The URL can be used to link to this page

Project Manual Project Manual MONROE COUNTY LIBRARY ADDITION Key West Branch 700 Fleming Street, Key West, FL JUN 0 2 1992 Thomas E. Pope PA Architect 610 White Street, Key West, FL 296-3611 Owner: Architect: Mechanical, Electrical, & plumbing Engineer 00002 PROJECT DIRECTORY Monroe County Library Key West Branch Attn: Peter Horton 5100 Jr. College Rd. Public Service Building Key West, Fl. 33040 305-292-4500 Thomas E. Pope, P.A. Attn: Thomas pope 610 White St. Key West, Fl. 33040 305-296-3611 Bernier, Carr & Associates, P.C. Attn: Mike Harris 172 Clinton St. Watertown, N.Y. 13601 315-782-8130 END OF PROJECT DIRECTORY PROJECT DIRECTORY 00002-1 00005 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTORY PAGES Division 0 - 00001 00002 00005 00020 00310 00500 00600 00700 00800 SPECIFICATIONS Division 01010 01021 01045 01152 01201 01310 01340 01370 01500 01640 01660 01700 01710 Division 02060 02110 02210 02220 02221 02362 Division 03100 03300 03345 03412 .01 Bidding and Contract requirements: Cover page Project Directory Table of contents Invitation to bid Bid form (stipulated prices) Form of Agreement..................(Use AlA A101) Construction Bond forms. .... .......(Use AlA A311) General Conditions................. (Use AlA A201) Supplementary Conditions 1 - General requirements: Summary of the Work Cash Allowances Cutting and patching Applications for payment preconstruction conference Construction schedules Submittals and substitutions Schedule of values Temporary facilities and controls Product handling Testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems Contract closeout Cleaning 2 - Site work: Building demolition Clearing Site grading Excavating, backfilling, and compacting Tranching, backfilling, and compacting Cast-in-place concrete piles 3 - Concrete: Concrete formwork Cast-in-place concrete Concrete finishing Precast concrete deck TABLE OF CONTENTS 00005-1 Division 4 - Masonry 04220.01 Concrete unit masonry (standard blocks) Division 5 - Metals: 05130 Aluminum handrails Division 06010 06100 06190 06200 06405 Division 07210 07413 07530 07600 07920 Division 08121 08211 08615 08710 Division 09110 09220 09620 09310 09330 09510 09660 09860 09900 09951 Division 10161 10400 10800 6 - Wood and plastics: Lumber Rough carpentry Wood trusses Finish carpentry Cabinets and fixtures 7 - Thermal and moisture protection: Building insulation Metal roofing Single ply roofing Flashing and sheet metal Sealants and caulking 8 - Doors and windows: Aluminum door frames Flush wood doors Wood windows Finish hardware 9 - Finishes: Metal stud system Portland cement plaster Gypsum wallboard systems Ceramic tile Cuban tile Acoustical ceiling Resilient tile flooring Carpeting Painting Vinyl coated fabric wall covering 10 - Specialties: Laminated plastic toilet partitions Identifying devices Toilet room accessories DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Genera 1 Prov i s ions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P repa'" a t i on f:J r F 1 n a 1 IJ 5e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pipe Identification............................................... General Piping Systems Installation Procedure....... .... ...... .... Pipe and Pipe F i tt i n 9 s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hangers and Supports.............................................. Valves & Cocks (Manual) Water Service............................. Pumps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vibration Isolation and Expanslon Compensatlon.... ..... ..... ...... Water Ba 1 ance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meters, Gauges and Thermometers....... ........ ........... ......... Insulation....................................................... . Plumb i n9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pl umbi n9 Fi xtures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refrigeration Piping and Accessories.... ..... ..... ... ....... ...... Air Conditioning Fan & Chilled Water Units. .,. .................... Chi 11 e r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chi lled Water Specialties......................................... Expans i on Tan ks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust Fans...................................................... Ductwork. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duct Accessories.................................................. Gu i:, 1 et s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Ba 1 ance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tempe'""\ture Control............................................... DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Gel1era1 Provisions................................................ Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting, Patching and Painting.................................... Demo 1 it i on and Removal s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intenor Raceways, Fittings and Accessories....................... Fasten i ng and Support Dev ices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wires and Cables (600 volts and under). ..... ................. ..... :::l~ct~.ic3.l 3cxes~r,:! ~ittings..................................... '~l ring Del! ices :lnd Cove rs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F ana 1 Boa rd s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CiJSes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Identificatlon......................................... Electrical Insoection, Load Test and Balancing........... .., ...... ~nc3ndesl:er1;: ;:. ::tL.;res.....:....................................... Fluorescent Fi;<tures.............................................. Aut om a tic L i 9 h tin g an ci C c n t r 0 1 s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '~etal Hallds Fixtures............................................. -= -( i t. 3.nc t;;le rgenc'j L- i gnt ~ ng. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . " ., - ,-::: ... ::. r;"" ::.. -:. :.5'.......,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ..,." ........... :: -::' : ~I '..: ~ '1 ;:: _ ":. -=. _:. _-l -=. ~ ::: I . . . . . . . . , , - - ...- ~,~ 2 '~ ..:; : .~.;; c }.j ~ " ~ :": ~ _' ~ ':-~ 7"". :: d7~ "::'--"_ . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . .~ ., : - - 11 S t"""'l E '.:~...; ~ C Ill;::: ",' :. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS 00005-2 SECTION 15010 .5011 15012 15013 15060 15061 15106 15140 15160 15161 15170 15180 15400 15450 15650 15671 15680 15702 15712 15801 15840 15860 15870 15891 15900 16010 10025 16050 16060 16110 16115 16120 16130 16140 16160 16170 16180 16195 16196 ~ 65 11 16512 165:3 16514 16515 .. ::: - , ,~, .. .~, ?:. ':. .. ~,; i~ ~ NOTICE OF CALLING FOR BIDS NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN that on April 7th, 1992 at 10:00 a.m. at the Office of the Director of Purchas- ing, a Committee consisting of the Director of Purchasing, the County Administrator, the County Attorney, and the requesting Department Head or Division Director, or their designees, will open sealed bids for the construction of the Monroe County Li- brary Addition, Key West Branch. All bids must be received by the Office of the Director of Purchasing, 5100 College Road, Public Service Building, Cross Wing, Room 002, Stock Island, Key West, Monroe County, Florida 33040 on or before 10:00 a.m. on April 7, 1992. All bids, including the recommendation of the County Adminis- trator and requesting Department Head or Division Director, will be referred to the Board of County Commissioners for final award- ing or otherwise. The Board will automatically reject the bid of any person or affiliate who appears on the convicted vendor list prepared by the Department of General Services, State of Florida, under Sec. 287.133(3)(d), Fla. Stat. (1989). Two (2) complete original bid forms shall be submitted from each bidder in a sealed envelope marked on the outside, "Sealed Bid for the Monroe County Library Addition, Key West Branch". All bids must remain valid for a period of ninety (90) days. Specifications and/or further information may be obtained by contacting Thomas E. Pope, Architect, at 610 White Street, Key West, FL 33040, (305) 296-3611. Bid packages consisting of 2 complete sets of specifications and 3 complete sets of blueprints will be available to bidders for a refundable deposit of $150.00. A mandatory pre-bid confer- ence will be held on site, in the Auditorium of the Key West Branch Library, 700 Fleming Street, Key West, Florida on March 17, 1992 at 10:00 a.m. Bids will not be accepted from firms or individuals whose representatives fail to attend the pre-bid conference. The Board of County Commissioners of Monroe County, Florida, reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive informali- ties in the bids and to readvertise for bids. The Board also reserves the right to separately accept or reject any item or items of a bid and to award and/or negotiate a contract in the best interest of the County. DATED at Key West, Florida, this 26th day of February, 1992. R.M. COFER Director of Purchasing for Monroe County, Florida Page 2 BID FORM TO: 1. The undersigned, having examined the proposed Contract Documents titled: and having visited the site and examined the conditions affecting the Work, hereby proposes and agrees to furnish all labor, materials and equipment, and to perform operations necessary to complete the Work as required by said proposed Contract Documents, as described in Summary of Work Phases 1, 2, and 3, for that portion of the Work identified as "Base Bid", for the stipulated sum of: DOLLARS ($ 2. A. We propose to provide substantial completion of the project within calendar days from the date of notice to proceed with the Work for Phase One. B. We propose to provide substantial completion of the project within calendar days from the date of notice to proceed with the Work for Phase Two. C. We propose to provide substantial completion of the project within calendar days from the date of notice to proceed with the Work for Phase Three. 3. The Owner would like the following items priced separately as additions to Base Bid. A. Carpeting (Supplied & Installed) DOLLARS($ B. Circulation Desk (Supplied & Installed) DOLLARS($ C. Book Storage Enclosure (Includes exterior ramps, stoops and stairs) DOLLARS($ D. Computer conduit loop as shown on sheet E-3 DOLLARS($ E. Addition II (and related work on Sheets AS & A9) DOLLARS($ Bidder: By: Address License No: License Type: Bid dated this day of 19 BID FORM TO: 1. The undersigned, havi~g examined the proposed Contract Documents titled: and having visited the site and examined the conditions affecting the Work, hereby proposes and agrees to furnish all labor, materials and equipment, and to perform operations necessary to complete the Work as required by said proposed Contract Documents, as described in Summary of Work Phases 1, 2, and 3, for that portion of the Work identified as "Base Bid", for the stipulated sum of: DOLLARS ($ 2. A. We propose to provide substantial completion of the project within calendar days from the date of notice to proceed with the Work for Phase One. B. We propose to provide substantial completion of the project within calendar days from the date of notice to proceed with the Work for Phase Two. C. We propose to provide substantial completion of the project within calendar days from the date of notice to proceed with the Work for Phase Three. 3. The Owner would like the following items priced separately as additions to Base Bid. A. Carpeting (Supplied & Installed) DOLLARS($ B. Circulation Desk (Supplied & Installed) DOLLARS($ C. Book Storage Enclosure (Includes exterior ramps, stoops and stairs) DOLLARS($ D. Computer conduit loop as shown on sheet E-3 DOLLARS($ E. Addition II (and related work on Sheets A8 & A9) DOLLARS($ Bidder: By: Address License No: License Type: Bid dated this day of 19 THE ^ MER r. ^ N N S TIT II T E () F ARr.f1ITECTS "- I A/A f)OCll111C'l1t A20/ General Conditions of the Contract for Construction HilS P()O'Ml'N" ((;IS 1,\II'()N7/1NT rF(;;lr UJNSUJI!l:NCl'S; c'()NSl:nATHW If'f7H ;IN A TT()N,vf;Y IS FNU )r'NAC;FIJ If'IT" NI'SI'FCT 70 ns A!()f)IFlC'A H()N 1987 EDITION T ABLE OF ARTICLES \.... 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS R. TIM E 2. OWNER <), PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION .). CONTRACTOR 10, PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 4, ADMINISTRATION OF TIlE CONTRACT 11, INSURANCE AND BONDS 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7, CHANGES IN TilE WORK 11. TERMINA nON OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT This document h:ls heen :lpproved and endorsed hy the Associated (;eneral Contr:lctors of America. Copyright 1911. 191~, 191 R, I <)2~, 1957. 19~ I. 19~H, 1961, 1l)6.~. 19(,(" 1967, I <)70, I 'F6, @ 19R7 by The American Institute of Architects, 1""'35 New York Avenue, N,W., WashingtPn, D.C., 2000(" Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation pf its pro\'isions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright I:tws of the \ Initell States and will be subject to legal prosecutions. \.... AlA DOCUMENT A201 . <iENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDITION AlA" . IE) t9117 THE AMERICAN INSTITI'TE OF ARClIITECTS. I 7~~ NEW YORK AVENI IE. NW, WASHINGTON, n C 2000(, A201.1987 1 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work. 9.66. 9'<U. 12.3 Acceptan('e of Work 9.(,.6. <).A2. 9.9.5. 9.10.1.9.10..\ Access to Work. 3.16,6.2.1. 12.1 Acddentl'revention. .j2..\. 10 Act~ and ()mi~.,ion~ .\.2.1. .\2.2. .\.\.2. .\.12.H. .\.1 A. 4.2..\, .1..\.2. .1'9. A.\!. 10.1.4. 10.2<;. 15..12. 1.\7. 111 Addenda I. I 1..\ 11 Additional Cost, Claims for. .1.\.6, .1..\.7, 4.\9, 6.1.1,10.\ Additionalln~p('ctions and Testing. 4.2.6, 9.H.2, 12.2.\. 15.5 Additional Time, C1aim~ Ii)r. . 4.36. 4..3.H, 4..\.9. H.\.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 5.\..\, 4, 91. 9 <; Ad\'erti~ement or Invitation to Bid. . .. t .1. t Aesthetic Effect. '1.2.1.\,4SI Allowances 3.8 All risk Insurance. . 11..\ .1.1 Applications for Payment .12.<;,7..\.7,9.2.9.3,9..1.9';, 1.9.6..\, lJH3.<)10.1.9.10',910A, 11.1.5, 1.\.2..1 2. i. .\ .\.\,\ 'i. .'. 10.2, .3 12 ..1 throu~h .\.12 .H. .\ I H..3, 42.7,9.'2, 1151.1. 1\.01.2, I.\'i 1.1 A. 4U, 43'1, 4.IA. 4.5, R31. 10.1.2, 11.5.9, 11..'.10 ArchItect 4.1 Architcct. \)efinition of. '11.1 Architect. Extent of Authority. 2.1. .\.12.0, 12.1..\.2, '1.\0. ,I. I. 'i.2, (d. 7.12. 72.1. 7..'(" 7A. 9.2. ')51, 'lA. 9 'i. 9,(i\. 9.A.2. 9H.\. ').10.1, 9.10.\,12.1,12.2.1, 13<;1.15';,2,112.2, 1121 Architect. l.imit:uions of Authority and Respoll~ihilit)'. .\.'3..\ 12.A, .\.1 2.11. ,1.12. .12.1, 4,2.2. 4.2.3, 42.(,. '12.7.12.10. ,12 12, '12.1.', '1..\.2, 'i21. 71, <14.2. <),("i. 9('.0 ^,chitect'~ Addition:lI Ser\'ice~ and Expenses. 2..1,9.A.2. \ 1.51.1,12.2.1,12.2.1. 1.\.'i2. 1.\.'i\, 112..1 Architect's Administration of the Contract. 4.2, '1'.0, '1..\.7,'11,<)4.9<; Ar('hitect'~ Approval~ 21. .\';, 1. .\.102. 512'<,. 3.12.H. ,'.IA,\. .127 Architect'~ Authority to Reject W'ork . 5, 'i, I. ,1.2 h. 12, 1.2, 12.2.1 Architect'~ Copyri~ht 1.3 Architect's necision~ ,1.2.0. '1.2.7. '1.2.11.12.12,12.1.3. 'H.2.1.,\'(',HI,Ui. .1.<;. (d. "..3.(', 7.\,A. HI.5. R..' I, 9.2,9.4. <)<;1. 9H2. 9<).1.101.2.15';,2.112.2,14.2.4 Architect'~ Inspections 42.2. ,12.9. '1..3'<,. 9.1.2.lJ.A.2, ')92.9.10.1,15.<; 42,0.12.7, 4.2.H.U7. 7.'1.1.12.1,1552 ,1.2.11. ,12 12. .1.5.7 122. 12.'i.1..\.0. 9.'12, <).'i,I. 910.1,15.5 i\rchitect'~ I'rojcct Ikpresent:llin: 4.2.10 ArchiteCl'~ Ill-btionship ,,'ith Contractor I 1.2. .3.2.1. .3.2.2. H.3. .\.'i1,\.73. .311.'12A. .312.11, 510. .'.IA. '12.5,1.2.'1, '120,.12 12, 'i2, (,22. "\..1, 9H.2, 115.7,12.1. 1.3.'i Architect'~ Rcl:ltion~hip with Sul'Colltractors . 1.1.2.4.2..', .1.2.1. 120. ')(i..3. 9(,i, 11,\7 <),12, ')'i I. ') In.1 12,2.1.2.5, '129.1..3(,.942, ')'i I, ()H2. 9'<)2. <lIO I. I.\'i 10.1 3 I A I. ') 102. 10 I j ('.1.\ Approvals Arbitration Archit('ct'~ [nstruction~ . Ar('hitect's Int('rpret:ui"ns . Architect's ()n .Sil(' ()hscr\':I1ion~ A, chiten'~ Ikpresent:lli"ns Architect's Site Visits :\Sh('~fl lS i\ttorncys' Fces A \\':ad of Separate Contracts. Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work Basic Definitions . Bidding Requirements Boller and Machinery Insurance Bonds. Lien Bonds. I'('rform~nee and Payment 5.2 1.1 I I 1.1.1.7. 'i2.\. 11.1.1 11.3.2 9,10.2 7..3'<,.4. 9.lll'. 11.39. II.j Building I'ermit 3.7. I Capitalization 1.4 Certificate of Suhstanti~1 Completion . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9.8.2 Certificates for Payment. . 42.5, '12.9. 9..\.'\, 9.4, 9. <;,9.6.1, 96.6,9.7.1, 9.R..\, 9.10.1, 910.3, ".7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Certificates of Inspection. Testin~ or Approval .3,12.11, t 3.5.4 Certificates of Insurallt'e 9.3.2,9 10.2, 11. 1..\ Change Orders .. 1.1.1,2.1. t, .\R.2A, :-'< 11,4.2.8, .i.3..\, 5.2.3, 7.1,7.2, 7.3.2, 8.3.1,9.3.1.1,9.10.3, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.4, 11..\.9, 12.1.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. ,. 7.2. I ......... ... ~1 'II. 42H. 7, R.~.I, 9.31,1,10.1.3 . .. 4.3.1 . . . . . . .. 4.3,4.4,45,6.25.8.3.2, 9..\.1.2,933,9.10.4, 10.1.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 4.5.6 ClaIms for Additional Cost .13.6,4,3.7, '13.9,6.1.1,10.3 ClaIms for Additional Time. .1.\0,4.3.8,4.3.9,8.3.2 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. 4.3.6 Claims for D~m~~('s. 31H, 439. 01.1, (,.2.<;, H3.2, 9.'i1.2. 10.1.4 Claims Suhject to Arhilr~lion . 4.3.2,41.4.4.5.1 Cleaning Up 3.15,63 Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period 13.7 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to . . . . . .. 2.1.2, 2.2.1.321.3.2.2, .\7 1. .'.10,1, 3.126, 4.3.7, 5.2.1. (,22, R.I.2, R.2.2. 9.2, 11.1.3, 11..\.6, II .'1.1 Commencement of the Work. Definition of 8.1.2 Communications Faeilit~tin~ Contract Administration 3.9.1,4.2.4,5.2. t Completion. Conditions Rc1atin~ to . ,'11, '\.15,4.2.2,4.2.9, '15.2,9.'1.2. 9A, ql) 1.9.10, 11.3.5, 12.2.2, 13.7.\ COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9 Completion, Substantial. 42,9. ,1.\. 'i.2, 8.1.1,8.1..\,8.2.3, 9.8,9.9.1, 12.2.2, 1,\.7 Compliance with Laws. 1..\,5.0.3.7,313,4.1.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 1 1.5.151. U51. 13';,2, 13.6, 14.1.1,14.2.1.3 Conce:llcd or (Inknown Conditions. ......... . . . . . 4.3.6 Conditions of the COl1lract I. 1.1, 1.1.7,6. I. t Consent, Written 13.1,3.12.8,3.14.2.4.1.2, '13.4. ,1. 5. 5, 952. 9.H.2, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.5,10.1.2, 10.1..\, 11.3.1, 11.3.l-I, 11.3.11,1,\.2,13.4.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 1.1.4.6 Construction Ch~nRe Directi\T, Definition of. 7.3.1 Construction Change Directives. .. 1.1.1,42.8,7.1.7.3,9.3.1.1 Construction Schedules, Contractor's . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10,6.1..\ Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts ........... 5.4 Continuing Contract Performance 4.3.4 Contract, Definition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.12 CONTRACT, TERMINA TIOH OR SUSPENSIONOFTHE 4..\.7, q.l.l, 14 Contract Administration 3.5.\,4,9.4.9.5 Contr~ct Award and Execution, Conditions Relatin~ to, 3:7.1, 3,1 n, 52. 92. 111..3, 11..\.0, 11.-1.1 Contract Documents, The 1.1, 12, 7 Contract Documents. Copies Furnishnl and 11se of. 1..3.2.2.<;,5..\ Contract Documents, Definition of 1.1. t COlllract I'erformance Durin~ Arhitration . . .. 4..\.4,45.3 Contract Sum . 'H. 4..3.6, 4.3.7, 4.4.4, <;.2.3, ('13.72.7..\,9.1,9.7,11,3.1. 12.2.4, 12..\, 14.2.4 Contract Sum, Definition of. 9.1 Contract Time ,1.,\.0, 4..3H. 4.4.4, 7.2.1,3, 7.3, R.2.1. 8..\.1, 9.7,121.1 8.1.1 INDEX Change Orders, Definition of . Changes. . . CHANGES IN THE WORK Claim, Definition of . ClaIms and Disputes . Contract Time. Definition of J 2 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (;ENERAI. CONDITIONS OF TIlE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. FOURTEENTH EDITION AlA'" . Icll')A7 TilE AMERICAN INSTln 1TE OF ARCII'TECTS. 173-' NEW YORK AVENI !E. NW. WASIIINGTON, D.C 20006 \..-' CONTRACTOR 3 Contractor, Definition of 3.1, (,1.2. Contractor's Rid . I I I Contractor'. Construction Schedules 3.10, (,1.\ Contractor's Employees .~~.2., .\.12., .~R.I ,~'),\.IR. -i2\, '\Z6, RU, IOZ. IO~. II I 1,112.1 I Contractor's LIability Insurance 11.1 Cnlllractor's Relationship with Separ;ne <:, Intractors and Owner's Forces 2.2.(;. .\.12.'i,\ H.2, .j2.1, 6, 12.2.'i Contractor's Relatiomhip with Suhcontractors 1.2.1. .~..\.2, >,.IR I. .\ I R.2, 'i.Z, S.\, 'iA. 962, 11:'>7. II~R, 112. 1.2 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect I 1.2. .\.2. 1. .\.2..2.. ~.:'>..~, .~<;I.\7:'>, :'>11, .U2..R .\I(".~ IR, .j2.~. ~2.1. 126, .j212, 'i 2.. 62.2,7\.4. I)R.2, 11'7,121, U'i Contractor's Representations. 1.2. 2, .~ <; I, .\.12.7. (,2.2. R 2. I . I) ~ ,,\ Contra<.:tor's Responsihility for Those Performin~ the \'/iork \ .~.2.,~.1 R. .i 2..~, III Contra<.:tor's Review of Contract DOClllllelllS 1 2..2, .'.2, .\.7:'> Contractor's Ri~ht to Stop the Work 1)7 (;ontractor's RIRht to Terminate the Contr:lCt Ii I Contractor'sSlIhlllitt:lls .'>.10, ~.II, .\12,.j 2.7. 'i.2.1, 'iZ.:,>. "-.\,('. <J2. 1)..\ I. I)R.2. ')1) I. ') 102. I)HU. III 12. II.j 2. II.j\ Cnntr:lCtor's Superintendent I'). \0.2,(, Contractor's Supervision and Construction I'rocedllres 1.2.1, \.~,U. i2\. R22. R2.\. \() II 1 I ....1121 1.2.2,121. :'>:\1. UO, .~.12 7. (, 1\, (,21 Copies Furnished of [)rawin~s and Specifications 1.\. 2.2. S,\. 1 I Corre<.:tion of Work 2...~. 2 .1, ,j 21, 9.R.2, 1)')1.1212.. \22. 1\7.1..\ Cost. Definition of -'('. 1'1. ~.'i Costs 2.4, :'>2.1, .\.7.1, :'>.R.2,.\ I 'i2., ~.\f"i.,7,UR I. 'i.Z" (, 1.1 , (,2.\, 6~, 7 3 .'d, 7.:'> 6. 7., 7. ,)...., <J H 2, I). I 0 2., I 1.\. 1 .2, I I U.\, I 1.\.4, I U I). 1 2 I. I 2 2 I, I 2 21. 1 2 2 . 'i. I' 'i, J.j Cu",ng and Patching. 3.14, (12.6 Dama~e to Constrllction of Owner or Separate Contr:lCtors .'. I ~ .2, (,2A, 1)<;1'i. 102.12, 10.2.'i, HU, II 1.11\. \2..2.S DamaRetothe\'fork'>'i2.991, 10212., lo2.'i, 11l.~.II.\ DamaRcs,C1aimsfor. .\.IR,.i.,.9,6.1 1,6.2..S.H..\2,9.S.12. IO.IA DamaRes for I )el:Jy. (,I I. H.~.~, I) 'i.I(" ')7 D:ne of Commencement of the \'{'ork. Definition of H 1.2. Dale ofSllbstantial Completion. Definition of H.I.., Day, Definili"n of R.I A Decisions of the Architect. 12. .6, 'I 2..7, .j2. I I, .12.12. .j2.. 1.~, H2, -1.36, 'li.l,Ui,i.S, <d. 7.'>(" 7.'>H. H.I'>. R.'>I, 1)2, I)A. I)SI. 9R2, 9<)1,1012. 1'>'i2. 1122. l'I2i Decisions to Withhold Certification 9.5, IP. I j I I..~ [l<'fccti\'e or Nonconforming \'('ork. AC(Cpt;lI1CT, R('jcction and Corrcuion of 2..'.2.1. .'c; 1,1.2..1. .j2(" ~.'>'i, I) 'i2. <JR2. ')9 I. 102'1. 12. I ~ 7 I..~ IkfecthT \Vork, [)dlnition of .''i.l Definitions 1.1,2 l.l,.\I,.'>.'i.I.~12.1.'>122,'12.,..I.II, 1.'>.1, 'iI, (1.12,7.2.1.7.'>1, "'\f,. H.I. 1).1. 'JH.l Delays and Extensions of Time 'U I.UH 1. j)R2. (,1.1, (,2'>.7.2.1, "',1. - ).j. ....'S -., H, 75.9, H.I I. 8.3, IIH I. I i.l 1.-\ llisputes 1.1.1,1.,..j1,.I.'i.(;2'i.(", 7,H,'l\ 1.2. [)ocuments :lIld Samples at the Site .' II [)rawin~s, Definition of I I. 'i [)rawinRs and Specifications, I 'se and Ownership of 1.1 I. 1.), 22 'i., II. 'i.5 flutv to Review Contract Ilocunlents and Field Conditions .\2 Effective Date "f Insurance. H 2.2. II 1.2 Contractual Li:lhility Insur:lI1ce . Coordination and Correl'llion ~ Emergencies '1.\.7,10.3 Fmplo\'ees. Contractors .~.'> 2. .\. 12, .~R I,,> .9, .'> I R 1. '> IR2.12'>. ,\ 26. R I 2.. 102. 11l3. 11 1.1, 1-1.2.1.1 E'l'lipment. lahor. ~later1:lls and I 1..~. 1.1.6,3.4. 3S1, \ R2, .~12~. )12.-.' 1211. .\13, 51SI, .\2.7, (, 21, 7.'>6. 952, 9~.\, I\'>, 12.ZA, 14 Execution ;Ind Pro~ress of the \'<'ork \ I..,>. 1.2.'>.3.2,541, ,>'1 1.12.2. ,U~, .UA. 4., R, (,Z.2, 71.3, -.'.9, R2, R .'>. 9'i, 991, 10.2, 14.2, 1-13 Execution, Correlation and Intent of the Contract DonmH'nts 1.2,5.7.1 Extensions of Time 1 ~.I, I~.fl, 7.2.1.3, H3, 10.~ I Failure of Payment I1\' Contr;l('tor I),S.I.3,14.2.1.Z Failure of Payment hy ()wncr 1.~.7, 9.7, I.-I.l..~ halhl' Work (See Defective or Nonconformin~ Work) Final Completion and Final Payment 12 I, '12..9, 4.3.2, HS.9.10, 1112. 111..'>, I\'>S, 12..'>.1, 137 Financial ArranRements. (l\\'ller's 2.2.1 Fire and Extended CovnaRe Insurance II..'> 1 13.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS. Governing Law <;uar:mtees (See W;urant\' :lI1d \'<';uranties) 1l:1zardolls M:ltenals 10.1. IO.2A Identific:ltion of Contract 1)0UIIl1ents 1.2.1 Identification of Suhcontractors and Suppliers. 'i.2.1 Indemnification 517,3.18,9.10.2..101.-1.1\'>.12,1\'>7 Information and Services Required of the Owner. . . 2. I.Z, 2.2, HA. (,I~, (,.1.1,6.2.6,9..\.2,9.6.1, 964, C).R~, 9.9.2., "10.5,101.-1,11.2,11..'>. 13SI, 15.52 InJury or Damage to Person or Property 4.3.9 Inspections. .'>.3.'>, .\.'>.1, 3.7, I, ~.Z.2, 12(" 'U9. 'U6. 942. 9fl2, 9.92, 9101, I~S Instructions to Bidders 1 1 I Instructions to the Contractor .\H I. .1.2 .fl, S2. I, 7. 12,1, 15S2 Insur:lI1ce '\.5.9 ('.1. I. "',(>.4. 9.~2, 9.RZ, 9.9.1,9.102. II Insurance, Boller and Machinery 11.3.2 Insurance, Contractor's LIability 11.1 Insurance, Effective D;ltc of R.22. 11.1.2 Insurance, Loss of Use. II..'", Insurance, Owner's LIability. 11.2 Insurance, Property. IO.2.S,11.3 Insur:mcc, Stored Materials 9.-',2. 11..\.14 11 .9.9.1, II..'> II 11.~.IO 1.2..'>,5.12.4. .12(,.4.27. '12.12. ,U.I3, 7.1 Interest 13.6 Interpretation 12. 'i, I. i. 1.5,j 1 I .L' I. S 1,6 12, R.I.I Interpret;nions, Written 4.2.11,4 2.IZ, 4..~7 .Joinder and (:"ns"lid:lti"n of n'lill1S Hequired .1 '1(, Judgment on Final Award .1.5.1, 'lSI.I, 4.5.7 Labor and Materials, Equipment 1 I:'>, 1.16, 3.4,~S I, 3fl 2. .~ 12Z. 512.'>. 3127, 31211, 3J.~, 51'i1, 12-, (121, 7.56. 9.~.2, 1),.\.5, 12.2.\. Ii Lahor I )isputes . A.5.1 LawsandRcRlIlatio!lS 1'>..'>'<,..~7,51.\4.II,4.'i."i,4S7, 'J91. 1022.. 11 1,11..\ 1'>1. 1.~4. 13SI, I3S2, 156 Liens 2 12. \.'2. 'L~.'i 1. R2Z, 9.:'>.'>. 9102 LImitation on Consolidation or Joinder 4.5.5 l.imit:ltions. Statlltesof 4S,i.2, 12.2.6, 1.'>.7 l.imit:ltions of Authoritl' 5.'>.1,4.1.2. ,12.1. 12.~. 12.... 12 10. 'i22, 'i21, 7.1. II'> 10 INSURANCE AND BONDS Insur;ll1ce Companies. Consent to Partial Occupancy. Insurance (:omp:lIlies, Scttlement with Intent of the Contract [)oelllllents AlA DOCUMENT "201 . GENERAl. CONDITtONS OF 1"1 IF CONTHACT FOR CONSTRI !CTION . FO[!RTEENTII EDITION AlA'" . IC) \'lR7 TilE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF AHCIIITFCTS, ,-\<; NFW YORK AVENI IE. N W . WASI"N<;TON. n c. 2llllll(J A201-1987 3 Iimit~tionsofliahililv 2.3.32.1. 3 'i. 1. .3.73. 312.R, .312.11, 3.17, 31 R: <12(,. <12.7. '1.2,12.6,2,2,9.-1.2,9(1'1, 9.HU, III I'i. 102'i. 11.1 ,2, 1\.2,1, 1\.\,7, 1.3 '12, U'i,2 Iimilations of Tim.... (;en...r~1 2.2.1.2.2.<1.3,2, I. .37,.3, .3 R2. .310. 312,'i. .\ I 'i.I. .12, I. '1.2,7, '1.2,11. .H,2. I.H, <1\.<1,'U(),U.9, 4'i.<12, ';2.1. ';2.3. (,.2..1, 7.3..1, 7..1, H2, 9 'i. 9(,2. 9R. 9.9, 9.10,11 1..3.11.31,11..32, 11,3.'i. 11.3.(,. 12.2.1, 12.2.2, \.3. 'i. 1.3,7 I.imit~tionsofTim...,Specific. 2,1.2.2.2.1.2.4,j.IO,3.11, 31 'i. I. 4.2.1. 4.2.11. 'U, 41, .1 'i. 'i.j. 'iA, 73.'i, 7.39, R.2, 92. '1.3, I. 93.3. 'H I. 9(, I, 9.7, 9R2, 910.2. 11,1..3, 11.3.(" 11,.110,11.311.12,2.2,122..1.122(,,13.7,1'1 Loss of Use Insurance . 11.3.3 M~terial Supplit."rs 1.3.1,312, I, .1.21, <1.2,(,. 'i.2. I. 93. I. 9.3 1.2, 9.3.3. 9.<1.2. <J<i 'i, 9 loA 10.1. 102.1 11..\. 1.1.(,. .3.'\, .3 'i I, 3R.2, .U2,11. 3,1.3, 31'iI,U", (,21, 7.\(,.932,93.3. 12.2.\. 14 Means. Methods. Techniques. Sequcnces and Procedures of Construction .3.3.1, .12..3,1.2.7,9..1.2 Minor Changes In the Work . I I I. 'I.2.R, '137, 7.1.7.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13 Modifications. Definition of 1.1.1 Modifications to the COlllr:1Ct 1 I 1. I. I .2. .3.7..3. .311. 4.1.2. ,U. 1. 'i,2..3. 7. R.31. 97 Mutual Responsibility 6.2 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of 12.3 Nonconfonnin~ Work, Rejection and Correction of . 2.3.1. ,j,3.'i, 9.';2. 9H2. 12. 1.37,13 23. 2A. .32.1.32.2,3".3. .3.7,1. .39, .3!2R. .312'),3.17.1.3, 'H.'1. <1 'i. ';2.1. 'i3. 'i.,i.I,I. H2,2. 9.1.1. l)'il, 9(,1, <)", 910.10,1.2. IO.2.ti, 11.1..3,11..3.12.2.2. 122.-1,13.3. 13'i1. 1.3'i2. 11 Notice, Written 2..3,2.\. .\.9, 3. 12.H, 312.9,13, iAA,I'i, 'i,~ I, 'i3. 'i. 1.1. I, H2.2. ')A I. 9.'i I. ()", l) to. 1012. III 2.(,. II 13.113.12.2.2, 12.2A.13.3, US2. 1,\ NoticeofT('stin~~ndlnspections 1.3'i.1, \.3.';.2 NotitT to rroceed. H,2.2 Notices, Permits, Fees and 22.3,3.7, .3 13,73(1.4, 10.2.2 ()hservations. Architecc \ On.Site 12,2, .1.2. 'i, \3(1, 9.12, 9<;1. 1)111l. 1:1.'; 1.2.2, .32.2 l).(,.6, 9.H. I, l)(l. 11.3 II .12.2. 1.2.9. .1.3.(., 9..1,2, 9.H.2, 9.9.2, l) Ill, I j2.2.i2.'i,U.(" ').12, l).'il. IJlIlI. 1.3'i 23, 3'),i37, ", H22. 11.3.9,12, I, 12.2. U'i.2, IUI OWNER 2 (l\\'n{'('. Definition of 2.1 Owner, Information and ServIces Required of the. 2.12. 2.2, '13i, (', 9. III Ii. 11.2, 11..3. US I. I i.1 l'i, 111..3 (lwner's Authority ."H. l,i.I..\.12(), 'i2. I, 'i2.1, 'i. I I, -,3 I, H2.?. (l.3 1.932. 11..\1. 12.2. i. 1.3'i2. 1,12. I \..31 ( hvner's Fin:lIlcial Clpability 2.2. I, 1,11 1 'i Owner's Liability Insurance 11.2 Owners Loss of Ilse Insurance 11..3.., (hvnn's Relationship ,vith Subcontractors. I 1.2, 'i.2.1. 'i I I. lill.1 2A, 12LI. 142.2.2 6.3 M~teri:tls, II az~td( .us Materials, 1.:llmr, Equipment and '12.2,3123,.312". Notice (lhserv:llions. (:ontr:lCtor's ( kcup:lIlcy Oll-.Site Inspections hy the Architect On Site ()hserv:llions bv the Architect ()rders, Written ()wner's Ri~ht to (:arry ()ut the Work Owner's Right to Clean Up Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts 6.1 Owner's Right to Stop the Work. 2.3,4.3,7 Owner's Ri~ht to Suspend the Work. 1<1,3 Owner's Ri~ht to Terminate the COnlraet , . , . , . . . . 14.2 Ownership and Use of Architect's Drawings, Specifications and Other Documents. 1.11,1.3,2.2.5, 'i.3 Partial Occupancy or Use 9.6.6,9.9, 11.3.11 Patching, Cutting and. 3.14,6.26 Patents, Royalties and . , . , . . .. 3.17 Payment, Applications for <12.'i, 9.2, 9.3,9.4, 9.'i.1.9H3, 9.101. 9.10.::1, 9.104,14.2.4 Payment, Certificates for .1.2,'i, <1.2.9,9.3.3.9.4,9.5, 1)(>.!,9(,.ti, 1l71, 9H\ 9101, 9.\(>..3,13.7,14.1.1.3,1<1.2.<1 Payment, Failure of 4.3.7.9. ';.1.::1, 9.7,910,2,141.1.3.14.2.1.2 12. I. .12.9,1.32, <1.3. 'i, 9. 10. 11.1.2. 11.1.3,11.3.';,12.3.1 . . .. 736..1. 910.3,11..3.9,11.4 13.4,9..3,9(" I)R~. 9.10..3, 1.3.(" 1-12..\ . . .. 9,14 'i.4,2. 9'i.1 .3. 962, 9(,.~, 9('i, 11..3.A, 14.2.1.2 10.1 73.6.<1, 9.10.3,1159,11.<1 Permits, Fees and Notices 2.23.3.7,313,7..3.6.<1,10.2.2 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl 10.1 Product Dat~, Definition of. .\.12.2 Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings. ::1.11,3.12,4.2.7 Progress and Completion 4.2,2,4.34,8.2 Progress Payments 4.34.9..3, 9.6, 9H3, 910.3. U,6, 14.2,\ ProJect, Definition of the. 1.1.4 ProJect Manual, Definition of the 1.1.7 Project M:lt1uals 2.2. '; Project Representatives . . . . . . . . . . .. '1.2.10 Property Insurance 10.2. ';,11.3 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY. 10 Re~ulationsand L~ws 1::\, ::1.(,. .\.7, ::\\.3, -1.11, .is';, 1.'i.7, 10.2.2, 11.1. I 15, 1~1, 1.3A, 13'i1. 1::\.5,2, 136,14 Rejection of Work .3SI. 4.2.6, 12.2 Releases of \'{'aivers ~nd Liens 9, I 0.2 Representations, 1.2,2. .3.51, 312.7. (,.2.2. A.2. 1,9.33,1)..1.2,9.'; I, 9H.2, 910.1 2.1.1, .~, I. I, ::\.9, il.l,I.2.I, 4.2,10, 'i.1 I, 'i.1.2, 13.21 Resolution of Claims and Disputes. 4.4, ,I. 'i Responsihilit\' for Those Performin~ the Work. .3.3.2. -1.2.3, (i.U, (,2,10 Ret~ina~e. 9.3.I,9(,.2,1).R3.99 1,9.10.2.9:10.3 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor Review of <:otltr~clor's Submittals by Owner and Architect P:IYlllent. Final Payment Bond, Performance Bond and Payments. Pro~rcss PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION P:lyments to SuhCOtltr:Ktors . PCB. Perform:ll1ce Bond and P~vment Bond I~epresetlt~tives . ..../ 1.2.2,3.2, ,D.\. ::\,12.7 .3101. .3.10.2, ::\.11, .3,12, 12.", U.<), 'i2.I, 5.2.3,9.2, 9.A.2 Review of Shop Drawings. Product Dat~ and Samples by (:ol1l ractor .~. 12.5 Rights and Remedies 1.1.2,2.3, 2A, .3. '; 1,3.1 ';2. 12("41,(,, .I'i, 'i..3, (,I, (13, 731. R.31, 9S1, 9.7, 10.2.'i, 10.3, 12.2,2, 122.<1.13.4, J.i 3.17 Royalties and Patents . ---/ 4 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (;F.NERAI. CONDITIONS OF TlfE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. FOURTEENTH EDITION AIAc!> . (0) IlJA7 TlfE AMERICAN INSTlTtlTE OF ARClfITECTS. 17\" NEW YORK AVENUE, NW. WASHIN(;T()N, D.C. 20nO(, 4.5.2 10.2 i.2.,.L2~, 10.1 \ 12., U 1.3.12, iL' 3.11 9.2, <) '.1 ~. 10 I 1.1.,.1 U,jLL I ~~.(), 11.,,,. 12.1.2, 12.2~ \. 12.1 U 1,3.12,12- 3.13, (,. I I. (d I i. .i22,i2')," ~ ('. 9H2, ').10.1. I' ~ 122. U~.I2.').U(J. I, ')H.2, ').').~. ').10.1. 'I.~ 12(" 1221, I.'~ 1.1.6 111,1.1.6,1.1",1.2.i,I~..'11 .j ~.U. 122(,. 1,7 2 ~, il -, ') -. 10. I .!.. Il U, I i I (, 2 I.' U. 2, 111.2 I 2, I I.~ Ii. I 2 2 I Rules and Notices for Arbitration Safety of Persons and Property Safety Precautions and Programs S:lIl1ples, Definition of Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples at the Site, Documents and . Schedule of Values Schedules. Construction Sep;u;lIc Contracts ;lIld Colltractors Shop I)rawill~s, ()el1nitioll of. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples Site, Use of Sill' Inspections 1.22, .1..' Site Visits, Architect's ')i 2. ') ~ Spedallnspectiolls and Testin~ Specifications, ()efinilion o! lhe Specifications, The SlalUles of Limit;llions Sloppin~ t he Work. Slored Materials SUbcolllfactor, 1 lefinil;on of SUBCONTRACTORS \ "-, ~.I I 5 1.2. I. ~ 12. .1 12.1. 1.2.,\, ;.:). ':;," Subcontractual Relations 5.3, ~ i. ').~.12. ')().2, ').6..', Q(,,1. 11121. 11.\.c. I I.., H. Ii.I I, I i.2.1.2, \ i.12 Snhllliltals I', .~.2..\ .~.IO..~ II," 12,i2.7, ~2.1, ~.2..\ "1(" ')2, ".,1. ')H2. ')')1, t)lo2. ')111.,.111.12. II I., Subrogation, Waivers of (, I. I. I U. ~, 11.3.7 Substantial Completion. I 2.9. 'U~2, H.I I, H.I', A2.\ 9.8, ')9 I, 122 I. 1222, 157 Suhst;mtial Completion. IJefinition of tiA 1 Suhstitution of Suhcontractors ~.2." ~2 ..j Suhstitution of the Architect i. I., Suhstilutiolls o! ~btcri:lis .,S I Suh subcolllraClOr. ()el1nilioll or ~.1.2 Suhsurf:ICe Condit.iollS i.~(, Successors and Assigns 13.2 Superintendent 3.9,ln.2.(' Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2A. 3.3, .~,i, .12.1,\.".'\, (,I~, (d..j, c I.,. ~"~' H2. H.'.I, In. 12, 1'1 'f.! I. if.!.~'11 .').11I2.').IlU.Ii22 t)t).I, t). I n.2. t). I II., 222. .1.1 H." Subcontraclors. Work bv Suret y Surety. (:onscnt of Sllrve\'~ . "-- Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 14.3 Suspension o! the \X'ork , .' c. ~ ,j 2, III 1..1.1.1.., Suspension or Termillation of Ihe (:onlract I. ,.7, ~. II I, II Taxes 3.6,7..'(,1 Termination by the Contractor 14.1 Termination by the Owner for Cause . ~. 4. I . I. 14.2 Termin:llion of the Architect ,II." Termin:llioll of the Contrac!or . 14.2.2 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14 Tests and Inspectlons~'~,U.h. Ut), 'Y,U, 12.2.1,13.5 TIME 8 Time, Delays and Extensions ofUH, "21,8.3 l'ime Limits, Specilk 2 1.2.221.2..i,." 111",11,.,.1';.1, 1.2.I,i.2.II.U. .\i.i~, ~', ~ 1.7.,,,. -..'.9, fl.2, 9.2, 9..~.I, ')"5.t).jl.t)(,1,9".')H2.')11I2, 111'. 11.3.6, 11..,.10, II '.11. 1222. 1221, 12U" 1."7, 11 U2, 4.3.3, .U(" 'U9. .U, .j '; ().~2, 9..\.5 12 12.1 U(,.fU.I.ll1.1 ".14,7..132 1 \I, I~, 2 2.~,.' 12.7, ';,," 3.13,6.11.(12.1 9.2,9..' I 4.3.5, ,is I. 9 103 13..1.2 910,.j. 11.".7,15.4.2 4.5. ~.I S 1,9.9", II'''. II.'';. 11.."7. 1.U2 9.102 (, I I. II.".';, 11.".7 3.5,\.2.9, ! ~".\' 9:1:1, ')A2. ,).t) I. 12.2.2. 13.7.1.3 \X'c:lther Dclay~ 4."fl2 When Arbitration May Be Demanded 4.5.4 \X'ork, Dcl1nition of I I..' Writll'l1 ConSl'l1I I' I, .' 12A. :II 12, .1.12,1.' i, i~". 'H2. 'i.H2. ')t) I. l)10.2, 9.1(1.\,10.1.2,10.1.", I '.~1. I UI \. lUll, 1.,2. I.U2 W,.illcl1 Illlnprl't:ltiol1s 12. It. .j2 .12, .1..".7 Written Notice 2.,. 2.1, .~t),".12H, 5 12.9.43,14.4, .I~. ~21, ~" "j \I, H22, <).\1, 9S 1.9.7. SUO, 1tl.1.2. 102(,.11 1 ~, 11,. 1222. 1221.13.3,151.2,14 2.',3.9, .\,\7, -. A!.2. II.~(), 121. 122, 1.~.~2. H..'.1 Time Limits on Claims Title to \X'ork UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK Uncovering of Wort< l lnforc."-t'en (:onditilllls l 'nit Price", t 'st' of I)()l t11l1Cn1S Use of Site Values, Schedule of Waiver of Claims: Final Payment \X':li\'('r of C1:1ims hy the Architect W:lin'r of t :l:Iims I". the COl1tractor W:liver o! C1:1ims hv the OWI1l't l) 10..\ Waiver o! 1.iel1S W:.ivers o! Subwg:ltiol1 Warranty :llld W:lrr:lf1tics \'1,' ritlcn ( )rdl't~ AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (;ENERAI. CONDITIONS OF 1'111'. CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. FO(lRTEENTII EDITION ,\IA" . IL' I'lR7 THE AMERICAN INSTtTlITF. OF ARCHITECTS. I-.~' NEW YORK AVENI IE, NW, WASIIIN(;TON. ll.L 2(Xl0l1 A201-1987 5 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF TIlE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ~ ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Cont.ract f)ocument~ con~i~t of the ARreement hetwecn ()wner :1l1d Contr:lCtor (hereinafter the Agrecment). Condition~ of the Contract ((;eneral, Supplementary and other Condition~), ()rawinRs. Specification~, addenda is~ued prior to execution of the Contract, other documcnt~ li~ted in the Agreement anu Modifk:llions i~~ued after execution of the Contract. A Modifi. cation i~ (I) a written :tmendment to the Cont.ract signcd hy hoth partie~, (2) a Change Order, C-',) a Con~trllction Change Directive or ('I) a written order for a minor ch:1I1ge in the Work is~ued hy the Architect. Unle~~ specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contr:lCt ()ocument~ do not include other docum('nts ~uch a~ hidding requirement~ (adverti~e1l1ent or invitation tl) hid, lnstructjon~ to Bidder~, ~ample forms, the Contra( tor'~ hid or portion~ of addenda relating to hiuding rcquirement~). 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract ()()cumenr~ form the Contract for Con~truction. The Contract rcpre~ents the entire and integrated agreement hetwecn the partie~ hereto and supersede~ prior negotiation~, rcpresentation~ or :Igrecment~, either written or oral. The Con. tract m:1Y he amended or modified only hy a Modification. The Contract [)ocument~ ~hall not be con~trued to create a contr:lc- tll:ll relationship of :lny kind (I) hetween the Architect and Con- tractor, (2) between the Owner and :1 Suhcorllr:lctor or Suh- ~ubcontrJctor or (3) between any per~on~ or entities other thall the Owner :lnd Contractor. The Architect shall, however, he entitled to perfonn:lnce :lnd enforcement of ohligation~ under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect'~ duties. 1.1.3 THE WORK The term "Work" means the construction and ~ervice~ required hy the Contr:lCt ()ocument~, whether completed or partially completed, and include~ :III other labor, lIlaterial~, equipment ami service~ provided or to he provided hy the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's oblig:ltions. The Work m:!y con~litllle the whole or a part of the Project. 1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project i~ the total comtruction of which the Work per- formed under the Contract Documents m:1Y be the whole or a part :1l1d which may include construction hy the Owner or hy sep:lr:!te contractors. 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictori:J1 portion~ of the Con- trKt Documents, wherever located and whenever issued. showing the de~ign, location and dimen~ion~ of the Work. generally includin~ plans, elevations. scction~, det:lil~, ~ched. ules and diagram~. 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specification~ are that portion of the Contr:lct Document~ con~isting of the written requirements for material~, equip- ment, C( Hlstruction ~ystem~, standards and workman~hip for the Work, :1I1d performance of rebted ~ervice~. 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is the volume u~ually as~embled for the Work which may include the biduing requirements, ~arnple form~, Condition~ of the Contract and Specifications. 1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT 1.2.1 The Contract [)ocument~ shall he ~igned by the Owner and Contractor as provided in the Agreement. If either the Owner or Contractor or hoth do not ~ign all the Contract Documents. the Architect shall identify such un~igned Docu- ment~ upon reque~l. 1.2.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a repre- ~ent:1tion that the Contr:lctor has vi~ited the site, become famil- iar with local condition~ under which the Work i~ to he per- formed and correlated personal observation~ with require- ment~ of the Contract Documents. 1.2.3 The illlcnt of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary f( ir the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The COlllr:1Ct [)ocument~ are comple- mentarv, and what i~ required hy one ~hall he as binding a~ if required by all: performance by the Contractor ~haJl he required only to the extent con~i~tent with the Contract Docu- ments and reasonably inferable from them a~ being necessary to produce the intended re~ults. 1.2.4 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and :lrticle~, and arrangement of Drawing~ sh:lllnot control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to he performed by any trade. 1.2.5 (Inles~ otherwi~e ~tated in the Contr;JCt Documents, word~ which have well.knowntechnical or construction indus- try meanings are u~ed in the Contr:Kt Documents in accord- ance with such recognized meaning~. 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS 1.3.1 The [)rawing~, Specifications :md other documents prepared hy the Architect are instruments of the Architect'~ service through which the Work to he executed hy the Con- tractor is descrihed. The Contractor m:lY retain one contract record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Suhcontractor, Sub- ~uhcontractor or material or equipment ~upplier shall own or claim a copyright in the [)rawin~s, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, :lnd unless otherwi~e indic:lted the Architect ~hall he deemed the author of them and will retain all cOll1mon law, ~tatutory and other re~er\'ed rights, in addition to the copyright. All copies of them, except the Contractor's record ~et. shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on reque~t, upon completion of the Work. The [)rawing~. Specifications and other documents prepared hy the Architect. and copie~ thereof furni~hed to the Contrac- tor, :tre for u~e solely with re~pect to thi~ Project. They are not to he used hy the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Suh- ~ubcontractor or material or equipment ~upplier on other proj- ects or for :lddition~ to this Project outside the scope of the I ~ .J 6 A201~1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (;ENERAL CONDITIONS OF TilE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRIICTION . FOURTEENTH EDITION MA~ . 'c) l'IR' TilE AMERICAN IN~TIT(lTE OF ARCHITECTS. 17.~S NEW YORK AVENUE. NW.. WASIIINGTON, D.C. 20(}O(i \X'ork without the srtTiflc written consent of the ()wner :1I1d Architect. The Contr;lctor, SUhnllllr;l<'lOrs, Suh suhcontractors and m:llerial or equipment suppliers are ~ranted a limited license to use ;lnd reproduce aprliclhle portions of the I )raw, in~s, Speciflc;ltions amI other docurnems prep:lred hy the Architect :lrpropriate to and for use in the execution of their \X'ork under the Contr;lct Documents, All copies made under Ihis license shall hear the st:llutory copyri~ht notice, if any, shown on the [)r;lwin~s, Speciflc;ltions and other documents prerared hv the Architect. Suhmitlal or distrihution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in con, nection with this Project is not to be construed as puhlicllion in derog;ltion of the Architect's copyright or other reserved rights. 1.4 CAPITALIZATION 1.4.1 Terms capitalized in these (;eneral Conditions include those which arc (I) specifically defined, (2) the titles of num, hered articles and idemifled references to l'aragr;lphs, Suhpara- gr;lphs ;lnd Cbuses in the document or (5) the titles of other documents puhlished hy the Americ;ln Institute of Architects. 1.5 INTERPRETATION 1.5.1 In the interest of hrevity the ContrKt Documents fre- quently omit modifving words such as "all" and ":1I1V" :md arti- cles such ;IS "the" and "an," hut the fact that a modifier or an :lrticle is absent from one statement and arpears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either st:II('ment. ARTICLE 2 OWNER ',= 2.1 DEFINITION 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or t'ntity identifkd as such in the Aweement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in numhn. The term "( )wner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized represent:llhT. 2.1.2 The ()wner upon reasonahle written request sh:11I furnish to the Contr;lctor in writing information which is necessary and rdev:mt for the Contractor to evalmtt', give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights, Such information shall include a corrnt st:Hement' of the record legal title to the property on \\'hich the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner's interest therein at the time of execution of the Agreement and, \\iithin five days :lfter any change, infornl;1tion of such change in titk, recorded or unrecorded. 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER , ""'- 2.2.1 The Owner shall, :11 the request of the Contr:lCtor, prior to execution of the Agreement and promptly from time to time thereafler, furnish to the Contractor reason:lhle {'\'idence that fln:1I1ci:t1 arrangements have heen made to fulfill the Owner's ohligations under the Contr;lct. f'vole: (1lI/ess slIeh IWISOII(I/J!e ('/,idellu' 1/'(Te .llInlis/wd Oil /'{"/lIcsl jlrior 10 Ihe ('-,,('ullioll of /II(' /l,f.!I'('C/I/('III, Ihl' jwosjwclil'l' C!J//lroc!or l/'Ollld 1101 Ill' /'{"/II/rcd 10 c.'(ec/I(c (/1e AR/-cell/CIII or (0 (O/lIlIl('IIU' Ihe lI'ink/ 2.2.2 The Owner shall furnish survevs descrihing pll\'sical ch;lr;lcteristics, legal limitations and utility locatiollS for the site of the Project, ami a legal descrirtion of the site. 2.2.3 Except for permits and fees which are the responsihilitv of the Contr;lclor under the Contr;lct Documents, the Owner Sh:lll secure and P:1V for necessary ;lpprovals, casements, :lssess- l11('nts :lI1d d1:lr~es required 1'( II' C( lIlstruction, use or occup;lncy ,)1' I'nm:ll1ent structures or fi,r permanent chan~es in existin~ Llcililit's. 2.2.4 Inform:lli(lIl 'HstT\'ices und('[ the ()wner's control sh;lll he fUfllished hy the (hvner wtth reasonable promptness to an ,id delay in orderly progress of the Work, 2.2.5 {'nless otherwise provided in the Contr;lct Documents, tile (:ontr:tctor will he furnished, free of charw', such ropies of Drawings and Project M:1I1uals :IS are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work, 2.2.6 The foregoing arc in addition to other duties and respon- sibilities of the Owner enunltT:ltnl herein and especially those in respect to Article (, (Construction by Owner or hy Sep;lrate Contr:lctors), Article 9 (Payments and Completion) and Article I J (Insurance ;lnd Bonds), 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contr;lct Documents as required by Paragr;lph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner, hy written order si~ned personally or hy an ;lgent specifically so empowered by the Owner in writin~, may order the Contrac- tor to stop the Work, or ;lny portion thereof, until the c;luse for such order has been eliminated: however, the right of the ()wner to stop the Work shall not give rise to;l duty on the part IIf the Owner to ex('[cise this right for the benefit of the Con- tractor or :lny other person or entity, except to the extent required bv Suhpar;lW:lph (, I..~. 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in ;Iccordance with the Contract Documents and fails \vithin a seven-d:lY period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence :lI1d continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such seven-d;l)' period give the Contractor ;I second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a second se\'Cnday period, If the Contractor within such second seven- ll:iy period after receipt of such second notice fails to com- mence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner m:1\', \vithout prejudice to olher remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies, In such case an :lppropri:lle (:hange (hder shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such defi- ciencies, inclnding compens:ltion li,r the Architect's additional .stTvices and expenses made necessary Iw such default, ne~lect or failure, Such :lnion hy the Owner ;lnd :lI110Unts charged to the Contractor arc both suhject 10 prior :Ipproval of the Archi- tect. If payments then or there:llter du(' the (:ontractor ;Ire not sufficient to cover such :1I110unts, Ihe COl1tr:\ctor shall P:1Y the difference to Ihe Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1 DEFINITION 3.1.1 The Contr;lctor is the person or entitv identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contr;lct Documents as if singular in numher. The term "Contr;lctor" means the Contr;lC!or or the Contractor's ;luthorized represent:lt hT. AlA DOCUMENT A201 . ';ENFRAL CONDITIONS OF TItE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. FOt'RTEENTII EDITION AlA'" . 'C119R7 TIlE AMERICAN INSTtTl ITF OF ARCItITECTS, 17.\" NEW YORK AVENt 'I', N W, WAS1IIN(;nlN, D.C. 200lK, A201-1987 7 .....-'.i""'_'.<.,~.....".-.""'~__~Ill..~_."'__~"'''' 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.2.1 The (:onlractor ~hall clldully studv ;lI1d compare the Contr;1Ct ()O('\IIUt'IllS wilh cach other :lI1d with illform:llion furnished hv Ihe ()wner pursuant to Suhparagraph 22.2 and shall ;U onn: report to Ihe Architect error~, inconsistt'ndes or omissions discO\Tred. The Contra<:lor shall not he Iiahle to Ihe Ownt'f or Architcl"l for d:ulla~e resultin~ from crrors, inconsis. tendt's or omissions in the Contrat"l Documcnts unless the Contractor reco~nized such error, inconsistcncy or omis,~ion :lIld knowin~ly failed to report it to the Architct'l If the Con. Irat'lor performs any construction activity knowing it involves ;1 recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Contrac- tor sh;lll assume appropri:lle responsihility for such perfor. mance and sl1;l1l hear an ;lppropriate amount of the attrihutahle costs for correction, 3.2.2 The Cont r:lCtor shall take fidd measurements and vt'fify field conditions and sh:11I cardully compare such field mea surements ;lIld condit ions and 01 her in format ion known to the Contra<:lor with Ihe ( .<lntract Documents hc'fore cOlllmendng ;Icth'ities. Errors, illconsislencies or omissions discovered shall he reported to the Architect at once, 3.2.3 The Contractor sh:11I perform the Work in accordance with the (:ontrat'l \)r 'Clllnents and suhmittals approved pur. sU:lI1t to I'aragr:lph .~. I 2. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise ;lI1d direct the Work, nsin~ the Contractor's hest skill and attention, The Contractor shall he soldy responsihle for and have control over construc. tion means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures :ll1d for coordin;uing all portions of the \1('ork under the Con. tract, unless Contr:lt'l Documents give other specific instruc. t ir lIlS n lIKeflling these matters. 3.3.2 The Contractor :;hall he responsihlc to thc Owncr for :tt'ts and omissions of thc Contractor's employces, Suhcontrat"lors :lI1d their :l~ents and employees, and other persons pcrfoflning portions of thc \Vork undcr a contract with the Contractor. 3.3.3 The Contractor shall not he relieved of ohligations to per. form Ihc Work in :tt'cord:lIlce with the Contrat"l \)ocuments either hy activities or duties of the Architect in Ihe Architect's :Idnlinistration of Ihe Contract, or hy tests, inspections or ;Ipprov:lls required or performed hy persons other than the Cont r:lct or. 3.3.4 The Contr;1ClOr shall he rcsponsihle f(lr inspection of por. tions of Work already pt'fformed under this Contract 10 deter. mine that such portions arc in proper condition 10 receive suh. sequent Work, 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Cot1lra<:l \)ocumellls, the Contractor shall provide ;lI1d pay for lahor, materials, equip. ment, tools, constnKtion equipment and machinery, W:lter, heat, utilities, transport:llion, anti other fadlitics and services necessary for proper execution :l1ld completion of the Work, ",'hether temporary or permanent anti whether or not inr:orpo. rated or to he incorporated in the \"('ork. 3.4.2 The Contr:lclOr shall enforce strict discipline :lIld good (lrder among the Contractor's employees :lI1d other pnsons carrvin~ (lllt the ContraCl. The Contractor ~hall Ilot permit employment of unfit persons or persons nOl skilled in tasks :Issignedto them. 3.5 WARRANTY 3.5.1 The (:( 1111 r:1Ct( lr warr;II11S t( 1 the (hvner and Architect that In:lleri:i1s :lIld equipment furnished undt'r the Contract will he of good qU;llitv :l1ld new UlllesS otherwise required or permit. led hy the COlltrKt Documents, that the Work will he free from dl'fect~ not inherellt in the qualitv required or permitted, and that the \"('ork will COil form with the requirements of the Contract Documcnts. Work Ilot conf(>rrning to these require. ments, indudinR suhstitutions not properly aflproved and authorized, m:IY he considered defective. The Contractor's warr:l1ll y excludes remedy for d:lI11age or dcfect caused hy abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, imflroper or insufficient m;lilllenancc, improflcr operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage . If required hy the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and qualitv of materials and equipmelll. I J 3.6 TAXES 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay S;lleS, consumer, use and similar t:lxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Con. tractor which arc leg:i1lv enacted when hids arc received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely schcduled to go into cffecl. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits :llld governmelllal fees, licellSes and inspections necessary t< lr proper exeClIl ion :lIld completion of the Work which :IIT custom:lrilv secured after execution of the Contract and which :lre legally rcquircd when hids :Ire received or nego. ti:ltions concluded. 3.7.2 The Cont ractor stull comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations :md lawful orders of puhlic allthorilies bearing on performance of the Work. J 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsihility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in ;lccordance with applic;lble I:tws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regula. ti( lIlS. Ilowever, if the Contractor ohservcs that portions of the Contract Documents arc at variance therewith, the Contractor sh:11I promptly notify the Architect and (hvner in writing, ;lnd necess3ry changes shall he accomplished by appropriate Modification, 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to he con. trary to laws, statutes, ordinances, huildin~ codes, and rules 3nd regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the Contr;lctor sh311 assume full responsibility for such Work and shall hear the attributahle costs. 3.8 ALLOWANCES 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the COlltract Sum all allow:l1lces staled in the Contract Documcnts. [terns cmTred hy alltm'ances shall he supplied for such amOllllts and hy such persons or entities as thc O\Vller may direct, but the Contr:rctor sl1;111 not he rcquired to employ persons or entities against which the Contractor makes rcasonahle ohjection, 3.8.2 llnless otherwise provided ill the Contract Documents: .1 m:llerials and equipmelll under an allowance shall he selcctcd promfltly hy the Owncr to avoid delay in the \"(, ork: .2 ;llIow:lIlces shall co\"t'r the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment dclivcrcd at the site and all required taxes, Icss :lpplicable trade discounts: ..) 8 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (;FNFRAI. CONDITIONS Of TilE CONTRACT fOR CONSTRUCTION' FO(lRTEENTll EDITION AlA" . ,i.11'JH' TilE AMERICAN INSTtTlITE OE ARClIITECTS, I ~.\<; NEW YORK A\"FNI'E, N.W. \Y,'AS11lN(;TON, nc. 2mKl(, .3 Contr:lclor'S costs filr unlo:ldin~ :Illd h:llldling at the sile, I:lbor, installation costs, o\Trll<':ld. profil :Illd ,'ther expenses ('( llltempl:ttnl Ie lr Sl :Iln I all"\\':lI1ce :lIlHllIllIS sh:11I 1)(' included in the (:, 11lIr:lcl Sum amI IH)t in I he :III< l\\':IIHTS: .4 when("\Tr costs :lre more Ih:1ll "r less than all')"':lllces, the (:ontr:lct Sum shall 1)(' :Idjustetl accordingly bv Ch:lIlgc Order. The amount of the (:ll:In~e (lrder sh:i11 reflect (1) the difference between actu:i1 costs :Illd lhe allowances under Clause .~.H.2.2 and (2) changes in Contr:lClor's costs under Clause ,~,H2.,~, 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.9.1 The Contr;Ictor shall cmploy :1 l'< Hllpetent superinten- dent and necess;Iry ;\.ssist;Ints who Sh:lll be in :lttend:lI1tT at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superinten- dent shall represent the Contractor, and cOlntllunicllions ~iven to the superintendent shall hc as binding as if given to the (:on- tractor. Important cotllmtlllications shall be confirmed in writ- ing. Other communications shall he similarlv confirmed on wrillen request in each case. 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3.10.1 The Conlraclm, promptly after being aW:lrdnlthe Con- tr:lCt, shall pwp:lre and suhmit for the ()wner's :lIld Architect's inf(lrm:llion:1 (:onlraclor's construction schedule lell Ihe \X'ork, The schedule shall not excenl time limits curn'nl under Ihe Contract \)Ot'lIl1H'nts, shall he revised :Il appropri:lle interv:i1s as re'luiled hy Ihe conditions of the \X!ork :Illd 1'1'< 'jnl, shall he related to the entire Project 10 the extent required h\' the (:on. tr:lct \)ocumenls, :lI1d shall provide for expedilious alltlpraui- c:rhle execution of the \'('ork. "'>,,..- 3.10.2 The Contr:lctor shall prepare find keep CUtrelll, lill the Architect's approval, :1 schedule of suhmillals which is c(lordi. n:lted with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review suhmittals 3.10.3 The Contractor shall conform 10 the most recent schedules. 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 3,11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copv of thc Drawings, Specifications, addenda, Change Orders ';nd other Modifications, in good order :lI1d tll:nked currently to record di;Inges :lI1d selections lTlade during constntction, and in addition approved Shop Drawings, Prod- uct Dat:l, S:lmplcs and similar required suhmill;Ils, These shall he :lvail:lhle to the Architcn and shall he delivered to the Archi- tect for submill:ll to the Owner upon completion of the \,\lork, 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.12.1 Shop [)r:1\\'ings :lre t1r:lwings, t1iagr:llm, schedules :I1lt1 other t1:H:1 specially prep:lted for the Work hv the Contr:ll'tor or :1 Subcontractor, Subsuhcflntractor, manufacturn, supplier or distribulor to illustr:lle some portion of the \V, nk. 3.12.2 Product D:lla are illustrations, sland:\I'(.1 schedules, per- f, HIlI:lIl{ 'e Ch;lrtS, inst ruct i, lIlS, hn ,chures, diagrams ;lIld ,)t her inhlrmation furnished \1\' the Conll:l( tor to illustratc m:llcri:t1s or c'\llipment for some portion of thc \Vork, ,'>- 3.12.3 Samples arc pl1\'sical cxamples \\'hidl m:llerials, cquipmcnt or workm:lIlship and est:lhlish hv \\hich the \X.'ork will he judged 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samplcs alltl similar ,sub- mitt:t1s :Ire not COlllr;lCt Documetlls, The purpose of tl1eir sub- millal is to demonstr:lte for those portions of the \X'ork for illustrate st:lI1tl:1rds \\hich.sllhmllt:lls :1[(' re'tlllrnl the W:l\' Il1e OllHr:lctor prnposes 10 COliform 10 Il1e illform:1I ion ghTn and t he design concept {'xpressnl in lilt' (:,'ntr:l<t I ),\('lIluenIS. Hn'iew hy the Architect is sllhject to Ihe IIIUil:1I1l1IlS ol SlIbp:lr:lgr:lpil ,i2~, 3.12.5 Till' ( :, lnllact' lr shall n'\'lt'w, approv!' .and submit to the Architcct Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples :lnd similar suhmittals required I)\' the (:, >l1Ir:lCt Documents with re;\.~on- able promptness and in such sl'quence :lS to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separatc con- Iractors. Suhmillals made bv lhe Contractor which arc not (equired hv the Contract Documents may he returned without action, 3.12,6 The Conlractor sh:11I pnform no portion of the Work I l'quiring suhmillal :lI1d review of Shop Drawings, Product I )ata, Samples or simil;lr suhmillals until the respective submit- 1:11 has been approved 11\' the Archill'Ct. Such Work shall be in :lCC' nd:llltT w'it h appn l\TtI sullmill:lls, 3.12.7 1\\' :Ippro\'ing alltl submilling Shop Drawings, Product D;II:I, Sampll's :lIld similar submittals, the Contr:lctor represents that the Contractor has deterlnilK't1 and \'{'ritit'd materials, field ml'asureml'nts autl field construction nitl'ria related thereto, or will do so, and h;IS checked and coortlin:Hl'd the information cont:lined within such suhmittals wilh the requirements of the \X'ork amI of the Contr:lt't DOt'tllllClltS, 3.12.8 'I he Conlr:lctor ,11:111 Ill)t Ill' relil'ved of rcsponsibilitv for dcvi:llious from re'tuirl'ml'IlI.' of Ihe Contract ()ocumell!s by Ihe Architect's :lpP('(lval of Shop Drawings, Product Dat:I, Samples "I' similar sullmill:t1s unless the Contractor has specil1clllv informcd thl' Architect in wriling of such deviation :tl the time of suhmittal :llId thl' Architect has given written :Ipprovalto the specific de\'i:Hion, The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibilit\' for errors or omissions in Shop Draw- ings, Product Data, Samples or similar suhmillals hy the Archi- tect's approval thereof. 3,12.9 Till' Contr:lctor Sh:lll direct specific allemion, in writing or on resubmitted Shnp Drawings, Prnduct Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested hy the Architect on previous submillals, 3.12.10 Infnrlll:ltional suhmituls upon which the Architect is not expected [0 take responsive :lCtion may he so identil1ed in I he Conllact [)Ot'llmenIS. 3.12.11 When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, s\'stems or equipment is required by the Contract ()ocuments. Il1e Architect slull he entitled to rely upon the accuracy :llld completeness of such calculations and certitl- cations, 3.13 USE OF SITE 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations ;It the site to areas permitted hy bw, ordinances, permits and the Contract ()ocuments :md sh:lll not unreasonably encumher the site with materials or equipment. 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.14.1 The COllt ractor shall be responsible for cutting, l111in~ or patching required to c(Hnplcte the Work or to make its parts fit together ptoperlv, 3.14,2 The Cotllractor sh:lllnot dama~e or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or sep:lrate contraclors hy cultin~. patching or other- wise altering such construction, or hy exc:lvation, The Contrac- tor shall not cut or othnwise alter such construction hy the AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (;ENERAI. U lNDITI< lNS , )1'. TIlE (:, lNTRAC.T F< IR U lNSTRt I( :1'1< IN . H)( IRTEENTI t EDtTI< IN ,~IA.' . ,r) l'lA' TilE AMERICAN tNsTtTlITE OF ARUIITECTS, 1-:'\, NEW YOHK AVENlIF.. N \'(', \'('~slltN(;TON. D.C. 211()()() A201-1987 9 "",,,,,,.~,_,'__'~'__""""~~"~'''''''''_''"'''"<'''''"''m' <.-._o.'''''''f._.;''''''''oi''''"_''' Owner or a separate nmlractor except with written nlll~ent of the ()wncr and of such separate contractor; such consem shall not he umeasnn:lhly withheld. The Contractor shall not unrea. sonably withhold From the Owner or a separate contractor the Contr:ICtor's consent to cUllin~ or otherwise alterin~ the Work. 3.15 CLEANING UP 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surround. in~ area free from accumulation of waste materials or ruhhish Clused hy oper:nions under the Contract. At completion of the Work the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall he char~ed to the Contractor. 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner :md Architect access to the Work in preparation and pro~ress wherever located. 3.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The (.ontractor shall defend suits or claims For infrin~ement of p:llel11 rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless From loss on account thereof, but shall not he responsible For such defense or loss when a particular desi~n, process or prod. uct of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required hy the Contract Documents. However, if the Contractor has rea- son to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly Furnished to the Architect. 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Archi- tect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, includ- ing hut not limited to :1ltorneys' Fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, dam- age, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, dise:t~e nr death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible prop- erty (other than the Work itself) includin~ loss of use resulting therefrom, hut only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may he liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to ne~ate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person descrihed in this Parawaph 3 I R. 3.18.2 In claims agamst any person or emity indemnit1ed under t his Paragraph 3.1 R hy an employee of the Contr:Ktor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed hy them or anyone For whose acts they may he liable, the indemnifica- tion obligation under this Para~raph 3 I H shall not he limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit :!Cts. 3.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph .~.l H shall not extend to the liahilitv of the Architect, the Archi- tect's consultants, and a~el1ls anti employees of any of them arising out of (I) the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Chan~e Orders, designs or specifica- tions, or (2) the givin~ of or the failure to give directions or instmctions by the Architect, the Architect's consultants, and a~ents and employees of any of them provided such ~ivin~ or failure to ~ive is the primary cause of the injury or damage. I ,..J ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 ARCHITECT 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity I:Iwfully practicing architecture iden- tified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents :l~ if singular in number. The term "Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not he restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unrea- sonably withheld. 4.1.3 In case of termination of employment of the Architect, the Owner shall appoint an architect against whom the Con- tractor makes no reasonahle ohjection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall he that of the former architect. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be the Owner's representative (1) durin~ construction, (2) until final payment is clue and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the correction period described in Para- graph 12.2. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instmment in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the completed Work and to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicat- in~ that the Work, when completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check quality or quantity of the Work. On the basis of on- site observations as an architect, the Architect will keep the Owner informed of progress of the \'\'ork, and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. 4.2.3 The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not he responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's responsihility as provided in Paragraph 3.3. The Architect will not he responsihle for the Contractor's Failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Con- I ~. ...j 10 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (;ENFRAL CONDtTlONS OF TilE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRI'CTtON . FOURTEENTH EDITION AlA" . iC, IWF TIlE AMERICAN tNSTITl '1'1' OF ARCIII1'ECTS. 17.~<; NFW YORK AVENt 'I'.. NW. \'<;'ASltlNGTON. D.C 2000(, tr:lctor, Suhcontr:lctors, or their ;l~ents or emplo\'l't's, or of :lny other persons performin~ portions of the Work. \- 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administra- tion. Except :IS otherwise provided in the Contr;Kt Documents or when direct communications h:lve htTn speci:1l1y ;Illlho- rized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communi- clle thrnu~h the Architect. Communic;llions hy and with the Architect's consultants shall he throu~h the Architect. Commu- nications by and \vith Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be thrO\I~h lhe Contractor. Communications bv and with separate contractors shall he throuRh the Owner. 4.2.5 Rased on the Architect's observations and evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Archilect will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisahle for implementa- tion of the intent of the Contract DOClUllents. the Architect will have :luthority to require :ldditional inspection or testin~ of the Work in :lCconbnce wilh SubparaW:lphs 1.~.'i.2 ;md l.~'i..~, whether or not such Work is f:thric:lted. inst:llled or completed, Ilowever. neither this authority of the Architect nor ;1 decision made in ~ood faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority sh;lIl give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Archi- tect to the Contr:lctor. Suhcontr:lctors. materi;ll and equipment .>;uppliers. their :lgents or employees. or other per>;ol1S perform- ing portions of the Work, 4.2.7 The Architect will review ;llld ;lpprove or take other appropri:lte :1Ction upon the Co11tr:lctor's suhmittals such ;lS Shop Drawings, Product Data :lnd Samples, hut only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract DOClI- ments. The Architect's action will he taken with such reason- ahle promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or separ:lte contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review, Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such :IS dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance o(equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents, The Architect's review of the Contractor's submit- tals shall not reliev(' the Contractor of th(' ohligations under Paragraphs 3.3, 3, 'i and 3.12. The Architect"s review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated hy the Architect, of any construction means. methods. techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect"s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an :lssembly of which the item is a component 4.2.8 The Mchitect will prepare Change Orders and Construc- tion Change Directives. and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in P;lragraph 7,1. 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the eLHe of fin:i1 completion. will receive and forw:ud to the Owner for the ()wner's review and records written warranties and rdated documents required by the Contract :lIld assemhled hy the Contractor. and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance ",,-jth the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will pro- vide one or more project representatives to ;I.ssi.st in C1rrving \.... I lut the Architect's re>;ponsihilities :11 the site, The duties, responsibilities ;llld limitations of authority of such project represent;Hives shall he as set forth in an exhibit to he incorpo- rated in the ContrKt I )ocuments. 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide m:1lters concern- in~ performance under ;llld requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contrac- tor. The Mchitect's response to such requests will be made with rc;lsonahle promplt1('ss and within any time limits a~reed upon. If no aweement is made C(Jtlcernin~ the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be fur- nished in compli;lIlce with this Para~raph 4,2, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to fur- nish such interpretations until l'i days after written request is made for them. 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will he consistent with the intent of ami rea.sonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings, When making such interpr('tations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner amI Contr;lClor. will not show partiality to either and will not he liable for results of illlerpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. 4.2.13 The Architect's decision>; on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.1 Definition. A (:bim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpre- tation of Contract terms. payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in ques- tion between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relat- ing to the Contract. Claims must be made by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. 4.3.2 Decision of Architect. Claims, includinR those alleging an error or omission bv the Architect. shall he referred initially to the Architect for action as provided in Paragraph 4.4, A deci- sion by the Architect, as provided in Subparagraph 4.4.4, shall be required as a condition precedent to litigation of a Claim between the Contractor :1Ilc1 Owner as to all such matters :uising prior to the ebte finall'ayment is due, regardless of (I) whether such matters relate to execution and progress of the Work or (2) the extent to whit:h the \X'ork has been com- pleted. The decision hy the Architect in response to :I Claim shall not he a condition precnlelll to litigation in the event (I) the position of Architect is vacant. (2) the Architect has not received evidencT or has Lliled to render a decision within ;lgreed time limits. (~) the Architect has failed to take ;lCtion required under Subparagraph '1.'1.4 w'ithin 50 clays after the Claim is made. (I) .is days have passed after the C1~im has Iwen referrcd to the Architect or ("i) the Claim rdates to a mechanic's lien. 4.3.3 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must he made within 21 davs after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 davs after the c1aim3nt first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims must he made Il\' written notice. An additional Claim made after the initial Claim has heen implemented by Change Order will not he considered unless submitted in a timely m3nner. AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (;ENFRAt. (:l lNlllTlClNS l ll' Till' (:( lNTRACT FOR CONSTR1'ClI( IN . f'()\ 'RTI'FNTII FIllTI(lN .\IA'" . ri'! 1l)H7 '1'111' AMERICAN tNSTIII ITE OF AHU 11'1 H'TS. I - IS NFW YOHK AVENt 'I', N W . \\'ASIIIN(;TC IN. Il t: 2'"lfl(, A201-1987 11 4.3.4 Continuing Contract Performance. I'endin~ /inal reso. hllicln of a Claim , unless otherwise ;l~rcTd in wrilin~ the Contr:lctor Sh:ll1 proceed dili~ently with perfor. m:lrKe of the Contract ;md the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the COlllr:lCt Documents. 4.3.5 Waiver of Claims: Final Payment. The making ()f fin:11 payment sh:lll constitute a waiver of Cbims by the Owner except those arising from: .1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumhranccs aris. ing out (If the Contract :Ind unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contr:lct Documents; or .3 terms of speci:ll w:lrr:lnties required by the Colllract Documents. 4.3.6 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If con. ditions are encountered at the site which arc (I) subsurface or otherwise concealed physic:l1 conditions which differ materi. ally from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which dif. fer materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice hy the ohserving p:lfly shall he given to the other party promptly before conditions arc disturbed and in no event bter than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Archi. tect will promptly invcsti~atc such conditions and, if they differ matnially and cause an inCfc;lse or decrease in the Contractor's cost of. or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the rerms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall so notify the Owner and COlllrKtor in writing, stating the reasons. Claims by either party in opposition to snch determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect Ins given notice of the decision. If the Owner atilt Contractor cannot ;lgree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initi:11 deter. mination, subject to further proceedings pursuant to Paragraph If. ,I. 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Cost. [f the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the ''<'ork. Prior notice is not required for Claims relatit,~ to an emergency endangering life or property :Irising under Para. graph 10.:\. [f the Contractor helieves additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited (() (I) a ,vritten interpretation from the Architect, (2);m order hy the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor W:IS not at fault, (5) a writ. ten order for a minor ch;mge in the ''<'ork issued hv the Archi. tect, (1) failure of payment by the Owner, ('i) termin:llion of the Contract by the Owner, ((,) Ownet"s suspension or (7) other reasonable grounds, Claim shall be filed in accordance with the l'roCTdure e<t:lblished herein. 4.3.8 Claims for Additional Time 4.3.8.1 [f the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be ~iITn. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost :md of prob:lble effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a cOl1!inuing delay only one Claim is necessary. 4.3.8.2 If adverse weather conditions are the hasis for a Cbim for additional time, such Claim shall he documented by data subst:mti:lling that weather conditions \H're almormal for the period of time and could not have been reasonably anticipated, and that w(';1Iher conditions had an adverse effect on the scheduled CI Hlstruct i( 1l1. "J. 4.3.9 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or dam:lge to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, of any of the other party's emplovees or agcnts, or of others for whose acts such party is leWdly liable, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after first observance. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other partv to investigate the matter. If a Cbim for addi. tional cost or time related to this Claim is to be asserted, it shall he med :IS provided in Subparagraphs 4:\.7 or .L.~.fl. 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.4.1 The Architect will review Claims and take one or more of the following preliminary actions within ten days of receipt of a Claim: (I) request addition:1I supporting data from the claimant, (2) submit a schedule to the parties indicating when the Archi. tect expects to take action, (.~) reject the Claim in whole or in part, stating reasons for rejection, (1) recommend approval of the Cbim hy Ihe other p:uty or ('i) .<uMest a compromise. The Architect may also, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the n:llure and amount of the Cl:1im. 4.4.2 If:l Cbim has heen resolved, the Architect will prepare or ohtain appropriate documentation. 4.4.3 If a Claim has not been resolved, the party making the Claim shall, within ten days after the Architect's preliminary response, take one or more of the following actions: (I) submit additional supporting data requested by the Architect. (2) modify the initial Claim or (5) notify the Architect that the initial C1:1 im stands. I .i, 4.4.4 [f a Claim has not heen resolved after consideration of the foregoing and of further evidence presented by the parties or requested by the Architect, the Architect will notify the parties in writing that the Architect's decision will be made within seven d:ll.s, which decision shall be final and binding on the p:lrties . llpon expiration of such time period, the Architect will render to the parties the Architect's written decision relative to the Cbim, including any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. [f there is a surety and there :Ippe;us to be a possibility of a Contractor's dcfauli, Ihe Architect may, hut is not ohligated to, notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy, .,J" 12 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (;ENERAI. CONDITIONS OF TilE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. F()[!RTEENTII EDITION AlA'" . (c) I<Jfl7 TilE AMFRICAN INSTITIITE OF ARCIIITECTS. ,-\<; NEW YORK AVFNIIF. N'JC'. WASIIIN(;TON, DC. 2mxl(, '" ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITIONS 5.1.1 A Suhcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout I he Contract Documents :IS if singular in number and means a Subcontr:Ktor or an authorized represenlative of the Suncon- tCKtor. The term "Suhcontractor" docs nO! include a separate contractor or suhcontractors of a separate contractor. 5.1.2 A Sub-suhcontractor is a I'erson or entity who has a direct or indirect C()ntr:Kt with a Subcontractor to prrform a portion ()f the \'('(lIk at the site. The term "Sun-subcolllractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in numhn and means a Subsnhnllltractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subnllltractor. 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK \.. 5.2.1 I !nless otherwise stated in the Cotltract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as prac- tiC:lhlc aftn award of the Contr:Kt, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or enti- ties (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment Lllnicatnl to a special design) proposed for each principal por- lion of the Wmk. The Architect will promptly reply 10 the Con- trxlor in writing stating \,;hethn or n()t the Owner or the Architect. :Ifter due investigation, has reasonahle objection to any sllch proposed person or entity. r:lilure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reason- :Ihle ohjection. 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed per- son ()r entitv to whom the Ownn or Architect has made rea- son;thlc amI timely ohjection. The Contractor shall not he required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor h:Ls made reasonahle ohjection. 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonahle ohjection 10 a person or entitv proposed by the Contractor, the Contr;Ictor shall propose :lI1other to whom the Owner or Architect has no rcason:lble objection. The Contract Sum shall he incrc;lsed or deLTe:lsClI hy the t1ilfere!lce in cost occasioned hy such change and an appropriate Change Order sl1:111 he issued. Ilowever, no incre:lse in the (:olllract Stllll Sh:11I he allowed for such change unless the Contractor has aeted promptly and responsively in <;uhmitting names as required. \... 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person or elHitv pre\'j()usly selected if the Owner or Architect makes re;lsonahle ohjection 10 such change. AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (,ENFRAI. CONDITIONS OF TilE CONTRACT FOil CONSTlll1CTION . F< H :RTEENTII EDITION AlA'" . le-' t"H~ TilE AMERICAN tNST1T\ 'TE OF ARC! IITECTS. I ~.~'i NFW YORK AVENt 'E. N W. WASIIIN(iJ"(JN. ilL 20(11)(, A201-1987 13 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 Ry ;lppropriate :I~reement, written where Ic~ally required for v:llidity, the Conlr:lctor shall require C:lCh Suhcontr:lctor, to the extent of the \'<:'ork to he performed by the Suhcontr;Klor, to he hound to the Contractor hy terms of the Contract Docu. ments, :lnd to assume toward the Contractor :III the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these DonI' ments, ;lssumes IOw;lrd the Owner ;111(1 Architect. Each suhcon. tr;l(.t ;lgreemel1l sh;lll preserve and protect the rights of the Owner ;111(1 Architect under the Contr;lct Documellls with respect to the Work to he performed hy the Subcontractor so that subcontraClin~ thereof will not prejudice such rights, ;lnd shall allow to the Suhcontractor, lInless specifiedly provided otherwise in the suhcol1lr;lct agreement, the henefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, hy the Contract Documents, has against lhe Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor 10 enter into similar ;lgreeme-nts with Sub.sub. contractors. The Contr;lctor sh;lll make ;lvail:1ble to e-ach pro. posed Suhcontr;lctor, prior to the execution of the suhcontract ;lgreement, copies of the Contr;lct Documc'nts to which the Subcol1lr;lctor will be bound, ;lnd, upon written re-quest of the Subcontractor, idelllify to the Suhcontractor terms and condi. tions of the proposed suhcontr;lct agree-ment which may he al variance Wilh the Contract Documellls. Subcolllr;lCtors shall simibrly make copies of applicahle portions of such dc KUlllents ;lv;lilahle to thdr re-spective proposed Suh-suhcontr;lctors. 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS 5.4.1 Each suhcontr;lct agreement for a portion of the W'ork is ;lssigned hy the Contr;lctor to the Owner provided that: .1 assignment is effective only :lfter te-rmination of lhe Contr;lct hy the Owner for c;luse pursuant to Para- graph I '..2 and only for those subcontr;Kt ;lgreements which the Owner ;lccepts by notifying lhe Suhcon- tractor in writing; ;lnd .2 ;l~signment is subject to the prior rights of lhe surety, if ;lny, ohligated under bond rebting to the Contract. 5.4.2 If the Work has heen suspended for Illore than 50 days, lhe- Subcontractor's compens;ltion shall be- equit;lbly adjustcd. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 The Owner re-serves the right to pe-rform construction or oper;ltions rebted to the Project with the OwnCf's own forces, allt! to award separ;lte contracts in connection with other por- tions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditic'Ils of the Contract idelllicll or suhstanti:llly simil;lr to these including those portions rdated to insurance :lIld waiver of suhrogation. If lhe Contractor claims that delay or ;ldditional cost is involved hecause of such ;lction by ,l1e Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided else. where in the Contr;lct Documents. 6.1,2 When separ;lle contracts are awarded for differenl por- lions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case sh;11I mean the Contractor who executes each separate ()",ner-( :ontractor Agreement. 6.1.3 The ()wncr shall provide for coordination of the activi- ties of the ()wner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the \Vork of the Contr;lctor, who sh;lll cooper;lte wilh them. The Contractor sh;lll participate with other separate con. tr;lctors and the Owner in reviewin~ their construction sched. ules when directed to do so. The Contractor shJII make any revisions to the construction schedule and Contract Sum deemed necessary ;lfter a joint review ;lnd m\llu;l1 ;lgreement. The construction schedules sh;lllthen constitute the schedules to he used hy the Contractor, sep;lrate contractors and the Owner until suhsequently revised. II -II 6.1.4 (lnless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations rel;lted to the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be suhject to the s;lme ohligations and to have the s;lme rights which ;lpply to the Contractor under the Concli. tions of the Contr;lct, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article .\ this Article 6 ;lnd Articles 10, II and 12. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate con. tr;lctors reason;lble opportunity for introduction ;lnd storage of their materials and equipmelll and performance of their ;lctivi. lies and sh;lll connect and coordin;lte the Contractor's con. struction ;lml operations with theirs as re-quired hy the Contract Documents. 6.2.2 If part of lhe Contractor's Work depcnds for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or ;I separJte contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect ;lpparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction th;lt would render it unsuit;lblc for such proper e-xeclllion and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or sep;l. r;lte contractors' completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contr;lctor's Work, except as to dde-CIS not then reasonahly discoverahle. I) -...)) 6.2.3 Costs caused by delays or by improperly timed ;lctivities or defective construction shall he borne by the party responsi. ble t he rcfo r. 6.2.4 The Contractor Sh:ll1 promptly remedy damage wrong. fully caused hy the Contr;lctor to completed or partially com. pleted construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors ;IS provided in Suhpar;lgr;lph 10.2. S. 6.2.5 Claims ;Inti other disputes ;lnd matters in question between the ContrJctor and ;I separJte contr:lctor shall he sub- ject to the provisions of Paragraph 4 J provided the sep;lr;lte contractor h;ls reciprocal obligations. 6.2.6 The ()wne-r ;1lld each separate contractor 5h;lll have .the same re-sponsibilities for CUlling and patching as are descrihed for the Contractor in Paragr;lph 5.1.\' 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If ;I dispute arises ;lnlllllg the Contr;lctor, sep;lrate con. tr;lctors and the Owner a.s to the responsihility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises :md surround. ing area free from waste m;lterials and ruhhish as descrihed in Par;lgraph >,.1 <;, the Owner mav clean up and alloc;lte the cost among those responsible as the Architect determines to he just. ~ 14 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (:ENI'IlAI. CONDITIONS or TilE U lNTIlACT rOil UJNSTRl1CTION . I'Ol'RTEF.NTII EDITION ."A" . 'c' I 'liP 'IIII' AMFHICAN INSTlTl'TE Of ARCIIITECTS. I ~\S NEW YORK A\TNt 'F. N "'. "'ASIIINC;TON. D C 2lXl06 ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK \.. 7.1 CHANGES 7.1.1 Ch:IllRes in the Work may he accomplished :Ifter execu- tion of the ContrKt. and without invalidatinR the Contract, by Change Order. Construction ChanRe Ilirective or order for a minor chanRe in the Wmk, suhject to the limitations stated in this Arlide 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documellts. 7.1.2 A Change Order shall he hased upon agreement amonR the Owner, Contractor :ll1d Architect: :1 (:, ll1st ruct ion Change Directive requires aweemelll h\' the ()wner and Architect and mayor may not he agreed to hy the Contractor: :In order for a minor change in the Work may he issued hy the Architect alone. 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall he perlllfl11<:d under appli- cahle provisions of the Contr:llt Documellts, and the Colltrac- tor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Ch:ll1ge Ilirective or order for a minor chanRe in the Work. 7.1.4 If unit prices arc st:lled in the Cllntr:Kt Documents Ilr suhsequenlly :lgreed upon, :Illd if qU:llltities origin:llly con- templated arc so changed in a proposed Change ( )rder or Con- struction Change Dircctive that appliC:ltion of such unit prices to quantities of \'fork proposed will CllIS.. suhst:llltial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the :lppliClI1Ic unit prices shall he equitahly adjusted. \..... 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS 7.2.1 A Changc Order is a written instrument prepared hy the Architcct and signed hy thc Owner, Cllntractor and Architect, stating their :Jgreemcnt upon all of the following: .1 a change in the Work: .2 the amount of the adjustment in the Contnct Sum, if :1I1Y; and .3 the extent of the :Idjustment in the Colltract Time, if :IIlY. 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments II) the C'lIltr:lct Sum may include those listed in Suhpar:lgraph 7..~..~. 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.3.1 ^ Construction Change lJirecth-c is a written order prc- p:lfed hy the Architect and signed hv the Owncr and Alchitect, directing a c11:Jnge in the Work and st:lling a proposed hasis for adjustment, if any, in the Col1lr:lCt Sum or Contract Time, or hoth. The Owner Inav hv Conslruclion Ch:lIlge Directive, \\ithout inv:llidating lhc Contract, Ilrder changes in the \Xork within the general scope of thc Contract consisting Ilf addi- tions, deletillns or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Con- t r:lCt Time heing adjusted :Kcordinglv. 7.3.2 A Cllnslructilln Change Directive shall 1)(' uscd in the ;Ihsence of tot:d agreement on the terms of a Change Order. \.... 7.3.3 If the I:, HlstrUClion Change I )irectin' prm'ides f( Ir an ;ttljustment to the Contr:tct Sum, the :ldjust1l1ent sh;tll he hased on one of the following mcthods: .1 mutu:d :tl"ceptance of a lump SUI11 proper'" itCl11ized and supported hy sulficit'nt suhst:lIlli:lling data to per- mit {'\'alu:lli, Hl; .2 unit prices stated in the (:, lntr:lct Documl'lllS or sub- ~equenth' agreed upon: .3 cost to he t1etnml1lcd in :I manner :Igreec! ' the paft ies :1I1d :1 l11utually acceptahle fixed o. :lge tee; "I' .4 as pro\"ltled in Subparagraph 7..~ ,(,. 7.3.4 \lpon receipt of ;1 COllstruction ChanRe Directive, tt Contractor shall promptly proceed with the chanRe in tl Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractol aRreement or disaRreement with the method, if any, provide in the Constnlction Ch:ll1ge Directive for determininR the pr posed aojustmcnt in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. , I :n 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed hy the Contra, lor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, inelu, ing adjustment in Cllntract Sum and Contract Til11e or th l11elhoo for determining them. Such agreement shall be effe, tive immediately and shall be recorded a$ a Change Order. 7.3.6 If the C, mtractor docs not respond promptly or disagre( with thc method for :ldjustl11ent in the Contract Sum, tl mcthod and the adjustl11ent shall he determineo hy the Arch tect on the basis of rcasonable expenditures and savings ( thllse performing the Work attrihuuhle to the change, inelu, ing, in casc of :1l1 innC:lse in the Contract Sum. a retsonah allowance Ii >r overhead :lI1d profit. In such case. and also und, Clause 7.~.".5, the Contractor shall keep and present, in SUl forl11 :IS the Architcct may preseribe, an itemized accounti,' togcther wilh ;lppropri:lle supporting data. l :nless otherwi.' pro\'idnl in the ("olllract Documents, costs for the purposes, this Suhpar:lgraph 7 ".(, shall be limited to the following: .1 costs of !:tlmr, including social security, old age an IlI1ctll\,lovl11cnt insur;lIlce, fringe henents 1('(" ' ~d I agreel11cnt or custOI11, and workers' 0" .., Cllmpcns:lli( Hl insurancc: .2 costs of l11atnial.s, supplies ano equipment, inl ing cost of tr:lI1sportation, whether incorporateo ( "(lllSumed: .3 rental co,ts of machinery and eqllipment, exclusive' h:llld tools, whether renteo from the Contr:lctor ( others: .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, pcrn' fecs, and s:des, use or similar taxes related to tl \,\'ork; :Illd .5 :Idditional costs of supervision and fielo office persOl nel directh' attributable to the change. 7.3.7 Pcnding final determination of cost to the Owne amounts not in dispute may he included in Applications f, Payment. The amount of nedit to he allowed by the Contra, tor to the Owner for a deletion or dl:JnRe which results in a n' decre:lse in the Cont ract Sum shall he actual net cost as COI lirtlleO h\' the Architect. When hoth additions and nedi: covering rdued W'ork or suhstitutions are iuvolved in change, the all<l\vance for overhead ano profit shall he figure on the has is of net incre:lse, if any, with respcct to that chang' 7.3.8 If the I )wner :lI1d (:'Hltractor do not :Igree with tl' adjustment in ClllltraCl Timc or the method for determining I I ill' adjnstment or the method sil:llI he refcrred to the Architel for dctermination. 7.3.9 Wilell lile (h\'lllT and Contractor agrcc with the dete min:llion made h\" till' Architcct concerning the adjll~' 'IS lile (:olltract SUIl1 ;lt1d I :ll11t raet Time, or otherwise re ~rc ment upon lile adjustme11ts, such agreement shall be clleCli, imll1cdi:ncly :lt1d shall he rcc, "ded hv preparation and exec liOI1 of all appropri:lle I.ilange (lrder. AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (;ENFRAI. (:(lNllI"ll( INS (11' TIlE (:, 1NTRAtT FI lR C(lNSTRI '(:ll<lN . "')( .HTFFN III Flllll<lN AlA" . (0) I"He 1'111' AMERICAN INSlITIITI' OF AHU IIlECl~. 1- \'i NEW YOHK A\'ENI 'F. N W \X,\~III:--;(;Tt l:'i. 11 ( 2(lflflb A201-1987 w"",;"",,"'~C'",,:,,,,,,~""",,,,,,;,,""'4'<,,,.,,,i"""""'~""""""~"'""..".!4li>lii<.........~,l'i,.';" 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor ch:\I1~(,s in the Work not involvin~ adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contr:lCt Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such chan~es shall be effected by written order and shall be bindin~ on the Owner and Conlractor. The Contractor shall carry out such wrillen orders promptly. ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS 8.1.1 (Inless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, includin~ authorized adjustments, allotted in the Con- tract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. The date shall not be postponed by the failure to act of the Contractor or of persons or entities for whom the Contractor is responsible. 8.1.3 The d:lle of SlIbst:\I1tial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accord:IIKe with Para~raph 9.H. 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar tby unless otherwise .specifictlly defined. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents :11'1' of the essence of the Contract. f3y executin~ the Agreement the Con- tractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period 'fe II' performin~ the Work. 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowin~ly, except by agree- ment or instruction of the (hvner in writin~. prem:llurely com- mence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective d:lle of insurance required by Article II to be furnished by the Contractor. The date of commencement of the \X'ork shall not be changed by the effective date (,I' such insurance. (Inless the date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed given by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the (hvner in \vriting not less than five days or other agreed period before ('( lIlHllencing the \X'ork to permit the timely filing of mortg:lges, mcchanic's liens and other security interests. 8.2.3 The COnlractor shall proceed expeditiously with ade- quate forces and shall :JChieve Substantial Completion within the COl1tr:lCt Time. 8.3 DELA YS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the W'ork by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or 01':\11 employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or hy labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, un:lvoid:tble casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control. or by delav :tuthorized hy the Owner pending arhitration. or hy other causes which the Architect determines m:IY justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reas( lnable time as the Architect may determine. 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accord:lIKe with :Ipplicable provisions of Parap;raph .1..1. 8.3.3 This Paragraph H..~ docs not preclude reCO\Try of d:lm- :!ges for delay by either partv under other provisions of the Contr:lCt J)O('lllllenIS. ARTICLE 9 PA YMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 CONTRACT SUM 9.1.1 The (:ontr:K't SllIll is stated in the Agreement and, includ- in~ authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor f()(' performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. j ...h 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment. the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and sup- ported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect m:lY require. This schedule, unless ohjected to hy the Ar'chitect, shall he used :LS a has is for reviewin~ the Contractor's Applica- tions I(lr Payment. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date estahlished for each progress payment, the Contractor shall suhmit to the Architect an itemized Applicllion for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of \':liues. Such application shall be notarized, if required, :lIld suppmted by such data suhst:mti:lling the Contr:lctor's ri~ht to payment :IS the Owner or Architect mav require, such :IS copies of requisitions from Suhcont r:lctors and m:llcrial suppliers, and renecting retainage if provided for elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 9.3.1.1 Such :tpplicttions may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which 11:Ive heen properly authorized hy Construction Change Directives hut not yet included in Change Orders. 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for pay- ment of amounts the Colltr:lCtor does not intend to pay to a Subcontr:tC!or or material supplier heCluse of a dispute or other reason. I ...I, 9.3.2 ('nless otherwise prm'ided in the Contract Documents, payments shall he made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitahly stored at the site for suhsequent incor- por:ttion in the \X'ork. 1':lyment Ii lr materials and equipment stored on the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures s:ttisf:lCtory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materi:tls and equipmcnt or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, ami shall include :Ipplicahle insurance, storage :lIld transportation to the site for such materials and equipment . 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all \'fork covered hy an Application for Payment will pass to the Owncr no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certifkates for 1':lyment have heen previously issued ami payments received from the Owner shall. to the hest of the Contractor's knowledge, inform:ttion and helief, he free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Suhcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim hy reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relatin~ to the Work. 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9.4.1 The Architect will. within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's ^pplicttion for Payment, either issue to the ~ 16 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (;ENERAI. CONDtTlONS OF TI tE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRlICTION . r'(JI'RTEENTlI EDITION ,\fA'" . ,i" I 'JIP TilE AMERICAN I NSTtTt 1'1'1' OF ARCIIITECTS. I ~.\S NEW' YORK AVENt 'E. NW. WASIIIN(;TON. D.C. 20<)06 Owner;1 Certificate ror Payment, with a CO!'I' 10 Ill(' (,>llIr;lc, t<1r. for such ;tI1HlllIll as the Architect tletertllines is I'r< 'lwrlY tlue. (>r U' )tify the (:<1ntractor ;tI1d ()wncr in \\Tiling ,If the ArdllllTt's reasons for withll<lldin~ cl'ltilic;llion in whoit' <11 111 part ;lS prm'idnl in SuhP;llaW;lph () ') 1 9.4.2 The issuance of a CertifiClte for Payment will constitute a representation hI' the Architect to the ()wner. 1used I >11 the Architect's ohserv;llions al the site ;1I1d the dat;1 comprisin~ the Application for Payment, that the Work has pro~ressed t<1 the point indicated ;lIld that. 10 the hest of the Architect's knn\\l- ed~e. information :tI1d he lid. qllality of the \X'ork is in accor- lbnce with the Contract ()ocunKnts. The fore~oin~ representa- t ions ;Ile suhject to an eyaluation of the \X'ork for conform;lIlce with the Contract ()ocuments upon Suhstantial Completion. to resulls Ill' sllhseqllent tests and inspecti(lI1s. 1<) minl)r deviatilllls from the Contract Documents correctahle prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed hI' the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Paymel1l will further constitute a representation that the Col1lr:lc1llr is el1litled to paYlIlent in Ihe ;Imount certified. II< )weycr. the issuance <11' a (:ertiflclte I<)f P;IY- ment will not he a representation that the Architect Ins (I) m;tde exhaust iye or colllil1lH IUS (lIl.site inspect il HIS to check the qmlity or quamitv <11' the \X'ork. (2) reviewed c<1nstruction mC:lIls. methods. tect1l1iques. sequences <1r pr< ,,-'('durcs, (.~) reYiewed copies of reqllisitions received fr<1m Suhcontr:lCtors ;tIltlm;llcri;11 suppliers :ll1d other d:lta requested hy the ()wner to suhst:tIltiate the (:ontr:tctor's right to p:lyment or (,i) made cxamin:ltion to ascertain hOlv <1r f<1r what purpose the Contrac- tor has used money previously paid on :ICCOllnt of Ihe ( :ont r:tct Sum. 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.1 The Architecl lilaI' decide not to certil\' payment and m;IY withhold a CertiflC:lle for P:lyment in whole or in part. to the extent reasonahly nccess:try to protect the ()wner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the ()wner required hI' Suhparawaph 9.'1.2 cannot he m:lllc. If the Architect is un:lhle 10 certify payment in the amount of the Application. the Architect will notify the ContrKtor and Ownl'l :IS proYided in Suhpara~raph 9..1.1. If the Contractor and Architect ctllnot :IWl'C on ;1 revised amount. the Architect will prompt Iv issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for \\hich the Architect is :lble to m:lke such representations to the ()wner. The Archi- tect l11ay :llso decide not to certify pa\'ment or, hecause or suhsequentlv discol'ercd e\idence or subsequent obscf\,;tlions, l11ay nullify the whole or a part of a Certiric;lle for Pal'ment prel'iollsly issued. to such extent as may he neeess:lf\' in the Architect's opinion to protect the O\vncr from loss hecause of: .1 defecti\'e Work not remedied: .2 third party claims f1Ied or reasonahle evidence indic:1t ing prohahle f1Iing of such c1ail11s; .3 f:lilure of the Contr:Ktor to make pa\,ments prop- erly to Subcol1lr:tctors or for i:lhor, m:t1crials or equipmellt: .4 rC:lsonahle evidence that the Work cll1not he COIll- pleted for the unpaid balance of the Contract SUIll; .5 dam:lge to the Owner or another contractor: .6 rC:lsonahle e\'idence that the Work will not he com- pleted within the Contract Tillle, ;1I1d that the unpaid halann:, would not he adequate to Co\'Cr actual or liquidated d:IlTIages for the :t111ieip:lled del:l\'; or .7 persistent failure to carrl' out the \X'ork in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.5.2 Whcn thc ;11)( liT rC1SOl\S for withholding certiflcllion are l'('lllo\Td, nTtillcation will he Illade for :IITIounts previous Iv wnl,hdd 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.1 After the Architect ILlS issued a (:crtiflC:lle fl)f Payment. the ( hvner shall make p:l\'ment in the Illanner and within the time pro\'ided in the COlltr:Kt I )oculllents. :lnd sh:11I so notify the Architect 9.6.2 The CI 'nt r:Ktor shall promptly pay each Sllhcontr:tctor. llpon receipt of paymcnt from the ()wner. out of the amount p:lid to the Contractor Iln account of such Suhconlractor's por- tion of the \Vork. the amount to which said Suhcontractor is entitled, retkctin~ pcrcel1ta~es :Ktually retained from payments to the (:ontractor on :lccount of such Suhcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contr:Ktor shall. by :lppropriate aweement wilh each Suhcontractor, require each Suhcontr:lctor to make payments to Suhsuhcolltractors in similar manner. 9.6.3 The Architect will. on reqllest. furnish to a Subcontrac- tor, if practicable. illformation re~arding p('rcenta~es of com- pletion or al110unts applied for hy the Contr:lctor and action LIken thereoll hI' the Architect and Owner on account of por- tions of the \X'ork done hy such Subcontractor. 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall ha\'(' :In ohli~ation to payor to see to the payment of money to a Suhcontractor except :lS may otherwise he required hy law. 9.6.5 P;l\'ment to material sllppliers sh:t11 hc treated in a manner similar to that pro\'ided in Suhparagraphs 9.0.2.9.<l..' and 9()ol. 9.6.6 A Ccrtiflc;lle for 1':lyment, :1 progress payment. or partial or entire use or occllpallCl' of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute :lCceptance of \X'ork llot in accordance with the Contract I )ocul11cnts. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment. throu~h no fault of the Contr:lctor. within seven days after receipt of the COlllr:tctor's Application for Payment. or if the Owner docs not pay the Contractor within se\'en cl:lys after the dalc estahlished in the Contract Documents the amount cer- tified hI' the Architect then the Con- tr:tctor mal', upon seven additional dal's' writtcn notice to the Owner and Architect. stop the Work until payment of the amount ()'\vin~ has been received. The Contr:lct Time shall he extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall he increased hy the amount of the Col1tr:Ktor's reasonahle costs of shut-down. delay and start-up, \vhich shall he accomplished as provided in Article 7. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Suhstalllial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the WI,rk or designated portion thereof is suffi- cientl\' complete in :lccordance with the Contwct Documents so the Owner can occupy or U1i1ize the \X'ork for its intended use. 9.8.2 Whell the (:olltractor considers th:tt tlte Work. or a por- tion thereof \\'hich the O\\-ner agrees to accept separately. is subst:mtially complete. the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to he completed or corrected. The Contractor shall proceed promptly to com- plete and correct items on the list. Failure to include an item nn such list docs not alter the responsihility of the Contractor to complete :111 Work in accordance wilh the Contract Docu- ments. [Ipon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or desi~- AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (;ENERAI. CONDITIONS or TilE CON'I RACT rOR CONSTR1ICTHlN . FOt'RTHNTII [,DtTION AlA"' . ,ie! t')H7 TilE AMERtCAN tNSTtTI !TE or AIlUIllTCTS. 1-\<; NEW YOIlK AYENl1E, N W. WASIIIN(;TON. II ( 21l1l0(, A201-1987 17 _"."";.~...,...~_~j"'''''''''if !iill" " ~' . ;p;''$''''<il '"trtii'. n:lInl portion thereof is substantially complete. If Ihe Architect's inspection discloses any item. whether or not indulkd on the Contractor's list, which is not in accord;H1ce with the requirements of the Contract I )ocuments. the (:, mtrac- tor sh:llI. before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Com- pletion. complete or correct such itelllupon notifiGltion bv the i\rchittT!. The C'mtractor shall then submit a request for :mot her inspection hy the Architect to determine Sub.~tantial Completion. \'('hen the Work or desi~nated portion thercof is ~uhst:Hltially ('omplcte, the Architect will prepare a (:ertificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Suh st:mtial Completion, shall estahlish responsihilities of the Owner and Contral'lor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, dam:lge to the W'ork and insurance, and Sh:lll fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list ;l('companyin~ the Certificate. Warranties required by the Con- Iran Documents shall commence on the date of Suhstantial Completion of the W'ork or desiRnated portion thereof unless otherwisc provided in the Certificate of Suhstanti:11 Comple- til1l1. The Certificl!e of Suhstantial Completion shall be suh- milled to the Owner and Contractor for their wrilleT! acl'{:p- rance of responsibilities :lssigned to them in such Certificate. 9.8.3 'Ipon Suhstantial Completion of the \'Cork or desipl:lIed portion thereof :1Ild upon :lpplicatioT! hy the Contr:lCtor and tutificltion by the Architect. the Owner shall make p:lymelll, reflecting adjustment in retailla~e, if any, for snch \'('ork or pm- tilm thereof as provided in the Contract Documents. 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.9.1 The Owner m:1Y occupy or use any completed or par- tially completed portion of the W'ork at any stage when such portion is designated hy separate agreement with the Contrac- tor, provided such occnpancy or use is consented to hy the insurer as required ullller Subparagraph 11.5.11 and authorized hy puhlic alllhorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such 1):11 tial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is suhst:lIltially complete, provided the Owner and Contl:Ktor h:lve accepted in \\'fiting the responsibilities assigned to e:1('h of Ihem for payments, retain:lge if allY, sccu- rity, maintenanec, heat, utilitics, damagc ro the \X'OI k and imur- ance, aud have agreed in writing concerning the period for cor- rc,.tion of the Work and commenccment of warranties wquired by the Contract Documents. When the Conlr:ll'lor Cflllsidns a portion suh.stalllially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and suhmit a list to the Architect as provided under Suhpar;lgr:lph 9.F!2. Conscnt of the C011lr:lClor to parti:11 occu- pancy or use shall not he unreasonahly withheld. The st:I!~e of the progress of the \'(fOlk shall he determined hy written :Igree- ment hetween the OwnCf and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, hy decision of the Archilec!. 9.9.2 Immedi:lll'iy prior 10 such partial occupancy or lise, the ()wner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area 10 be occupied or portion of the \'(fork to be used in order to t!elnmirw :lIld record the condition of the Work. 9.9.3 I !nlcss otherwise :lgreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a pOr!ion or pnrtions of the \'('ork shall not constitute accep- lance of Work not complying with the requiremcnls of the Contract Documents. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 (Tpon receipt of wrilten notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment. the Architect will promptly make such inspcction and, when the Architect finds the \X'ork accept- ahle under the Contract Documents and the Contran fully per- formcd, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for 1':lymel1l st:lling that to the hest of the Architect's knowledge, infonnation and helief, ;lIld on the ba.sis of the Architect's ohser\';ltions and inspeclions, the \'('ork has heen completed in accord:lllce with terms and conditions of the Contract Docu- ments and that the entire halance found to he due the Contrac- tor and noted in said final Certificate is due and p:lyahle. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitnte a further representation that conditions listed in Suhparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's heing entitled to final payment have heen fulfilled. I ~ 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any rem:unmg retained percentage shall heeome due until the Contractor suhmits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, hills for materials and e(juipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might he rcspollSihle or enClllllhered (less amounts withheld hy Owner) have heen paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidenc- ing th:ll insur:mce required hy t he Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be clllcelled or :llIowed to expire until at least .~O days' prior written notice Ins been given to the Owner, (5) a written statement th:1l the Contr:1Ctor knows of no substantial reason that thc insur:1Ilce will not he renewable to cover the period required by tlte Contract Documents. (i) consent of surety, if :my, to final flaymelll :lIld (S), if required by tltc Owner, other data est:lhlishing payment or satisf;1Ction of ohligations, such as receipts, releascs and waivers of liens, claim,s, security interests or encumbranccs arising out of tlte Contract, to the extent and in such li)flll as may he designated hy the Owner. If a Suhcon- tr:Ktor refuses to furnish a releasc or waiver required by lhe Owncr, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lit:n remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund 10 the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and rcasonable attorneys' fees. I ,..J 9.10.3 If. :lfter Substantial Completion of the Work, final com- pletion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or hy issu:lllce of Change Orders affecting I1nal completion, :md the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon applicathlll by the Contractor and ccrtification by the Architect. and without terminating the Contrac!. 1l1:1ke payment of the bal:!nce due for that portion of the W'ork fully completed and :IClTpted. If the relllaining halance for Work not fully com- pletnl or corrccted is less than ret;lin;lge stipulated in the Con- tract I )ocuments, and if honds have heen furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the halance due for that por- tion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submit- ted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall he m:lde under terms and conditiolls gl)\'Crning final payment. except th:1I it shall npt constitute a waiver of claims. The making of l1nal payment shall constitute a w:liv('f of claims hy the ()wner as provided ill Sub- raragr:lph ,i.~.'i. 9.10.4 Acceptance of final payment hy the Contractor, a Sub- contractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims hy that payee except those previously made in writinR and identil1ed hy that payec as unsettled at the time of final Applicllion for 1':lyment. Such waivers shall he in addition to the waiver described in Suhparagraph 4.~.'i. -J 18 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (;ENERAI. CONDITIONS OF TilE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRl'CTION . FOllRTEENTH EDITION AlA'" . (0) I 'liP TilE MtEHICAN INSTlTllTE OF ARUIITF.CTS. 1"\, NEW YORK ,\VENIIE. N W. WASIIIN(;TON. D.c 2()f)o6 ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10.1.1 The Contractor shall he responsihle for initiating, main t:lil\in~ and supervising all safety prl'cauti( lIlS and programs in connection wilh the performance ()f the (:( lIllrKt. 10.1.2 In the evelll the Colllractor encounters on the site material reasonahly hdieveu to he asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) which Ius not heen rendered harmless, the Contractor sh;lIl immediately stop \1(:ork in the area affected and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in \'Titing. The Work in the affected ;lfea shall not thereafter bc resumeu cxccpt hy written a~recment of tbe Owner and Cl lIllraClor if in fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) :lI1d has not been rendered harmless. The Work in the affected area shall be resul11eu in the ;lhsence of :Ishestos or polychlori- nated hiphenyl (PCB), or \'.hen il Ius been rendered harmless, hy written agreement of the Owner and Contr:lCtor, or in :lcl'<lItlance with final determin:llion by the Architect on w'hich arbil rat ion has not been dcmanded, or by arbitLIl ion under Article 1. 10.1.3 The Clllltr;IClor shallnllt be re(!'lired pursllant tl) Article 7 to pl'lform without consent ;II1Y \Vork rdating to asbestos or pol\'( hlorinated biphenyl (PCII) '- 10.1.4 To the fullest extent permitted hv law, Ihe ()wnl'l shall indemnify and hold harmless t he Contractor, Architcct, Archi- tect's consultants and agcnts and emplovees of anv of them flOm and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, includ- ing but not limited to attorneys' fecs, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact tbe material is :Lsbestos or polycblorin;llcd hiphenvl (I'CII) ;lI1d bas not heen rendered harmless, provided that such d:lim, d:lIl1:lge, loss or expense is attrihutahle to hoclih' injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of t:lI1gible 11roPcrty (other th:1I1 lhe \X'ork itself) including loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent cllIsed in "'hole I H' in par! by negligent :1l'lS or omissions of the (lwner, ;lI1vone directlv or indirecth' employed hy the Owner or :lIlyone Ii lr whost' acts the Owner may' be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is cHlsed in P;Ir! I]V a party indcmnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be const rued to negate, ahridge, or reduce other rights or ohligath lIlS of indcmnity which \Voulu otherwise exist as to a p;lrl\' or person described in this Subparagraph 10, I " 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1 The Contractor sh;11I l:Ike reasona\1le: preclutions for s:lfety of. and shall provide rC:lsona\1le protection to prcvent dam;tgc. ininry or loss to: ',- .1 emplovees on the \X'ork and other persons who may \1(' :Iffected therein': .2 the \X'ork and materials and equipmcnt hI \1e incorpo- r:tted therein, vvhether in slor;lge on or off the site, under Clre, cllstodv or ('[)ntrol or the Contr:lctor Ilr the (:ontracto(s Suhcontractors or Suh-suhcontrac- tors: and .3 other property at the site or adj;IITnl thereto, such as trees, shruhs, I:twns, walks, pavemcnts, ro:ldwavs, stntctures and utilities not design:ned fi 1I- relllov;t!. relo- cation or rcplacelllent in the coursc or constrllltion, 10.2.2 The ContLllIor shall give notices :lT1d comply with applicable 1:1\\'5, (Irdin;lIlces, rules, regulations ami lawful orders t ,1' pll\1lic :llIthorities beaflng on safetv' or p("(sons or property or their protl'('tlon rrom dam:lge, injury or loss, 10.2.3 The (:onlr;tctor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, re;L5on- :Ihle s;lfcguards for safetv and protcction, including postin~ d:lIlgcr signs and ot her w;lrnings against hazards, promulgating s;lfcty regul:1tions and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites ;lI1d utilil ies. 10.2.4 When use or stor:lge or explosives or lllher hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, Ihe Contr:lctor shall exercise utmost care and clrry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. 10.2.5 The Contractor Sh:ll1 promptly remedv damage anu loss (other than ll:tmage or loss insured under property insurance required hy the Contractl)ocuments) to property referred to in Cbuscs 10,2.1.2 ;lI1d 10.2 I ,.~ callsed in whole or in part hy the (:. lIltracl< )r, :1 SlIhnll1tract.lr, a Sub.suhcontractor, or anyone directly or indircctlv cmplovl'll hy :II1Y of them, or hy anyone for "'hose acts they may bc li:lhle and f(lr which the Contractor is responsible undt'! Cl:tuscs 10,2,1.2 ;lI1d I 02,1..~, except damage or loss :tttrihut:lhle to :1c!S or omissions of the Owner or Architcct or anyone directly or indirectly employed hy either of thell1, or bv anyone ror whose :Icts either of them may he Ibble, :llId not :ntrihlltahle to the falllt or negligence of the (:lllltract(l!" Thc r.lITg(ling (lhlig:lli()Ils ()f the (:(1I1traetor are in :Iddition to the Contractor's obligations under I'arawaph ,~,IR, 10.2.6 The (:ontractor shall designate a responsihle member of the (:.lIllral'l(lr'S (l!"ganizati(lIl at tile site whllse duty shall he the prevention of ;lCcidents. This person shall he the Contractor's superintendent unkss otherwise designated hy the Contractor in \\'titing to the (lwner :lI1d Architect. 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to he loaded so as to endanper its safety, 10.3 EMERGENCIES 10.3.1 In:1Il emergency affecting safety of persons or property, Ihe Contractm shall act, at the Contractor's uiscretion, to pre- \-ell! threatened damage, injury or loss, Additional compensa- t ion or extensil 1Il (If time claimed hy the (:( lI1tractor on account of :111 emergency shall be determined as prm'ided in Paragraph 'i.~ :lI1d Article 7, ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.1.1 The (:. lilt ract()r sh:11I purch:lse fn Jm ;lI1d maintain in a CI1l11p:II1Y or companies I:1wflllly authorized \() do business in the jllrisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as vvill protcct the (:ontractor from claims sct fOllh helow whieh nuy arise out or or result from the Contractor's operations tinder the Contract and for which the Contractor may he Icg:llly li:lhlc, vvhether such operatiolls he by the Contractor or hy a Subcontractor or hv :lIlvone directlv or indirectly employeu oy :II1V' of them, or hv anvone for whose :lctS any of them may be liahle: .1 cl:1ims under workers' or workmen's compensation, disahilitv benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are :lpplicahle to the \X'mk to be perfonned; AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (;ENERAI. CONDITIONS Of TItE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRlICTION . f()( 'RTEENTIt EDITION AlA'" . (el t')H7 TIlE AMERICAN INsTtTtlTE OF ARCItITECTS, I '~<; NEW YORK AVENl'E, NW, WASIIIN(;TON, DC 21JIX1<1 A201-1987 19 .2 cbims for d:lI11ages hecluse of hodily illjlln', (ICCupa. tionaJ sicknes.s or disease, or de:llh . If the (:olltral'tor's emp/< >}Tes: .3 c1:lims for d:lIl1:lges hecause 01 bodilv illjun', sickness or disease, or death ()f :111 v person other thanlhe C,'n. t ractor'.s elllpl. )\Tes: .4 claims for dal1l:lges inslll'ed hv usual Il<.'l'sonal injury liabilit y C()\Trage which :Ire sustained ( I ) by a person :tS a result of:1I1 offense directly or indirectlv related to employment of such person bv the (:( nllractor, or (2) by another person: .5 c1:lims for damages, other than to the \X'ork itself. hecause of injury to or destruction of tangihle prop. erty, including loss of use resulting therefrom: .6 claims for dama~es hecause of hodily Injury, de;uh of a person or properly d:unage arising out of owner. ship, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle: and .7 claims involving contractual Ii:lhility insurance appli. cahle to the (:ontractor's ohligations under Par:lgraph .~.I H. 11.1.2 The insurance required by Suhparagraph I I. I . I sh:1I1 he writtcn for not less than limits of li:lhility specified in the Con. tract (loclllllents or required hy 1:IW, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on :m OCUlITl'IH'e or c1:limslllade hasis, Sh:lll he l1laintained without interruption frolll date of CCHl1Illenl'elllent of the \X'ork IIl1til d:lle of fin:ll p:tyment and terminati, H1 of any cover:lge rcquired to he Illain t:lined afler final pa\'lllenl. 11.1.3 Cerlificates of Inslll'anee acceptahle to the ( lwner shall he filcd with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. These Certificates and lhe insurance policies required hy this Par:lgr:lph 11.1 shall contain a provision that covera~es :1fforded under the policies will not he cancelled or allowed to expire until atle:1st 50 cbys' prior written notice h:1s heen given to the Owner. If any of the foregoin~ insurance coverages arc required to remain in f(>rce after final payment and are reason- :lhlv :1vailahle, an additional certificate e\'idencing continuation of such nl\'era~e shall he suhmitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9,10.2. Information concernin~ reduction of coverage shall he furnished by the Contr:1ctor with reason:lhle promptness in accordance with the (:ontractor's inforn'1ation :lfld belief. 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 The Owner shall he responsible f( >1' plll'ch:lsing :md Illaintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. (lptionally, the Owner may purchase and maint:1in other insurance for self- protection against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract. The Contractor shall not be re,sponsihle for plll'ch:lsing :1nd maintaining this optional Owner\ liability in~ur:mce unless specific:1l1y required by the Cotllr:1ct I )ocuments. 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.3.1 llnless othem'ise provided, the ()wner shall pllfchase :md maintain, in a company or comp:lllie~ 1:I\\'fully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is Ipc:tted, property insurance in the amount of the initi:ll Con- tract Sum :lS well a~ suhscquent modificttions thereto for the entire Work at the site on a replacement cost basis without vol- IUllary deductibles. Such property insur:lllce shall be m:lin- tained, unless otherwise pro\'ided in the Contract Documents tlr otherwise agreed in writing by all persons :md elltitie~ who are heneficiaries of such insurance, ulltil final payment h:1S heen m:lde as provided in Paragraph C). 10 (>1' until no person or emitv othn thall thc (lwner ha~ an insurahle interest in the property required hv Ihis P:lr:lgr:lph II,,~ to he covcred, whichever is earlier This inslIl'ance shall include intCl'ests of the Owner, the (:fllllr:wtor, Suhcc)(ltract(lrS :md Suh suh('()(ltractors in the \X', nk. 11.3.1.1 1'1'< >pertv insurance Sh:lll he (111 :111 :"1 risk policy form and shall insure :Ig:tinst the perils of fire and extended covera~e and physical loss or d:nnage induding, without duplic:llion of C()\'t'r:lge, I heft, v:md:llism, malicious mischief. coll:ipse, false- work, tempor:lry huildings aud dehris removal includin~ demolition occlsioned hy enforcement of any applicahle legal requiremellts, and shall cover reason:lhle compens;llion for Architect's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss, Coverage for ot her perils shall not be required unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such prop- erty insurance required hy the Contr:tet and with all of the coverages in the amount descrihed ahove, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencemellt of the Work, The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect t he interests of the Contractor, Suhcontractors and Sub- suhcontractors in the Work, and hy :Ippmpriate Change Order the cost Ihereof sh:lll he charged to the (hvner. If the Contrac- tor is d:unagnl hy the failure or neglect of the Owner to pur- ch:lse tlr maintain insurance as de~crihed above, without so notifying the Ctlnll'actor, Ihen the Owner shall hear all reason- ahle costs properly :ttlrihutahle thereto, 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires minimum deduCli- hies and such deductihles arc identified in the Contract Docu- ments, the Contractor shall pay costs not covered hecause of such deductihles. If the Owner or insurer inCfe:Jses the required minimum deductibles above the amounts so identified or if the Owner dects to purchase this insurance with voluntary deduc- tible :UllountS, the Owner shall be responsible for payment of the additional costs not covered because of Stich increased or voluntary deductibles. If deductibles arc not identified in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay costs not covered hecause of deductihles. 11.3.1.4 I !nless (ltherwise provided in the Contract Donl- ments, this property insurance shall cover portions of the \'V'ork stored off the site :Ifter written approval of the Owner at the value estahlished in the approval, and also portions of the Work in tr:l11sit. I ~ I ...J. 11.3.2 Boller and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall purchase and maintain hoiler :md m:Khinery insur:1nce required hv Ihe Contract Documents or hy law, which shall specific:"ly cover such insured objects during installation and until final accept:lllce hy the Owner: this insurance shall include illterests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontr:1Ctors and Suh. suhcolltr:tetors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall he named insureds. 11.3.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the OwnCf'S option, may purchase and rn;lintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner w:lives all rights of :tetion against the Contractor for loss of use of the ()\yner's property, including consequt'ntiallosses due to fire or other hazards however caused. 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other tlun those descrihed herein or for other special haz- :mls he included in the property in.sur:lllce policy, the Owner shall. if possihle, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall he charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change () rder. ......J 20 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (;FNERAI. CONDITIONS OF TilE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. HlflRTF.ENT" EDITION AlA'" . (e\ f<JH~ TIlE AMFRICAN INSTlTliTE OF ARCII'TFCTS. 171'i NEW YORK AVENt 'E. N W" \~'ASIIIN(;T<)N. DC. 2()()()6 11.3.5 If dllfin~ the Project construClion period the ()wncr insures properties, real or personal or hoth, adjoinin~ or :l(lj:t~ cent to the site hy properly insurance under policies sl'par:lle from those insurin~ t he Project, or if after IInal payment prop erty insurance is to he provided on the completed Project throll~h a policy or policies olher Ihan those insurin~ Ihe I'roi~ ect durin~ the construction period, the Owner shall waive all ri~hts in accordance wilh the terms of Subpar:l~raph Il~~ -;' ror dama~es caused hy fire or other perils covered by this separ:lIe property insurance, All separale policies shall provide Ihis waiver of subrogation hy endorsement or otherwise, 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required hy Ihis Para~raph 11,5, Each policy shall contain all ~enerally applicable conditions, dcfini~ lions, exclusions and endorsements rdated to this Project, Each policy shall contain a provision that lhe policy will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 50 days' prior \...'tit~ ten notice has been given to the Contractor, 11.3.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Conlractor waive :lll rights against (1) each other and any of their subcon~ tractors, suh~subconlractors, a~etlls :lnd employees, each of the other. and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article b, if any, and any of Iheir sub~ cot1lractors, s\Jb~suhcolltractors, agents and employees, for dama~es caused hy fire or olher perils to the extenl covered by property insllrance ohtained pursuant to this l'ar:lgf;lph II .'l or olher properly insur:mce :lpplicahle to the Work, except such ri~hts as they h:l\"C to proceeds of such insurance held hy tile Owner as fiduciary, The Owner or Contraclor, as :Ippropriatc, shall reqllire of the Architect, Architect's consult:lIl1S, separate contractors described in Article (l, if any, :md the subcontrac~ tors, Sl1h~Sllbcontractors, agents :1I1d employees of any of them, hy appropriale aweell1ents, written where legally required for validity, similar wai\Trs each in f:IVor of other parties ellllln~ crated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of suhf()~ gation by endorsement or otherwise, A wahTr of suhrogalion shall be crfective :lS to a person or entity even though Ihat I'er~ son or entity would otherwise ha\T a duty of inden\llificnion, contractu:ll or otherwise, did nol pay the insurance prcmium directly or indirectlv, and whether or not the person or cntity had an insurable interest in the propert y damaged. 11.3.8 A loss insured under ()wner's property insurancc shall he adjusted by the Owner :LS fidueiary and m:lde paphle to the ()wner as fiduciarv for the insureds, as their inlerests may appear, suhject to requirements of any :lpplicthle mortg:lgee clause and of Suhp:u:Jgraph 11 .~~, 10. The Contr:iCtor shall pay Subeqnlractors Iheir just shares of insurance proceeds received hy the Conlractor, and bv :lppropriale agreements, \Hillen where legally required for validit \', Sh:ll1 require Suhcontl actors to make payments to their Sub~subCllntractors in simil:tr manner. 11.3.9 If required in writing hy :1 part v in iuterest, I he ()wncr :IS fidud:lry sh:lll, upon occurrcuce of :111 insured loss, give hmd for proper I'erf'lflnance of the ()wner's duties, The eoSI 'If rcqllired 1)( Hlds shall be charge, I against procecds rceeived as IIduciary, The Owner shall deposit in a separate account pro~ ceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accor~ dance with such agreement as the p:trties in interest mav reach, If aher such lOSS no otl1er speCIal :lgreement IS malle, replacement of dam~ :lgec\ property shall he covered bv appropriate Change ()rder. 11.3.10 The ()wner as t1duciarv shall have power to adjust and ~cllle a loss wit h insurers, 11.3.11 1':lItial occupancy or use in accord;\llce with rara~raph ()<) shall Ilot commence ulltil the insurance comp:Il1Y or com~ p:lIIies providing propertv insurance have consented to such p:lrtial occupancy or use hy endorsement or olherwise. The ()wner and the Contractor shall take reasonahle steps to ohlain cOllsent of lhe insurance companv or comp:ll1ies and shall, without nnllual written consent, LIke no aclion with respect to partial occupancy or use that would calise cll1cellation, lapse or reduction of insurance, 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.4.1 The Owncr shall have the righl to require the Contrac- tor to furnish honds covering failhful performance of the Con~ tract and payment of obli~ations arising thereunder as stipu- lated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Conlract Documents on the date of execulion of the Contract. 11.4.2 I !pon lhe reque~t of :\11\' person or entitv :lppearing to Ill' a potential bencficiary 'If h, lllds Cl l\Tring pavment of obliga~ tions :Irising under the Conlracl, Ihe C()llIractor shall promptly furnish :1 copy of the honds or shall permit a copy to he made. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12.1.1 If :l portion of the Work is coven'd contrary 10 the Architect's lequest or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contr:lct Documents, il tllust, if required in '\\'fiting by the ArchittTI, be lIIKo\'('red for lhe Architect's ohsef\'ation and he repl:tccd al the Contractor's expensc without change in the Contract Time, 12.1,2 11':1 portion of the \X',>rk has heen covered '\\~hich the Archilcct has not specifically requested to observe prior to its heing covered, the Ar(\litcct may request to see sllch \X:ork and it sh:1I1 be uncovered by the Contraclor, If such WOlk is in :lccold:\I1cC '\\'ith the Contract DO<:lnl1enIS, costs of uncover~ ing and replacement shall, hy appf()priate Change Order, he ch:trged to the ()wner, If sllch \X'{ Ilk is not in :lCcord:mce with lhl' Contract ()()Cllmcnts, the Col1lr:lctor .slull p:ty ,~lIch coslS unless the t<mdition was clllsn\ bv the O'\\~ner or a separate contractor in which event Ihe ()\\,ner shall he responsihlc for 1':lynll'nt of sllch costs. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WOnK 12.2.1 The C()lllractor shall promptly correct Work rej(.C!cd hy tl1e ArchitecI or failing to Conf0f111 to the f<'qllirements of the (:')Illracl 1)(lClIl11ents, \\'heth('r {lhserVClI Ix'fore "r after Suhst:lntial (:{lInpleti<Hl and whether (lr III ,t Lthriclled, installed "r cOllll'kled. The Col1lraC!or shall hear costs of correcting ~lIch rejccted Work, including addilion:tl tcsting and inspec- tions :lI1d compensation for the Architect's services and cxpenses made necessary IherebV'. 12.2.2 If. wilhin one \Tar after the dale of Suhstanli:t1 Comple- tion of the \X'ork or designated p()niOnlhercof, or after the d:ite AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (:ENERAI. CllNDlTIONS OF TilE CONTRACT FOR CONSTHIICTION. HHIHTEENTII EDITION ,\IA'" . (C1 IlJi17 TilE AMERICAN INSTITI 'TE (IF AR( :IIITECTS, le.IS NEW YORK AVENI 'I'" NW, \'('ASIIIN(;TON, DL 20(H)(, A201.1987 21 for commencement of warranties established under Sub- paraRraph ':1.9.1, or by terms of an :lpplicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the COlltractor shall correct it rromptly after receipt of wrillen notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner ha,s previously Riven the Contractor a wrillen accep- tance of such condition. This period of one year shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Comrletion hy the period of time between Substan- tial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. This ohliRation under this SubraraRraph 12.2.2 shall survive accep- tance of the Work under the Contract and termination of the Contract. The Owner shall ~ive such notice rromrtly after dis- covery of the condition. 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site rortions of the Work which arc not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. 12.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconformin~ Work within a re:lson:lble time, the Owner may correct it in accor- d:mce with Para~raph 2.4. If the Contractor docs not rroceed with corrcction of such nonconforming Work within a reason- able time fixed hy written notice from the Architect, the Owner may remove it and store the salvable materials or equirment at the COlltractor's expense. If the Contractor docs not pay costs of such removal and stora~e within ten days :Iftn wrillCII notice, the Owner may upon ten additional days' wrillen lIotice sell such materials and equipment at auction or at private sale and shall account for the proceeds thereof, after deducting costs and damages that should have been home hy the Con- tractor, including compensation for the Architect's services and cxpenses made necessary thereby. If such proceeds of sale do not covcr costs which the Contractor should have borne, the Contract Sum shall he reduced by the deficiency. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor :lre not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the diff('fcnce to the Owner. 12.2.5 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completcd or p:lflially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Con- tract Documents. 12.2.6 Nothin~ contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be con- strued to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which tile Contractor might have under the Con- tract Documents. Establishment of the time period of one year as described in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific ()blig:ttion of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may he cOlllmenced to estahlish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Con- traclllr's obligations other than specifically to correct the \X'01 k. 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and cor- rection, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW --..-/ 13.1.1 The Contract shall be ~()verned by tbe law of the place where the Project is located. 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively hind them- selves, their partners, successors, assigns and Ie~al representa- tives to the other party bereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, a~reements and obli~ations contained in the Con- tract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without wrillen consent of the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain le~ally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a memher of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it W:IS intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving not ice. 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Docu- ments :lIld rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or aV:lilable by law. 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or COlllractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as m:IY be specifically agreed in writing. J 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordi- nances, rules, rq~ulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless other- wise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent test- in~ lahoratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the :tppropriate puhlic authority, :lI1d shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and appro\':lls. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspec- tions are to be made so the Architect Illay observe such proce- dures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or :tpprovals which do not become requirements until afte~ bids are received or negoti:llio!1S concludcd. 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities h:l\"ing jurisdiction determine thm portions of the Work require addi- tional testing, inspection or approval nnt included under Sub- paragraph I.~S I, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect may observe such procedures. -./ 22 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (;ENERAL CONDITIONS OF TilE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOtlRTEENTH EDlTtON AlA'" . (cJ t91P TilE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCIIITECTS. 17.'S NEW YORK AVENUE. N W. WASIIINGTON. D.C. 20006 The ()wner ~hall hear ~uch co~ts except a~ provltkd in Suh- par:lW:lph US.~. 13.5.3 If ~lIch procedures for te~tin~, in~pection or :lpproval under Suhpar:lwaphs U.S.1 and 1.~.S.2 reveal f:ulure of lhe pOrlion~ of the Work to comply with requirement~ esuhlishnl hv the Contr:lCl Documents, the Contractor shall he:u all costs made l1tTeS~:lry hy such failure includin~ those of repelled procedures and cOlllpf'nsation for the Architect's ~ervices amI expen~es. 13.5.4 Required certificates of testin~, inspection or :Ipproval ~hall, unless otherwi~e required hy the Contract [)ocuments, he sccured hy the Contr:lctor and promptly delivered to the Architect. 13.5.5 If the Architect is to ohserve tests, inspections or :lpproV:11~ required hy the Contract Document~, the Architect will do so promptly :md, where practicable, at the normal place of rest in~. 13.5.6 Te~ts or in~pections conducted pursuant to the Con- tr:wt Document~ ~hall he made promptly to :lvoid unre:1.sonahle delay in the Work. 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMIT A TION PERIOD 13.7.1 As hetween the Owner and Contractor: .1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to :let occurring prior to the relevant date of Suhst:lI1- tial Completion, any applicahle statute of Iilllit:llions sh:11I COllllllence to run and any alleged cause of action shall he deemed to have accrued in any and all e\Tnts not later. than such date of Suhst:1I1tial Completion: .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final CertifI- cate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occur- ring ~uhsequent to I he relevant dale of Suhst:tnrial COlllpletion and prior to is~uance of the Iinal CeIlifi- cate for P:lyrnent, any applicahle statute of limitations shall comlllence to run :lnd any allq~ed Clllse of action ~hall he deellled to h:lve accrued in :lny and all events not later th:tn the dale of issuance of lite final Certificate for P:IYlllent: and .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to 'ICt~ or failures to ;lCt occurring after the rele\'alll date of issu- :m('(' of the fin:1I Certificale for PavnH'nt, :ltl\' :1J'pli- elhlc sUlllle (,f limitations shall c< llllmence t, 1 run :11 j( I :\lIY :llleged cause of action shall he deellled to have ac~'runl in any and all events not bter than the date ()f :II1V act or failure to act by the Col1lractor pur~u:lnt to any \yarranty provided under Paragraph .~, 'i, t he date of any correction of the \'('ork or f:tilure to correct the Work hy the Contractor under Paragraph 12.2. or the dale of :It'tual comlllission of any other act or failure to perforlll any duty or obligation hy the COl1tractm or ()wner, whichevCf occurs last. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1.1 The Contractor Ill:!Y terminate the Contract if the Work is stoppcd fpr a period of .~O d:IYs throu~h no ;Jct or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontr:lctor, Suhsuhcnlltractor or their :lgents or cmployees or any other persom perfnrmin~ pnrtions of the Work under contract with the Contractor, for any of the followin~ re:l.,ons: .1 issuance of an order of a court or other public author- ity having jurisdiction: .2 an act of ~overnmel1l, such a~ a declaration of nJ,tional emer~ency, makin~ materialunavailahle; .3 because the Architect has not is~ucd a Certificate for Payment and ha~ not notilied the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification :1.., provided in Subpar:lgraph 9.'j I, or heelllse the Owner has not made payment on a Cntificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract [)ocuments; .4 if repeated su~pen~ions, del:1y~ or interruptions hy the ()wner as descrihed in 1':If:lgraph 1.\.:\ con~titute in the aggrc~ate more than 100 percent of the total num- her of d:IY~ scheduled for completion, pr 120 days in any Y,'i-tl:1y period, whidl('\Tr is les~; or .5 the ()wner ha~ f:lilcd to furnish to the Col1lr:lctor promptly, upon the Contractor's request, re;Jsonahle evidence as required hv Subparagraph 2,2,1, 14.1.2 If one of the above rea~ons exists, the Contractor may, upon sen:n additional day~' written noticc to the Owner and Architect, terminate the C.mtratt :lIld rec()\'cr from the Owner payment for Work executed :lnd for proven loss with respect to n1:lterials, equipment, tools, and construction cquipment :1I1d m:lchincry, including reasonable overhead. profit and dall1a~es, 14.1.3 If the \X'ork is stopped for a period of (,0 days Ihrough IH) act or fault of the Contractor or a Suhcontractor or their :lgel1l~ or employees or :UlV other persons performing portions of the Wmk under contract with the Contractor hecause the ()wner has per~istently f:liled 10 full1l1 the Owner's ohlig:ltions under the Contract I)ocument~ with respect to m:ltters impor- tant to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon se\'('n :ldditional tl:1vs' wlitten notice to the Owner and Ihe Architect, terminate the Contract ;lnd recover from the Owner as provitkd in Suhpar:lgraph Ii. I .2, 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE 14.2.1 The Owner ma\' lerminate Ihe Contract if the ('( 'I1tractor: .1 persistent Iv or repeatedly rcfusc~ or fails to ~upply enough 1 'roperlv skilled wprker~ or proper materials; .2 fails to nuke p;I\'ment to Suhcontr;Jctor~ fpr matcri:lls or I:1hor in :tccord:l11ce \\-ilh the respective ;tgreements between the Contractor and the Suhcontractors: .3 persistently di~regards bws, ordinances, or rules. reg- ulations ot orders of a puhlic authority having juris- diction: or .4 otherwise is guilty of suhstantial hreach of a provision of the Contract [)oCUI1lents, 14.2.2 When any of the ahove rea~ons exist, the Owner, upon ccrtifiC;lliol1 by the Architect that sufficient C:tusc exists \0 jus- AlA DOCUMENT A201 . CFNERAI. CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRIICTION . FOt'RTEENTlI EDtllON AlA" . (e. ll)fP TilE AMERICAN INSTill 'TE OF ARCHITECTS, I :\~ NEW Y( lRK AVENt 'F., N.W, WASIIIN(;'J(JN, DC. ~OllO(, A201-1987 23 lifv such Ktion, llIay witho\ll rrejudke to any other ri~hts or re;ncdies of the Owner and after ~ivin~ the COlltrKtor alld the Contractor's sllfely, if any, seven days' wrilten nOlice, termi- lIate employment of rhe Contractor and may, SUhj'Tt to ;lIlY rrior riRhts of the surety: .1 take ross("ssif m of the site and or all m;Herials, c'Iuip- ment, tools, and construction equipment ;\Ild machin- ery thereon owned by the Colltrac!or; .2 KC("pt assiRnrnent of subcontracts rursuanl 10 Para- Waph '),.}; ;lIld .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable mcthod the Owner Illay deem expedient. 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the re;l~ons stated in Subparagraph 14.2 .1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to r("(Tive further payment until Ihe Work is finished. 14.2.4 If the unpaid b;dance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of filli.shing Ihe Work, inc1udinR compensation for the Archi- tect's sCfvices and cxpenses made necessary thereby, such excess Sh;111 be r:tid to the Contractor. If such costs excecd the unpaid balance, the Contrac.:tor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amoullt to hc paid to the COl1lractor or Owner, as Ihe clse may bc, sh;11I be certified hy the Architect, upon arpli- cHion, ;ll1d this ohli~alion for payment shall survive termina- I ion of I he COli tract . 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3.1 The Owner llIay, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the \X'ork in whole or in part for such reriod of time ;lS lhe Owner may determin(". 14.3.2 An adjustment shall he made for incr("a.~es in the cost of perform;lnce of the Contract, including rrofit on the increas("d cost of rerformance, clused by suspension, delay or interrup- tion. No adjustment shall be made to the extent: .1 that performance is, wa~ or would have been so sus- pended, delayed or inlcrnlpted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or .2 thal:tn equitahle adjustment is made or denied under another provision of this Contr:lCt. ..../ 14.3.3 Adjustments made in the cost of rerformance may have a mUlually agrecd fixed or pen_Tillage fec. .J '-.-/ 24 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . (;ENERAI. CONDITIONS OF TlfE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRflCTION . Fot'RTEENTff EDITION AlA" . (0) 191P TilE AMERICAN INSTITPTE OF ARClfITECTS. ,-.\<; NEW Yl JRK AVENI 'E. N.W. "'ASIIIN(;T(lN. D.c. 2lXl06 3/87 T " E A M E R C A N N S T T [I T E () F A R C " T E C T S l ,- .~.J " /llA noel/ment A I()I Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor II'here the fwsis o11J01'11wllt is (( ,')'TIPrnA TED SUfrl 1987 EDITION TlIlS f)OcnMRNT FlAS IMI'O/UANT /'FGAI, CON5'FQURNCRS; CONSUr7'A T/ON \'(lITH ,IN A Tn >f?NRY IS FNCO(!IV1(,'Ff) \'('fTlI NFSI'RCT TO I1S U MJI'U~TfON ON MonlF/(;A TfON. nl(' 1'187 h/iliOlI of 11111 /)oClI1lIl'I/I (1201, (;1'1/('/"(11 OllldiliOI/S of Ihe ((lIIlroc/jill' Olllslrlldiol/. is ado/,Ied ill Ihis dOClI1lWIII Ill' /'('f('rl'I/U' /)0 1/01 liSt' 1/'ilh olh('I' ,~el/(,,'(/I c())/(lilirIllS III/less Ihis dOCll1lll'l/1 is 11/r)(lified. This docu!11ent h:1S heen ;Jpproved :1I1d endorsed hv The Associated (;elleral COlltr:1Ctors of A!11erio. AGREEMENT made as of the Nineteen Ilundred and day of in the year of BETWEEN the Owner: (StOIll' (01(1 (uldn'ss) and the Contractor: (N(l111(, {I1ld (uldn'ss) The Project is: (,\"tll11e rOlfl !flu,f",n) The Architect is: (,\'anw (n/(/ (/(/tI,.e,\s) The Owner and Contractor agree as set forth below. Cop\,(1~ht 191'1, {')tH. 1'12'1, 1')'-, 1'1'11, I'J'iH, 1'1(,1, 1')(,.,. 1')(,-. I'),.\. 1')""'-, I<JH7 h\' The Alllcricanlnstitllte of Archi- tects, 17~'i New York A\Tlllle. N\'C. \'Cl.shinglOn, D.e. 2000(,. I(cprodllction of the materi:tl herem or sllhstalltial qllotation of its pro\'isions wilh()\ll written p('(mission of the AlA \'io!:lIes the copyri~ht Ltws of the I'nitt'd S!~tes ;1I1d will he suhject to kgal {'"",'Cutioll AlA DOCUMENT A101 . OWNER CONTRACTOR i\(;REEMENT . TWHFTIl EDITION. AlA" . 'ciJ')H7 rilE M1ERICAN INSTITI 'TE OF ARum ECTS. 1 "\, NEW YORK AVENI'E. N W, WAsIlIN,;TON. DC. 2llll()(, A101-1987 1 ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The COnlract [)ocumel1!s consist of this A~r('el11enl, Conditions of the Contract ((;ener:d, Supplemenlary and other Conditions), [)rawin~s, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Aweemenl, other documenls listed in this Agreemenl and Modifications issued after execution of this A~reel11enl; these form the (:ontract, and are as fully a part of the Conti'act as if attached to this Agreemenl or repeated herein. The COnlract represenls the enlire and inlegrated agreement hetween the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, represenlations or a~reemenlS, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documenls, other than Modifications, appears in Article 9. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The COnlractor shall execute the enlire Work described in the Contract Documents, except to the extent specifically indicated in the COnlract Documenls to he the responsihility of others, or as follows: ARTICLE 3 DA TE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 3.1 The date of commencement is the date from which the COnlract Time of Paragraph 3.2 is measured, and shall be the date of this Agreemenl, as first written ahove, unless a differenl date is stated helow or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. (/1I.<"rl Ibe dale of CI,,"me"am""I. if il diffe,'s /m", Ih" dal" o/Ibis ARree",e1lI,J/'. if a/,/,I,wl>le. slale Ihal/be dale /1'1/1 be fixed ill a lIolice 10/,roceed.) Unless the date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed issued by the Owner, the COnlractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days hcfore commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interests. 3.2 The Contractor shall achieve Suhstantial Completion of the enlire Work not later than ("~sn"l tb~J calendar dale 0'" "umher of calendar da)'s afley ~he date (~l comme"cenr('lll. AI.HJ "rsert any requirements for ea,-lier Suhs/antial C"''''pletion of cer- lalll !mp'/rulls oflbe U'Onrk. i/110( slated eI.H'II'Iu','(' ;11 thi' (.( ",trad /)ooinrelll.t;) , suhject to adjustmenls of this Conlract Time as provided in the COnlract Documenls. (I"serf /,n)l'IS;"11...., il allY. for !rt/tli(/a/ed damrtJ.!('s rcla'",)!, to (al',o-e to complete 011 lime) "- AlA DOCUMENT A101 . OWNER-CONTRACTOR A(;REEMENT . TWELFTH EDITION. AlA>!> . @1987 TIlE AMERICAN INSTlTlITE OF ARCHITECTS. 17\,; NEW YORK AVENlIE, N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006 A101-1987 2 ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM 4.1 The ()wner shall pay the Contractor in current funds for the (;<Hltraclo[s performance of the (:<lIltran the (;(Hltract Sum of Dollars (S ), subjecl to additions ;tIld deductions as provided in the Con- IrKl Documents. 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the followin~ ;Ihernates, if any, which arc described in the Contract Documents and are herehy accepted hy the ()wner: (SIa((' Ihe 1lllmfwrs or (JIbe,. idelll;/,< alum (I) af (('/IIed a!tf'nwl('s 1/ cle( ;sttHlS 1111 nOw,. ll/(('nW(es an' (0 he mt,t/e h1.' fhf' ('!t'w'" slthsel/Il('I" In the {'xenJl,o" 01 Ill,... ARrf'eme'Jt, (Iltad'J (l !it/we/tilt, 01 SIl( h nOwr ,,!Jf'nlntf's shull"",,,! tJ1(' am(Jln1f In,- ('ad, "nd lh(' date IIlItll whIch Ihal tum'tllll IS ,.allel.) 4.3 \ 'nit prices, if any. are as follows: AlA DOCUMENT A101 . O',X'NERCONTRACTOR A<;RHMENT . rWEI.FTlI EDITION. AlA'" . re) 19H7 TilE AMERICAN INSTITllTE OF ARClIITF.Cn, 17\'; NF.W YORK A\'FNlIF., NW, WASIIIN(d'ON, D.C. 2(MI(I<, A101-1987 3 ,.. .._~.~'",,,,,,_,,,,"_,_,,.,,.c.__~,_.,,"_~_,,,_~,..~..-..;,,;,,. ARTICLE 5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 5.1 Rased upon Applications for Payment suhmitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued hy the Architect, the Owner shall make pro~ress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided helow and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 5.2 The period covcred hy each Application for Paymcnt shall he one calendar month endin~ on the last day of the month, or as follows: 5.3 Provided an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month, the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor nOllater than the day of the Illonth. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed ahove, payment shall he made by the Owner not later than days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. 5.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based upon the Schedule of Values suhmitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Schedule of Values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work and be prepared in such form and supported hy such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect Illay require. This Schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewin~ the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 5.5 Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. 5.6 Subject to the provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each pro~ress payment shall be computed as follows: 5.6.1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the total Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the Schedule of Values, less retainage of percent ( %). Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute may he included as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.7 of the General Conditions even though the Contract Sum has not yet been adjusted by Change Order; 5.6.2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered :md suitably stored at the site for suhsequent incorporation in the completed construction (or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing), less retainage of percent ( % ); 5.6.3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made hy the Owner; and 5.6.4 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment as provided in Para- graph 9. 'j of the General Conditions. 5.7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Paragraph 5.6 shall he further modified under the following circumstances: 5.7.1 Add, upon Suhstantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to percent ( % ) of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete Work and unsettled claims; and 5.7.2 Add, if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, any additional amounts payable in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.3 of the General Conditions. 5.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows: (If il is inteut/rd, {,,';or to Suhs/a,lIial (:om/,{c!ioll (~r tbe e"Ure \f'ork, (0 reduce or limit the rela;,uIIW reslIltitlR Jnml the IJercelltoRes Inserted in Suhpara- RrafJbs 5.6.1 a,uJ S". fl. 2 aho,'(', l171d this i.fi not explained elsl'II'her(' in Ow Contract f)oflimellls, i"sert here prol'i...io1ls for sud) '-eduction or limitation.) AlA DOCUMENT A101 . OWNER.CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT' TWEl.FTH EDITION' AIA<!> . @1987 TilE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 17~~ NEW YORK AVENUE, NW, WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A101-1987 4 ARTICLE 6 FINAL PAYMENT Final payment, con~tilLlling the entire unpaid balance of the (:ontract Sum, shall he made by the ()wnl'r to the (:ol1trauor when (I) the Contract ha~ been fully performed by the Contractor except for the Contractor'~ responsibility to correct nonconforming \X'ork a~ provided in Subparagraph 12.2.2 of the (;encral Conditions and to satisf\' other requirement~, if an\" which nece~~aril\' ~ur\'i\'C final pa\'merll: and (2) a final Certificllc for I'aymcnt ha~ heen issucd hy tht; Architect: such final paym~nt ~hall be made h~ the Owner not more than .~() (bv~ after the i~su;lIlce of the Architect'~ final Certificate I<lr I'a\'ment, or a~ follo\\i~: . ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 Where reference i~ made in thi~ Agreement to a provi~ion of the (~eneral Condition~ or another Contract Document, the ref. erence refer~ to that provi~ion a~ amended or ~upplemented hy other provi~ion~ of the Contract ))ocument~. 7.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall hear interest from the date payment is due ;ll the rate ~tated below, or in the ab~ence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project i~ located. (/11.(,('1"1 rale ul ;ll(('n'~;1 aR'"c'ed"!,o,,. II (1111' ) (C.HUT lall's alld '"(''1"lyemc'Nts ,,,uh'," the Federal Tr"lh '11 /'cl1tlr'l1R..1< I, 51111I/ar .\/a/e tOld Ifl(O/ consumer ey('e/i, lall's (/l1d o'h('r n'Rlllall(lllS at Ihe ()rnll""'s alld (:01l":(I("(or 's !Jrirrcl/Ja!/Il(l(('s 0/ IJtlsnlf'ss, the 10ulltu11 (~I the flrH/<'( t UNci ('/s(,lI'/lere mal' a/Jed the ,'aUdit)' of this !H'ut'IS-ioll !.('Ra! (It/I'H"e ....../lollld he ohIO/fled with r('sped to dde/ifms or mndi/iultlullS allit also 1"l'.l!.al'lliu,'l. r('(/rll,-('",('"I... S,Ii{ h (IS tiTrf(cIl rlrsdnsun's or U'tllnT'I ) 7.3 Other provi~ion~: ARTICLE 8 TERMINA TION OR SUSPENSION 8.1 The Conlr;1Ct m;IY he terminated h\' the ()wner or the Contractor ;IS provided in Article "1 of the (~e!lcral Conditions. 8.2 The Work ma\' he sllspended Iw the ()wner a~ pn)\'ided in Article I.j of the (jeneral Conditio!ls. AlA DOCUMENT A101 . OWNERU)NTRACTOR A(;llEEMENT . TWEI.FTII EDITION. AlA'"' . (cl1')H7 rilE AMERICAN INSTITI 'TE Of ARCHITECTS. \"" NEW YORK AVENI IE, NW. WASHINGTON, D.C. 21XX1(, A101-1987 5 ARTICLE 9 ENUMERA TION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.1 The Contr:Jct Documents, except for Modifications issued :Jfter execution of this ARreement, :Jre enumer:Jted :IS follows: 9.1.1 The ARreemel1l is this executed St:Jnd:ml Form of ARreement Between Owner :Jnd Contr:Jctor, AlA Docwnel1l A 101, 1987 Edition. 9.1.2 The General Conditions :Jre the (;cner:J1 Conditions of the Contr:Jct for Construction, AlA Document A201, 1987 EdItion. 9.1.3 The Supplement:Jry :Jnd other Conditions of the Contr:Jct :Jrc those contained in the Project Manual d:Jted , and :Jre a~ follows: Document Title Pages 9.1.4 The SpecifiC:Jtions :Jre those cont:Jined in the Project M:Jnual dated ;IS in Subp:Jr:JW:Jph 9.1.3, :Jnd :Jre ;IS follows: (1:",,('" list thr .\!wcq;(fllion" here 0"'- rrfe,- 10 all ('xhihit alltl("hed In fhi.f; ARr(,l'l1W"'.) Section Title Pages AlA DOCUMENT A101 · OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT. TWElFTH EDITION. AlA" . @]987 TlIF. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCIIITECTS, 173~ NEW YORK AVENUE, NW., WASIIINGTON, D.C 20006 A101-1987 6 9.1.5 The ()rawin~s arc as follow.s, :lIld arc dated unless a diffcrelll dale is shown helow: (Fi/he" Ii.'" th,' !>rllll''-''R.'i here' rn- n'le,. In tin ('xhll1l1 elttar h,'d to thl!_ ARn'prtU,,,t) Number Title Date 9.1.6 The Addenda, if :lI1Y, arc as follows: Number Date Pages Portions of Addenda relating 10 hicltling requirelllellls arc nol pan of lhe Contract [)oculllellls unless the hidding requiremellls :Ire also enumerated in this Anicle '). AlA DOCUMENT A101 . OWNER CONTRACTOR AC;REEMENT . TWF.l.FTII EDITION. AlA" . (Cl!9H7 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. !7\S NEW YORK AVENI IE, NW, WASHINc;T()N, D.c:. 20006 A101-1987 7 ."..;""~____<,>""""",,,,~'.'.ilI"H.1\ihliii '''-''~''' "";"';'''' *T~f'f:j.'", ""~,~,^~_,._.........",,,,,",,,,,,.._~...___'h .~ '~WlI':'- "~'~"""'" 9.1.7 Other documents, if any, forminR pan of the Contract Documents are a~ follows: (1i.<1 here any adc/il/onal doo,ment" u'bi('b are mlended 10 J"''m I'arl of Ihe Contrael One",n"m" 711<' (,h.eral Omdt/io!l< I'NII',de Ihal bidding requirements meb a.' ad.'erl/,emenl nr Im'llal/on '" bid, 111,'11"1<,/1(111'< to Rid,kr", "aml'le form" and the (;(mlraaor:, bid are not I'arl of Ihe Ol1llraa Oncrm,ent" Imle,,,, enumeraled ill Ihi.~ ARrPf""rnl, 77J(!l' .fihor,ld he Ii..,ted brre' ",,/)' if illlNuJed In h(J I'art of the Contract I"JtH:llmenr....j This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first wrillen above and is executed in at lea~t three original copies of which one is to he delivered to the Contractor, one to the Architect for use in the administration of the Contract, and the remainder to the Owner. OWNER CONTRACTOR (S~~'/(/tllr") (\iRllatllre) (!'rillfed lIame rllld litl,,) (!','illled lIame alld lil/e) AlA DOCUMENT A101 . OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT. TWELFTH EDITION. AlA'" . (C) I'JR7 TilE AMERJr.AN INSTlTlIT ')f ARCHITECTS, 17,~~ NEW YORK AVENUE, N.w, WASHINGTON, D,C. 2000(i A101-1987 8 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS ."::-l-c-.CJ \ I . ,(I . , \ . ~~'T-~-' AlA Document A311 Performance Bond KNOW ALL MEN BY TH ESE PRESENTS: that (Here Insert full namf" and addrellis or I"R.a1 lille of Contractor) as Principal, hereinaft~r called Contractor, and, IH... in..,1 full nom. .nd .dd,." or l.g.1 lill. of Surely) as Surety, hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto (Here In.ert full n.m. .nd .ddr." or leg.1 lille of Owner) as Obligee, hereinafter called Owner, In the amount of Dollars ($ ) , for the payment whereof Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, Contractor has by written agreement dated (Ht'rf' ino;crt full n.1mt:', Jddr~~'i and d('Soiptlon of projf'l"!) 19 , entered into a contract with Owner for In accordance with Drawings and Specifications prepared by (Here In''if'rt full name and (H.idr(''S'i or I('gal IlIle of Architect} which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract. AlA DOCUMENT AJII . I'IRI()R\\\~( r IH1"iD AND 'AllOR i\N[) MATfRIM "!\YMINT RON[) . AlA Iii) IIBRI'''RY Fnl I[). [I~E ,\'HRI(\'< 11\,<;T1II! Tf Of ARCHITfCf<;, 1'1, N Y 1\\1 NW" WA',HI"iC[ON, () C :000(, 1 ,;:~.;",,~_w~.....,.'<!OJolo..n'J ,_. """,. ."'lr.....~ PERFORMANCE BOND NOW, THEREfORE, THE CONDITION or THIS ORlIGATlON i~ such Ihal, if ("ontr.lctor shall rromr11y and faithfully perform ~...id Contract, then this ohligation shall be null and void; otherwl~e It shall r('main In full force and eff('cl. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made hy the Own('r. Whenever Contractor shall he, and derlared by Owner to he in default under the Contract, the Owner having performed Owner'~ obligations thereunder, the Surety may rromptly remedy the default, or shall rromptly 1) Comr'ete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, or 2) Obtain a bid or bids for compleling the Contract in accordance with Its terms and conditions, and upon de- termination by Surety of the lowest responsihle bidder, or, if the Owner elects, upon determination hy the Owner and the Surety jointly of the lowest responsihle bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, and make available as Work rrogre~~es (even though there should be a default or a succession of Signed and sealed this day of defaults under the contrM t or contr,1( h of completion arranged under thi~ pMagraph) sufficient funds to ray the cost of cornrl!'tion le~~ the h...lanc!' of the contrart pricE'; hut not exce!'dlng, including oth!'r coq~ and damage~ for \'"hi( h th!' Suretv may fw liable h('reunder, the amount set forth in th(' flrq paragrarh her('o( The term "balance of the contract rrlC e," as used in this paragraph, shall m!'an th!' total amount payable by Own!'r to Contractor under the Contract and any am!'ndnl('nts th!'reto, less the amount properly paid by Ownf'r to Contractor. Any suit uncier this bond mu~t be instituted before the expiration of two (2) years from th" date on which final payment uncier the Contract falls due. No right of aclion shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of an~' rer~on or corroration othf-'r than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executor~, adminis- trators or successors of the Owner. 19 1 'Prill! ,,,,,11 IS"JI, (\o'\o"f'lI'~ <) I TlII(" I (.~lII(.tl' ) IS"".) (W;l"('~') .- ",t/,,) AlA OOCUMfNT AJll . PERH)RMANCE ROND AND l^BOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT RONO . AlA @ HRRlJARY 1'170 ED.. THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 N,Y, AVE., N.w., WASHINGTON, D, C. 20006 2 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS AlA Document A311 Labor and Material Payment Bond 11115 BOND 15 IS,UED SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH rERrORMANCE BOND IN rAVOR or 1IJE OWNER CONDITIONED ON TilE FULL AND FAITllrUL rERFORr,,1ANCE OF TilE CONTRACT KNO\1\I ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that IHere in~('rf full nam(' .lnd ;lfj(hf'~\ (1f Ip~~l 11111"' of ((lnHarlor) as Principal, hereinafter called Princiral, and, (Here insert full nam~ and addr('f,~ or [pF;al IltlC' of Surelyl <IS Surety, hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto (llere tf1l,ert full oamr .lod addless or lq~~l Itllc of Owner) as Obligee, hereinafter calif'd Owner, for the use and benefit of claimants as hereinhelow defined, in the amount of (HNP. in~ert a sum ('qual to at Ir:'"q oor-half of the ennlr.let prlff') Dollars ($ ), for the rayment whereof Princiral and Sllrety bind thcmselves, tlwir heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly'hy these presents, \NHEREAS, Principal has by written agreement dated (! {ere insert full n:lme, ;vJdrC'ss Jnd dl"Cicription or projC'("f} 19 , entered into a contract With Owner for In accordance with Drawings and Specifications rrerared by Oir're Insert full name and ;Jodrcl"s or l('gal titlE" of Architect! '-- which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract AlA DOCUMENT A311 . rERfORMANCE RONO AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND. A!A @ FEBRUARY 1970 ED.. THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE or ARCHI fEers, 1735 N.Y. AVE, NW, WASHINGTON, D. C. 20006 3 '~"'.'-';"""",,".,,.,,......,,,<.,". _,,,,~,,,,,,,,,,,,';,.,,,,",,,,_,""h~,,,,..,,,,_,,;..,,,",,,,,,<;k,"~,",io\.AAIi~"'l4' LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND NOW, TlffRlfORf, fllf (ONlllfION Of 1I11~ ORII(;AIION I~ ~ueh fhat, if Prrnnpal ~h.lll promptly make payment to all d,wnant~ a~ heretn,lfter df'fined, for all labor .1Od m,ltl'ri.ll u~ed or rl'a~on,lbly rpquired for u~e 10 fhe performance of the Contr.1( t, Ihen Ihi~ ohliHation ~h.lll be VOid; otherWise it ~h.lll rem,ltn III full force and e(feet, ~ubject, however, to the fol- lowing conditions: 1. A claimant i~ defined a~ one having a direct (on- trar! with the Principal or with a Subcontractor of the Principal for labor, malerial, or both, used or rea~onahly r('quirf'd for u~e in the performance of fhe Contract. lahor and material heing con~trued to include that part of waler, gas, power, light. heat, oil, gasoline, telephone ~ervin.> or rental of equipment directly applicable to the Contract. 2. The Jbove named Principal and Surety hNehy jointly and severally Jgree with the Owner th.1I every claimant a~ h('rein defined, who has not been p,lid in fu11 before the expiration of a period of ninety (<)0) days aftf'r the date nn which the last of such c1aimallt's work or labor wa~ done or performed, or mJterials were furnished hy such claimant, may sue on this bond for the u~e of such claim,lnt, prosecute the ~uit to final judgment for ~\H h ~um or ~um~ a~ may he justly du(' c1aim,Hlt, and have executIOn fhereon. The Owner shall not he liahle for th(' payml'nt of any costs or expenses of any such suit. '- 3. No suit or aclion ~hall he commenc('d llE'reunder by any claimant: .1) Unless (Iaimanl, other than one having .1 dlr('( t contract with the Principal, ~hall have given written nolice to any two of the following: the Principal, the Owner, or the Surety above named, within ninety (90) days after such c1aim,lIlt did or performed the last of the work or labor, or furnished the last of the mat('rials for which said claim i~ made, stating with substanl1al Signed and ~ealed this day of accurac-y tht' amount c1aimt'd and the name of the party to whom thE' matE'rials were flJrnlslH'd, or for whom the work or lahor was donE' or performed. Such notice shall be served by mailrng thE' ~,lme by registered mail or cerlifiE'd mail; postagf' prppaid, in an envelope ad- drf'~Sf'd 10 the PrinCipal, Owner or Surety, ilt any place where an office is r('gularly maintain<,d for the trans- action of business, or sprved in any manner in which legal proCE'SS may bE' servf'd in the state in which the aforesaid proj<,ct is located, save that such service need not be made by a public officer. b) Aftpr the expiration of one (1) year following the date on which Principal ceased \Vork on said Contract, it heing understood, however, that if any limitation em- bodied in thiS bond is prohlbrled by any law controlling the con<lruclion hereof ~uch limifation shall be deemed to bl' amended so a~ to be equal to the minimum period o( limitation permitted by such law. c) Other Ihiln III a state courl of competent jurisdiction in ilnd (or th(' county or other polrlical subdivision of the state in which the Proj('ct, or any part thereof, is situated, or in the United Slates District Court for the district in which th(' Project, or ,lny part thereof, is sit- uated, and not elsewhere. 4. The amount of this bond shall be reduc-pd by and to the E'xtent of any payment or paym<,nts made in good faith hereunder, inclusive of the payment by Surety of mechanics' liens which may be filf'd of record against said improvement, whether or not claim for the amount of such lien be presented under and against this bond. 19 1 (PrinClpall IS... I) (Willll''') ( ritld ! 1v\"/lnl'\\1 ',- (Surely) 15.01) ITif/(') ^IA DOCUMENT A311 . I'f1UORMANCE RONO AND lAROR ANO MAHRIAl PAYMENT RONO . AlA @ fEBRlIARY 1<J70 (D.. THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE Of ARCHITECTS, 1715 Ny' AVE., N.W, WASHINCTON, D. C. 2000f, 4 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1. The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", 1\IA Document A201, 14th edition, April 1987, Articles 1 through 14 inclusi~e, is part of this Contract. 2. The following supplements modify, delete from, and/or add to the General Condi tions. I . A. All 1\rticles, or portions thereof, which are not specifi- cally modified, deleted, or superseded hereby, remain in full effect. B. The General Conditions also may be supplemented elsewhere in the Contract Documents by provisions located in, but not necessarily limited to, Division 1 of the Specifica- tions. 3. After subparagraph 1.1. 7, add: 1. 1.8 MISCELLANEOUS DEFINITIONS .1 The term "product" includes materials, systems, and equipment. .2 The term "provide" includes furnishing and installing a product, complete in place, tested and approved. .3 The term "building code," and the term "code," refer to regulations of governmental agencies having juris- diction. .4 The terms "approved," "required," and "as directed" refer to and indicate the work or materials that may be approved, required, or directed by the Architect acting as the agent of the Owner. .5 The term "similar" means in its general sense and not necessarily identical. .6 The terms "shown," "indicated," "detailed," "noted," "scheduled," and terms of similar import, refer to requirements contained in the Contract Documents. .01 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-1 ._..,~"....,.~_<IlW>I~""0""""f"h', "....."..,I..,'""".,,.""'"'"'~~~ 7. After subparagraph 8.3.3, add: 8.3.4 In planning his construction schedule within the agreed Contract Time, it shall be assumed that the Con- tractor has anticipated the amount of adverse weather con- ditions normal to the site of the Work for the season or seasons of the year involved. Only those weather delays attributable to other than normal weather conditions will be considered by the Architect. 8.3.5 When the Contract Time has been extended, as pro- vided under this Paragraph 8.3, such extension of time shall not be considered as justifying extra compensation to the Contractor f~r administrative costs or other such reasons. 8. At the end of subparagraph 9.3.~, add: The form of application for payment shall be AlA Document G702, "Application and Certificate for Payment," supported by continuation sheet or sheets approved by the Architect., .01 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-2 10. At the end of Section 10, add: Preliminary investigations of the building have revealed no asbestos. If any is discovered during demoltion it will be handled at that time with a separate change order. 11a. At the end of subparagraph ll.i.2, add: Insurance coverage shall be not less than the following: A. Workers' Compensation: Statutory B. Contractor's Public Liability: 1. Personal injury: $500,000/$1,000,000 2. Property damage: $100,000/$200,000 C. Contractor's Contingent Liability: 1. Personal injury: $500,000/$1,000,000 2. Property damage: $100,000/$200,000 D. Automobile Public Liability: 1. Personal injury: $500,000/$1,000,000 2. Property damage: $100,000 each occurrence All Contractor's insurance policies shall name the Archi- tect and the Owner as additional insureds. All insurance policies shall provide that no cancellation of the policy or endorsement shall be effective until the tenth day following the mailing of written notices of such cancellation to the Architect and to the Owner. .01 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-3 """",,,,,..~,,;",,,,.;;,"..~~",,,__~,,,.____~;.",..__,...,.,.,,,.,,.,,,_'''''''''"_'''''''''''''~''''h'>'~_~ lIb. Add new subparagraph 11.1.2.1: The following coverages are required to be maintained by the Contractor throughout the entire length of the contract and any extensions thereof. 1. Premises and Operation Liability Insurance: Commercial General Liability Insurance shall be obtained in amounts of not less than $1,000,000 each occurrence. Coverage shall specifically include: a. Bodily injury and property damage liability cover- aqe for premises and operations. b. Products and completed operations. c. Independent contractor's exposures. d. Property damage resulting from explosion, collapse, or underground (x,c,u) exposures. e. Blanket contractual liability covering this con- tract. ~ f. Personal injury liability. g. Broad form property damage liability. 2. Automobile Liability Insurance: Comprehensive automobile liability insurance shall in- clude coverage for bodily injury and property damage liability for a minimum limit of $1,000,000 each occur- rence and shall cover use of owned, non-owned, and hired vehicles, and include employers' non-ownership liability coverage. 3. Workers Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance: Statutory Workers' Compensation coverage including Em- ployers Liability coverage with limits of not less than $100,000 per person per accident and $500,000 per person per occurrence for disease. Coverage shall be provided SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS to cover operations in the State of Florida and the Voluntary Compensation endorsement shall be provided. Coverage for Federally enacted benefits shall be provid- ed where applicable. All insurance policies are required to name Monroe County Board of County Commissioners as Additional Insured and pro- vide a minimum of sixty (60) days notice in the event of termination, non-renewal or reduction in coverage. Monroe County reserves the right to require additional insurance as may be deemed necessary for any specific project or work. Insurers providing coverage(s) must be financially stable and authorized to do business in the State of Florida. The Mon- roe County Board of County Commissioners reserves the right to reject any insurer that it believes to be unacceptable. Failure to maintain required insurance coverage in effect will provide Monroe County, Florida with the option of termi- nating the contract. Certificates expiring during the term of the contract shall be replaced with new certificates prior to the expiration of the original certificates. Complete and certified copies of all insurance contracts shall be furnished to The Monroe County Board of County Com- missioners if requested. 12. At the end of subparagraph 13.3.1, add: The venue for any dispute arising out of this contract shall be in the court of appropriate jurisdiction in Monroe County, Florida. END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 0"O<<";","",~;_ "'j' -~~lrl* ..'"...~~ :;.wr'...."..~""'...~ SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF THE WORK Part 1 - General 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: 1. The "Project" of which the "Work" of this Contract is a part is titled "Monroe County Library, Key West Branch," and consists of an addition to house the Florida History Collection and building rennovation and repairs. 2. The "Work" of this Contract as defined in the Contract Documents is to include but not neces- sarily be limited to the demolition and removal of the existing Children's Reading Room; the addition of a 2357 s. f. addition; an entire new roof system; painting the entire building and boundary walls; on site parking; window repair; replace lighting, air-conditioning, sewer and water service. B. Phasing 1. The a. 2. phasing of this Contract shall be as follows: Phase 1 - demolition; construction of new additions; new roof; parking; the book storage areas. (The Main Library Building to remain open to the public). The new door, concrete stair & landing at the west wing should be constructed to allow library access during Phase 2. b. Phase 2 - interior rennovations of the main building and East wing. The West wing (auditorium and new Children's Reading Room and new Florida Reference area) to remain open to public. c. Phase 3 - The exterior building, windows and the West wing. The main building, East wing, and new Florida Reference area to remain open to the public. Addition II and the related work will occur during phase 1 of the above phasing discription if the budget is approved. The new processing room will remian open during Phases 2 & 3 if Addition II is built. END OF SECTION SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01010 - 1 SECTION 01021 CASH ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: To provide adequate budget and bonding to cover items not precisely determined by the Owner prior to bidding, allow within the proposed Contract Sum the amounts described below. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Other provisions concerning Cash Allowances are stated in Paragraph 4.8 of the General Conditions. 3. Other provisions concerning Cash Allowances also may be stated in other Sections of these Specifications. 1.2 SPECIFIC CASH ALLOWANCES A. Door hardware 1. Addition: $3500.00 2. Addition II: $500.00 CASH ALLOWANCES .01 01021-1 SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: This Section establishes general require- ments pertaining to cutting (including excavating), fit- ting, and patching of the Work required to: 1. Make the several parts fit properly; 2. Uncover work to provide for installing, inspecting, or both, of ill-timed work; 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents; and 4. Remove and replace defective work. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. In addition to other requirements specified, upon the Architect's request uncover work to provide for in- spection by the Architect of covered work, and remove samples of installed materials for testing. 3. Do not cut or alter work performed under separate con- tracts without the Architect's written permission. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Request for Architect's consent: 1. Prior to cutting which effects structural safety, sub- mit written request to the Architect for permission to proceed with cutting. 2. Should conditions of the Work, or schedule, indicate a required change of materials or methods for cutting and patching, so notify the Architect and secure his writ- ten permission and the required Change Order prior to proceeding. CUTTING AND PATCHING .01 01045-1 B. Notices to the Architect: 1. Prior to cutting and patching performed pursuant to the Architect's instructions, submit cost estimate to the Architect. Secure the Architect's approval of cost estimates and type of reimbursement before pro- ceeding with cutting and patching. 2. Submit written notice to the Architect designating the time the Work will be uncovered, to provide for the Architect's observation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. For replacement of items removed, use materials complying with pertinent Sections of these Specifications. 2.2 PAYMENT FOR COSTS A. The Owner will reimburse the Contractor for cutting and patching performed pursuant to the written Change Order, after claim for such reimbursement is submitted by the Contractor. Perform other cutting and patching needed to comply with the Contract Documents at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection: 1. Inspect existing conditions, including elements sub- ject to movement or damage during cutting, excavating, patching, and backfilling. 2. After uncovering the work, inspect conditions affect- ing installation of new work. B. Discrepancies: 1. If uncovered conditions are not as anticipated, im- mediately notify the Architect and secure needed di- rections. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION PRIOR TO CUTTING A. Provide required protection including, but not necessarily limited to, shoring, bracing, and support to maintain structural integrity of the Work. CUTTING AND PATCHING .01 01045-2 '''''.h'''''."''''''''''''<'~ti"'. RI'fi"iiI .....","'~~,~""""'.<.,j,:.,,,:._:',..:;""',:~.,_,.""",...,.""'.."""'","A~"", 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. Perform required excavating and backfilling as required under pertinent other Sections of these Specificatiqns. 1. Perform cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other portions of the Work and pro- vide proper surfaces to receive installation of repair and new work. 2. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide finished installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes. END OF SECTION .01 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-3 SECTION 01152 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Comply with procedures described in this Section when applying for progress payment and final pay- ment under the Contract. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions,. Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. The Contract Sum and the schedule for payments are de- scribed in the Form of Agreement. 3. Payments upon Substantial Completion and Completion of the Work are described in the General Conditions and in Section 01700 of these Specifications. 4. The Architect's approval of applications for progress payment and final payment may be contingent upon the Architect's approval of status of Project Record Docu- ments as described in Section 01720 of these Specifi- cations. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Prior to start of construction, secure the Architect's ap- proval of the schedule of values required to be submitted under Paragraph 9.2 of the General Conditions, and further described in Section 01370 of these Specifications. B. During progress of the Work, modify the schedule of values as approved by the Architect to reflect changes in the Contract Sum due to Change Orders or other modifications of the Contract. C. Base requests for payment on the approved schedule of values. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Informal submittal: Unless otherwise directed by the Architect: 1. Make an informal submittal of request for payment by filling in, with erasable pencil, pertinent portions of AlA Document G702, "Application and Certificate for APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT .01 01152-1 ~~........"",...;..._>v..."",,,,,~.,~,, Payment," plus continuation sheet or sheets. 2. Make this preliminary submittal to the Architect at the last regular job meeting of each month. 3. Revise the informal submittal of request for payment as agreed at the job meeting, initialing all copies. B. Formal submittal: Unless otherwise directed by the Archi- tect: 1. Make formal submittal of request for payment by fill- ing in the agreed data, by typewriter or neat letter- ing in ink, on AlA Document G702, "Application and Certificate for Payment," plus continuation sheet or sheets. 2. Sign and notarize the Application and Certificate for Payment. 3. Submit the original of the Application and Certificate for Payment, plus eight identical copies of the con- tinuation sheet or sheets, to the Architect. 4. The Architect will compare the formal submittal with the approved informal submittal and, when approved, will sign the Application and Certificate for Payment, will make required copies, and will distribute: a. One copy to Contractor; b. One copy to Owner; c. One copy to Architect's file; 5. Owner will, upon approval, disburse directly to the Contractor. END OF SECTION . I .01 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01152-2 SECTION 01201 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: To help clarify construction contract ad- ministration procedures, the Architect will conduct a Pre- construction Conference prior to start of the Work. Pro- vide attendance by the designated personnel. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For those persons designated by the Contractor, his subcon- tractors, and suppliers to attend the Preconstruct ion Con- ference, provide required authority to commit the entities they represent to solutions agreed upon in the Conference. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. To the maximum extent practicable, advise the Architect at least 24 hours in advance of the Conference as to items to be added to the agenda. 1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. The Conference will be scheduled to be held within 15 work- ing days after the Owner has issued the Notice to Proceed, but prior to actual start of the Work. . I B. Attendance: 1. Provide attendance by authorized representatives of the Contractor and major subcontractors. 2. The Architect will advise other interested parties, in- cluding the Owner, and request their attendance. .01 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 01201-1 ".;"""~- 'l'lli(" ~'.4iI""ill.':rtr ~".,,,;""~"'Il<.M C. Minimum agenda: Data will be distributed and discussed on: 1. Organizational arrangement of Contractor's forces and personnel, and those of subcontractors, materials sup- pliers, and the Architect; 2. Channels and procedures for communication; 3. Construction schedule, including sequence of critical work; 4. Contract Documents, including distribution of required copies of Drawings and revisions; 5. Processing of Shop Drawings and other data submitted to the Architect for review; 6. Processing of field decisions and Change Orders; 7. Rules and regulations governing performance of the Work; and 8. Procedures for safety and first aid, security, quality control, housekeeping, and related matters. END OF SECTION .01 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 01201-2 SECTION 01310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: To assure adequate planning and execution of the Work so that the Work is completed within the num- ber of calendar days allowed in the Contract, and to as- sist the Architect in appraising the reasonableness of the proposed schedule and in evaluating progress of the Work, prepare and maintain the schedules and reports described in this Section. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Requirements for progress schedule: General Condi- tions. 3. Construction period: Form of Agreement. C. Definitions: 1. "Day," as used throughout the Contract unless other- wise stated, means "calendar day." 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Employ a scheduler who is thoroughly trained and experi- enced in compiling construction schedule data, and in pre- paring and issuing periodic reports as required below. B. Perform data preparation, analysis, charting, and updating in accordance with standards approved by the Architect. C. Reliance upon the approved schedule: 1. The construction schedule as approved by the Architect will be an integral part of the Contract and will es- tablish interim completion dates for the various ac- tivities under the Contract. 2. Should any activity not be completed within 15 days after the stated scheduled date, the Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to expedite com- pletion of the activity by whatever means the Owner deems appropriate and necessary, without additional compensation to the Contractor. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES .01 01310-1 ,......,.,~~~~,_"'''''',-'''''''''''C~f''''~-.:.''''',',.''"._"1'''''''','~~.~''''''., 3. Should any activity be 30 days or more behind schedule, the Owner shall have the right to perform the activity or have the activity performed by whatever method the Owner deems appropriate. 4. Costs incurred by the Owner and by the Architect in connection with expediting construction activity under this Article shall be reimbursed by the Contractor. 5. It is expressly understood and agreed that failure by the Owner to exercise the option either to order the Contractor to expedite an activity or to expedite the activity by other means shall not be considered to set a precedent for any other activities. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Preliminary analysis: Within ten calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit one reproducible copy and four prints of a prelim- inary construction schedule prepared in accordance with Part 3 of this Section. C. Construction schedule: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit one reproducible copy and four prints of a con- struction schedule prepared in accordance with Part 3 of this Section. D. Periodic reports: On the first working day of each month following the submittal described in Paragraph 1.3-C above, submit four prints of the construction schedule updated as described in Part 3 of this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONSTRUCTION ANALYSIS A. Graphically show by bar-chart the order and interdepen- dence of all activities necessary to complete the Work, and the sequence in which each activity is to be accom- plished, as planned by the Contractor and his project field superintendent in coordination with all subcontrac- tors whose work is shown on the diagram. B. Include, but do not necessarily limit indicated activities to: 1. Project mobilization; 2. Submittal and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Procurement of equipment and critical materials: 4. Fabrication of special material and equipment, and its installation and testing. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES .01 01310-2 5. Final cleanup; 6. Final inspecting and testing; and 7. All activities by the Architect that effect progress, required dates for completion, or both, for all and each part of the Work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRELIMINARY ANALYSIS A. Contents: 1. Show all activities of the Contractor under this Work for the period between receipt of Notice to Proceed and submittal of construction schedule required under Paragraph 1.3-C above; 2. Show the Contractor's general approach to remainder of the Work; 3. Show cost of all activities scheduled for performance before submittal and approval of the construction schedule. B. Submit in accordance with Paragraph 1.3-B above. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. As soon as practicable after receipt of Notice to Proceed, complete the construction analysis in preliminary form, meet with the Architect, review contents of the proposed construction schedule, and make all revisions agreed upon. B. Submit in accordance with Paragraph 1.3-C above. 3.3 PERIODIC REPORTS A. As required under Paragraph 1.3-D above, update the ap- proved construction schedule. 1. Indicate "actual" progress in percent completion for each activity; 2. Provide written narrative summary of revisions causing delay in the program, and an explanation of corrective actions taken or proposed. 3.4 REVISIONS A. Make only those revisions to approved construction sched- ule as are approved in advance by the Architect. END OF SECTION .01 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310-3 t . ~,' ~ i SECTION 01340 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Make submittals required by the Contract Documents, and revise and resubmit as necessary to estab- lish compliance with the specified requirements. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Individual requirements for submittals also may be de- scribed in pertinent Sections of these Specifications. C. Work not included: 1. Unrequired submittals will not be reviewed by the Architect. 2. The Contractor may require his subcontractors to pro- vide drawings, setting diagrams, and similar informa- tion to help coordinate the Work, but such data shall remain between the Contractor and his subcontractors and will not be reviewed by the Architect. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordination of submittals: 1. Prior to each submittal, carefully review and coordi- nate all aspects of each item being submitted. 2. Verify that each item and the submittal for it conform in all respects with the specified requirements. 3. By affixing the Contractor's signature to each submit- tal, certify that this coordination has been performed. B. Substitutions: 1. The Contract is based on the standards of quality es- tablished in the Contract Documents. Substitutions will be considered only when listed at time of bidding, on the form provided therefore in the bidding docu- ments, and when substantiated by the Contractor's sub- mittal of required data within 35 calendar days after award of the Contract. 2. The following products do not require further approval except for interface within the Work: a. Products specified by reference to standard speci- SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS .01 01340-1 fications such as ASTM and similar standards. b. Products specified by manufacturer's name and cat~ alog model number. 3. Do not substitute materials, equipment, or methods un- less such substitution has been specifically approved in writing for this Work by the Architect. C. "Or 1. equal": Where the phrase "or equal," or "or equal as approved by the Architect," occurs in the Contract Documents, do not assume that the materials, equipment, or meth- ods will be approved as equal unless the item has been specifically so approved for this Work by the Arcni- teet. The decision of the Architect shall be final. 2. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals of Shop Drawings, Samples, substitution requests, and other items in accordance with the provi- sions of this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Scale and measurements: Make Shop Drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently large to show all pertinent aspects of the item and its method of connection to the Work. B. Types of prints required: 1. Submit Shop Drawings in the form of three blueline or blackline prints of each sheet. 2. Blueprints will be acceptable. C. Review comments of the Architect will be shown on the sep- ia transparency when it is returned to the Contractor. The Contractor may make and distribute such copies as are required for his purposes. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS' LITERATURE A. Where contents of submitted literature from manufacturers includes data not pertinent to the submittal, clearly show which portions of the contents is being submitted for re- view. B. Submit the number of copies which are required to be re- turned, plus one copy which will be retained by the Archi- tect. SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS .01 01340-2 ."",~",._,',^,'i';';"~"'''"''''''''''''"''''''_'''''~''''~_'''''''''''''''~_''''''~,,,,,,,j,-,,,,,,,,",,,,,,,~,~,,,,,,,, 2.3 SAMPLES A. Provide Sample or Samples identical to the precise article proposed to be provided. Identify as described under "Identification of submittals" below. B. Number of Samples required: 1. Unless otherwise specified, submit Samples in the quantity which is required to be returned, plus one which will be retained by the Architect. 2. By prearrangement in specific cases, a single Sample may be submitted for review and, when approved, be in- stalled in the Work at a location agreed upon by the Architect. 2.4 COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Unless the precise color and pattern is specifically called out in the Contract Documents, and whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in the specified products, submit accurate color and pattern charts to the Architect for selection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 IDENTIFICATION OF SUBMITTALS A. Consecutively number all submittals. 1. When material is resubmitted for any reason, transmit under a new letter of transmittal and with a new transmittal number. 2. On resubmitta~s, cite the original submittal number for reference. B. Accompany each submittal with a letter of transmittal showing all information required for identification and checking. C. On at least the first page of each submittal, and else- where as required for positive identification, show the submittal number in which the item was included. D. Maintain an accurate submittal log for the duration of the Work, showing current status of all submittals at all times. Make the submittal log available to the Architect for his review upon request. 3.2 GROUPING OF SUBMITTALS A. Unless otherwise specified, make submittals in groups con- taining all associated items to assure that information is available for checking each item when it is received. SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS .01 01340-3 1. Partial submittals may be rejected as not complying with the provisions of the Contract. 2. The Contractor may be held liable for delays so occas- sioned. 3.3 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals far enough in advance of scheduled dates for installation to provide time required for reviews, for securing necessary approvals, for possible revisions and resubmittals, and for placing orders and securing delivery. B. In scheduling, allow at least ten working days for review by the Architect following his receipt of the submittal. 3.4 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW A. Review by the Architect does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors which may exist in the sub- mitted data. B. Revisions: 1. Make revisions required by the Architect. 2. If the Contractor considers any required revision to be a change, he shall so notify the Architect as pro- vided ~or in Paragraph 12.3 of the General Conditions. 3. Make only those revisions directed or approved by the Architect. C. Reimbursement of Architect's costs: 1. In the event substitutions are proposed to the Archi- tect after the Contract has been awarded, the Archi- tect will record all time used by him and by his con- sultants in evaluation of each such proposed substi- tution. 2. Whether or not the Architect approves a proposed sub- stitution, the Contractor promptly upon receipt of the Architect's billing shall reimburse the Architect at the rate of two and one-half times the direct cost to the Architect and his consultants for all time spent by them in evaluating the proposed substitution. . I END OF SECTION .01 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 01340-4 "",';"',.;,_.....~_~""~~~~*'..~"""'i;6i.Iitii~...... SECTION 01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide a detailed breakdown of the agreed Contract Sum showing values allocated to each of the vari- ous parts of the Work, as specified herein and in other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Schedule of values is required under Paragraph 4.8 of the General Conditions. 3. Schedule of values is required to be compatible with the "continuation sheet" accompanying applications for payment, as described in Section 01152. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use required means to assure arithmetical accuracy of the sums described. B. When so required by the Architect, provide copies of the subcontracts or other data acceptable to the Architect, substantiating the sums described. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to first application for payment, submit a proposed schedule of values to the Architect. 1. Meet with the Architect and determine additional data, if any, required to be submitted. 2. Secure the Architect's approval of the schedule of values prior to submitting first application for pay- ment. END OF SECTION .01 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01370-1 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide temporary facilities and controls needed for the Work including, but not necessarily limited to: 1. Temporary utilities such as water, electricity, and telephone; 2. Field office for the Contractor's personnel; 3. Sanitary facilities; 4. Enclosures such as tarpaulins, barricades, and cano- pies; 5. Temporary fencing of the construction site; 6. Project sign. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Except that equipment furnished by subcontractors shall comply with requirements of pertinent safety regulations, such equipment normally furnished by the individual trades in execution of their own portions of the Work are not part of this Section. 3. Permanent installation and hookup of the various util- ity lines are described in other Sections. 1.2 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Maintain temporary facilities and controls in proper and safe condition throughout progress of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UTILITIES A. Water: 1. Provide necessary temporary piping and water supply and, upon completion of the Work, remove such tempo- rary facilities. 2. Provide and pay for water used in construction. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS .01 01500-1 B. Electricity: 1. Provide necessary temporary wiring and, upon comple- tion of the Work, remove such temporary facility. 2. Provide area distribution boxes so located that ,the individual trades may furnish and use 100 ft maximum length extension cords to obtain power and lighting at points where needed for work, inspection, and safety. 3. Provide and pay for electricity used in construction. C. D. Telephone; 1. Make necessary arrangements and pay costs for in~tal- lation and operation of telephone service to the Con- tractor's office at the site. 2. Make the telephone available to the Architect for use in connection with the Work. 2.2 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Contractor's facilities: 1. Provide a field office building and sheds adequate in size and accommodation for Contractor's offices, sup- ply, and storage. 2. Within the Contractor's facilities, provide enclosed space adequate for holding project meetings. Furnish with table, chairs, and utilities. B. Sanitary facilities: 1. Provide temporary sanitary facilities in the quantity required for use by all personnel. 2. Maintain in a sanitary condition at all times. 2.3 ENCLOSURES A. Provide and maintain for the duration of construction all scaffolds, tarpaulins, canopies, warning signs, steps, platforms, bridges, and other temporary construction nec- essary for proper completion of the Work in compliance with pertinent safety and other regulations. 2.4 TEMPORARY FENCING A. Provide and maintain for the duration of construction a temporary fence of design and type needed to prevent entry onto the Work by the public. 2.5 PROJECT SIGNS A. .01 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-2 B. C. Except as otherwise specifically approved by the Archi- tect, do not permit other signs or advertising on the job site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL A. Maintain temporary facilities and controls as long as needed for safe and proper completion of the Work. B. Remove such temporary facilities and controls as rapidly as progress of the Work will permit, or as directed by the Architect. END OF SECTION .01 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-3 \"~'-" '~-',............""""~."="-",,~.;,"",,.~,-,, SECTION 01640 PRODUCT HANDLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Protect products scheduled for use in the Work by means including, but not necessarily limited to, those described in this Section. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Additional procedures also may be prescribed in other Sections of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Include within the Contractor's quality assurance program such procedures as are required to assure full protection of work and materials. 1.3 MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDATIONS A. Except as otherwise approved by the Architect, determine and comply with manufacturers' recommendations on product handling, storage, and protection. 1.4 PACKAGING A. Deliver products to the job site in their manufacturer's original container, with labels intact and legible. 1. Maintain packaged materials with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. 2. Promptly remove damaged material and unsuitable items from the job site, and promptly replace with material meeting the specified requirements, at no additional cost to the Owner. B. The Architect may reject as non-complying such material and products that do not bear identification satisfactory to the Architect as to manufacturer, grade, quality, and other pertinent information. PRODUCT HANDLING .01 01640-1 1.5 PROTECTION A. Protect finished surfaces, including jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways, through which equipment and materials are handled. B. Provide protection for finished floor surfaces in traffic areas prior to allowing equipment or materials to be moved over such surfaces. C. Maintain finished surfaces clean, unmarred, and suitably protected until accepted by the Owner. 1.6 REPAIRS AND REPLACEMENTS A. In event of damage, promptly make replacements and repairs to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Additional time required to secure replacements and to make repairs will not be considered by the Architect to justify an extension in the Contract Time of Completion. END OF SECTION .01 PRODUCT HANDLING 01640-2 .{.~n"1i"'IIi1..n:1'1i'1Ili' -'_~c SECTION 01660 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Make balance calcula- tions, measurements, and adjustment settings of air flows for the various systems, including recording of data, perform the required tests, and prepare and sub- mit the required reports. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. C. Definitions are as indicated in applicable publications of AABC, ASHRAE, and ANSI. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of personnel: 1. Obtain the services of a qualified testing agency to the approval of the Architect. 2. Part of the criteria for determining qualifications of the testing agency are certification by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC), or submission of evidence that the agency meets technical ability for membership in AABC. B. Comply with procedures specified in this Section and as described in AABC "National Standards for Field Measure- ments and Instrumentation - Total System Balance," Volume II. . I 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data: Within 60 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit name of the proposed agency to the Architect for approval. C. Preliminary report: Review the pertinent Drawings and Specifications prior to installation of the affected sys- tems, and submit a report to the Architect stating whether TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF SYSTEMS .01 01660-1 any deficiencies exist in the system which would preclude proper adjusting, balancing, and testing of the systems. E. Agenda: Submit agenda for approval of the Architect prior to start of testing and balancing. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (No products are required under this Section) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Progress inspections: 1. Make sufficient inspections during progress of air and hydronic systems installation to verify that essential components are installed in a manner to permit optimum balancing. 2. Make written report to the Architect following each inspection. 3.2 PROCEDURES AND INSTRUMENTS A. Adjust systems and components to perform as required by the Drawings and Specifications, using the procedures de- scribed in AABC Manual except as otherwise directed by the Architect. B. Test duration: 1. Conduct operating tests of heating and cooling fans, coils, and other equipment for not less than four TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF SYSTEMS .01 01660-2 hours after stabilized operating conditions have been established. 2. Base the capacities on temperatures and air quantities measured during such tests. C. Instrumentation calibration: 1. Use accurate instruments for measurements, and make the calibration histories of each instrument available for examination. 2. Have each test instrument calibrated by an approved laboratory or by the manufacturer. 3. The Architect reserves the right to require instrument recalibration, or use of other instruments and test methodology, where accuracy of readings is questioned. D. Use thermometers having an accuracy of plus or minus one graduation at the temperatures measured. 3.3 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURES A. Adjustment: 1. Adjust air handling systems to provide the required design air quantity to, or through, each component. 2. Adjust and balance systems during periods of the year approximating maximum seasonal operation. B. Adjust equalizing devices to provide uniform velocity across the inlets (duct side of supply) of terminals prior to measuring flow rates. C. Balance: 1. Use only flow adjusting (volume control) devices to balance air quantities. 2. Proportion flow between various terminals comprising the system, to the extent that their adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound in excess of limits acceptable to the Architect. 3. Accomplish balancing between runs by use of flow regu- lating devices at or in the divided-flow fitting. D. Flow restrictions: 1. Impose minimal restriction by flow regulating devices in or at terminals. 2. Make final measurements of air quantity after the air terminal has been adjusted to provide optimum air pat- terns of diffusion. E. Fan adjustment: 1. Vary the total air system quantities by adjustment of fan speed. 2. Damper restriction of a system's total flow may be .01 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF SYSTEMS 01660-) used only for systems with direct-connected fans (with- out adjustable pitch blades), and provided the system pressure is less than 1/2" wg, and sound level criter- ia are met. F. Use air measuring systems, where installed, to measure the applicable air flows required therein. G. Traverses: 1. Except as specifically indicated herein, make pitot tube traverses of each duct to measure the air flow therein. 2. Conform pitot tubes, associated measurements, traverse techniques, and other operations to the ASHRAE "Hand- book of Fundamentals." H. Exceptions to traverses: 1. Pitot tube traverse may be omitted provided the duct serves only a single room or space and its design vol- ume is less than 2000 cfm. 2. In lieu of pitot tube traverse, determine the air flow in the duct by totalling the volumes of the individual terminals served, measured as described herein. I. Where diffuser, register, or grille design velocity and air quantity both are less than 1000 fpm/cfm, air quantity may be determined by measurement at respective diffusers, registers, or grilles served. J. Air l. 2. 3. 4. K. Air l. 2. terminal, balancing: Generally, measure flow rates by means of velocity meters applied to individual terminals, with or with- out cones or other adapters, only for balancing. Determine air quantities at each type of air terminal (inlet and outlet) by the method approved for the bal- ancing agenda. Conduct laboratory tests to prove accuracy of method- ology when so directed by the Architect. Conduct such tests in conformance with applicable AS ME or ASllRAE Codes, and at no additional cost to Owner. motion: Provide air motion and distribution specified and in- dicated on the Drawings. In addition to air motion measurements, make smoke test wherever requested by the Architect, and at no additional cost to Owner, to demonstrate the air dis- tribution to and from air terminals. 3.4 HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEM PROCEDURES A. General: 1. Adjust heating and cooling systems to provide required quantity to, or through, each component. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF SYSTEMS .01 01660-4 < ";''''''i''''~' -- 'j>' ~'f"""'.' ~ P'Mt.~ ~ 'qtr'iil""~~""""",~j"",",_h-"~'"'"""l"""""_~"",,,,, 2. Measure quantities and pressures with calibrated meters. 3. Use venturi tubes, orifices, or other metering fit- tings and pressure gages to measure flow rates and to balance systems. 4. Adjust the systems to provide the approved pressure drops through the heat transfer equipment prior to the capacity testing. 5. Where flow metering fittings are not installed, deter- mine the flow balance by measuring temperature differ- ential across the heat transfer equipment, and make flow rate calculations by using temperature differen- tial data. 6. Measure temperature differential with the air system, adjusted as described herein, in operation. 7. Position the automatic control valves for ~ull flow through the heat transfer equipment of the system prior to testing. j. ~~just flo\~ through the bypass circuits at three-way valves to balance the flow through the supply circuit. B. Distribution: 1. Make adjustments on distribution systems by means of balancing devices (cocks, valves, and fittings) and automatic flow control devices as provided. 2. Do not use service fittings for the purpose of balanc- ing. C. Where automatic flow control valves are used in lieu of venturi tubes, only pressure differential need be re- corded, provided said pressure is at least the minimum ap- plicable to the tag rating. D. Special procedures: 1. Where available pump capacity (as designed) is less than total flow requirements of individual heat trans- fer units of the system served, full flow may be simu- lated by the temporary restriction of flow to portions of the system. 2. Delineate the specific procedures in the proposed agenda. 3.5 SOUND TEST PROCEDURES A. Make tests to determine compliance with the sound level requirements specified for the systems. B. Make sound level measurements at times when the building is unoccupied, or when activity in the surrounding areas, plus background noise levels in the areas tested, are at a minimum and are relatively free from sudden change in noise levels. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF SYSTEMS .01 01660-5 c. Make measurements with all equipment tightly secured, ex- cept the equipment being tested. D. Measure the required sound levels at any point within a room not less than 72" from an air terminal or room 'unit, and not closer than 36" from any floor, wall, or ceiling surface. E. Meters: 1. Measure sound levels with a sound meter complying with ANSI Sl.4, "Standards for Sound Level Meters." 2. Use the A-scale to measure overall sound levels. 3. To determine the specified octave band levels, set the aboveground level meter on the C-scale, and supple- ment with Octave Band Analyzer complying with ANSI Sl.ll, "Specification For An Octave Band Filter Set." 3.6 CERTIFIED REPORTS A. For the reports required to be submitted under Article 1.3 of this Section, provide certification by an independent registered professional engineer who is versed in the field of air and hydronic balancing and who is not affili- ated with any firm involved in the design or construction phases of this Work. B. Identify in the reports each item not complying with the Contract requirements, or obvious maloperation or design deficiencies of equipment or controls. 3.7 ADDITIONAL TESTING AND BALANCING A. Refer to sections 15161, 15891 and 15900 in conjuction with this section .01 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF SYSTEMS 01660-6 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide an orderly and efficient transfer of the completed Work to the Owner. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Activities relative to Contract closeout are described in, but not necessarily limited to, Paragraphs 2.2.16, 9.8, and 9.9 of the General Conditions. 3. "Substantial Completion" is defined in Paragraph 8.1.3 of the General Conditions. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Prior to requesting inspection by the Architect, use ade- quate means to assure that the Work is completed in accor- dance with the specified requirements and is ready for the requested inspection. 1.3 PROCEDURES A. Substantial Completion: 1. Prepare and submit the list required by the first sen- tence of Paragraph 9.8.1 of the General Conditions. 2. Within a reasonable time after receipt of the list, the Architect will inspect to determine status of com- pletion. 3. Should the Architect determine that the Work is not substantially complete: a. The Architect promptly will so notify the Contrac- tor, in writing, giving the reasons therefore. b. Remedy the deficiencies and notify the Architect when ready for reinspection. c. The Architect will reinspect the Work. 4. When the Architect concurs that the Work is substanti- ally complete: a. The Architect will prepare a "Certificate of Sub- stantial Completion" on AlA form G704, accompanied by the Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, as verified by the Architect. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT .01 01700-1 b. The Architect will submit the Certificate to the Owner and to the Contractor for their written ac- ceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate. B. Final Completion: 1. Prepare and submit the notice required by the first sentence of Paragraph 9.9.1 of the General Conditions. 2. Verify that the Work is complete including, but not necessarily limited to, the items mentioned in Para- graph 9.9.2 of the General Conditions. 3. Certify that: a. Contract Documents have been reviewed; b. Work has been inspected for compliance with the Contract Documents; c. Work has been cqmpleted in accordance with the Contract Documents~ d. Equipment and systems have been tested as re- quired, and are operational; e. Work is completed and ready for final inspection. 4. The Architect will make an inspection to verify status of completion. 5. Should the Architect determine that the Work is incom- plete or defective: a. The Architect promptly will so notify the Contrac- tor, in writing, listing the incomplete or defec- tive work. b. Remedy the deficiencies promptly, and notify the Architect when ready for reinspection. 6. When the Architect determines that the Work is accep- table under the Contract Documents, he will request the Contractor to make closeout submittals. C. Closeout submittals include, but are not necessarily lim- ited to: 1. Project Record Documents 2. Operation and maintenance data for items so listed in pertinent other Sections of these Specifications, and for other items when so directed by the Architect; 3. Warranties and bonds~ 4. Keys and keying schedule~ 5. Spare parts and materia~s extra stock; 6. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governmen- tal agencies having jurisdiction including, but not necessarily limited to: a. Certif~cates of Inspection; b. Certit ates of Occupancy; 7. Certificat, of Insurance for products and completed operations; 8. Evidence of payment and release of liens; 9. List of subcontractors, service organizations, and principal vendors, including names, addresses, and CONTRACT CLOSEOUT .01 01700-2 ~.,~.,,",,~~~....._>.,.;,""",,","^' telephone numbers where they can be reached for emer- gency service at all times including nights, weekends, and holidays. D. Final adjustment of accounts: 1. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Archi- tect, showing all adjustments to the Contract Sum. 2. If so required, the Architect will prepare a final Change Order showing adjustments to the Contract Sum which were not made previously by Change Orders. 1.4 INSTRUCTION A. Instruct the Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance of systems, equipment, and similar items which were provided as part of the Work. END OF SECTION . I .01 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-3 SECTION 01710 CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Throughout the construction period, main- tain the buildings and site in a standard of cleanliness as described in this Section. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. In addition to standards described in this Section, comply with requirements for cleaning as described in pertinent other Sections of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conduct daily inspection, and more often if necessary, to verify that requirements for cleanliness are being met. B. In addition to the standards described in this Section, comply with pertinent requirements of governmental agen- cies having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide required personnel, equipment, and materials need- ed to maintain the specified standard of cleanliness. 2.2 COMPATIBILITY A. Use only the cleaning materials and equipment which are compatible with the surface being cleaned, as recommended by the manufacturer of the material. CLEANING .01 01710-1 ,_..."'_'_.llI'.."......f:.'.'1~ ...~*~-1'7""I'..:;"', PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: 1. Retain stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, not impeding traffic or drainage, and providing required protection of materials. 2. Do not allow accumulation of scrap, debris, waste material, and other items not required for construc- tion of this Work. 3. At least twice each month, and more often if neces- sary, completely remove all scrap, debris, and waste material from the job site. 4. Provide adequate storage for all items awaiting remov- al from the job site, observing requirements for fire protection and protection of the ecology. B. Site: 1. Daily, and more often if necessary, inspect the site and pick up all scrap, debris, and waste material. Remove such items to the place designated for their storage. 2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect all ar- rangements of materials stored on the site. Restack, tidy, or otherwise service arrangements to meet the requirements of subparagraph 3.1-A-l above. 3. Maintain the site in a neat and orderly condition at all times. C. Structures: 1. Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect the structures and pick up all scrap, debris, and waste material. Remove such items to the place designated for their storage. 2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, sweep interior spaces clean. a. "Clean," for the purpose of this subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free from dust and other material capable of being removed by use of reasonable effort and a hand-held broom. 3. As required preparatory to installation of succeeding materials, clean the structures or pertinent portions thereof to the degree of cleanliness recommended by the manufacturer of the succeeding material, using equipment and materials required to achieve the neces- sary cleanliness. 4. Following the installation of finish floor materials, clean the finish floor daily (and more often if neces- sary) at all times while work is being performed in the space in which finish materials are installed. a. "Clean," for the purpose of this subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free from foreign CLEANING .01 01710-2 material which, in the opinion of the Architect, may be injurious to the finish floor material. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. "Clean," for the purpose of this Article, and except as may be specifically provided otherwise, shall be interpre- ted as meaning the level of cleanliness generally provided by skilled cleaners using commercial quality building maintenance equipment and materials. B. Prior to completion of the Work, remove from the job site all tools, surplus materials, equipment, scrap, debris, and waste. Conduct final progress cleaning as described in Article 3.1 above. c. Site: 1. Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Archi- tect, broom clean paved areas on the site and public paved areas adjacent to the site. 2. Completely remove resultant debris. D. Structures: 1. Exterior: a. Visually inspect exterior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste materials, smudges, and other foreign matter. b. Remove all traces of splashed materials from adja- cent surfaces. c. If necessary to achieve a uniform degree of clean- liness, hose down the exterior of the structure. d. In the event of stubborn stains not removable with water, th~ Architect may require light sandblast- ing or other cleaning at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Interior: a. Visually inspect interior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste materials, smudges, and other foreign matter. b. Remove all traces of splashed material from adja- cent surfaces. c. Remove paint droppings, spots, stains, and dirt from finished surfaces. 3. Glass: Clean inside and outside. 4. Polished surfaces: To surfaces requiring routine ap- plication of buffed polish, apply the polish recom- mended by the manufacturer of the material being pol- ished. E. Schedule final cleaning as 'approved by the Architect to enable the Owner to accept a completely clean Work. CLEANING .01 01710-3 """""~~\"""",_",,,,",,.~~~,"'_""","';J"};_""" ,.;"'..'.0"''''"'>;;,.";.:,"'',...''''....,,.>',.., 3.3 CLEANING DURING OWNER'S OCCUPANCY A. Should the Owner occupy the Work or any portion thereof prior to its completion by the Contractor and acceptance by the Owner, responsibilities for interim and final' cleaning shall be as determined by the Architect in accor- dance with the General Conditions of the Contract. END OF SECTION .01 CLEANING 01710-4 SECTION 02060 BUILDING DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Demolish and remove from the site those items so indicated on the Drawings. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (No products are required in this Section) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 DEMOLITION A. General: 1. Prior to start of demolition, carefully study the Draw- ings and these Specifications. BUILDING DEMOLITION .01 02060-1 r .1 .l. .. __""".,,""''',.,,''_<i\i......0I~"~..,~~(_..~;, 2. In company with the Architect, visit the site and veri- fy the extent of demolition to be performed under this Contract. B. Using only the means and equipment approved for this pur- pose by the governmental agencies having jurisdiction, de- molish and completely remove from the job site the existing construction designated to be removed. 1. Shut off, cap, and otherwise protect existing public utility lines in accordance with the requirements of the public agency or utility having jurisdiction. 2. Completely remove footings, foundations, and above- ground and under-ground construction of all kinds. 3. Remove rocks larger than 6" diameter, roots, and de- bris. C. Demolished material shall be considered to be property of the Contractor and shall be completely removed from the job site. D. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors, and to other work being performed on or near the site. END OF SECTION .01 BUILDING DEMOLITION 02060-2 SECTION 02110 CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Clear and grub the site as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Section 02210: site Grading 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 !-1ATERIALS A. Provide materials, not specifically described but required for proper completion of the work of this Section, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. CLEARING .01 02110-1 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect existing utilities indicated or made known. B. Protect trees and shrubs, where indicated to remain, by providing a fence around the tree or shrub of sufficient distance away and of sufficient height so trees and shrubs will not be damaged in any way as part of this Work. C. Protection of persons and property: 1. Barricade open depressions and holes occurring as. part of this Work, and post warning lights on property adja- cent to or with public access. 2. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required. 3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other haz- ards created by operations under this Section. D. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors, and to other work being performed on or near the site. E. Maintain access to the site at all times. 3.3 CLEARING A. Clean out roots 1" in diameter and larger to a depth of at least 12" below the existing ground surface or subgrade of new graded surface, whichever is lower. Treat roots re- maining in the soil with a weed killer approved by the Architect. 3.4 CONSERVATION OR TOPSOIL A. After the area has been cleared of vegetation, strip the existing topsoil to the depth necessary to provide at least 6" depth of topsoil in areas shown on the Drawings to be turfed or planted, and to fill planters, without contamina- tion with subsoils. B. Stockpile in an area clear of new construction. . I C. Maintain the stockpile in a manner which will not obstruct the natural flow of drainage. 1. Maintain stockpile free from debris and trash. 2. Keep the topsoil damp to prevent dust and drying out. CLEARING .01 02110-2 3.5 DISPOSAL A. General: 1. Remove brush, grass, roots, trash, and other material from clearing operations. 2. Dispose of away from the site in a legal manner. 3. Do not store or permit debris to accumulate on the job site. B. Do not burn debris at the site. 3.6 UTILITIES A. Coordinate with utility companies and agencies as required. B. Where utility cutting, capping, or plugging is required, perform such work in accordance with requirements of the utility company or governmental agency having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION .01 CLEARING 02110-3 ..,..""",....,........" At.' -....iI._""Y.I';"i>-_~"'"'_.j-~""".,._.,' SECTION 02210 SITE GRADING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Excavate, backfill, compact, and grade the site to the elevations shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed to meet the requirements of the con- struction shown in the Contract Documents. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Use equipment adequate in size, capacity, and numbers to accomplish the wo~k in a timely manner. C. In addition to complying with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, comply with the directions of the soils engineer. 1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Fill and backfill materials: 1. Provide soil materials free from organic matter and deleterious substances, containing no rocks or lumps over 6" in greatest dimension, and with not more than SITE GRADING .01 02210-1 15% of the rocks or lumps larger than 2-3/8" in their greatest dimension. 2. Fill material is subject to the approval of the soil engineer, and is that material removed from excavations or imported from off-site borrow areas, predominantly granular non-expansive soils, free from roots and other deleterious matter. 3. Do not permit rocks having a dimension greater than 1" in the upper 12" of fill or embankment. 4. Cohesionless material used for structural backfill: Provide sand free from organic material and other for- eign matter, and as approved by the soil engineer. 2.3 TOPSOIL A. Where and if shown on the Drawings or otherwise required, provide topsoil consisting of friable, fertile soil of loamy character, containing an amount of organic matter normal to the region, capable of sustaining healthy plant life, and reasonably free from subsoils, roots, heavy or stiff clay, stones larger than 2" in greatest dimension, noxious weeds, sticks, brush, litter, and other deleterious matter. B. Obtain topsoil from sources within the project limits, or provide imported topsoil obtained from sources outside the project limits, or from both sources. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 FINISH ELEVATIONS AND LINES 3.3 PROCEDURES A. Utilities: 1. Unless shown to be removed, protect active utility SITE GRADING .01 02210-2 b'Ilii;~. If I Y',llI '~l1ilIj(" r.-"jlilli(,il'~,,,~" lines shown on the Drawings or otherwise made known to the Contractor prior to excavating. If damaged, repair or replace at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. If active utility lines are encountered, and are not shown on the Drawings or otherwise made known to the Contractor, promptly take necessary steps to assure that service is not interrupted. 3. If service is interrupted as a result of work under this Section, immediately restore service by repairing the damaged utility at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. If existing utilities are found to interfere with the permanent facilities being constructed under this Sec- tion, immediately notify the Architect and secure his instructions. 5. Do not proceed with permanent relocation of utilities until written instructions are received from the Archi- tect. B. Protection of persons and property: 1. Barricade open holes and depressions occurring as part of this Work, and post warning lights on property adja- cent to or with public access. 2. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required. 3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, washout, and other hazards created by operations under this Section. c. Dewatering: 1. Remove all water, including rain water, encountered during trench and substructure work to an approved lo- cation by pumps, drains, and other approved methods. 2. Keep excavations and site construction area free from water. D. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors, and to other work being performed on or near the site. E. Maintain access to adjacent areas at all times. 3.4 EXCAVATING A. Perform excavating of every type of material encountered within the limits of the Work to the lines, grades, and el- evations indicated and specified herein. B. Satisfactory excavated materials: 1. Transport to, and place ~n, fill or embankment areas within the limits of the Work. SITE GRADING .01 02210-3 C. Unsatisfactory excavated materials: 1. Excavate to a distance below grade as directed by the soils engineer, and replace with satisfactory materials. 2. Include excavation of unsatisfactory materials, and re- placement by satisfactory materials, as parts of the work of this Section. D. Surplus materials: 1. Dispose of unsatisfactory excavated materials, and sur- plus satisfactory excavated material, away from the site at disposal areas arranged and paid for by the Contractor. E. Excavation of rock: 1. Where rocks, boulders, granite, or similar material is encountered, and where such material cannot be removed or excavated by conventional earth moving or ripping equipment, take required steps to proceed with the gen- eral grading operations of the Work, and remove or ex- cavate such material by means which will neither cause additional cost to the Owner nor endanger buildings or structures whether on or off the site. 2. Do not use explosives without written permission from the Architect. F. Excavate and backfill in a manner and sequence that will provide proper drainage at all times. G. Ditches and gutters: 1. Cut accurately to the cross sections, grades, and ele- vations shown. 2. Maintain excavations free from detrimental quantities of leaves, sticks, trash, and other debris until com- pletion of the Work. 3. Dispose of excavated materials except do not, in any case, deposit materials less than 3'-0" from the edge of a ditch. H. Unauthorized excavation: 1. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materi- als beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific instruction from the Architect or the soils engineer. 2. Under footings, foundations, or retaining walls: a. Fill unauthorized excavation by extending the indi- cated bottom elevation of the footing or base to the excavation bottom, without altering the re- quired top elevation. b. When acceptable to the soils engineer, lean concrete fill may be used to bring bottom elevations to proper position. SITE GRADING .01 02210-4 3. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excava- tions as specified for authorized excavations, unless otherwise directed by the soils engineer. 3.5 FILLING AND BACKFILLING A. Backfill excavations as promptly as progress of the Work permits, but not until: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade: 2. Inspecting, testing, approving, and recording locations of underground utilities; 3. Concrete formwork is removed; 4. Shoring and bracing are removed, and voids have been backfilled with satisfactory materials; 5. Trash and debris have been removed; and 6. Horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally suppor- ted walls. B. Ground surface preparation: 1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materi- als, obstructions, and deleterious materials from the ground surface prior to placement of fills. 2. Plow, strip, or break up surfaces steeper than one ver- tical to four horizontal, so that fill material will bond with existing surface. 3. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "compacting" for the particular area, break up the ground surface, pulverize, moisture- condition to the optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density. 4. At exposed soils in areas to be paved, scarify to a minimum depth of 6", and recompact at a moisture con- tent that will permit proper compaction as specified for fill. SITE GRADING .01 02210-5 C. Placing and compacting: 1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in loose depth. 2. Before compacting, moisten or aerate each layer as nec- essary to provide the optimum moisture content. 3. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum density for the area. 4. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or containing frost or ice. 5. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to required elevations. 6. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying the material uniformly around the structures to approximately the same elevation in each lift. 3.6 GRADING A. General: 1. Uniformly grade the areas within limits of grading un- der this Section, including adjacent transition areas. 2. Smooth the finished surfaces within specified tolerance. 3. Compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown on the Drawings, or between such points and existing grades. 4. Where a change of slope is indicated on the Drawings, construct a rolled transition section having a minimum radius of approximately 8'-0", unless adjacent construc- tion will not permit such a transition, or if such a transition defeats positive control of drainage. B. Grading outside building lines: 1. Grade areas adjacent to buildings to achieve drainage away from the structures, and to prevent ponding. 2. Finish the surfaces to be free from irregular surface changes, and: a. Shape the surface of areas scheduled to be under walks to line, grade, and cross-section, with fin- ished surface not more than 0.10 ft above or below the required subgrade elevation. b. Shape the surface of areas scheduled to be under pavement to line, grade, and cross-section, with finished surface not more than 0.05 ft above or be- low the required subgrade elevation. 3.7 COMPACTING A. Control soil compaction during construction to provide the minimum percentage of density specified for each area as determined according to ASTM D1557. SITE GRADING .01 02210-6 B. Provide not less than the following maximum density of soil material compacted at optimum moisture content for the ac- tual density of each layer of soil material in place, and as approved by the soils engineer. 1. Structures: a. Compact the top 8" of subgrade and each layer of fill material or backfill material at 90% of maxi- mum density. 2. Lawn and unpaved areas: a. Compact the top 8" of subgrade and each layer of fill material or backfill material at 90% of maxi- mum density; b. Compact the upper 12" of filled areas, or natural soils exposed by excavating, at 85% of maximum den- sity. 3. Walks: a. Compact the top 8" of subgrade and each layer of fill material or backfill material at 90% of maxi- mum density. 4. Pavements: a. Compact the top 8" of subgrade and each layer of fill material or backfill material at 95% of maxi- mum density for cohesive soil material. C. Moisture control: 1. Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture-conditioned before compacting, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compacting operations. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil mate- rial that is too wet to permit compacting to the speci- fied density. 3. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compacting may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrow- ing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value as determined by moisture- density relation tests approved by the soils engineer. SITE GRADING .01 02210-7 3.9 MAINTENANCE A. Protection of newly graded areas: 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion, and keep free from trash and weeds; 2. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to the specified tolerances. B. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, reshape, and compact to the required density prior to further construction. END OF SECTION .01 SITE GRADING 02210-8 SECTION 02220 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Excavate, backfill, compact, and grade the site to the elevations shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed to meet the requirements of the con- struction shown in the Contract Documents. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Use equipment adequate in size, capacity, and numbers to accomplish the work of this Section in a timely manner. C. In addition to complying with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, comply with the directions of the soil engineer. 1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Fill and backfill materials: 1. Provide soil materials free from organic matter and deleterious substances, 'containing no rocks or lumps over 6" in greatest dimension, and with not more than EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING .01 02220-1 15% of the rocks or lumps larger than 2-3/8" in their greatest dimension. 2. Fill material is subject to the approval of the soil engineer, and is that material removed from excavations or imported from off-site borrow areas, predominantly granular, non-expansive soils free from roots and other deleterious matter. 3. Do not permit rocks having a dimension greater than 1" in the upper 12" of fill or embankment. 4. Cohesionless material used for structural backfill: Provide sand free from organic material and other for- eign matter, and as approved by the soil engineer. 5. Where granular base is called for under building slabs, provide aggregate complying with requirements of Sec- tion 03300 of these Specifications. 2.3 TOPSOIL A. Where and if shown on the Drawings or otherwise required, provide topsoil consisting of friable, fertile soil of loamy character, containing an amount of organic matter normal to the region, capable of sustaining healthy plant life, and reasonably free from subsoil, roots, heavy or stiff clay, stones larger than 2" in greatest dimension, noxious weeds, sticks, brush, litter, and other deleterious matter. B. Obtain topsoil from sources within the project limits, or provide imported topsoil obtained from sources outside the project limits, or from both sources. 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING .01 02220-2 l"~;""""''''",oi~~~.'.~ to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 FINISH ELEVATIONS AND LINES A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01050. 3.3 PROCEDURES A. utilities: 1. Unless shown to be removed, protect active utility lines shown on the Drawings or otherwise made known to the Contractor prior to excavating. If damaged, repair or replace at no additional cost to the OWner. 2. If active utility lines are encountered, and are not shown on the Drawings or otherwise made known to the Contractor, promptly take necessary steps to assure that service is not interrupted. 3. If service is interrupted as a result of work under this Section, immediately restore service by repairing the damaged utility at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. If existing utilities are found to interfere with the permanent facilities being constructed under this Sec- tion, immediately notify the Architect and secure his instructions. 5. Do not proceed with permanent relocation of utilites until written instructions are received from the Archi- tect. B. Protection of persons and property: 1. Barricade open holes and depressions occurring as part of the Work, and post warning lights on property adja- cent to or with public access. 2. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required. 3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, washout, and other hazards created by operations under this Section. C. Dewatering: 1. Remove all water, including rain water, encountered during trench and sub-structure work to an approved lo- cation by pumps, drains, and other approved methods. 2. Keep excavations and site construction area free from water. D. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors, and to other work being performed on or near the site. E. Maintain access to adjacent areas at all times. EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING .01 02220-3 3.4 EXCAVATING A. Perform excavating of every type of material encountered within the limits of the Work to the lines, grades, and el- evations indicated and specified herein. B. Satisfactory excavated materials: 1. Transport to, and place in, fill or embankment areas within the limits of the Work. C. Unsatisfactory excavated materials: 1. Excavate to a distance below grade as directed by the soil engineer, and replace with satisfactory materials. 2. Include excavation of unsatisfactory materials, and re- placement by satisfactory materials, as parts of the work of this Section. D. Surplus materials: 1. Dispose of unsatisfactory excavated material, and sur- plus satisfactory excavated material, away from the site at disposal areas arranged. and paid for by the Contractor. E. Excavation of rock: 1. Where rocks, boulders, granite, or similar material is encountered, and where such material cannot be removed or excavated by conventional earth moving or ripping equipment, take required steps to proceed with the gen- eral grading operations of the Work, and remove or ex- cavate such material by means which will neither cause additional cost to the Owner nor endanger buildings or structures whether on or off the site. 2. Do not use explosives without written permission from the Architect. F. Excavate and backfill in a manner and sequence that will provide proper drainage at all times. G. Borrow: 1. Obtain material required for fill or embankment in ex- cess of that produced within the grading limits of the Work from borrow areas selected and paid for by the Contractor and approved by the soil engineer. H. Ditches and gutters: 1. Cut accurately to the cross sections, grades, and ele- vations shown. 2. Maintain excavations free from detrimental quantities of leaves, sticks, trash, and other debris until com- pletion of the Work. 3. Dispose of excavated materials as shown on the Drawings EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING .01 02220-4 "t" .~~"i""",""'",-"",~",~1iJOO~"i" or directed by the soil engineer; except do not, in any case, deposit materials less than 3'-0" from the edge of a ditch. I. Unauthorized excavation: 1. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materi- als beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific instruction from the Architect or the soil engineer. 2. Under footings, foundations, or retaining walls: a. Fill unauthorized excavations by extending the indi- cated bottom elevation of the footing or base to the excavation bottom, without altering the re- quired top elevation. b. When acceptable to the soil engineer, lean concrete fill may be used to bring the bottom elevation to proper position. 3. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excava- tions as specified for authoriied excavations, unless otherwise directed by the soil engineer. J. Stability of excavations: 1. Slope sides of excavations to 1:1 or flatter, unless otherwise directed by the soil engineer. 2. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of the materials being excavated. 3. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe con- dition until completion of backfilling. K. Shoring and bracing: 1. Provide materials for shoring and bracing as may be necesary for safety of personnel, protection of work, and compliance with requirements of governmental agen- cies having jurisdiction. 2. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of the time period excavations will be open. 3. Carry shoring and bracing down as excavation progresses. L. Excavating for structures: 1. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of 0.10 ft, and extending a sufficient dis- tance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removing concrete formwork, installation of ser- vices, other construction required, and for inspection. 2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation: a. Excavate by hand tools to final grade just before concrete is placed. b. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive concrete. EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING .01 02220-5 3. Excavate for footings and foundations only after gen- eral site excavating, filling, and grading are complete. M. Excavating for pavements: 1. Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross sec- tions, elevations, and grades. N. Cold weather protection: 1. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmos- pheric temperature is less than 35 degrees F. 3.5 FILLING AND BACKFILLING A. General: 1. For each classification listed below, place acceptable soil material in layers to requir~d subgrade elevations. 2. In excavations: a. Use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 3. Under asphalt pavements: a. Use subbase materials. 4. Under building slabs: a. Use granular fill, if so called for on the Drawings, complying with aggregate acceptable under Section 03300 of these Specifications. B. Backfill excavations as promptly as progress of the Work permits, but not until completion of the following. 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing and waterproofing. 2. Inspecting, testing, approving, and recording locations of underground utilities. 3. Removing concrete formwork. 4. Removing shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Placement of horizontal bracing on horizontally suppor- ted walls. C. Ground surface preparation: 1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materi- als, obstructions, and deleterious matter from ground surface prior to placement of fills. 2. Plow, strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than one vertical to four horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing surface. 3. When existing ground surface has a density less than that speci.fied under lIcompactingll for the particular area, break up the ground surface, pulverize, moisture- condition to the optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density. EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING .01 02220-6 D. Placing and compacting: 1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in loose depth. 2. Before compacting, moisten or aerate each layer as nec- essary'to provide the optimum moisture content. 3. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum density for area. 4. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or containing frost or ice. 5. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to required elevations. 6. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying the material uniformly around the st.ructure to approximately the same elevation in each lift. 7. Where the construction includes basement or other under- ground walls having structural floors over them, do not backfill such walls until the structural floors are in place and have attained sufficient strength to support the walls. 3.6 GRADING A. General: 1. Uniformly grade the areas within limits of grading un- der this Section, including adjacent transition areas. 2. Smooth the finished surfaces within specified tolerance. 3. Compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown on the Drawings, or between such points and existing grades. 4. Where a change of slope is indicated on the Drawings, construct a rolled transition section having a minimum radius of approximately 8'0", unless adjacent construc- tion will not permit such a transition, or if such a transition defeats positive control of drainage. B. Grading outside building lines: 1. Grade areas adjacent to buildings to achieve drainage away from the structures, and to prevent ponding. 2. Finish the surfaces to be free from irregular surface changes, and: a. Shape the surface of areas scheduled to be under walks to line, grade, and cross-section, with fin- ished surface not more than 0.10 ft above or below the required subgrade elevation. b. Shape the surface of areas scheduled to be under pavement to line, grade, and cross-section, with finished surface not more than 0.05 ft above or be- low the required subgrade elevation. EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING .01 02220-7 3.7 COMPACTING A. Control soil compaction during construction to provide the minimum percentage of density specified for each area as determined according to ASTM D1557. B. Provide not less than the following maximum density of soil material compacted at optimum moisture content for the ac- tual density of each layer of soil material in place, and as approved by the soil engineer. 1. Structures: a. Compact the top 8" of subgrade and each layer of fill material or backfill material at 90% of maxi- mum density. 2. Lawn and unpaved areas: a. Compact the top 8" of subgrade and each layer of fill material or backfill material at 90% of maxi- mum density. b. Compact the upper 12" of filled areas, or natural soils exposed by excavating, at 85% of maximum den- sity. 3. Walks: a. Compact the top 8" of subgrade and each layer of fill material or backfill material at 90% of maxi- mum density. 4. Pavements: a. Compact the top 8" of subgrade and each layer of fill material or backfill material at 90% of maxi- mum density. C. Moisture control: 1. Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture-conditioned before compacting, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compacting operations. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil mate- rial that is too wet to permit compacting to the speci- fied density. 3. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compacting may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrow- ing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value as determined by moisture- density relation tests approved by the soil engineer. EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING .01 02220-8 ~.~~.w~'" 3.9 MAINTENANCE A. Protection of newly graded areas: 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion, and keep free from trash and weeds: 2. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to the specified tolerances. B. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, reshape, and compact to the required density prior to further construction. 3.10 CERTIFICATION A. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, and as a condi- tion of its acceptance, deliver to the Architect a written report from the soil engineer certifying that the compaction requirements have been obtained. State in the report the area of fill or embankment, the compaction density obtained, and the type or classification of fill material placed. END OF SECTION .01 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING 02220-9 SECTION 02221 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Trench, backfill, and compact as specified herein and as needed for installation of underground util- ities associated with the Work. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Use equipment adequate in size, capacity, and numbers to accomplish the work in a timely manner. C. In addition to complying with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, comply with the directions of the soil engineer. 1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Fill and backfill materials: 1. Provide soil materials free from organic matter and deleterious substances, containing no rocks or lumps over 6" in greatest dimension, and with not more than 15% of the rocks or lumps larger than 2-3/8" in their greatest dimension. TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING .01 02221-1 '"'O_.~;~,,^,.__.~,~_",,,~_-I>_""";""'-"' ",.,...."..,..."'....;-..,.....'''"','''''.,:.;,...-. 2. Fill material is subject to the approval of the soil engineer, and is that material removed from excavations or imported from off-site borrow areas, predominantly granular, non-expansive soil free from roots and other deleterious matter. 3. Do not permit rocks having a dimension greater than 1" in the upper 12" of fill. 4. Cohesionless material used for backfill: Provide sand free from organic material and other foreign matter, and as approved by the soil engineer. 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 FINISH ELEVATIONS AND LINES A. Comply with pertinent provision of Section 01050. 3.3 PROCEDURES A. Utilities: 1. Unless shown to be removed, protect active utility lines shown on the drawings or otherwise made known to the Contractor prior to trenching. If damaged, repair or replace at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. If active utility lines are encountered, and are not shown on the Drawings or otherwise made known to the Coritractor, promptly take necessary steps to assure that service is not interrupted. 3. If service is interrupted as a result of work under this Section, immediately restore service by repairing the damaged utility at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. If existing utilities are found to interfere with the permanent facilities being constructed under this Sec- tion, immediately notify the Architect and secure his instructions. 5. Do not proceed with permanent relocation of utilities TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING .01 02221-2 until written instructions are received from the Archi- tect. B. Protection of persons and property: 1. Barricade open holes and depressions occurring as part of the Work, and post warning lights on property adja- cent to or with public access. 2. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required. 3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, washout, and other hazards created by operations under this Section. C. Dewatering: 1. Remove all water, including rain water, encountered during trench and sub-structure work to an approved lo- cation by pumps, drains, and other approved methods. 2. Keep trenches and site construction area free from water. D. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors, and to other work being performed on or near the site. E. Maintain access to adjacent areas at all times. 3.4 TRENCHING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 02220, and the provisions of this Section. B. Provide sheeting and shoring necessary for protection of the Work and for the safety of personnel. 1. Prior to backfilling, remove all sheeting. 2. Do not permit sheeting to remain in the trenches except when, in the opinion of the Architect, field conditions or the type of sheeting or methods of construction such as use of concrete bedding are such as to make removal of sheeting impracticable. In such cases, the Archi- tect may permit portions of sheeting to be cut off and remain in the trench. C. Open cut: 1. Excavate for utilities by open cut. 2. If conditions at the site prevent such open cut, and if approved by ~he Architect, trenching may be used. 3. Short sections of a trench may be tunneled if, in the opinion of the Architec~, the conductor can be installed safely and backfill can be compacted properly into such tunnel. TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING .01 02221-3 4. Where it becomes necessary to excavate beyond the lim- its of normal excavation lines in order to remove boul- ders or other interfering objects, backfill the voids remaining after removal of the objects as directed by the soil engineer. 5. When the void is below the subgrade for the utility bedding, use suitable earth materials and compact to the relative density directed by the soil engineer, but in no case to a relative density less than 90%. 6. When the void is in the side of the utility trench or open cut, use suitable earth or sand compacted or con- solidated as approved by the soil engineer, but in no case to a relative density less than 80%. 7. Remove boulders and other interfering objects, and backfill voids left by such removals, at no additional cost to the Owner. 8. Excavating for appurtenances: a. Excavate for manholes and similar structures to a distance sufficient to leave at least 12" clear be- tween outer surfaces and the embankment or shoring that may be used to hold and protect the banks. b.. Overdepth excavation beyond such appurtenances that has not been directed will be considered unauthor- ized. Fill with sand; gravel, or lean concrete as directed by the soil engineer, and at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Trench to the minimum width necessary for proper installa- tion of the utility, with sides as nearly vertical as pos- sible. Accurately grade the bottom to provide uniform bearing for the utility. E. Depressions: 1. Dig bell holes and depressions for joints after the trench has been graded. Provide uniform bearing for the pipe on prepared bottom of the trench. 2. Except where rock is encountered, do not excavate below the depth indicated or specified. 3. Where rock is encountered, excavate rock to a minimum overdepth of 4" below the trench depth indicated or specified. F. Where utility runs traverse public property or are subject to governmental ?r utility company jurisdiction, provide depth, bedding, cover, and other requirements as set forth by legally constituted authority having jurisdiction, but in no case less than the depth shown in the Contract Documents. G. Where trenching occurs in existing lawns, remove turf in sections and keep damp. Replace turf upon completion of the backfilling. TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING .01 02221-4 H. Cover: 1. Provide minimum trench depth indicated below to main- tain a minimum cover over the top of the installed item below the finish grade or subgrade: a. Areas subject to vehicular traffic: (1) Sanitary sewers: 48"; (2) Storm drains: 36". b. Areas not subject to vehicular traffic: (1) Sanitary sewers: 30"; (2) Storm drains: 18". c. All areas: (1) Water lines: 30"; (2) Natural gas lines: 24"; (3) Electrical cables: 42"; (4) Electrical ducts: 36". d. Concrete encased: (1) Pipe sleeves for water and gas lines: 24"; (2) Sanitary sewers and storm drains: 12"; (3) Electrical ducts: 24". 2. Where utilities are under a concrete structure slab or pavement, the minimum depth need only be sufficient to completely encase the conduit or pipe sleeve, and elec- trical long-radius rigid metal conduit riser, provided it will not interfere with the structural integrity of the slab or pavement. 3. Where the minimum cover is not provided, encase the pipes in concrete as indicated. Provide concrete with a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 2500 psi. 3.5 BEDDING A. Provide bedding as indicated on the Drawings. 3.6 BACKFILLING A. General: 1. Do not completely backfill trenches until required pressure and leakage tests have been performed, and un- til the utilities systems as installed conform to the requirements specified in the pertinent Sections of these Specifications. 2. Except as otherwise specified or directed for special conditions, backfill trenches to the ground surface with selected material approved by the soil engineer. 3. Reopen trenches which have been improperly backfilled, to a depth as required for proper compaction. Refill and compact as specified, or otherwise correct to the approval of the soil engineer. 4. Do not allow or cause any of the Work performed or in- stalled to be covered up or enclosed by work of this Section prior to required inspections, tests, and ap- provals. TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING .01 02221-5 ~~ r- ~. ""'_~",-"""",,,".,,,~,_",,~.....;.",,,,,","<l>ilII;...,'~ 5. Should any of the Work be so enclosed or covered up be- fore it has been approved, uncover all such Work and, after approvals have been made, refill and compact as specified, all at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Lower portion of trench: 1. Deposit approved backfill and bedding material in layers of 6" maximum thickness, and compact with suitable tam- pers to the density of the adjacent soil, or grade as specified herein, until there is a cover of not less than 24" over sewers and 12" over other utility lines. 2. Take special care in backfilling and bedding operations to not damage pipe and pipe coatings. C. Remainder of trench: 1. Except for special materials for pavements, backfill the remainder of the trench with material free from stones larger than 6" or 1/2 the layered thickness, whichever is smaller, in any dimension. 2. Deposit backfill material in layers not exceeding the thickness specified, and compact each layer to the min- imum density directed by the soil engineer. D. Adjacent to buildings: Mechanically compact backfill with- in ten feet of buildings. E. Consolidation of backfill by jetting with water may be per- mitted, when specifically approved by the soil engineer, in areas other than building and pavement areas. 3.7 TEST FOR DISPLACEMENT OF SEWERS AND STORMDRAINS A. Check sewers and stormdrains to determine whether displace- ment has occurred after the trench has been backfilled to above the pipe and has been compacted as specified. B. Flash alight between manholes or, if the manholes have not yet been constructed, between the locations of the manholes, by means of a flashlight or by reflecting sunlight with a mirror. C. If the illuminated interior of the pipe line shows poor alignment, displaced pipes, or any other defects, correct the defects to the specified conditions and at no addition- al cost to the Owner. 3.8 PIPE JACKING A. The Contractor may, at has option, install steel pipe cas- ings, tongue-and-groove reinforced concrete pipes, and steel pipes under existing roads or pavements by jacking TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING .01 02221-6 into place using procedures approved by the governmental agencies having jurisdiction and approved by the engi- neer. 3.9 TUNNELING OPERATIONS A. The Contr3ctor may, at his option, tunnel pipes into posi- tion using procedures approved by the engineer and the governmental agencies having jurisdiction. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The engineer will inspect and approve open cuts and trenches before installation of utilities, and will make the following tests: 1. Assure that trenches are not backfilled until all tests have been completed; 2. Check backfilling for proper layer thickness and com- paction; 3. Verify that test results conform to the specified re- quirements, and that sufficient tests are performed; 4. Assure that defective work is removed and properly re- placed. END OF SECTION .01 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING 02221-7 '''.''",~.,,~''''''''<-'"' ..~. ~ ,"'V -_~. ;j>.;;ji"'-....~.""'.,."'"""'.,."'"..,"",..,,...; SECTION 02362 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PILES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide cast-in-place reinforced concrete piles complete in place as shown on the Drawings and speci- fied herein. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Section 03300: Cast-in-place concrete. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. The Owner, through the Architect, reserves the right of ap- proval of the subcontractor selected for this portion of the Work. Approval will be based, in part, on: 1. Demonstrated successful experience in performing work of a similar nature; 2. Acceptable schedule of unit prices for measurement and payment in event of changes in the work of this Section. C. In addition to complying with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, comply with directions of the soil engineer. 1. The soil engineer's log will be used as the official log on which final payment quantities will be based for the work of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PILES .01 02362-1 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Reinforcement: 1. Bars: Comply with ASTM A61S and, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or directed by the Architect, use grade 40, with deformed bars for number 3 and larger. 2. Welded wire fabric (if required): Comply with ASTM Alas. 3. Bending: Comply with pertinent provisions of ACI 318. B. Concrete: 1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or directed by the Architect, provide concrete complying with perti- nent provisions of Section 03300 of these Specifica- tions. 2. Provide slump of not more than 5". 3. Submit mix design to the Architect for review and ap- proval as required under Paragraph 1.3-C above. 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and cond~tions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 DRILLING A. General: 1. Machine drill the pile shafts to the diameters and lengths shown on the Drawings. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PILES .01 02362-2 L'-"'.'''; ..'J.....J......:...l...'illioil 2. Locate shafts within 2" of the position shown on the Drawings, and make excavations plumb within a tolerance of 1" in 101-0". 3. Maintain clear excavations, using necessary equipment to prevent fouling of concrete due to inclusion of dirt from the shaft sides while depositing concrete. 4. Where piles occur in groups, or are spaced closer than four diameters on center, drill and fill alternate piles and allow to cure at least eight hours before drilling adjacent pile. B. Inspections: 1. Secure inspection and approval of shafts by the soil engineer. 2. Provide necessary facilities, including shaft liners and drop lights when so required, to accommodate re- quired inspections. 3.3 REINFORCING A. Assemble the required reinforcement, securely wiring to- gether, and install in the shaft with concrete block spacers. 3.4 PLACING CONCRETE A. Prior to placing concrete, remove water from the shafts by pumping or other means approved by the Architect. B. Scheduling: 1. Drill and fill piles with concrete in one continuous operation. 2. Do not leave pile shafts unfilled except as approved by the soil engineer. C. Placing: 1. Place concrete in piles by the pump method, taking care to assure that concrete does not strike sides of the shaft causing segregation of materials and inclusion of dirt. 2. Support the pump hose with suitable mean& to allow the hose to hang straight down into the shaft. 3. Limit the concrete to a' 51-0" maximum free fall, with no ricochet off the reinforcing steel. D. Caving precautions: 1. If sides of shaft excavations tend to cave or ravel, provide shaft liners during placement of concrete. 2. Keep the bottom of the liner below the level of fresh concrete and slowly withdraw the liner as the shaft is filled. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PILES .01 02362-3 E. Vibration: 1. Have suitable vibration equipment immediately available as approved by the Architect. 2. Vibrate the freshly placed concrete as directed by the Architect. F. Protection: Provide suitable protection around protruding reinforcement steel. 3.5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Include within the Contract Sum an amount sufficient to cover all costs for work of this Section in the quantity shown in the Contract Documents. B. Include within the schedule of unit prices submitted under Paragr~ph 1.3-B above additive and deductive amounts for possible changes in the work of this Section. C. Payment will be made for quantities of pile length placed properly according to the Contract Documents or other auth- orized instruction. 1. Payment will not be made for damaged pile replacements, correction of defective work, or additional pile length caused by Contractor's error. 2. Payment for additional work not covered in the approved schedule of unit prices will be determined in accor- dance with the General Conditions. END OF SECTION .01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PILES 02362-4 M",.^_...,~_~~~"".~"i"',""""",~"".,,,,'''_''~,i,' SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide formwork in accordance with provi- sions of this Section for cast-in-place concrete shown on the Drawings or required by other Sections of these Speci- fications. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Section 02220: Excavating for footings. 3. Section 03200: Concrete reinforcement. 4. Section 03300: Cast-in-place concrete. 5. Section 03430: Tilt-up concrete construction. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Design of formwork is the Contractor's responsibility. C. Standards: In addition to complying with pertinent regu- lations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, com- ply with pertinent provisions of ACI 347. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit manu- facturers' data and installation instructions for proprie- tary materials including form coatings, ties, and acces- sories, and manufactured form systems if used. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. CONCRETE FORMWORK .01 03100-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM t1ATERIALS A. Except for metal forms, use new materials. Materials may be re-used during progress of the Work, provided they are completely cleaned and reconditioned, recoated for each use, and capable of producing formwork of the required quality. B. For footings and foundations, use Douglas Fir boards or planks secured to wood or steel stakes, substantially con- structed to shapes indicated and to support the required loads. C. For studs, wales, and supports, use Standard grade or bet- ter Douglas Fir, dimensions as required to support the loads but not less than 2" x 4". D. Wall forms: 1. Exposed concrete surfaces: a. Use 3/4" minimum thickness Douglas Fir plywood, grade B/B, class I or II, exterior, sanded both sides, complying with PS-l. b. Seal edges and coat both faces with colorless coating which will not affect application of ap- plied finishes. 2. Unexposed concrete surfaces: a. Use 1" x 6" shiplap Douglas Fir boards, surfaced one side and two edges, or 3/4" minimum thickness Douglas Fir plywood, grade B/B plyform class I or II, sanded both sides, mill-oiled. E. Column forms, if required: 1. For square or rectangular columns, use 2" thick Doug- las Fir planks or joists, surfaced one side and two edges, or use metal forms. 2. For round columns, use metal forms or patented paper tube forms approved by the Architect. 3. Construct column forms with tight joints and securely clamped together with steel clamps. 2.2 FORM TIES A. Hold inner and outer forms for vertical concrete together with combination steel ties and spreaders approved by the Architect. 1. Space ties symmetrically in tiers and rows, each tier plumb from top to bottom and each row level. 2. At horizontal pour lines, locate ties not more than 6" below the pour lines. Tighten after concrete has set and before the next pour is made. 3. For exposed concrete surfaces, provide form ties of CONCRETE FORMWORK .01 03100-2 removable type with she-bolts equipped with permanent plugs and a system approved by the Architect for fix- ing the plugs in place. 2.3 DESIGN OF FORMWORK A. General: 1. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork so it will safely support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied, until such loads can be suppor- ted by the concrete structure. 2. Carry vertical and lateral loads to ground by formwork system and in-place construction that has attained ad- equate strength for that purpose. 3. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. 4. Design forms and falsework to include assumed values of live load, dead load, weight of moving equipment operated on the formwork, concrete mix, height of con- crete drop, vibrator frequency, ambient temperature, foundation pressures, stresses, lateral stability, and other factors pertinent to safety of the structure during construction. 5. Provide shores and struts with positive means of ad- justment capable of taking up formwork settlement during concrete placing operations, using wedges or jacks or a combination thereof. 6. Provide trussed supports when adequate foundations for shores and struts cannot be secured. 7. Support form materials by structural members spaced sufficiently close to prevent objectionable deflec- tion. 8. Fit forms placed in successive units for continuous surfaces to accurate alignment, free from irregulari- ties, and within the allowable tolerances. 9. Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt joints, and provide backup material at joints as required to prevent leakage and prevent fins. 10. Provide camber in formwork as required for anticipated deflections due to weight and pressures of fresh con- crete and construction loads. 2.4 EARTH FORMS A. Side forms for footings may be omitted, and concrete may be placed directly against excavation, only when requested by the Contractor and approved by the Architect. B. When omission of forms is accepted, provide additional concrete 1" on each side of the minimum design pro- files and dimensions shown on the Drawings. CONCRETE FORMWORK .01 03100-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. General: 1. Construct forms complying with ACI 347 to the exact sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown, and as re- quired to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, and level and plumb work in the finished structure. 2. Provide for openings, offsets, keyways, recesses, moldings, reglets, champfers, blocking, screeds, bulk- heads, anchorages, inserts, and other features as re- quired. B. Fabrication: 1. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. 2. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where strip- ping may damage cast concrete surfaces. 3. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, re- cesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and assure ease of removal. 4. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where so di- rected by the Architect. C. Forms for exposed concrete: 1. Drill forms to suit ties being used, and to prevent leakage of cement paste around tie holes. Do not splinter forms by driving ties through improperly pre- pared holes. 2. Provide sharp, clean corners at intersecting planes, without visible edges or offsets. Back the joints with extra studs or girts to maintain true, square in- tersections. 3. Use extra studs, wales, and bracing to prevent objec- tionable bowing of forms between studs, and to avoid bowed appearance in concrete. Do not use narrow strips of form material which will produce bow. D. Corner treatment: 1. Unless shown otherwise, form champfers with 3/4"x3/4" strips, accurately formed and surfaced to produce uni- formly straight lines and tight edges. 2. Extend terminal edges to required limit, and miter the champfer strips at changes in direction. CONCRETE FORMWORK .01 03100-4 E. Locate control joints as indicated on the Drawings and, where required but not shown on the Drawings, as approved by the Architect. F. Provisions for other trades: 1. Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. 2. Verify size and location of openings, recesses, and chases with the trade requiring such items. 3. Accurately place and securely support items to be built into the concrete. 3.3 FORM COATINGS A. Coat form contact surfaces with form coating compound be- fore reinforcement is placed. 1. Do not allow excess form coating material to accumu- late in the forms or to come in contact with surfaces which will bond to fresh concrete. 2. Apply the form coating material in strict accordance with its manufacturer's recommendations. 3.4 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. General: 1. Do not disturb or remove forms until the concrete has hardened suffic'iently to permit form removal with com- plete safety. 2. Do not remove shoring until the member has acquired sufficient strength to support its own weight, the load upon it, and the added load of construction. 3. Do not strip floor slabs in less than two days. 4. Do not strip vertical concrete in less than seven days. B. Finished surfaces: 1. Exercise care in removing forms from finished concrete surfaces so that surfaces are not marred or gouged, and that corners are true, sharp, and unbroken. 2. Release sleeve nuts or clamps, and pull the form ties neatly. 3. Do not permit steel spreaders, form ties, or other metal to project from, or be visible on, any concrete surface except where so shown on the Drawings. 4. Solidly pack form tie holes, rod holes, and similar holes in the concrete. For packing, use the cement grout specified in Section 03300 of these Specifica- tions, flushing the holes with water before packing, screeding off flush, and grinding to match adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION .01 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03100-5 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide cast-in-place concrete, including formwork and reinforcement, where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Comply with "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings," ACI 301, except as may be modified herein. C. Provide access for, and cooperate with, the inspector and testing laboratory described in Section 01410 of these Specifications. D. Do not commence placement of concrete until mix designs have been reviewed and approved by the Architect and all governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and until cop- ies of the approved mix designs ar~ at the job site and the batch plant. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Secure concrete mix designs from the testing laboratory in accordance with provisions of Section 01410, and submit to the Architect for review and approval. B. Distribute approved mix designs to testing laboratory, batch plant, job site, and governmental agencies having jurisdiction. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE .02 03300-1 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS A. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork so it will safely support vertical and lateral loads which might be applied until such loads can be supported safely by the concrete structure. B. Construct forms to the exact sizes, shapes, lines, and di- mensions shown, and as required to obtain accurate align- ment, location, grades, and level and plumb work in the finished structure. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with the following as minimums: 1. Bars: ASTM A61S, grade 60 unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, using deformed bars for number 3 and larger; 2. Welded wire fabric: ASTM A18S; 3. Bending: ACI 318. B. Fabricate reinforcement to the required shapes and dimen- sions, within fabrication tolerances stated in the CRSI "Manual of Standard Practices." C. Do not use reinforcement having any of the following de- fects: 1. Bar lengths, depths, or bends exceeding the specified fabricating tolerances; 2. Bends or kinks not indicated on the Drawings or re- quired for this Work; 3. Bars with cross-section reduced due to excessive rust or other causes. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE .02 03300-2 2.4 CONCRETE A. Comply with the following as minimums: 1. Portland cement: ASTM e150, type I or II, low alkali. 2. Aggregate, general: a. ASTM C30, uniformly graded and clean; b. Do not use aggregate known to cause excessive shrinkage. 3. Aggregate, coarse: Crushed rock or washed gravel with minimum size between 3/4" and 1-1/2", and with a maximum size number 4. 4. Aggregate, fine: Natural washed sand of hard and dura- ble particles varying from fine to particles passing a 3/8" screen, of which at least 12% shall pass a 50-mesh screen. 5. Water: Clean and potable. B. Provide concrete with the compressive strengths shown on the Drawings. When such strengths are not shown on the Drawings, provide the following as minimums: 1. Concrete footings and belled caissons: 3000 psi 2. Concrete walls: 3000 psi 3. Concrete walks and slabs on grade: 2000 psi C. Surface treatment: 1. ~'lhere "sealer" or "hardener" is called for on the Draw- ings, provide "Ashford Formula" manufactured by Cure- crete Chemical Company of Orem, Utah and distributed by Martech Associates, 19836 Vintage Street, Chatsworth, California 91311 (213) 993-1163, and provide the manu- facturer's standard written 20 year/IO year warranty. 2. Except as otherwise directed by the Architect or shown on the Drawings, on all other concrete slab, driveway, and walkway surfaces provide "Hunt TLF" curing agent manufactured by Hunt Process Co., Inc. 2.5 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE .02 03300-3 ",,~..... . ~,,'" t '"'Il "$ ....l~~__,,~~_~'" 3.2 REINFORCING A. Comply with the fOllowing, as well as the specified stan- dards, for details and methods of reinforcing placement and supports. 1. Clean reinforcement and remove loose dust and mill scale, earth, and other materials which reduce bOnd or destroy bond with concrete. 2. Position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by forms, construction, and the concrete placement operations. 3. Place reinforcement to obtain the required coverages for concrete protection. 4. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as prac- ticable, lapping adjoining pieces one full mesh mini- mum. 5. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, or required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction, lap bars 24 diameters minimum. 3.3 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Do not embed piping, other than electrical conduit, in structural concrete. 1. Locate conduit to maintain maximum strength of the structure. 2. Increase the thickness of the concrete if the outside diameter of the conduit exceeds 30% of the thickness of the concrete. B. Set bolts, inserts, and other required items in the con- crete, accurately secured so they will not be displaced, and in the precise locations needed. 3.4 MIXING CONCRETE A. Transit mix the concrete in accordance with provisions of ASTM C94. B. Mixing water: 1. At the batch plant, withhold 2-1/2 gal of water per cu yd of concrete. 2. Upon arrival at the job site, add all or part of the withheld water (as required for proper slump) before the concrete is discharged from the mixer. 3. Mix not less than five minutes after the withheld water has been added, and not less than one minute of that time immediately prior to discharge of the batch. 4. Unless otherwise directed, provide 15 minutes total mixing time per batch after first addition of water. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE .02 03300-4 C. Do not use concrete that has stood for over 30 minutes af- ter leaving the mixer, or concrete that is not placed with- in 60 minutes after water is first introduced into the mix. 3.5 PLACING CONCRETE A. Preparation: 1. Remove foreign matter accumulated in the forms. 2. Rigidly close openings left in the formwork. 3. Wet wood forms sufficiently to tighten up cracks. Wet other material sufficiently to maintain workability of the concrete. 4. Use only clean tools. B. Conveying: 1. Perform concrete placing at such a rate that concrete which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic. 2. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final location so as to avoid separation due to rehandling and flowing. 3. Do not use concrete which becomes non-plastic and un- workable, or does not meet required quality control limits, or has been contaminated by foreign materials. 4. Remove rejected concrete from the job site. c. Placing concrete in forms: 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers not deeper than 24", and avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Remove temporary spreaders in forms when concrete has reached the elevation of the spreaders. D. Placing concrete slabs: 1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. 2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge, and then strike off. 3. Use bullfloats or darbies to smooth the surface, leav- ing the surface free from bumps and hollows. 4. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surface prior to start of finishing operations. 3.6 CONSOLIDATION A. General: 1. Consolidate each layer of concrete immediately after placing, by use of internal concrete vibrators supple- mented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. 2. Do not vibrate forms or reinforcement. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside the forms. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE .02 03300-5 3.7 JOINTS A. Construction joints: 1. Do not use horizontal construction joints except as may be shown on the Drawings. . 2. If additional construction joints are found to be re- quired, secure the Architect's approval of joint design and location prior to start of concrete placement. B. Expansion joints: 1. Do not permit reinforcement or other embedded metal items that are being bonded with concrete (except dowels in floors bonded on only one side of the joints) to ex- tend continuously through any expansion joint. 2. Fill expansion joints full depth with expansion joint material approved by the Architect. 3.8 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Except as may be shown otherwise on the Drawings, provide the following finishes at the indicated locations. 1. Scratch finish: a. Apply to monolithic slab surfaces that are to re- ceive concrete floor topping or mortar setting bed. 2. Float finish: a. Apply to monolithic slab surfaces that are to re- ceive trowel finish and other finishes specified hereinafter, and to slab surfaces which are to be covered with insulation. 3. Trowel finish: a. Apply to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed to view, unless otherwise shown, and to slab surfaces that are to be covered with resili- ent flooring, carpeting, paint, or other thin-film finish coating system. 4. Non-slip broom finish: a. Apply to walks, stairs, drives, ramps, and similar pedestrian and vehicular areas. 3.9 REMEDIAL WORK A. Repair or replace deficient work as directed by the Archi- tect and at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION .02 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-6 SECTION 03345 CONCRETE FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide finishes on cast-in-place concrete as called for on the Drawings, specified herein, and need- ed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Section 03300: Cast-in-place concrete. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Except as may be modified herein or otherwise directed by the Architect, comply with ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. CONCRETE FINISHING .01 03345-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Carefully study the Drawings and these Specifications, and determine the location, extent, and type of re- quired concrete finishes. 2. As required for the Work, provide the following mate- rials, or equals approved in advance by the Architect. B. Concrete materials: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 03300, except as 'may be modified herein. C. Liquid bonding agent: "Weld-Crete," manufactured by the Larsen Products Corporation. D. Curing and protection paper: 1. Approved products: a. "Sisalkraft, Orange Label"; b. Equal products complying with ASTM C17l. 2. Where concrete will be exposed and will be subjected to abrasion, such as floor slabs, use non-staining paper such as "Sisalkraft, Seekure 896," or equal paper faced with polyethylene film. E. Liquid curing agents: 1. Where application of specified finish materials will be inhibited by use of curing agents, cure the surface by water only; do not use chemical cure. 2. For curing other areas, use "Hunt TLF" manufactured by Hunt Process Company, Inc. F. Floor sealer: Acceptable products: 1. "Superkote Special Clear Sealer" manufactured by Ven- Chern Company, Inc., P. O. Box 3186, Santa Barbara, California 93105 (213) 342-1195. 2. "Supershield" manufactured by James Darcey Company, Inc., 19712 Merridy Street, Chatsworth, California 91311 (213) 349-3705. G. Slip-resistant abrasive aggregate: 1. Provide aluminum oxide, 14/36 grading. 2. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Carborundum Company; b. Norton Company; c. L. M. Scofield Company. 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. CONCRETE FINISHING .01 03345-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of ' this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES A. General: 1. After removal of forms', give the concrete surfaces one or more of the finishes specified below where so indi- cated on the Drawings. 2. Revise the finishes as needed to secure the approval of the Architect. B. As-cast finish: 1. Rough form finish: a. Leave surfaces with the texture imparted by forms, except patch tie holes and defects. b. Remove fins exceeding 1/4" in height. 2. Smooth form finish: a. Coordinate as necessary to secure form construc- tion using smooth, hard, uniform surfaces, with number of seams kept to a practical minimum and in a uniform and orderly pattern. b. Patch tie holes and defects. c. Remove fins completely. C. Rubbed finishes: 1. Provide these finishes only where specifically called for, and then only on a "smooth form finish" base as described above. 2. Smooth rubbed finish: a. Produce on newly hardened concrete no later than the day following form removal. b. Wet the surfaces, and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until uniform color and texture are produced. c. Do not use a cement grout other than the cement paste drawn from the concrete itself by the rub- bing process. 3. Grout cleaned finish: a. Do not start cleaning operations until all contig- uous surfaces to be cleaned are completed and ac- cessible. b. Do not permit cleaning as the work progresses. c. Mix one part portland cement and 1-1/2 parts fine sand with sufficient water to produce a grout hav- ing the consistency of thick paint. d. Substitute white portland cement for part of the CONCRETE FINISHING .01 03345-3 gray portland cement as required to produce a color matching the color of surrounding concrete, as determined by a trial patch. e. Wet the surface of the concrete sufficiently, to prevent absorption of water from the grout, and apply the grout uniformly with brushes or spray gun. f. Immediately after applying the grout, scrub the surface vigorously with a cork float or stone to coat the surface and fill all air bubbles and holes. g. While the grout is still plastic, remove all ex- cess grout by working the surface with a rubber float, sack, or other means. h. After the surface whites from drying (about 30 minutes at normal temperatures), rub vigorously with clean burlap. i. Keep the surface damp for at least 36 hours after final rubbing. 4. Cork floated finish: a. Remove forms at an early stage, and no later than three days after placement of concrete. b. Remove ties. c. Remove burrs and fins. d. Mix one part portland cement and one part fine sand with sufficient water to produce a stiff mor- tar. e. Dampen the wall surface. f. Apply mortar with a firm rubber float or with a trowel, filling all surface voids. g. Compress mortar into voids using a slow-speed grinder or stone. h. If the mortar surface dries too rapidly to permit proper compacting and finiShing, apply a small amount of water with a fog sprayer. i. Produce the final texture with a cork float using a swirling motion. D. Unspecified finish: If the finish of formed surfaces is not specifically called out elsewhere in the Contract Doc- uments, provide the following finishes as applicable. 1. Rough form finish: a. For all concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. 2. Smooth form finish: a. For all concrete surfaces exposed to public view. CONCRETE FINISHING .01 03345-4 3.3 FINISHING SLABS A. Definition of finishing tolerances: 1. "Class A": True plane within 1/8" in ten feet as de- termined by a ten foot straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction. 2. "Class B": True plane within 1/4" in ten feet as de- termined by a ten foot straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction. 3. "Class C": True plane within 1/4" in two feet as de- termined by a two foot straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction. . I . B. Scratched finish: After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled to a Class C toler- ance, roughen the surface with stiff brushes or rakes be- fore the final set. C. Floated finish: 1. After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled, do not work the concrete fur- ther until ready for floating. 2. Begin floating when the water sheen has disappeared and when the surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation. 3. During or after the first floating, check the plane- ness of the surface with a ten foot straightedge ap- plied at not less than two different angles. 4. Cut down high spots and fill low spots, and produce a surface with a Class B tolerance throughout. 5. Refloat the slab immediately to a uniform sandy tex- ture. D. Troweled finish: 1. Provide a floated finish as described above, followed by a power troweling and then a hand troweling. a. Produce an initial surface which is relatively free from defects, but which still may show some trowel marks. b. Provide hand troweling when a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is moved over the sruface. c. Thoroughly consolidate the surface by hand trowel- ing. 2. Provide a finished surface essentially free from trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and in a plane of Class A tolerance. a. For concrete on metal deck, Class B plane toler- ance is acceptable. b. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, use grinding or other means as necessary and re- move all defects of such magnitude as would show through the floor covering. CONCRETE FINISHING .01 03345-5 E. Broom finish: 1. Provide a floated finish as described above. 2. While the surface is still plastic, provide a textured finish by drawing a fiber bristle broom uniformly over the surface. 3. Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, provide the texturing in one direction only. 4. Provide "light," "medium," or "coarse" texturing as directed by the Architect or otherwise called for on the Drawings. F. Exposed aggregate finish: 1. Provide a floated finish as described above. 2. While the surface is still plastic, embed an approved aggregate uniformly into the surface by light tamping. 3. Provide complete coverage to the depth of a single stone. 4. Float the surface until the embedded stone is fully coated with mortar and the surface has been brought to a true plane with Class B tolerance. 5. After the matrix has hardened sufficiently to prevent dislodgement of aggregate, begin exposure. a. Allow copious quantities of water, without force, to flow over the surface of the concrete while the matrix encasing the aggregate is removed by brush- ing with a fine bristle brush. b. Continue this operation until the aggregate is uniformly exposed but not dislodged. 6. An approved chemical retarder sprayed onto the freshly floated surface may be used to extend the working time for exposure of aggregate. G. Unspecified finish: If the finish of slab surfaces is not specifically called for elsewhere in the Contract Docu- ments, provide the following finishes as applicable: 1. Scratched finish: a. For surfaces scheduled to receive bond-applied cementitious applications. 2. Floated finish: a. For surfaces intended to receive roofing. 3. Troweled finish: a. For floors intended as walking surfaces; b. Floors scheduled to receive floor coverings or waterproof membrane; c. Parking areas; 4. Broom finish: a. Garage ramps. 5. Non-slip finish: a. Exterior platforms, steps, and landings; b. Interior and exterior pedestrian ramps. CONCRETE FINISHING .01 03345-6 3.4 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Beginning immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot and cold tempera- tures, and mechanical injury. B. Preservation of moisture: 1. Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, apply one of the following procedures to concrete not in contact with forms, immediately after completion of placement and finishing. a. ponding or continuous sprinkling: b. Application of absorptive mats or fabric kept con- tinuously wet; c. Application of sand kept continuously wet: d. Continuous application of steam (not exceeding 150 degrees F) or mist spray: e. Application of waterproof sheet materials speci- fied in Part 2 of this Section: f. Application of other moisture-retaining covering as approved by the Architect: g. Application of the curing agent specified in Part 2 of this Section or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Where forms are exposed to the sun, minimize moisture loss by keeping the forms wet until they can be re- moved safely. 3. Cure concrete by preserving moisture as specified above for at least seven days. C. Temperature, wind, and humidity: 1. Cold weather: 2. Hot weather: When necessary, provide wind breaks, fog spraying, shading, sprinkling, ponding, or wet cover- ing with a light colored material, applying as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing operations will allow. CONCRETE FINISHING .01 03345-7 3. Rate of temperature change: Keep the temperature of the air immediately adjacent to the concrete during and immediately following the curing period as uniform as possible and not exceeding a change of 5 degrees F in anyone hour period, or 50 degrees F in any 24 hour period. D. Protection from mechanical injury: 1. During the curing period, protect the concrete from damaging mechanical disturbances such as heavy shock, load stresses, and excessive vibration. 2. Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage from construction equipment7 materials, and methods, by ap- plication of curing procedures, and by rain and run- ning water. 3. Do not load self-supporting structures in such a way as to overstress the concrete. END OF SECTION .01 CONCRETE FINISHING 03345-8 SECTION 03412 PRECAST CONCRETE DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide precast concrete deck where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not neces- sarily limited to: 1. Engineering design: 2. Delivery and erection; 3. Alignment and grouting of edge-joint keyways. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Section 03300: Cast-in-place concrete. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section: 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to 'prove compliance with the specified requirements; 3. Shop Drawings showing complete information for fabri- cating and erecting the work of this Section including, but not necessarily limited to: a. Member dimensions and cross section; b. Location, size, and type of reinforcement; c. Special reinforcement and lifting devices neces- sary for handling and erecting; d. Welding connections, if any, indicated by standard AWS symbols; PRECAST CONCRETE DECK .01 03412-1 .~- e. Location and details of anchoring devices that are to be embedded in other construction; f. Similar data required to fully describe the pro- posed method of fabricating, erecting, and in- stalling the work of this Section. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESIGN A. Provide the services of an engineer properly licensed to perform such work at the location of the Work, and prepare complete engineering design in accordance with the shape and dimensions shown on the Drawings. 1. Secure all required design approvals prior to submit- tal of data described in Paragraph 1.3-B above. 2. Affix the signature and verification of the engineer on all design data submitted to the Architect. 3. Incorporate into the design such pertinent notes as are shown on the Drawings. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Provide "Spancrete" precast concrete planks and beams with the following attributes: 1. Plank strength: 4000 psi at 28 days; 2. Beam strength: 5000 psi at 28 days; 3. Portland cement: Comply with ASTM C150, type I, II, or III; 4. Aggregate: a. Dense and natural aggregate complying with ASTM C33, and approved for fire-protective properties; b. Lightweight (when required): Expanded calcined clay or shale of approved manufacture and comply- ing with ASTM C33; 5. Prestressing strand: Comply with ASTM A416. 2.3 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PRECAST CONCRETE DECK .01 03412-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 FABRICATION A. Manufacture the work of this Section in strict accordance with the approved Shop Drawings and the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for in- terface with the work of this Section. B. Provide a clean, uniform, level bearing surface for each item being installed. Where edge-joint keyways will be utilized for insertion of ceiling support hangers, provide notice to and access for trades placing such hangers prior to keyway grouting. C. Align the deck units, and grout the keyways using a mix- ture of one part portland cement and three parts of the approved aggregate. D. Where welding is required, use the electric shielded-arc method, or other process complying with the AWS Standard Code, and as shown on the approved Shop Drawings. E. Leave the work of this Section as a smooth and solid plat- form ready to accept placement of finished cast-in-place concrete topping. END OF SECTION .01 PRECAST CONCRETE DECK 03412-3 ~.-,-"_....l!..r'<;>''''''' SECTION 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide concrete unit masonry where shown o~ the Drawings~ as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. C. Mock-ups: 1. At an area on the site where approved by the Archi- tect, provide mock-up concrete unit masonry panels. a. Make each mock-up panel approximately 4'-0" high and 6'-0" long. b. Provide one mock-up panel for each combination of concrete masonry unit, bond pattern, mortar color, and joint type used in the Work. c. The mock-up panels may be part of the Work, and may be incorporated into the finished Work, when so approved in advance by the Architect. d. Revise as necessary to secure the Architect's ap- proval. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY .01 04220-1 2. If the mock-up panels are not permitted to be part of the finished Work, completely demolish and remove them from the job site upon completion and acceptance of other work of this Section. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. B. Store masonry units above ground on level platforms which allow air circulation under the stacked units. C. Cover and protect against'wetting prior to use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Provide lightweight hollow load-bearing concrete masonry units complying with ASTM C90, grade N, type I, in color "natural gray." B. Dimensions: 1. Provide units of the dimensions shown on the Drawings. 2. Where dimensions are not shown on the Drawings, pro- vide units having nominal face dimensions of 16" long by 8" high by the depth shown or otherwise required. C. Provide accessory shapes as indicated or otherwise re- quired. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT AND ACCESSORIES A. Comply with the following as minimums. 1. Bars: ASTM A61S, grade 40, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, using deformed bars for number 3 and larger. .2. Bending: ACI 318. 3. Wire reinforcement: ASTM A82. B. Fabricate reinforcement in accordance with recommendations contained in CRSI "Manual of Standard Practices." 2.3 MORTAR A. Ingredients: 1. Portland cement: Comply with ASTM CISO, type I. 2. Lime: a. Provide hydrated lime complying with ASTM C207, or quicklime complying with ASTM CS. b. When quicklime is used, slake and then screen through a 16 mesh sieve. After slaking and .01 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04220-2 W*,"_-"",,,".~.,,- . screening, but before using, store and protect for not less than ten days. 3. Aggregate: Provide clean, sharp, well graded aggregate free from injurious amounts of dust, lumps, shale, al- kali, surface coatings, and organic matter, and comply- ing with ASTM C144. 4. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures unless specifically approved in advance by the Architect. 5. Water: Provide water free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, and organic materials. B. Mixing: I." Provide mortar type "M" or type "S", as designated on the Drawings or otherwise directed by the Architect, and in accordance with ASTM C270. 2. Proportions: a. For type "M" mortar, provide one part portland ce- ment to 1/4 part hydrated lime and 3-3/4 parts sand by volume. b. For type "s" mortar, provide one part portland ce- ment to 1/2 part hydrated lime and 4-1/2 parts sand by volume. 3. Mechanically mix in a batch mixer for not less than three minutes, using only sufficient water to produce a mortar which is spreadable and of a workable consistency. 4. Retemper mortar with water as required to maintain high plasticity. a. On mortar boards, retemper only by adding water within a basin formed with mortar, and by working the mortar into the water. b. Discard and do not use mortar which is unused after 1-1/2 hours following initial mixing. 2.4 GROUT A. Ingredients: 1. Portland cement: Comply with ASTM ClSO, type I. 2. Aggregate: Provide clean, sharp, well graded aggregate free from injurious amounts of dust, lumps, shale, al- kali, surface coatings, and organic matter. 3. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures unless specifically approved in advance by the Architect. 4. Water: Provide water free from injurious amounts of acids, alkalis, and organic materials. B. Mixing: 1. Provide "fine grout" or "coarse grout" as designated on the Drawings or otherwise directed by the Architect, and in accordance with ASTM C476. 2. When the minimum grout compressive strength is required to be more than 2000 psi, provide laboratory design mix CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY '.01 04220-3 prepared as required for design mixes of concrete under Section 03300 of these Specifications. 3. Proportions: a. For "fine grout," provide one part portland cement to 2-1/4 parts minimum to 3 parts maximum of damp loose sand, with sufficient water to achieve fluid consistency. b. For "coarse grout," provide one part portland cement to 3 parts maximum of damp loose sand to two parts coarse aggregate, with sufficient water to achieve fluid consistency. 4. "Fluid consistency" is interpreted as meaning as fluid as possible for pour~ng intimately in place without segregation. C. Use "fine grout" where called for on the Drawings, where the grout space is less than 3" in its least dimension, and where otherwise directed by the Architect or required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not place masonry units when air temperature is below 40 degrees F. B. Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when erected in ambient air temperature of 99 de- grees F in the shade, with relative humidity less than 50%. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Do not commence installation of the work of this Sec- tion until horizontal and vertical alignment of founda- tion is within 1" of plumb and the lines shown on the Drawings. 2. Lay only dry masonry units. 3. Use masonry saws to cut and fit masonry units. 4. Set units plumb, true to line, and with level courses accurately spaced. 5. Clean the top surface of foundation free from dirt, de- bris, and laitance, and expose the aggregate prior to start of installing first course. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY .01 04220-4 6. Accurately fit the units to plumbing, ducts, openings, and other interfaces, neatly patching all holes. 7. Keep the walls continually clean, preventing grout and mortar stains. If grout does run over, clean immediately. B. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide running bond with vertical jo~nts located at center of masonry units in the alternate course below. C. Do not use chipped or broken units. If such units are dis- covered in the finished wall, the Architect may require their immediate removal and replacement with new units at no additional cost to the,Owner. D. Laying up: 1. Place units in mortar with full shoved bed and head joints. 2. Align vertical cells of hollow units to maintain a clear and unobstructed system of flues. 3. Hold racking to an absolute minimum. 4. Provide cleanouts at the bottom of each cell of hollow units for removing mortar droppings. Do not close the cleanouts until they have been inspected and approved by the Architect. E. Reinforcement: 1. Provide reinforcement as shown on the Drawings, fully embedded in grout and not in mortar or mortar joints. 2. Provide required metal accessories to ensure adequate alignment of steel during grout filling operations. F. Tooling: 1. Tool joints to a dense, smooth surface. 2~ Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide joints of "concave" pattern throughout. 3.4 GROUTING A. Perform grouting in strict accordance with the provisions of the governing building code. 1. Solidly fill vertical cells containing reinforcement. 2. Consolidate grout at time of pour by puddling with a mechanical vibrator, filling all cells of the masonry, and then reconsolidating later by puddling before the plasticity is lost. 3.5 CLEANING A. Inspection and adjustment: 1. Upon completion of the work of this Section, make a thorough inspection of installed masonry and verify that units have been installed in accordance with the provisions of this Section. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY .01 04220-5 2. Make necessary adjustments. B. Clean surfaces of masonry as required for proper applica- tion of the specified finishes. END OF SECTION I , .01 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04220-6 <'''-~ ,..' SECTION 05130 ALUMINUM RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide aluminum railings as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation shall be accomplished either by Mann trained personnel or equal . in strict accordance with Mann ~peci- fied procuders and shop drawings. B. Upon completion of installation the railing contractor shall clean all work for inspection adn approval. However, after installation, the General Contractor shall be responsible for protecting the railings during the balance of construction. ALuminum shall be cleaned with plain water containing a mild soap or detrgent, or white gasoline, kerosene or distillate. No abrasive agent shall be used. Note: Any railing exposed to ocean air or harmful chemical environments must be periodically cleaned with water and mild soap and waxed. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section~ 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements: 3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades: 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 05310-1 PART II - PRODUCTS 2. 1 MATERIM,S A. structural extrusions shall be 6063-T6. All others 6063-T5. castings shall be of high strength aluminum alloy and as cast. All faRteners shall be 300 series stainless steel or aluminum rivets. 2.2 CONSTRUCTION A. Assembly shall be in a neat workmanlike manner with the M.t.G. and Tleliarc welding process. Horizontal channels shall be punched to receive spindles and all welds in this application shall be concealed from view. (Lower channels particularly on stairs shall be further bottom covered by means of a Rnap in channel cover plate to eliminate un- sightly view of welds observed when ascending stairs.) Use of this cover plate must be specified when ordering. All posts shall be firmly welded to upper cap and lower channel members, to assure fixed fastening for the life of the rail. Corners shall be hairline fitted by mitre and further weld- ed to obtain maximum assurance of strength through usuage and normal building contraction and expansion. All splices shall be accomplished by overlapping the cap of one section to the other with a sleeve insert and further secured by means of stainless steel fasteners or non-ferrous expand- ing rivets. (Railing in contact with masonry surfaces part- icularly at wall fastenings shall be protected from direct contact with walls by means of surface co.tings and fast- ened by means of stainless drive pins or shield and lag com- bination.) All rail posts drilled into masonry decks or with the plastic sleeve shall be a minimum depth of 3" and shall be set by means of Por Rok Cement or other standard approved mat- erials qualified by tests submitted to local government build- ing departments. Holes shall be further be capped with masonry material similar to the parent deck to prevent weathering to the initial setting material. 2.3 FINISHES A. Mann applied thermosetting Duracron Super 600 over conversion coating. Meets AAMA 603 Spec. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM RAILINGS 05310-2 SECTION 06010 LUMBER 1.1 PAR'f 1 - GENERAl.. DESCRIPTION A. B. 1.2 A. 1.3 .01 Work included: Provide \'Iood, nails, bolts, scre\olS, framing anchors and other rough hardware, and other items required for rough and finish caFpentry as shown on the Drawings, specified herein, and needed for a complete and proper in- stallation. Related \1ork: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. QUALITY ASSURANCE Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Codes and standards: 1. In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regu- lations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, unless otherwise specifically directed or permitted by the Architect comply with: a. "Product Use Hanual" of the Western ~lood products Association for selection and use of products in- cluded in that manual; b. "Plywood Specification and Grade Guide" of the American PIY\'lOOd Association. PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. B. Protection: 1. Deliver the materials to the job site and store, in a safe area, out of the ~lay of traffic, and shored up off the ground surface. 2. Protect metals with adequate waterproof outer wrapping. 3. Use extreme care in off loading of lumber to prevent damage, splitting, and breaking of materials. LUMBER 06010-1 2. I PART 2 - PRODUCTS GRADE STAf.1PS A. B. C. 2.2 Identify framing lumber by the grade stamp of the West Coast Lumber Inspection Dureau, or such other grade stamp as is approved in advance by the Architect. Identify plywood as to species, grade, and glue type by thestamp of the AmericanPlyvood Association. Identify other materials of this Section by the appropriate stamp of the agency approved in advance by the Architect. t-tATERIALS A. Provide materials in the quantities needed for the ~ork shown on the Drawings, and meeting or exceeding the follou- in standards of quality: 1. Materials for framing: Roof trusses: Pre-engineered trusses by Alpine Ind. or equol. Roof rafters,and trusses and floor' joists: #2 p.t. pine Interior non-load bearing wall: ~2 pressure treated pine. 2. Material for sheathing: a. Sub flooring: 3/4" C.D. plywood; P.T. b. Wall sheathing: 1/2" C.D. plywood; c. Roof deck: 5/0" C.D. plyvlOod.: P.T. 3. Material for siding: b. Trim: 5/4 clear fir; c. Facia: Ix varies clear fir; d. Soffit: 3/4" C D plywood; P.T. e. Cornice: 5/4x varies clear fir. 4. Materials for interior door and \~indow trim and base- boards: lx4 clear fir 5. Material for decking: '1 p.t. pihe. 7. Wood preservative: Ammoniacalcopper arsenite, or 5% solution of pentachlorophenol. B. Rough hardwarn: a. Steel ite ,: (1) Comply with ASTM A7 or ASTM A3G. (2) Use galvanized at exterior locations. b. Machine bolts: Comply with ASTM A307. c. Lag bolts: Comply with Fed Spec FF-B-561. d. Na i 1 s : (1) Use common except as othen:ise noted; (2) Comply with Fed Spec FF-N-l; (3) Use galvanized at exterior locations. e. Joist hangers: Simpson, Teco, or equal as approved by the Architect. Lut-mER .01 06010-2 2.3 A. OTHER MATERIALS Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. 3.1 PART 3 - EXECUTION DELIVERIES A. 3.2 .01 Stockpile materials suf~iciently in advance of need to as- sure their availability 1n a timely manner for this Work. B. Make as many trips to the job site as are needed to deliver materials of this Section in a timely manner to ensure or- derly progress of the Work. COMPLIANCE A. Do not permit materials not complying with the provisions of this Section to be brought onto or to be stored at the job site. B. Promptly remove non-complying materials from the job site and replace with materials meeting the requirements of this Section. END OF SECTION LUMBER 06010-3 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Install wood framing as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, and needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Section 06010: Lumber. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING A. comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (No products are required in this Section) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. ROUGH CARPENTRY .01 06100-1 3.2 WORKMANSHIP A. Produce joints which are tight, true, and well nailed, with members assembled in accordance with the Drawings and with pertinent codes and regulations. B. Selection of lumber pieces: 1. Carefully select the members. 2. Select individual pieces so that knots and obvious de- fects will not interfere with placing bolts or proper nailing, and will allow making of proper connections. 3. Cut out and discard defects which render a piece unable to serve its intended function. 4. Lumber may be rejected by the Architect, whether or not it has been installed, for excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus, or mold, as well as for improper cutting and fitting. C. Do not shim any framing component. 3.3 GENERAL FRAMING A. General: 1. In addition to framing operations normal to the fabri- cation and erection indicated on the Drawings, install wood blocking and backing required for the work of other trades. 2. Set horizontal and sloped members with crown up. 3. Do not notch, cut, or bore members for pipes, ducts, or conduits, or for other reasons except as shown on the Drawings or as specifically approved in advance by the Architect. B. Bearings: 1. Make bearings full unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Finish bearing surfaces on which structural members are to rest so as to give sure and even support. 3. Where framing members slope, cut or notch the ends as required to give uniform bearing surface. 3.4 BLOCKING AND BRIDGING A. Install blocking as required to support items of finish and to cut off concealed draft openings, both vertical and hor- izontal, between ceiling and floor areas. B. Bridging: 1. Install wood cross bridging (not less than 2" x 3" nom- inal), metal cross bridging of equal strength, or solid blocking between joists where the span exceeds 8' -0". ROUGH CARPENTRY .01 06100-2 2. Provide maximum distance of 8"-0" between a line of bridging and a bearing. 3. Cross bridging may be omitted for roof and ceiling joists where the omission is permitted by code, except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 4. Install solid blocking between joists at points of sup- port and wherever sheathing is discontinuous. Blocking may be omitted where joists are supported on metal hangers. 3.5 ALIGNMENT A. On framing members to receive a finished surface, align the finish subsurface to vary not more than 1/8" from the plane of surfaces of adjacent furring and framing members. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD SHEATHING A. Placement: 1. Place plywood with face grain perpendicular to supports and continuously over at least two supports, except where otherwise shown on the Drawings. 2. Center joints accurately over supports, unless other- wise shown on the Drawings. B. Protect plywood from moisture by use of waterproof cover- ings until the plywood in turn has been covered with the next succeeding component or finish. 3.7 FASTENING A. Nailing: 1. Use only common wire nails or spikes of the dimension shown on the Nailing Schedule, except where otherwise specifically noted on the Drawings. 2. For conditions not covered in the Nailing Schedule provide penetration into the piece receiving the point of not less than 1/2 the length of the nail or spike, provided, however, that 16d nails may be used to con- nect two pieces of 2" (nominal) thickness. 3. Nail without splitting wood. 4. prebore as required. 5. Remove split members and replace with members complying with the specified requirements. B. Bolting: 1. Drill holes 1/16" larger in diameter than the bolts being used. 2. Drill straight and true from one side only. 3. Do not bear bolts threads on wood, but use washers un- der head and nut where both bear on wood, and use wash- ers under all nuts. ROUGH CARPENTRY .01 06100-3 C. Screws: 1. For lag screws and wood screws, prebore holes same di- ameter as root of threads, enlarging holes to shank diameter for length of shank. 2. Screw, do not drive, lag screws and wood screws. 3.8 NAILING SCHEDULE A. Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, comply with Table 25-G and Table 25-H of the Uniform Building Code, 1979 edition. END OF SECTION .01 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4 SECTION 06190 WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide wood trusses where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a com- plete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Section 06100: Rough carpentry. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section: 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements; 3. Shop Drawings showing species, sizes, and stress grades of lumber proposed to be used; pitch, span, camber configuration, and spacing of trusses: connec- tor type, thickness, size, location, and design value: and bearing details; 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. WOOD TRUSSES .01 06190-1 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD TRUSSES A. Design: 1. Provide the services of a structural engineer regis- tered to practice in the State of Florida , and de- sign the wood trusses' to sustain the indicated loads for the spans, profiles, and arrangements shown on the Drawings. 2. Comply with pertinent provisions of: a. "Timber Construction Standards" of the American Institute of Timber Construction; b. "Quality Control Manual" of the Truss Plate Insti- tute; c. The building code having jurisdiction. B. Fabrication: 1. Prefabricate in strict accordance with the Shop Draw- ings and other data approved by the Architect. 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for in- terface with the work of this Section. B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, WOOD TRUSSES .01 06190-2 and the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as approved by the Architect, anchoring all components firmly into position for long life under hard use. 1. Hoist the trusses into position with proper bracing secured at designated lifting points. 2. Exercise care to keep out-of-place bending of trusses to a minimum. 3. Install temporary horizontal and cross bracing to hold trusses plumb and in safe condition until permanent bracing is installed. 4. Install permanent bracing and related components prior to application of loads to trusses. 5. Tighten loose connect6rs. 6. Restrict construction loads to prevent overstressing of truss members. 7. Do not cut or remove truss members. END OF SECTION .01 WOOD TRUSSES 06190-3 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Install wood trim and other items not specifically described as being installed under other Sec- tions of these Specifications. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Section 06010: Lumber. 3. Section 06100: Rough carpentry. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (No products are required in this Section) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. FINISH CARPENTRY .01 06200-1 3.2 WORKMANSHIP A. Produce joints which are true, tight, and well nailed with all members assembled in accordance with the Drawings. B. Jointing: 1. Make joints to conceal shrinkage; miter exterior joints; cope interior joints; miter or scarf end-to-end joints. 2. Install trim in pieces as long as possible, jointing only where solid support is obtained. C. Fastening: 1. Install items straight, true, level, plumb, and firmly anchored in place. 2. Where blocking or backing is required, coordinate as necessary with other trades to ensure placement of re- quired backing and blocking in a timely manner. 3. Nail trim with finish nails of proper dimension to hold the member firmly in place without splitting the wood. 4. Nail exterior trim with galvanized nails, making joints to exclude water and setting in waterproof glue or the sealant described in Section 07920 of these Specifica- tions. 5. On exposed work, set nails for putty. 6. Screw, do not drive, wood screws; except that screws may be started by driving and then screwed home. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF OTHER ITEMS A. Install items in strict accordance with the Drawings, and the recommended methods of the manufacturer as approved by the Architect, anchoring firmly into position at the pre- scribed location, straight, plumb, and level. 3.4 FINISHING A. Sandpaper finished wood surfaces thoroughly as required to produce a uniformly smooth surface, always sanding in the direction of the grain; except do not sand wood which is designed to. be left rough. B. No coarse grained sandpaper mark, hammer mark, or other im- perfection will be accepted. 3.5 CLEANING UP A. Keep the premises in a neat, safe, and orderly condition at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, free from accumulation of sawdust, cut-ends, and debris. FINISH CARPENTRY .01 06200-2 B. Sweeping: 1. At the end of each working day, and more often if nec- essary, thoroughly sweep surfaces where refuse from this portion of the Work has settled. 2. Remove the refuse to the area of the job site set aside for its storage. 3. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, thoroughly broom clean all surfaces. END OF SECTION .01 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-3 SECTION 06405 CABINETS AND FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide prefinished cabinets, show cases, display racks, and similar items where shown on the Draw- ings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. C. Definitions: 1. "Exposed work" includes all surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed. a. Bottoms of cases more than 4'-0" above the floor will be considered as exposed; b. Visible members in open cases, or behind doors of clear glass, will be considered as exposed. 2. "Semi-exposed work" includes those members behind opaque doors, such as shelves, divisions, interior faces of ends, case backs, drawer sides, drawer backs and bottoms, and the back face of doors. a. Tops of cases 6'-6" or more above the floor will be considered as semi-exposed. 3.. "Concealed work" includes sleepers, web frames, dust panels, and other surfaces not usually visible after installation. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and reg- ulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, comply with one of the following for the grade or grades specified: 1. "Manual of Millwork" of the Woodwork Institute of Cal- ifornia; CABINETS AND FIXTURES .01 06405-1 'it I' ..'1(....- '1-"",..~~, 2. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Arch- itectural Woodwork Institute. C. Identification of components: 1. On a concealed but accessible surface of each item of the work of this S~ction, where approved by the Arch- itect, plainly stamp the identifying number or numbers shown on the Drawings for that item. 2. On a concealed but accessible surface of each removable part of each item of the work of this Section, where approved by the Architect, plainly stamp an identifying number or numbers for that item to aid in rapid and efficient identification and reinstallation of remova- ble parts. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data: Within 45 calendar. days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades: a. Identify cabinets, fixtures, moldings, and other items in accordance with the system used on the Drawings; b. Show overall dimensions, and call specific atten- tion to all dimensions. and conditions which vary from those shown on the Drawings; c. Indicate compliance with the selected Institute standards. C. Samples: 1. Accompanying the Shop Drawings, submit Samples of all items of finish hardware, metal work, trim, glasswork, plastic overlays, and similar items proposed to be provided under this Section. 2. After general colors and types of finish have been se- lected by.the Architect, prepare and submit Samples of the selected finishes on species of the actual cabinet and fixture material. a. Prepare Sampies by successive masking in such a manner that the completed system will display ex- amples of each step in the total finish system. b. Make each step example not less than 2" x 4". c. Clearly identify the total finish system repre- sented by the Sample, and clearly identify each step in the total system. 3. Revise and resubmit the Samples as needed to secure the Architect's approval. CABINETS AND FIXTURES .01 06405-2 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. B. Provide additional protection as needed to assure that the work of this Section remains undamaged during fabrication, installation, and the time between completion of installa- tion and actual acceptance of the total Work. C. Do not deliver cabinets and fixture materials or products to the job site until concrete 'and plaster installations are completed and dry, nor until the building interior has attained a relative humidity of 50% to 55% at 70 degrees F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD A. General: 1. Provide wood materials of the grades and species called for under "Specific items" in Part 3 of this Section. 2. Provide solid stock lumber at all locations except where other material is specified or is called for on the Drawings. B. Hardwood lumber: 1. For use as solid stock in work with transparent fin- ish, provide lumber in grain and uniform color match- ing the adjacent work. 2. For use as solid stock in all finish work, provide lumber having not more than 12% moisture content. C. Plywood: 1'. Veneer core: a. Comply with PS-5l for hardwood and decorative ply- wood. 2. particleboard core: a. Do not use. 3. Lumber core: a. When used, provide at least 5-ply consisting of face veneer, back veneer, two crossband veneers, and a core composed of strips of lumber edge- glued into a solid slab. 4. Provide only plywood fabricated with water-resistant glue by the hot plate method. 5. For use with transparent finish, achieve uniformity of color, figure, and grain character within each panel, and from panel to panel within each fixture and group of fixtures, as approved by the Architect. 6. Provide back veneers to properly balance the face ven- eers. CABINETS AND FIXTURES .01 06405-3 - 7. Sanding: a. Good-one-side (GIS) panels: (1) Sand both sides, and fine belt-sand the face side. b. Good-two-side (G2S) panels: (1) Fine belt-sand both sides. c. Provide additional sanding as described under painting and finishing in this Section. D. Composition board: 1. Particleboard: a. Do not use. 2.2 GLASS TYPES A. General: 1. Glass is called out on the Drawings by "type number." 2. Where so indicated on the Drawings or otherwise re- quired for proper construction, provide the glass types described below. B. Glass type 1: Fully tempered clear float glass such as PPG "Herculite" glass or LOF "Tuf-Flex" tempered glass, used throughout the work of this Section except where lam- inated glass or mirrors are called for. 1. Type IA: 1/8" thick, glazing quality. 2. Type IB: 3/16" thick, glazing quality. 3. Type lC: 1/4" thick, glazing quality. 4. Type 10: 3/8" thick, commercial quality. C. Glass type 2: Clear laminated safety glass consisting of an inner face and an outer face of float glass laminated under heat and pressure to a clear plastic core, such as CABINETS AND FIXTURES .01 06405-4 PPG "Laminated" glass or Guardian "Laminated" glass, used for fronts, tops, and shelves, and used in potentially hazardous locations where shown on the Drawings. 1. Type 2A: 1/4" thick, maximum size 80" x 120". 2. Type 2B: 5/16" thick, maximum size 68" x 120". 3. Type 2C: 3/8" thick, maximum size 80" x 120". 4. Type 2D: 1/2" thick, maximum size 80" x 120". D. Glass type 3 (mirrors): Provide glass of the type and quality shown below. 1. Apply mirroring silver to the back surface, followed by electro-copper plating and application of final coat of protective paint. 2. Do not permit silver to lap over edges of the glass. 3. Grind edges evenly, and flat-polish with no wheel laps. 4. Types: a. Type 3A: 3/16" thick float glass, mirror quality, for use in sizes not larger that 36" x 72". b. Type 3B: 1/4" thick float glass, mirror quality, for use in sizes not larger than 128" x 204". 2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS A. To the maximum extent practicable, assemble and install the electrical components at the mill. B. Design the electrical installation to terminate in junc- tion boxes located as closely as practicable to the build- ing junction boxes. C. Provide materials complying with the National Electric Code, National Board of Fire Underwriters requirements, and other regulations of governmental agencies having jur- isdiction, and bearing the UL label when standards for such materials have been established by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 1. Flexible conduits: a. Provide zinc-coated steel in continuous runs, with approved fittings where connected to utility boxes, ballast boxes, or other fixtures. 2. Rigid conduit: a. Provide zinc-coated steel of hot-dip, sherardized, or metallic process, with clear baked enamel fin- ish, attached to ballast boxes, utility boxes, or other fixtures with double locknuts, bushings, or approved fittings. 3. Wire: a. Provide copper, THHN, No. 12 AWG. 4. Outlet, utility, and junction boxes: a. Provide one-piece pressed steel type, knockout de- sign, with zinc or cadmium coating, complete with required extension rings, plaster rings, and covers, and with factory-made knockout seals CABINETS AND FIXTURES .01 06405-5 lli.';iijI.~',,;", closing all unused openings. 5. Outlets: a. Provide Arrow Hart No. 5262, GE No. 4065, or ap- proved equal duplex receptacles, 15 amp, 125 V, two pole, three wire, grounded. 6. External ballasts: a. Provide "P" rated. 7. Ballast boxes: a. Provide one-piece, knockout type of an approved make, with removable louver-vented cover finished to match the color of the base to which it is ap- plied, and complete with toggle switch. D. Lighting packages: 1. Type 1: a. 24 V incandescent tube light strip. b. Provide "D" series "Lucifer" lighting system by Emmanel Lighting Co., 212 East Houston Street, San Antonio, Texas 78205. 2. Type 2: a. Single tube fluorescent. b. Provide "Sentinel Lumiline" by Sentinel Lighting Division of Airey-Thompson Co., 3653 Sierra Pine Avenue, Los Angeles, California 90023, in length as required. 3. Type 3: a. Two tube fluorescent. b. Provide as specified for type 2, except provide with two tubes. 4. Type 4: a, Single tube fluorescent, rapid start, with remote ballast. b. Provide "Showcase Light No R750" by C. J. Lighting Co., Inc., 101 Dupont Steet, Plainview, New Jersey 11803. 2.4 HARDWARE A. General: 1. Provide finishes as selected by the Architect from the standard finishes of products approved for use in this Work. 2. Where manufacturer's name or catalog number is not in- dicated, provide best quality commercially available in the specified item. B. Hinges: 1. Provide heavy-duty wraparound, 2-1/4" minimum width, offset as required, with loose pins. 2. Install with a minimum of five No.8 full-thread screws to the jamb, and four No. 8 full-thread screws to the door. 3. On doors over 48" in height, provide three hinges. CABINETS AND FIXTURES .01 06405-6 C. Door and drawer pulls: 1. Acceptable products: a. Quality No. 179. b. National Lock 224A. c. Builders Brass No. 79. D. Magnetic catches: 1. Acceptable products: a . Epco 591. b. McKinney No. 2911. c. National Lock 24A. E. Drawer guides: 1. Acceptable products for lightweight drawers: a . KV 13 00 . b. KV 1336. c. Grant 336. 2. Acceptable products for extra heavy or larger drawers: a. KV 1460. b. Grant 329. c. Accuride 4037. F. Adjustable shelf clips: 1. Provide KV 346, and use with drilled holes. G. Base adjusters: 1. Provide leveling feet for fixed cabinets of the ad- justable screw type having a floor bearing surface of at least nine sq in at each foot. 2. Provide for leveling the cabinet from inside, through holes provided in the cabinet bottom. 3. Provide base adjuster covers such as: a. Fastener Supply 51026; b. Dot Plug Button S5-48l72l; c . KV 7 3 1. H. Locks: 1. Acceptable products: a. Gate latches: Garcy No. 433. b. Cabinet locks: Corbin No. 764L. c. Sliding door locks: Corbin No. 0229lX or 02290. d. Drawer locks: Corbin No. 02065-1/2. e. Sliding glass door locks: Garcy No. 0410. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives: 1. For woodwork and millwork, use water resistant and mold resistant adhesive complying with Fed Spec MM-A-125, type II. 2. For plastic laminates, use phenol, resorcinol, or melamine base, complying with Fed Spec MM-A-18l, in type, grade, and class best suited for the intended use. CABINETS AND FIXTURES .01 06405-7 B. Plastic laminates: 1. Provide patterns and colors selected by the Architect from standard patterns and colors of products approved for use in this Work, and complying with NEM1\ 1,03, in the following minimum thicknesses. a. Horizontal surfaces: 0.050" b. Vertical surfaces: 0.028" c. Post forming: 0.042" d. Self-edge bands: 0.028" e. Cabinet liners: 0.020" f. Backing sheets: 0.020" _/ 2.6 FABRICATION .01 A. General: 1. Fabricate and assemble units complete at the mill in- sofar as their dimensions will permit for transporta- tion and proper handling. 2. For units with sectional construction: a. Accurately fit and align the separate parts. b. Provide ample screw, glue-and-bolt blocks, draw- bolts, tongues, grooves, splines, dowels, tenons, mortises, and other means of fastening to render the work of this Section substantial, rigid, and permanently secured in the proper position. B. Scribe members: 1. Provide sufficient additional material to permit scribing to walls, floors, and related work. 2. Provide adequate allowance for shrinkage occurring af- ter installation. J C. Framing and blocking: 1. Assemble with bolted and screwed connections, securing to structural backings with cinch anchors, expansion screws, or toggle bolts as necessary. 2. Mortise-and-tenon all rails and stiles, neatly miter and member throughout, make butt joints flush and smooth, and make up permanent joints with water re- sistant glue. 3. Assemble fixtures without face nails or face screws, except as needed to attach trim. a. Countersink face nails and face screws, fill with plastic wood or wood plugs, sand smooth, and touch up to be nearly invisible. b. Countersink the heads of all screws in every sur- face. D. Cut and fit the work of this Section as necessary to re- ceive, clear, engage, or support other parts of the Work, and as needed for interface with electrical, plumbing, and other units. _/ CABINETS AND FIXTURES 06405-8 E. Cabinets, fixtures, and doors: 1. General: a. Use solid stock for frames, jambs, heads, stops, and edges. b. Use plywood for body construction of cabinets where members are more than 11" wide. c. Where plywood is used, trim exposed edges with hardwood, without face nailing. 2. Drawers: a. Provide slip dovetail construction, well glued. b. Fronts: (1) For flush slab design, provide solid stock or provide not less than 3/4" thick 5-ply veneer- core plywood with top edges bound with wood matching the face. (2) For panel design and carved design, provide solid stock or provide stile-and-rail con- struction in accordance with pertinent stan- dards. c. Sides and backs: (1) Provide extension slides at all drawers, and provide 5/8" thick sides and backs of solid Birch, Beech, or Ash, with no defects, plugs, or patches. d. Bottoms: (1) Provide 1/4" thick (3/8" thick for bottoms over four sq ft) of Birch, Beech, or Ash ply- wood dadoed into sides, fronts, and backs. 3. Wood doors for cabinets: a. For flush slab design, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, construct of 5-ply veneer-core ply- wood, and trim the exposed edges with wood match- ing the face. b. For laminated plastic covered doors, provide matching plastic on exposed edges and provide cab- inet liner or other appropriate material approved by the Architect on semi-exposed side to achieve equal tension. c. For panel design and carved doors, provide stile- and-rail construction in accordance with the per- tinent standard. d. Provide rubber stops at ends and backs of doors. e. Fit and adjust as necessary to achieve smooth and noiseless operation. F. Rout, drill, and otherwise prepare the surfaces as needed, and firmly install all finish hardware and accessories in accordance with the approved design and the manufacturers' recommendations. G. Glaze in accordance with pertinent recommendations con- tained in the "Glazing Manual" of the Flat Glass Marketing Association. CABINETS AND FIXTURES .01 06405-9 2.7 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Design is based on standard products of Sinclair Paint Co., and the catalog numbers of that manufacturer are specified. Use the specified products or equals approved in advance by the Architect. B. Provide uniform finishes, even, free from cloudy and mot- tled appearance: without dirt, runs, brush marks, sags, or laps: and in accordance with the approved Samples. C. Sanding: 1. Thoroughly hand-scrape and sand the surfaces before any finish is applied. 2. Sand each coat of finish smooth prior to applying the next coat, always sanding in direction of the grain. D. Filling and puttying: 1. Knife-putty open joints, cracks, and nail holes full, smooth, and flush with surrounding surfaces. 2. Use putty tinted to match the color of the finished wood. 3. Seal pitch pockets and knots: flush-glaze exposed end grain. 4. On open-grain wood, apply an approved wood filler in accordance with its manufacturer's recommendations. a. Apply two coats if needed. b. Sand thoroughly after each coat. E. Opaque finishes: 1. Where "heavy-duty" finish is called for, provide: a. First coat: Sinclair #14 Undercoater. b. Second coat: Sinclair AF6-ll Epoxy Enamel. c. Third coat: Sinclair AF6-ll Epoxy Enamel. 2. For all other opaque finishes, provide: a. First coat: Sinclair #2698 Lacquer Under- coater. b. Second coat: Sinclair #2656 Pigmented Semi- gloss Lacquer. c. Third coat: Sinclair #2656 Pigmented Semi- gloss Lacquer. 3. Apply the undercoaters only after the surface has been filled free from grain marks. 4. When the undercoater has dried, sand thoroughly and inspect for surface defects. 5. Calk, feather with fillers, and touch-up as needed. 6. Apply the finish coats in colors selected by the Arch- itect, and in strict accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer, sanding between coats. F. Transparent finishes: 1. Where "heavy-duty" finish is called for, provide: a. Stain: Sinclair #3350 Colormatic as di- rected. .01 CABINETS AND FIXTURES 06405-10 b. Three coats: Sinclair AF6-9 Epoxy Enamel. 2. For all other transparent finishes, provide: a. Stain: Sinclair #2640 Lac-O-Rite as di- rected. b. Sealer: Sinclair #2600 Lacquer Sanding Sealer as directed. c. Two coats: Sinclair #2602 Clear Semi-gloss Lacquer. 3. Apply stain only after the surface has been filled free from grain marks. a. Tint filler to match color of the unfinished wood. b. Apply and sand the filler as specified under fill- ing and puttying above. 4. Apply the specified stain and allow to dry, achieving the finish color of the Sample approved by the Archi- tect. G. Miscellaneous surfaces: 1. Concealed surfaces of cabinets and fixtures: a. Apply a single coat of the specified "heavy-duty" undercoater. 2. Frames for pegboard: a. Apply a single coat of black water stain before pegboard is attached. 3. Drawers: a. Apply two coats of the specified transparent seal- er to interior surfaces and to exterior surfaces of sides and backs. 4. Shelving: a. Exposed wood shelves: (1) Match the finish of cabinet unit in which they are located or to which they are adjacent. b. Behind wood doors: (1) Apply two coats of the specified transparent sealer. 5. Cabinet interiors: a. Exposed surfaces: (1) Unless otherwise directed, match exterior fin- ish of the cabinet. b. Semi-exposed surfaces: (1) Apply stain as directed by the Architect, plus two coats of the specified transparent sealer. 6. Rabbets for mirrors: a. Apply a single coat of black water stain within rabbets and dadoes for mirrors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental CABINETS AND FIXTURES .01 06405-11 r;i~"" to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for in- terface with the work of this Section. B. Make necessary measurements in the field to assure proper fit of shop fabricated items. C. Prior to start of installation, verify that the work of other trades is sufficiently complete to properly permit this installation to proceed. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this Section at the locations shown on the Drawings, and in accordance with the approved Shop Drawings. 1. Scribe units to wall, floor, and other surfaces as ap- propriate, with not more than 1/32" clear between the cabinet or fixture and the abutting permanent surface, and with no change of clearance in excess of 0..01" in any 4". 2. Set each unit square, level, plumb, and aligned within a tolerance of one in 1000 vertically and horizontally, and within 1/4" of the designated location for free- standing work. B. Coordinate the time of installation with availability of other trades to make required utility connections. 1. Provide access panels as needed for connection and maintenance of utilities. 2. Test each plumbing and electrical item through at least five operating cycles, and adjust as needed to achieve optimum operation. C. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean each item by use of only such cleaning materials as are recom- mended by the manufacturer of the item being cleaned. D. Touch-up scratches and abrasions to be completely invisi- ble to the unaided eye from a distance of five feet. 3.4 SPECIFIC UNITS A. Twin Drawer Unit 1. Premium Grade B. Discharge Units 1. Premium Grade CABINETS AND FIXTURES .01 06405-12 C. Book Return Unit 1. Premium Grade D. Corner Units 1. Premium Grade E. Open Shelf Units (18" & 30") 1. Premium Grade F. Cupboard Units 1. premuim Grade G. Restroom Vanity Units 1. Premium Grade END OF SECTION .01 CABINETS AND FIXTURES 06405-13 "....,;.,,,.."~."....,,.~P;..'~,;...'".^.;.,-,.;.,""H>".;;;;"~""'_i"';...~........._,......~_"'""'<"c..""".,. .."...,C,".,~....""....."",,~......._,..,.,_,...'_' "-"Io>.'~~..._...;"i""" SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide building insulation where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, complete and post a certificate of insulation compliance in accordance with pertinent requirements o~ governmental agencies hav- ing jurisdiction. 1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide the following building insulation where shown on the Drawings or otherwise needed to achieve the degree of insulation required under pertinent regulations of govern- mental agencies having jurisdiction. 1. Type A: 3/4" Foil backed expanded polystyrene insula- tion between furring strips. 2. Type B: 9" thick foil-faced glass fiber batts with an insulation-only value of R-30. 3. Type C: Sloped roof insulation @ 1/8" per foot. BUILDING INSULATION .01 07210-1 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Remove, or protect against, projections in construction framing which may damage or prevent proper insulation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as approved by the Architect, anchoring all components firmly into position. END OF SECTION .01 BUILDING INSULATION 07210-2 SECTION 07413 METlH, ROOrING P^R'l~ 1 - GENERM. 1.1 PESCRIPTION ^. Hark incl uded: Provide preformed metal roof ing system where shown on the rrawings, ?s specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents aff0cting wor~ oE this section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Section 07600: Flashing and other sheet metal. 1.2 QU^LITY ^SSUR^NCE ^. Use adequate numhers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly tr?ined and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the workof this Section, with two years experience applying this typeroof. 1.3 SUBMITT^LS ^. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Sufficient technical data to demonstrate compliance with the specified requirements. 3. Samples, each approximately 24" square, in as many pahe1s as necessary to demonstrate all conditions to be encountered, and utilizing each design, type of sol- der, fastener, base sheet, finish sheet, and other material required under this Section. 4. Warranties a. A twenty (20) year paint finish guarantee is required from the manufacturer. b. A two (2) year weathertightness guarantee is required from panel applicator. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. r-1ETl\L ROOFING .01 07413-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Furnish and install AEP*SPAN Bermuda Roofing System as manufactured by AEP*SPAN, Ston(~ Monutian, GA 1-800-237-7726. B. Upor. receipt of preformed metal panels, flat sheets, flashings and panel accessories; installer shall examine each shipment for damage and for completeness of the consignment. C. Care should be taken to prevent contact with any substance which may cause a discoloration in the finish during storage. Store materials out of the weather, in a clean, dry place. One end of each container should be slightly elevated to allow any moisture to run off. D. Where required, Panel assembly to bear Underwriter's Lab UL90, pursuant to Construction Number 296. E. Color by Architect. F. Roofing and membrane: Comply with ASTM 02626, Type 1, 301b. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify that wood decks are sound, dry, properly sloped for drainage, and completely nailed. C. Verify that provision has been made for roof drains, scup- pers, flashings, and all other interface items attaching to or penetrating through the work of this Section. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not allow the installed work of this Section to be used as a storage space for other materials. B. Do not allow traffic on completed roo~. ~f required, provide cushioned walk boards. METAL ROOFING 07413-2 PART 3 - F:Xr.CtJTTON 3.3 INSTALLATION 3.03 Installation A. Workmanship shall conform to standards set forth in the architectural sheet metal manual as published by SMACNA. 8. Panels should be installed in such a manner that, horizontal lines are true and level, and vertical lines are plumb. C. All starter and edge flashings should be installed prior to panels. D. Do not allow panels or trim to come into con- tact with dissimilar materials. E. Exposed edges are permissable due to the galvanic action of the system where the zinc migrates to protect the exposed material. However, efforts should be made to reduce the amount of exposed edges. 3.04 Touch Up Only minor scratches and abrasions will be al- lowed to be touched up. Any other damaged material shall be replaced. 3.05 Clean Up A. Leave work areas clean, free from grease, finger marks and stains. 8. Remove scrap and debris from surrounding areas and grounds. END OF SECTION .01 HETAL ROOFING 07413-3 .'NOL. PLY Aaall P",TENt NO .,~.* Fibirliii SECTION 07530 FIBERTITE@ MECHANICALLY ATTACHED SINGLE PLY ROOFING SYSTEM (New Construction and/or Re-roofing) Membrane roofing utilizing a mechanically attached FiberTite~ Single-Ply System as manufactured and supplied by Seaman Corporation, Building Systems Division, 2170 Whitfield Avenue, Sarasota, Florida 34243-3397, Telex: 52774 Telephone (813) 756-8463. 1.02 SPECIAL CONDITIONS H. Mechanical fastener pull-out resistance tests must be conducted as a means of determining the deck acceptability for proper mechanical attachment of roof insulation and FiberTiteoAl membrane. NOTE: FiberTiteoAl requires a minimum of ten (10) pull-out tests for attachment evaluation. 1_00 SCOPE 1.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION I. Compliance with EPA and OSHA requirements as published by local, state, and Federal authorities. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE a. All applications require review by the Fiber- Tite~ Technical Service Department before any specification Is valid. A. FiberTiteoAl Roofing System shall be Installed by a roofing contractor, approved by Seaman Corpora- tion (herein atter referred to as Seaman) in strict ac- cordance with approved specifications and details as amended and approved by FlberTlte<IJ Techn Service Department to meet job and envlronmel conditions. A. This specification must be followed without varia- tion as It applies to only those building roofs having deck structures capable of supporting the guide- lines set forth herein. 1.03 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS B. Roofing Contractor and key supervisory personnel shall have attended the FiberTlte~ Contractor Train- ing Seminar. C. Material Submittal (Form SBS-16) must be com- pleted, signed by approved contractor and submit ted to FiberTitew Technical Service Department, along with roof drawings indicating building height, roof dimensions, perimeter areas, method of perimeter securement, penetration details and their location (unusual details must be shown as to their anticipated construction and approved In writing by FiberTlte<IJ Technical Service Department prior to In- stallation). D. FiberTite<!! offers, if required, technical assistance for pre-job conference and initial job start-up. C. FiberTite<IJ form SBS-16 must be completed, signed by appropriate parties, submitted to and approved by Seaman Corporation and FlberTite<IJ Techical Ser- vice Department before any consideration for war- ranty and/or the release of any materials can be authorized. A. An engineering study Indicates that the structure is unable to accommodate additional live and dead loads. B. Building height, deck type, roof slope and/or high wind areas. C. Suitability of existing roof for retrofit with or without a tear off. E. Final inspection shall be performed by a Fiber- Tite@ Technical Representative for acceptance and approval of appropriate warranty. D. Method of perimeter securement. F. Newly completed membrane is subject to chemical discharge not listed on the FiberTite@ chemical resistance publication. F. Should there be any deviations or changes from ap- proved specifications without written approval from the FiberTite@ Technical Service Department, the project will be considered an unauthorized installa- tion and ineligible for Warranty coverage. E. Coal tar retrofits and/or direct contact with bituminous materials. (See Sec. 2.03 and 3.03) 1.05 SUBMITTALS (ARCHITECTURAL) G. FiberTite@ membrane that could be subjected to unusual wear and tear may require the inclusion of FiberTite@ (EIP) walkboards. A. Submit most recent published technical literature and specifications Issued by the Fiber- Tite<ll Technical Service Department. 0753(, . B. Submit sample guarantee and letter from Fiber. Tlte/!> approving the roofing contractor. C. Submit approved copies, from FlberTlte<ll Technical Service Department, of completed Manufacturer's ~aterial Submittal Form and approved shop draw- Ings detailing proposed Installation details and methods of securement. D. Submit approval from FiberTite~ stating any ac- cessories submitted not manufactured or expressly approved In FiberTite'" literature are approved and compatible with the FlberTlte~ Roofing System. E. Submit letter from FlberTlte(l) stating all OSHA re- quirements relating to all chemicals and solvents have been conveyed to the applicator. Material Safe- ty Data Sheets (MSDS) may be substituted for manu- facturer's letter. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Roofing Membrane Manufacturer's Warranty - fur- nish the owner with a five-year written Seaman Cor- poration Warranty for the roof membrane system subject to the terms and conditions of the sample warranty submitted for approval. B. Seaman shall extend the periOd of the warranty for an additional five or ten years at the owner's option upon written request and payment of the premium, as published by Seaman at the time of the request. 1.07 MATERIAL DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. "'leliver all materials and/or packages to the job site I manufacturer's original, unopened containers, with legible labels and In sufficient quantity to allow for continuity of work. B. Select and operate material handling eqUipment in a safe manner, guarding against damage to existing construction or newly applied roofing and conform- ing to manufacturer's recommendations of handling and storage. C. Provide appropriate protection to those materials subject to degradation from weather conditions, Le., moisture, wind, extreme cold or heat as per manufac- turer's recommendations. D. Remove all damaged materials from construction site. 1.08 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection. 1. Provide special protection on newly completed roofing to avoid unusual wear and tear during in- stallation. 2. Protect building walls, rooftop units, windows and other vulnerable components during in- stallation. Fiberliii .'HrII.... .....v RCOP' 07530.2 B. Environmental Requirements. 1. Comply with membrane manufacturer recorT" mendatlons as to allowable weather conditions during Installation. Also, take Into account the effect of high winds during installation of the roofing system. 2. Comply with local EPA and OSHA requirements as published by Local, State, and Federal authorities. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Prior to ordering of materials, a pre-roofing con. ference will be held with the approved roofing con. tractor, membrane manufacturer representative, representative of the building owner and the ar- chitectural representative to discuss the specified roofing system and its proper application. The ar- chitectural representative or building representative shall notify all parties a minimum of five days prior to the meeting. B. Coordinate application of the roofing system with other trades in such a manner that the complete in. stallatlon Is weathertight and In accordance with all approved details and warranty requirements. 1.10 INSPECTIONS AND JOB CONTROL A. A FiberTlte~ Technical Representative shall ba available to make recommendations necessary to In- sure compliance. The Technical Representative shall be responsible for recommending any specification alternatives due to unforeseen job con. dltlons. B. The roofing contractor shall notify the Fiber. Tlte(l) Technical Service Department In writing of job completion. FlberTlte~ will make the Final Inspec. tion with the roofing contractor's representative. -' C. The Final Inspection Report shall list any Items not meeting FlberTlte<!l's requirements and shall be discussed with the roofing contractor at the time of Final Inspection. The roofing contractor shall notify FiberTite<!l In writing when all defects are corrected. Upon FiberTite<!l 's acceptance, the specified warran- ty shall be Issued. 1.11 MAINTANANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. At the time of issuance of the warranty, a full set of instructions shall be Included detailing preventative maintenance and noting a list of harmful substances which may damage the roofing membrane. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOFING MEMBRANE Roofing membrane shall be an ethylene Inter- pOlymer (EIP) alloy, reinforced with knitted polyester fabric as manufactured by Seaman Corporation, Building Systems Division under the trade name FiberTite<!l conforming to the following physical pro- perties: MATERIAL TEST METHODS PRODUCT PROPERTY (Units) DATA Thickness ASTM 0-751 .033 Minimum Inches Tensile ASTM 0.751 (Ibs.) 375 x 350 Strength ASTM 0.882 (psi) 8500 Elongation ASTM 0.751 20 warp x (%) 30 fill Tear Strength ASTM 0.751 100 8"xl0" Sample (Ibs.) Puncture Fed. Std. 101 B 250 Resistance Method 2031 (Ibs.) Water Vapor ASTM E.96 Proc. A 1.3 Transmission (gmlm2124 hours) Water Absorption ASTM 0.471 14 days @ 70F (%) Maximum Dimensional ASTM 0.1204 0.5 Stability (%) Low Temperature ASTM 0-2136 -30 Flexibility (F) Factory Seam ASTM 0.751, Grab 100 Strength Method (% of Fabric Strength) Shore "A" ASTM 0.2240 80 Hardness Accelerated Carbon Arc 5,000 hrs..no Weathering with water spray cracking, blistering, or crazing Hydrostatic ASTM D.751 500 Resistance Method A. Proc. 1 (psi) Wicking Test U.S. Army 118" Maximum Natick Test (Inches) .:Iame Mil.C.20696C Type Pass Resistance II Class 2 Oil Resistance MiI.20696C No swelling, cracking, or leaking Hydrocarbon Mil-C-20696C No swelling, Resistance cracking or leaking 2.02 SEPARATION lAYER: (Where Applicable) Separation layer shall be one of the following: A. Heat bonded polypropylene non-woven felt, minimum weight of 3.2 oz. per sq. yard as approved by FiberTlte(!l Technical Service Department. B. Heat bonded fiberglass non-woven felt, minimum weight 3.2 oz. per sq. yard as approved by Fiber. Tlte(!l Technical Service Department. C. (For vertical walls only) Heat bonded polypropylene non-woven felt, minimum weight of 6 oz. per sq. yd. as approved by FiberTite(!l Technical Service Depart. ment, or exterior 1/2 in. plywood installed as to pro- vide a smooth workable surface. 2.03 VAPOR BARRIER (Where Applicable) A. Coal Tar Pitch Retrofit 1. All coal tar pitch retrofits will require the inclu- sion of a vapor barrier. Fiberliie _.NOL. PLY RoeF 07530.3 2. Vapor barrier shall be a minimum ten (10) mil polyethylene. Roll width shall be a minimum of 72 In. with a minimum of 0.4 permeance. NOTE: Although the inclusion of a vapor barrier in a coal tar pitch retrofit Is only to promote lonb term aesthetic quality, NO deviations will be per. mitted. B. Water Vapor Transmission 1. Vapor barrier shall be a minimum ten (10) mil polyethylene or approved material. Roll width shall be a minimum of 72 In. with a minimum of 0.4 permeance as per ASTM E96/A. 2. The inclusion of a vapor barrier falls within the design criteria of the architect/engineer. FIber- Tite<i> makes no recommendations as to the necessity of a vapor barrier. NOTE: Consult N.R.CA bulletins for ap- propriate guidelines. 2.04 LAMINATED METAL A. Fiberclad 22 GA. hot dipped G.90 or stainless steel laminated with polymeric coating (Fiberclad-ll) as supplied by Seaman Corporation. 2.05 FASTENING DEVICES A. FiberTlte@ membrane attachment shall utilize 2 In. barbed round, hot dipped, galvanized stress plate (Part No. 300). Membrane fastener shall be as listed within FiberTlte<Al Approved Fastener List. B. Insulation fastener and stress plate shall be as listed on the current FIberTlte(!l Approved Fastener list. In most cases it is recommended that only plastic, locking stress plates be used for insulation fastener assemblies. Metal round plates shall not be approv- ed or accepted for Insulation attachment. C. Any deviation from the FiberTlte<ll Approved Fastener List shall require written approval from FiberTite@ Technical Service Department. 2.06 SEALANTS, MASTICS, AND SOLVENTS A. As supplied or approved by FiberTite<ll. All sealants, mastics and solvents shall be listed on the Fiber- Tite<i> Material Submittal Form. A short description of its use shall also be included. B. Regardless of supplier, sealants usually require periodic maintenance and are not covered under the terms and conditions of the warranty. 2.07 ROOF INSULATION A. Insulation shall be a rigid type with a minimum uniform density of 1.40 Ibs., per cubic foot. Insul' tion facing material must be approved by Fib!. Tite~ Technical Service Department. B. All insulation boards shall be installed in accor- dance with the roof insulation manufacturer's In- structions encompassing the following data: -""-"'-""'''''__''';'iMIIl\iIlI .. Ij-.u 1'"-;,:- .:~~i.~.~...rjik:~~";)l,"'",",l_,.....- 1. Factory Mutual stress plates and fasteners ap- proved by the FiberTlte<1l Technical Service Department. 2. Underwriter's Laboratory Classifications 3. Factory Mutual Ratings 4. Thermal values 5. Flute spanabllity 6. Substrate compatabillty 7. Federal specification conformance C. Chemical Insulations must be a minimum of 1 In. thickness. Laminated Insulation boards must be fac. ed on both sides to prevent warping. 2.08 ROOF WALKWAY MATERIALS A. Walkways and protection boards shall consist of Du- Pont Elvaloy'" and DuPont Dacron"> Polyester yarns, compressed and heat bonded, (Fiber-Tuf), with dimensions of 2 ft. x 4 ft. x 1/4 in. and 4 ft. x 8 ft. x 1/4 in. as manufactured by Seaman Corporation. B. Concrete paver blocks. (Consult FiberTlte<!J Tech- nical Service Department for specific approval). NOTE: FiberTlte"" does not warrant concrete paver blocks. 2.09 WOOD NAILERS Wood shall be NO.2 or better southern yellow pine, kiln dried, wolmanized, as furnished by Koppers Company, Inc., or approved equal conforming to Federal specification TT-550, TT.W.517 and American Wood Preservers Institute Standard LP.2. NOTE: Creasote or asphaltic type preservatives are not acceptable. 2.10 EXPANSION JOINTS Expansion Joints shall be flashed with Fiber- Tltet!> membrane or prefabricated from neoprene, factory bonded to 26 gauge hot dipped G-go galvaniz- ed or 20 oz. copper metal flashing. 2.11 TERMINATION BAR Termination Bar shall be the following: 118 In. x 1 In. type aluminum rectangular bar having smooth, rounded edges as approved by FlberTlte<!J. (Flat stock cut on a shear Is not acceptable). Termination bar shall be pre-punched with 9/32 In. holes or slots 8 in. O/C. NOTE: Termination bars must be Installed with a minimum space of 114 In. between bars. Con- sult the FlberTlte<!J Technical Service Department for approved termination bar fasteners. 2.12 OVERNIGHT SEAL Contractor must maintain a watertight seal during any interruption of roof construction or at the end of each day. 3.00 EXECUTION fii)erliii _'NUL. PLY "OD~ 07530.4 3.01 INSPECTION OF SURFACES A. The general contractor shall be responsible for pro- viding a smooth acceptable surface for the proper in. stallatlon of the FlberTlte'" membrane, roof Insula. tlon and specified components on all new construe. tlon projects. B. The roofing contractor shall be responsible for the inspection of the deck surface as to suitability for roofing and notify the general contractor and ar. chltect of any defects that require correction prior to roof application. C. Retrofits require the removal of all loose aggregate (gravel) by power broomlng and/or vacuuming. D. Examine surfaces for inadequate anchorage, low areas that will not drain properly, foreign material, ice, wet Insulation, and unevenness or any other defect which would prevent the execution and quali- ty of application of the FlberTiteiIJ membrane roof. ing as specified. E. Clean all exposed metal surfaces such as pipes, pipe sleeves, drains, duct work, pitch pockets, etc., by removing loose paint, rust and any asphalt or coal tar pitch of any kind. Remove and discard lead sleeves at soli stacks. F. If the existing roof is coal tar pitch or has been repaired with coal tar pitch or has been resaturated with coal tar pitch, a special vapor retarder will be reo quired. Note section 2.03. G. DO NOT PROCEED WITH ANY PART OF THE Ap. PLICATION UNTIL ALL DEFECTS AND PREPARA- TION WORK HAVE BEEN CORRECTED AND COM. PLETED. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF WOOD NAILERS AND PERIMETER FIXING (Where Applicable) A. Install treated lumber at the same heights as insula- tion layer. Wood nailers are to be Installed at all perimeters as shown In approved details. The sur. face under the wood nailers shall be FREE OF ALL GRAVEL and shall be as even as possible. B. Where wood nailers are installed directly on the substrate, the substrate shall be carefully examined to confirm that the entire area provides a suitable fastening surface. All defects shall be repaired by the appropriate trade prior to installation. C. Nailers shall be installed and anchored In such a manner to resist a force of 751b. per linear foot In any direction. D. Nailers around curbs and expansion Joints are recommended. Consult the FiberTitet!> Technical Service Department for options. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF SEPARATION LAYER (Where Applicable) A. AGED ASPHALT AND LIGHT WEIGHT CONCRETE 1. In most cases it is recommended that a separa- tion layer be used as opposed to installing the membrane directly to the existing substrate. 2. Approved insulation board or materials selected from Section 2.02 are acceptable. B. VERTICAL WALLS (With Existing Bituminous Mem- brane Flashing) 1. FTR #201 MASTIC IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH ASPHALT 2. Heat Bonded Polypropylene NonWoven Felt - Attach with approved fastener and round metal stress plate - (1 per 1 sq. ft.) In addition to spot adhering with compatible mastic. 3. 1/2 in. Exterior Plywood - Attach with approved fastener and round metal stress plate (1 per 2 sq. ft.) ANY DEVIATIONS AND/OR MODIFICATION RE- QUIRES WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM FIBER- TITE!!) TECHNICAL SERVICE DEPARTMENT. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR BARRIER (Where Applicable) A. COAL TAR PITCH RETROFIT 1. Install vapor barrier directly on existing substrate. 2. Lap joints a minimum of 4 in. and seal with an ap- proved adhesive or tape prior to the application of approved roof Insulation. 3. Insulation board, regardless of facing material, is not considered a suitable separation layer for coal tar pitch retrofits. See 2.03. B. WATER VAPOR TRANSMISSION 1. Consult N.R.C.A bulletins for appropriate guidelines. 3.05 ROOF INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Roof insulation shall be mechanically fastened in ac- cordance with the roof Insulation manufacturer's recommendations and must be approved by the FiberTite@ Technical Service Department. All in- sulation boards must be attached by a Factory Mutual stress plate and fastener approved by the FiberTite@ Technical Service Department. B. Install roof insulation in parallel courses with tightly butted and staggered joints. Boards must be cut ac- curately to fit neatly around all penetrations. Small pieces and scraps of insulation shall not be used. C. Install no more insulation than can be covered dur- ing the same working day. D. Taper roof insulation to drain sumps using tapered edge strips. If insulation layer is 1 V2 in. or less, taper 121n. from the drain bowl. If insulation thickness ex- ceeds 1 V2in., taper 18 in. from the drain bowl. Mechanically fasten all tapers using two fasteners per board. Fiberliii SINaL. PLY ReeF 07530.5 E. At the end oi each working day, provide a watertight cover on all unused Insulation as to avoid moisture penetration. NOTE: Consult the FiberTiteiil Technical Service Deparl for Factory Mutual and Underwriters Laboratories Insu. fastening requirements. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF FIBERTlTE MEMBRANE A. QUALITY CONTROL 1. It will be the responsibility of the roofing con- tractor to initiate a Q C program to govern all aspects of the installation of the new Fiber. Tite@ roofing system. 2. The job foreman and or supervisor will be responsible for the dally execution of the Q C program which will include but is not limited to the inspection and probing of all heat welding incorporated within the FlberTile/Al system. 3. If inconsistencies in the quality of the welds are found, all work shall cease until corrective ac- tions are taken to insure the continuity of all field and detail welding. B. PANELED ROLLS 1. 10 ft., 15 ft., and 20 ft. wide rolls shall be installed snug, but not taut, utilizing chalk lines, and maintaining (good lay flat) characteristics. 2. Adjoining rolls shall overlap the fastened edge '" minimum of 41/2 in. maintaining proper roll st gering as to avoid back water seams. 3. Stagger the factory welds so that each weld falls equal distance between the factory welds on ad- jacent rolls. (SEE FTR-D1 FOR STANDARD ROLL LAY OUT AND FASTENER PLACEMENn C. NON PANELED ROLLS (58 IN. x 100 FT.) 1. When job conditions necessitate the utilization of roll roofing application procedures, follow all standard FiberTiteiil Installation Specifications, in addition to the following: a. Install rolls so that rolls overlap 5 in. to the back line of the underlying, adjacent roll. b. Stagger the rolls so that the tails, or roll ends do not line up_ (SEE FTR.D28 FOR ROLL OUT AND INSTALLATION OPTIONS) D. PERIMETER SHEETS (29 IN. x 100 FT.) 1. A minimum of one perimeter sheet shall be in- stalled, parallel to all exterior roof perimeters, including parapet walls, expansion joints and other changes in the plane of the deck. 2. Install perimeter sheets square to chalk Ii with proper staggering to avoid back wa,_ seams. 3. Adjoining rolls shall overlap the fastened edge a minimum of 41/2 in. maintaining proper stagger- ing to avoid back water seams. 4. Factory Mutual 1.90 classification may require two perimeter sheets at all exterior roof perimeters that are not bordered by a parapet, with a minimum of 24 in. above the plane of the deck. Consult the FlberTlte~ Technical Service Department for additional perimeter fastening data. E. ATTACHMENT 1. All decking not listed as approved by Factory Mutual for mechanical attachment or decking exceeding 10 years in age require documented pull out values for fastener resistance. 2. All testing is to be performed by the appropriate fastener manufacturer or an authorized representative. 3. Pull out values are to be submitted to the Fiber- Tltetll Technical Service Department, for ap- proval prior to the ordering of materials. 4. CONSULT THE FIBERTITEtIl FASTENER LIST FOR APPROVED FASTENERS AND OTHER RE- QUIREMENTS. F. PANELED ROLL ATTACHMENT 1. Tho following are minimum FM 1-90 re- quirements for the attachment of the prefabricated (10 ft., 15 ft., and 20 ft. x 102 ft.) rolls. Alternative spacing requirements may be required to achieve FM equivalency ratings due to deck type, building height, fastener resistance values, and special geographic zone considerations. a. Tabs Install fasteners and FTR barbed stress plates in a STRAIGHT LINE ON THE CENTER LINE 18 IN. O.C. b. Roli ends Install fasteners and FTR barbed stress plates in STRAIGHT LINE ON THE CENTER LINE 18 IN. O.C. c. Side laps Install fasteners and FTR barbed stress plates In a STRAIGHT LINE with Two fasteners and stress plates per panel, ap. prox. 27 In. O.C. G. NON PANELED ROLL ATTACHMENT 1. The following are minimum FM 1-90 re- quirements for the attachment of the 58 In. x 100 ft. rolls. Alternative spacing requirements may be required to achieve FM equivalency ratings due to deck type, building height, fastener resistance values, and special geographic zone considerations. a. Side Laps Install fasteners and FTR barbed stress plates in a STRAIGHT LINE ON THE CENTER LINE 18 IN. O.C. fiberliie ..NIIL. ,"LY '"'00" 07530.6 b. Roll Ends Install fasteners and FTR barbed stress plates In a STRAIGHT LINE 18 IN. O.C. H. PERIMETER SHEETS I. 1. AIi perimeter sheets are to be Installed by ter- minating the exterior edge to previously Install- ed wood nailers by nailing with galvanized anular ring shank nails 6 In. O.C. 2. Subsequent perimeter sheets toward the In. terior of the roof are fastened with approved fasteners and FTR barbed stress plates 12 In. O.C. FASTENER PLACEMENT 1. All stress plates must set completely on the membrane allowing a minimum of 1/2 In. from the edge of the underlying membrane. 2. Allow a minimum of 2 in. from the edge of the stress plate to the edge of the overlapping memo brane to allow sufficient room to apply the automatic welded field seam. J. WELDING 1. All field seams exceeding 10 ft.ln length shall be welded with an approved automatic welder. 2. All field seams must be clean and dry prior to In. Itlating any field welding. 3. Remove foreign materials from the seams (dirt, oils, etc.) with Acetone, MEK, or approved alter. native. Use CLEAN cotton cloths and allow ap. proximately five minutes for solvents to dissipate before initiating the automatic welder. 4. All welding shali be performed only by qualified personnel to ensure the continuity of the weld. 5. AIi finished seams shall exhibit a homogeneous bond a minimum of 11/2 in. In width. K. INSPECTION 1. The job foreman and/or supervisor shall Initiate daily inspections of all completed work which shall Include, but Is not limited to the probing of all field welding with a dull pointed instrument to assure the quality of the application and In- sure that any equipment or operator defflclen. ctes are Immediately resolved. 2. Insure that all aspects of the installation (sheet layout, attachment, welding, flashing details, etc.) are in strict conformance with the most cur- rent FlberTitetll Specifications and Details. 3. Excessive patching of field seams because of inexperienced or poor workmanship will not be accepted at time of FINAL INSPECTION FOR WARRANTY. 4. ANY DEVIATION FROM FIBER. TlTE~ SPECIFICATIONS AND/OR DETAILS RE. QUIRES WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM THE FIBERTITE~ TECHNICAL SERVICE DEPART. MENT PRIOR TO APPLICATION TO AVOID ANY WARRANTY DISQUALIFICATIONS. 3.07 FLASHING A. Clean all vents, pipes, conduits, tubes, walls, and stacks to bare metal. All protrusions must be proper. Iy secured to the roof deck with approved fasteners. Remove and discard all lead, pipe and drain flashings. Flash all penetrations according to ap- proved details. B. Remove all cant strips and loose wall flashings. C. Flash all curbs, parapets and interior walls in strict accordance with approved FlberTite<il Details. D. All flashing shall be totally adhered to approved substrate with FTR #201 mastic applied in sufficient quantity to insure total adhesion. E. The base flange of all membrane lIashlng shall ex. tend out on to the plane of the deck, beyond the wood nailer to a maximum width of 8 In. F. Vertical flashing shall be terminated no less than 8 in. above the plane of the deck with approved ter- mination bar or metal cap flashing. . G. Vertical wall flashings terminations shall not exceed 30 in. without additional, parallel horizontal rows of termination bar between the deck and the termina. tion point of the flashing. Spacing between horizon- tal rows shall not exceed 24 in. H. Complete all inside and outside corner details with FiberTite@ unreinforced membrane. PROBE ALL SEAMS WITH A DULL, POINTED PROBE TO INSURE THE WELD HAS CREATED A HOMOGENEOUS BOND. 3.08 CORNERS A. All inside/outside corners shall be installed in strict accordance with FiberTite@ Details for a complete watertight installation. Non-reinforced Flber- Tite@ membrane, either field fabrication sheets or pre-sized inside/outside corners shall be used. 3.09 PENETRATION ACCESSORIES Install penetration accessories in strict accordance with approved details. Insure penetration ac. cessories have not Impeded in any waY the working specification of the penetration. (Refer to the related trade for the technical specification). 3.10 FLASHING (METAL) A. All perimeter edge details are to be fabricated from Fiberclad Metal or an approved two piece locking system. B. Insure all facias are 4 in. lower than the bottom of the wood nailers. C. Fasten all metal flashing to wood nailers or approved substrates with approved fasteners 8 in. O.C. D. Break and install Fiberclad metal In strict accor. dance with approved details, insuring proper attach. ment, maintaining 1/2 In. expansion joints. Fiberliie a'NOLa PLY ReeF 07530.7 E. Flash metal expansion joints with a 5 In. strip of FiberTitelll membrane welded to Flberclad metal (Cover plates optional). 3.11 ROOF DRAINS Flash all roof drains in strict accordance with Fiber. Tite roof drain details - Replate all worn parts that may cut the FlberTlte membrane or prevent a water. tight seal. Replace all drain bolts or clamps holding the drain compression ring to the drain basin. Flber- Tite~ unreinforced 60 mil membrane or lead sheet may be used as drain flashing. Lead shall be set In FiberTlte #201 mastic. Lead sheets and drain basins must be free of any asphalt or coal tar pitch residue prior to installation. NOTE: Replace all broken drain strainers. 3.12 PITCH PANS A. Every effort shall be made to eliminate the need for pitch pans including the removal of existing pans. Contact the FiberTlte<<> Technical Service Depart- ment for specific design recommendations. B. In the event of no alternative, fabricate pitch pans from Fiberclad metal and install pitch pans in strict accordance with FiberTite@ details Insuring proper attachment, maintaining a minimum 2 in. clearance around the penetration, with proper depth of sealant. 3.13 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Flash all expansion joints in strict accordance with approved details. Fasten all expansion joint material according to FiberTite@ specifications. Insure the expansion material has sufficient material to expand to the widest point in expansion without causing un- due stress on the expansion joint material. B. If the expansion joint is a "factory system"lnsure in- stallation instructions and warranties have been submitted with the FiberTite<<> Material Submittal Form #SBS-16. 3.14 SEALANT A. Apply approved sealant to all surface mounted reglets and where called for in approved details. App- ly a bead of sealant large enough to fill the void en. tlrely. Tool the sealant to shed water, following manufacturer's Instructions and Installation guides. Use primer when recommended by the manufac- turer. 3.15 TEMPORARY SEALS A. At the end of each working day or at the sign or rain, install temporary watertight seal where the exposed edge of the completed new roofing terminates at the uncovered deck or existing roof surface. If the old roof surface is covered with slag, spud back an area 6 in. from where the membrane will be sealed to the deck. Use a sufficient size strip of FiberTltet> mem- brane or Fiberseal tape to bridge the new membrane and the roof deck. If using FiberTltet> membrane, the strip must be welded to the new roofing membrane and cemented to the cleaned roof deck. ~ -'1Iill1l~ .' 1I'<i"liill\it;oll.~.."'.Il':''O''';'~'1I~'''' B. Prior to the commencement of work, remove all tem- porary seats If they will cause a water dam and any exposed roof cement If used. DO NOT TRACK ROOF CEMENTS ONTO THE FIBERTITEt!J ROOF MEM- BRANE. 3.18 INSTALLATION OF WALKWAY Install Flber-Tuf walkway material on clean and dry FlberTltet!J membrane. Spot adhere walkways with FTR "201 mastic. 3.17 CLEAN.UP A. Remove all debris and excess material from the roof area. Pick up all loose fasteners and sheet metal scraps. B. Insure the watertightness of the entire system for warranty inspection. C. Protect all roof surfaces to damage from other trades. 4.00 WARRANTY 4.01 REQUEST FOR WARRANTY A. Request for warranty Inspection notification postcard shall be completed by the approved ap- plicator and forwarded to the Seaman Building Systems Division at least fourteen (14) days prior to the requested date of Inspection. Any special In for- matlon regarding access to the roof shall be includ- ed on the request form. B. The warranty shall be issued to the approved roofing contractor after satisfactory inspection by a Fiber- Tltet!J Technical Representative. Fiiierliii .'NeaL. ~LY "DO.. 07530.8 SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide flashing and sheet metal not specifically described in other Sections of these Speci- fications but required to prevent penetration of water through the exterior shell of the building. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regula- tions, comply with pertinent recommendations contained in current edition of "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" pub- lished by the Sheet Metal and Airconditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). C. Standard commercial items may be used for flashing, trim, reglets, and similar purposes provided such items meet or exceed the quality standards specified. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL .01 07600-1 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING , A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND GAGES 2.2 GALVANIZED IRON A. Provide sheet metal or sheet iron of a standard brand of open-hearth copper-bearing steel, copper-molybdenum iron, or pure iron sheets. B. Zinc coating: 1. Where galvanizing is required, provide zinc coating by hot-dip galvanize to all surfaces. 2. Weight: a. Provide not less than 1-1/4 oz per sq ft, nor more than 1-1/2 oz per sq ft, to surfaces required to be galvanized. 3. Comply with ASTM A93. 2.3 NAILS, RIVETS, AND FASTENERS A. Use only soft iron rivets having rust-resistive coating, galvanized nails, and cadmium plated screws and washers in connection with galvanized iron and steel. 2.6 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete ~nd proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL .01 07600-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Db not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 WORKMANSHIP A. General: 1. Form sheet metal accurately and to the dimensions and shapes required, finishing molded and broken surfaces with true, sharp, and straight lines and angles and, where intercepting other members, coping to an accu- rate fit and soldering securely. 2. Unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Archi- tect, turn exposed edges back 1/2". B. Form, fabricate, and install sheet metal so as to ade- quately provide for expansion and contraction in the fin- ished Work. C. Weatherproofing: 1. Finish watertight and weathertight where so required. 2. Make lock seam work flat and true to line, sweating full of solder. 3. Make lock seams and lap seams, when soldered, at least 1/2" wide. 4. Where lap seams are not soldered, lap according to pitch, but in no case less than 3". 5. Make flat and lap seams in the direction of flow. D. Joints: 1. Join parts with rivets or sheet metal screws where necessary for strength and stiffness. 2. Provide suitable watertight expansion joints for runs of more than 40'-0", except where closer spacing is indicated on the Drawings or required for proper in- stallation. E. Nailing~ 1. Whenever possible, secure metal by means of clips or cleats, without nailing through the exterior metal. 2. In general, space nails, rivets, and screws not more than 8" apart and, where exposed to the weather, use lead 'ashers. 3. For nailing into wood, use barbed roofing nails 1-1/4" long by 11 gage. 4. For nailing into concrete, use drilled plugholes and plugs. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL .01 07600-3 3.3 EMBEDMENT A. Embed metal in connection with roofs in a solid bed of sealant, using materials and methods described in Section 07920 of these Specifications or other materials and meth- ods approved in advance by the Architect. 3.5 TESTS A. Upon request of the Architect, demonstrate by hose or standing water that the flashing and sheet metal are com- pletely watertight. END OF SECTION .01 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-4 SECTION 07920 SEALANTS AND CALKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Throughout the Work, seal and calk joints where shown on the orawin'gs and elsewhere as required to provide a positive barrier against passage of moisture and passage of air. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of section 01640. SEALANTS AND CALKING .01 07920-1 ~'I.i11I.~.F,;_......' 8. Do not retain at the job site material which has exceeded the shelf life recommended by its manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANTS A. Except as specifically otherwise approved by the Architect, use only the types of sealants described in this Article. 8. Provide two-component, rubber based compound complying with Fed Spec TT-S-00227c~'with each color of sealant and each class of sealant the product of a single manufacturer selected from the following, or equal products approved in advance by the Architect. 1. Class A (for non-traffic bearing horizontal surfaces): a. "Novacalk 200 Series," manufactured by Novagard Corp., 835 New York Avenue, Trenton, New Jersey 08638; b. "paramastic," manufactured by Parr, Inc., 18400 Syracuse Avenue, Cleveland, Ohio 44110; c. "Hornflex TG" or "Vertiseal," manufactured by A. C. Horn, Inc., 3701 East Union Pacific Avenue, Los Angeles, California 90023. 2. Class 8 (for vertical surfaces): a. "Churchill 3C-50," manufactured by Churchill Chem- ical Corp., 3137 East 26th Street, Los Angeles, California 90023; b. "Ultratite 101 Series," manufactured by Essex Chemical Corp., 19451 Susana Road, Compton, Cali- fornia 90221; c. "Rubber Calk 250 Sealant," manufactured by Products Research and Chemical Corp., 5454 San Fernando Road, Glendale, California 91203. 3. For other services, provide products especially formu- lated for the proposed use and approved in advance by the Architect. C. Colors: 1. Colors for each sealant installation will be selected by the Architect from standard colors normally avail- able from the specified manufacturers. 2. Should such standard color not be available from the approved manufacturer except at additional charge, provide such colors at no additional cost to the Owner. D. In concealed installations, and in partially or fully ex- posed installations where so approved by the Architect, use standard gray or black sealant. SEALANTS AND CALKING .01 07920-2 2.2 PRIMERS A. Use only those primers which are non-staining, have been tested for durability on the surfaces to be sealed, and are specifically recommended for this installation by the manufacturer of the sealant used. 2.3 BACKUP MATERIALS A. Use only those backup materials which are specifically recommended for this installation by the manufacturer of the sealant used, which are non-absorbent, and which are non-staining. t . B. Acceptable types include: 1. Closed-cell resilient urethane or pOlyvinyl-chloride foam~ 2. Closed-cell polyethylene foam~ 3. Closed-cell sponge of vinyl or rubber~ 4. Polychloroprene tubes or beads~ 5. Polyisobutylene extrusions: 6. Oil-less dry jute. C. Preformed support strips for ceramic tile control joint and expansion joint work: Use polyisobutylene or poly- chloroprene rubber. 2.4 BOND-PREVENTATIVE MATERIALS A. Use only one of the following as best suited for the ap- plication, and as recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant used: 1. Polyethylene tape, pressure-sensitive adhesive, with the adhesive required only to hold tape to the con- struction materials as indicated~ 2. Aluminum foil complying with MIL-A-148E: 3. Wax paper complying with Fed Spec UU-P-270. 2.5 MASKING TAPE A. For masking around joints, provide masking tape complying with Fed Spec UU-T-l06c. 2.6 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a compV ':e and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. SEALANTS AND CALKING .01 07920-3 PART '3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Concrete and ceramic tile surfaces: 1. Install only on surfaces which are dry, sound, and well brushed, wiping free from dust. 2. At open joints, remove dust by mechanically blown com- pressed air if so required. 3. Use solvent to remove oil and grease, wiping the sur- faces with clean rags. 4. Where surfaces have been treated, remove the surface treatment by sandblasting or wire brushing. 5. Remove laitance and mortar from joint cavities. 6. Where backstop is required, insert the approved backup material into the joint cavity to the depth needed. C. Aluminum surfaces: 1. Aluminum surfaces in contact with sealant: a. Remove temporary protective coatings, dirt, oil, and grease. b. When masking tape is used for protective cover, remove the tape just prior to applying the sealant. 2. Use only such solvents to remove protective coatings as are recommended for that purpose by the manufactur- er of the aluminum work, and which are non-staining. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BACKUP MATERIAL A. Use only the backup material recommended by the manufac- turer of the sealant used, and approved by the Architect for the particular installation, compressing the backup material 25% to 50% to achieve a positive and secure fit. SEALANTS AND CALKING .01 07920-4 B. When using backup of tube or rod stock, avoid lengthwise stretching of the material. Do not twist or braid hose or rod backup stock. 3.4 PRIMING A. Use only the primer recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant, and approved by the Architect for the particular installation, applying in strict accordance with the manu- facturer's recommendations as approved by the Architect. 3.5 BOND-BREAKER INSTALLATION I . A. Provide an approved bond-breaker where recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant, and where directed by the Architect, adhering strictly to the installation recommen- dations as approved by the Architect. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF SEALANTS A. Prior to start of installation in each joint, verify the joint type according to details on the Drawings, or as otherwise directed by the Architect, and verify that the required proportion of width of joint to depth of joint has been secured. B. Equipment: 1. Apply sealant under pressure with power-actuated or hand gun, or by other appropriate means. 2. Use guns with nozzle of proper size, and providing sufficient pressure to completely fill the joints as designed. C. Thoroughly and completely mask joints where the appearance of sealant on adjacent surfaces would be objectionable. D. Install the sealant in strict accordance with the manufac- turer's recommendations as approved by the Architect, thoroughly filling joints to the recommended depth. E. Tool joints to the profile shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise required if such profiles are not shown on the Drawings. F. Cleaning up: 1. Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been tooled. 2. Clean adjacent surfaces free from sealant as the in- stallation progresses, using solvent or cleaning agent recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant used. END OF SECTION .01 SEALANTS AND CALKING 07920-5 (....~'""'...",'" SECTION 08121 ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide aluminum door frames where shown on the Drawings, as spec1fied herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified ,requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements; 3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades; 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for 'accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES .01 08121-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES A. Provide aluminum door frames in the types and designs in- dicated on the Drawings, in the dimensions shown on the Door Schedule in the Drawings, with mitered corners and light-and-sound seals, and properly reinforced for the finish hardware described in Section 08710 of these Speci- fications. B. Provide Class 1 anodized bronze finish as approved by the Architect. C. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Schwab vindou systems, 1815 N.E. 144th St., Miami, Fl., 33181. (305) 949-7218 2. Other manufacturers approved in advance by the Archi- tec t . 2.2 FINISH HARDWARE A. Secure templates from the finish hardware supplier, and accurately install, or make provision for, all finish hardware at the factory. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Placing frames: 1. Except where specifically otherwise directed by the Architect, or not practicable because of construction conditions, place frames prior to construction of en- closing walls and ceilings. 2. Set frames accurately into position, plumb, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. 3. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and un- damaged. B. Where the approved frames are designed for insertion into completed openings, coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in framing to receive the frames and provide proper anchorage. ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES .01 08121-2 .._.~_".,....>_,,;,,-'~~'~~,.;i<;. t lj't~~., ""t.~.t..".....,;"",,,,,,, C. Under all conditions, install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the recommendations of its manufac- turer, anchoring all components firmly into position for long life under hard use. 3.3 TOUCHUP A. Upon completion of the installation, visually check all exposed surfaces of the work of this Section, and touchup all scratches and abrasions to be completely invisible to the unaided eye from a distance of five feet. I . END OF SECTION .01 ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES 08121-J SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide flush wood doors, complete in place with finish hardware installed, where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a com- plete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Section 08710: Finish hardware. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regula- tions of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, comply with: 1 2. "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute, for the grade or grades specified. 3. Certification and stamps will not be required. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. FLUSH WOOD DOORS .01 08211-1 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. B. Delivery: 1. Deliver doors to site after plaster and cement are dry, and after the building has reached average pre- vailing humidity of its locality. 2. Deliver prefinished doors in manufacturer's original containers, clearly marked with manufacturer's name, brand name, size, thickness, and identifying symbol on the covering. 3. Seal all four edges of unfinished doors when delivered to the job site. C. Storage: 1. Stack flat on 2" x 4" lumber, laid 12" from ends and across center. 2. Under bottom door and over top of stack, provide ply- wood or corrugated cardboard to protect door surfaces. 3. Store doors in area where there will be no great vari- ations in heat, dryness, and humidity. D. Do not drag doors across one another: lift doors and carry them into position. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide flush wood doors of the types, designs, and thick- nesses shown on the Door Schedule in the Drawings, labeled or non-labeled as indicated and required, and in solid core or hollow core as shown on the Door Schedule. B. Grade: Except as may be shown otherwise on the Drawings, fabricate the work of this Section to "custom grade" stan- dards of the referenced organization. C. For hollow core doors, provide core construction as needed to accommodate finish hardware described in Section 08710 of these Specifications. D. Species: 1. where "paint grade" or "opaque finish" are called for on the Drawings, provide Birch or Beech faces for opaque finish. 2. For all other flush wood doors, provide rift cut White Oak faces for transparent finish. E. Site finish or mill finish wood doors in accordance with provisions of Section 09900 of these Specifications. F. Provide 12'x12' aluminum door grills on doors indicated on alc plans. FLUSH WOOD DOORS .01 08211-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be ppl-formed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Fitting and machining: 1. Unless doors are completely fitted and machined at the mill, fit them for width by planing and fit them for height by sawing: a. Bottom: 1/2" clearance maximum. b. Top: liB" clearance maximum. c. Lock edge and hinge edge: Bevel 1/8" in 2" maxi- mum. 2. Machine doors for hardware in accordance with recom- mendations of the hardware manufacturers, as those recommendations have been approved by the Architect. B. Receive and retain custody of finish hardware furnished for the work of this Section under Section 08710 of these Specifications and, except as otherwise directed by the Architect, install all such finish hardware in strict ac- cordance with the recommendations of its manufacturer. C. Replace or rehang doors which are hingebound and do not swing or operate freely. 3.3 COMPLIANCE A.The Owner reserves the right to request and pay for an in- spection by a representative of the referenced organiza- tion to determine that the work of this Section has been performed in accordance with the specified standards. B. In the event such inspection determines that the work of this Section does not comply with the specified require- ments, immediately remove the non-complying items and re- place them with items complying with the specified re- quirements, all at no additional cost to the Owner, and reimburse the Owner for the cost of the inspection. END OF SECTION .01 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-3 MANUFACTURER Marvi n Wi ndows P.O. Box 100 Warroad, MN 56763-0100 Phone: (800) 346-3363 SECTION 08615 WOOD DOUBLE HUNG WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wood [double hung] [single hung] [simulated triple hung] [round top double hung] window complete with hardware, glazing, weatherstripping, [screens] [removable grilles] [jamb extensions] [combination storm/screen] and all standard or specified anchorages, trim, attachments and acces- sories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01340-Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. D. Section 0171O-Final Cleaning: Glass cleaning. E. Section 06200-Finish Carpentry: Wood trim other than trim furnished by window manufacturer. F. Section 079oo-Joint Sealers: Sill sealant and perimeter caulking. H. Section 09900-Painting: Paint or stain finish other than factory applied finish. 08615-1 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design and Performance Requirements: 1. Window units shall be designed to comply with A NSI/NWWDA I.S.2, [Grade 20 Residential for wood double hung] [Grade 40 light Commercial for wood double hung]. 2. Ai r leakage shall not exceed the followi ng amount per li neal foot of crack for operati ng sash or per square foot for fixed sash when tested at 1.57 psf accordi ng to ASTM E283: [Grade 20-0.34 cfm] [Grade 40-0.25 cfm]. 3. No water penetration shall occur when units are tested at the following pressure according to ASTM E331: [Grade 20-2.86 psf] [Grade 40-4.43 psf]. 4. Window assembly shall sustain the following load without damage when tested according to ASTM E330: [Grade 20-20 psf] [Grade 40-40 psf]. 5. All glass shall be select quality complying with FS DD-G-451 D. 6. Insulating glass shall be manufactured and tested to comply with IGCC, and ASTM E774. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01340. B. Product Data: Submit catalog data under provisions of Section 01340. D. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certifications indicating compliance with specified per- formance and design requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING B. Deliver in original packaging, store off the ground and protect from weather. C. Store units in an upright position in a clean and dry storage area. 08615-2 D. Pri me or seal all wood surfaces, i ncl udi ng surfaces to be concealed by wall construction if more than 30 days will expire between delivery and installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Insulating Glass: All sealed insulating glass warranted against failure of the air seal for a period of ten (10) years from date of manufacture as stamped on the metal spacer between glass panels. PART 2 PRODUaS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Description: Marvin Wood [double hung] factory assembled Windows [and related fixed units] as manufactured by Marvin Windows, \tVc1rroad, Minnesota. Operable sash tilt into room for cleaning or rem<M!1. 2.02 WOOD DOUBLE HUNG MATERIALS A. Frame: Finger jointed edge-glued ~stern Ponderosa pine kiln dried to a moisture content of 6-12 percent at time of fabrication. \tVc1ter repellent, preservative treated in accordance with NWWDA 1.5.4. Frame Thickness: 11/16 inch (jambs and head jambs) and 1-5/16 inches (sill). Frame Width: 4-9/16 inches. B. Sash: Clear ~stern Ponderosa pine kiln dried to a moisture content of 6-12 percent at time of fabrication. \tVc1ter repellent, preservative treated in accordance with NWWDA 1.5.4. Sash Thickness: 1-5/16 inches. Corners slot and tenoned. C. Finish: 1. Exterior: [Acrylic latex prime coat, White] 2. Interior: [Acrylic latex prime coat, White]. D. Hardware: 1. Balancing System: Coil Spring Block and Tackle System with nylon cord and steel clutch. 2. Track: Vinyl extrusion with foam backing. Color: [White] 3. Lock: High Pressure Zinc Die-Cast Cam lock with heavy gauge steel keeper and lock base. Finish: Phosphate coated and electrostatically painted [White] baked enamel. 4. Sash lift: [None] E. ~atherstripping: Continuous, leaf-type weatherstrip on head jamb part stop which seals against top sash; dual durometer double leaf at check rail; bulb type dual durometer weatherstripping at bottom rail. leaf type weatherstrip at vinyl hardware track. I. Authentic Divided lites (ADl): [7/8 inch single glaze muntin] [1-7/16 inches insulating glaze muntin] Western Ponderosa pine. 08615-3 1. Pattern: [Rectangular] [Diamond) [Custom lite layout]. 2. Finish: Match sash finish. 2.03 GLAZING Edit for project conditions and window type: If more than one glass or glazing type is required, indicate types on drawings. All glazing types are available with combination storm sash and screen units. All insulating glass for standard sized one lite windows has Argon fill as standard if either Northern low E or Southern low E is specified. All insulating glass for special sized one lite windows and all ADl Units may have option of Argon fill if either Northern low E or Southern low E is specified. Hard Coat low E only on single glass with energy panels. A. Glazing Method: [Single Glazed with Energy Panel] B. Glass Type: [Clear] C. Glazing Seal: Silicone bedding glazed by means of removable stops. 2.04 ACCESSORIES AND TRIM B. Exterior Wood Mouldings: 1. Profile: [Brick Mold] 2. Finish: Match frame finish. as indicated on drawings. 0861 5-4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Before installation, verify that openings are plumb and square and of proper dimension. Report frame defects or unsuitable conditions to the General Contractor before proceedi ng. B. Acceptance: Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install windows according to manufacturer's instructions and reviewed shop drawings. Use installation clips for pre-finished units. Do not nail through factory finish. B. Install sealant and related backing materials at perimeter of assembly in accordance with Section 07900 Joi nt Sealers. Do not use expansive foam sealant. C. Install accessory items as required. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adj ust operable sash to work freely wi th all hardware functi oni ng properly. Re-adj ust at completi on of the project if directed. B. Remove all visible labels. C. leave wi ndows in a job clean condi ti on. fi nal c1eani ng of glass wi II be done under Secti on 01710. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Cover windows during spray painting or other construction operations that might cause damage. END Of SECTION 08615-5 SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide finish hardware throughout the Work as specified herein ahd as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Section 01021: Cash Allowances. 3. Installation of finish hardware is described under other Sections of these Specifications. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements; 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FINISH HARDWARE A. Provide within the Contract Sum the Cash Allowance stated in Section 01021 of these Specifications. B. The Architect will approve the finish hardware selection and the contractor will arrange for its delivery to the job site. FINISH HARDWARE .03 08710-1 """"""'~-~"'-""""'''~'-~'"'.''\'.'''''-'''"'''''''",'- PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for in- terface with the work of this Section. B. Secure templates from manufacturers as required, and dis- tribute to suppliers of doors and other items as required to assure proper fit of mill-installed units. C. Distribute finish hardware components to other trades as required, and provide proper direction regarding correct installation and adjustment of all units. D. Upon completion of installation of finish hardware, and as a condition of its acceptance, make a complete inspec- tion of all installed items. 1. Verify proper installation and function. 2. Make required adjustments and achieve optimum opera- tion. 3. Tighten screws and fasteners as necessary. 4. Make scratches and abrasions invisible to the unaided eye from a distance of five feet, or completely re- place such damaged item with new identical item at no additional cost to the OWner. END OF SECTION .03 FINISH HARDWARE 08710-2 SECTION 09110 METAL STUD SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide metal studs and accessories as in- dicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Surplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. In addition to complying the pertinent codes and regula- tions of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, comply with pertinent recommendations contained in "Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring" published by the Metal Lath/ Steel Framing Association. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. 2. Manufacturers' specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. 3. Manufacturers' recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. METAL STUD SYSTEM .01 09110-1 "<:l ~ PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL STUDS AND ACCESSORIES A. Meet or exceed minimum requirements of Fed Spec QQ-S-698 and Fed Spec QQ-S-775d, class d, for the item and use in- tended. B. Metal studs: 1. At interior metal stud partitions, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide standard punched steel studs of the gages shown on the Drawings, either hot- dip galvanized or factory pre-painted. 2. Use only one type throughout the Work, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specifically approved in ad- vance by the Architect. 3. At exterior metal stud walls, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide 14 gage standard punched steel "C" studs, either hot-dip galvanized or factory pre- painted. C. Accessories: Provide all accessories including, but not necessarily limited to, tracks, clips, anchors, fastening devices, sound attenuation pencil rods and resilient clips, and other accessories required for a complete and proper installation, and as recommended by the manufacturer of the steel studs used. 2 . 2 GROUT A. Provide a good grade of commercial grout for leveling the floor runner member of steel stud partitions as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Accurately layout partition and wall lines from the dimen- sions shown on the Drawings. B. Install metal studs and accessories in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Architect, anchoring all components firmly into position. J .01 METAL STUD SYSTEM 09110-2 C. Align partition and wall assemblies to a tolerance of one in 200 horizontally and one in 500 vertically. D. Coordination: 1. Space the studs as required for compliance with perti- nent regulations, to give proper support for the cover- ing material, and as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Coordinate and provide required backing and other sup- port for items to be mounted on the finished covering. 3. Coordinate requirements for pipes and other items de- signed to be housed within the partition and wall sys- tems. 3.3 LEVELING A. By use of the specified grout, or by other means approved by the Architect, provide continuous solid bearing under floor runner members of steel stud partitions and walls. B. Level in a manner to provide uniform interface with ceil- ings and other overhead construction. 3.4 SOUND ATTENUATING PARTITIONS A. At sound attenuating partitions, set floor runners in two 1/4" diameter continuous beads of sealant complying with provisions of Section 07920 of these Specifications. END OF SECTION .01 METAL STUD SYSTEM 09110-3 SECTION 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide portland cement plaster where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. C. Mock-ups: 1. At an area on the site where approved by the Architect, provide a mock-up plaster panel. a. Make the mock-up panel approximately 4'-0" square. b. Provide one mock-up panel for each portland cement plaster finish used on the Work. c. The mock-ups may be part of the Work, and may be incorporated into the finished Work when so ap- proved by the Architect. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER .01 09220-1 d. Revise as necessary to secure the Architect's ap- proval. 2. The mock-up panels, when approved by the Architect, will be used as datum points for comparison with the remainder of work under this Section for the purpose of acceptance or rejection. 3. If the mock-up panels are not permitted to be part of the finished Work, completely demolish and remove them from the job site upon completion and acceptance of the work of this Section. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING , . A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Portland cement: 1. Comply with ASTM e150, type I or II. 2. When specifically approved in advance by the Architect, other cements such as masonry cement, plastic cement, and gun cement may be used in the proportions shown in the approved mix designs. B. Lime: Provide special finishing hydrated lime complying with ASTM C206, type US," or provide normal finishing hy- drated lime complying with ASTM C6, type "N" with maximum unhydrated oxide content of 8% by weight, according to the proportions shown in the approved mix designs. C. Aggregates: 1. Comply with ASTM C144. 2. Gradation: a. For base coat, provide gradation within the follow- ing tolerances. U.S. standard Percent retained by weight +/- 2%: sieve: Minimum: Maximum: No. 4 : 0 No. 8: 0 10 No. 16: 10 40 No. 30: 30 65 No. 50: 70 90 No. 100: 95 100 .01 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-2 b. For finish coat, provide same gradation as for base coat: except with all aggregate passing the No. 8 sieve. D. Water: Use water which is potable and free from impurities that affect setting of portland cement plaster. E. Fiber additive: Provide pure manila fiber or animal hair, specially processed and packaged for use with plaster, from 1/2" to 2" long, and free from grease, oil, dirt, and other impurities. F. Coloring agent: Provide alkali resistant, sun fast, miner- al oxide producing colors approved by the Architect. G. Bonding agents: Provide material producing a permanent bond not affected by freezing, heat, acid, alkali, or damp- ness, producing no discoloration to finished plaster sur- faces, and complying with ASTM C631. H. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. 2.2 MIXES A. General: 1. Procedures: a. Proportion and measure the materials for each batch of plaster accurately. b. Prepare batches in quantity for complete use within a maximum of one hour after mixing. c. Do not retemper or use partially set plaster, ex- ceptp1aster which has stiffened only from evapora- tion. d. Do not use frozen, caked, or lumpy material, but remove such material from the job site immediately. e. Use sand which is moist and loose. f. Withhold about 10% of the required water until the mixing cycle is nearly completed, then add water as needed to achieve the required consistency. g. Do not mix by hand unless specifically so approved by the Architect. 2. Mechanical mixing: a. Mix each batch separately. b. Clean the mixer thoroughly between batches, remov- ing set or hardened materials prior to loading new materials. c. Continue operation of mixer while adding materials. .' .01 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-3 B. Proportions: 1. Dash bond coat: Use one part of the approved cement to 0-2 parts sand. 2. Base coats: a. Where "fiber plaster" is called for, use 1 lb of the specified fiber to 94 lbs of the approved ce- men t . b. At other locations, use proportions shown in the mix design approved by the Architect. 3. Finish coats: a. Where color is called for, use not more than lOt. color (by weight) to cement. b. Use proportions of. other materials as shown in the mix design approved by the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.i SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. verify that grounds have been set in a manner to achieve the required plaster thicknesses. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Uniformly dampen absorptive bases by use of a fine fog spray of clean water. B. Where required, apply the approved bonding agent. 3.3 . APPLICATION A. General: 1. Schedule application of plaster to precede application of other finishes, and installation of other items, which could be damaged by accidents incidental to the plastering. 2. Apply portland cement plaster by machine or by hand. 3. Apply each coat continuously, interrupting only at control joints, at openings, or at junctions of plaster planes. 4. Where frames or other items provide a plaster ground, tool through the finish coat to produce a V-joint at the intersection of plaster and such items. 5. Produce the total plaster thicknesses shown on the Drawings. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER .01 09220-4 B. Base coats: 1. Over metal base: a. Apply with sufficient material and force to cover the substrate and to form good keys, embedding and filling all spaces of the metal base. b. Score to receive the succeeding coat. 2. Over solid base: a. Apply with sufficient material and force to insure tight contact and complete coverage of substrate. b. Score to receive the succeeding coat. 3. Where three-coat installation is called for: a. Do not apply the second coat sooner than 48 hours after installation of the base coat. b. Apply with sufficient material and force to cover the substrate and form a good bond. c. Bring out to grounds, straighten to a true surface, and leave sufficiently rough to ensure adequate bond of the finish coat. C. Finish coats: 1. Do not apply finish coat sooner than seven days after installation of the last under coat. 2. Apply with sufficient material and force to cover the substrate and form a good bond. 3. Finish to a true and even surface after moisture has left the surface. 4. Where "trowel finish" is called for, use a steel trowel and produce a uniformly smooth surface free from imper- fections visible to the unaided eye from a distance of five feet. 5. Where "float finish" is called for, use a wood float and produce a uniformly smooth sand-finished surface free from imperfections visible to the unaided eye from a distance of five feet. 6. Where "textured finish" is called for, provide a dash finish coat matching the texture of the approved mock- up panel. 3.4 TOUCHUP A. Upon completion of the other work of this Section, inspect all portland cement plaster surfaces and correct conditions which do not meet specified requirements. B. Remove protective materials and plaster materials from ad- jacent surfaces, and remove stains which would adversely affect finishes. END OF SECTION .01 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-5 SECTION 09260 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide gypsum drywall and accessories where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Section 09110: Metal stud system. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. c. Mock-ups: 1. At an area on the site where approved by the Archi- tect, provide a mock-up gypsum wallboard panel. a. Make the panel approximately 4'-0" square. b. Provide one mock-up panel for each gypsum wall- board finish used on the Work. c. The mock-ups may be used as part of the Work, and may be included in the finished Work, when so ap- GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM .01 09260-1 proved by the Architect. d. Revise as necessary to secure the Architect's ap- proval. 2. The mock-up panels, when approved by the Architect, will be used as datum points for comparison with the remainder of the work of this Section for the purpose of acceptance or rejection. ~. If the mock-up panels are not permitted to be part of the finished Work, completely demolish and remove them from the job site upon completion and acceptance of the work of this Section. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING I . A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. General: 1. Provide gypsum wallboard complying with Fed Spec SS-L-30D, in 48" widths and in such lengths as will result in a minimum of joints. 2. Regular wallboard: Provide type III, grade R, class 1, 5/8" thick except as may be shown otherwise on the Drawings. 3. Fire-retardant wallboard: Provide type III, grade X, class 1, 5/8" thick. 4. Water-resistant wallboard: Provide type VII, grade W or X as required, class 2, 5/B" thick except as may be shown otherwise on the Drawings. 5. Foil-backed wallboard: Provide as shown on the Draw- ings. B. Shaft walls: Where so indicated on the Drawings, provide gypsum wallboard system specifically designed for encasing shafts of the .required fire-resistivity, and complying with Fed Spec SS-L-30D, type IV, grade R or X, class 1, in the dimensions shown or otherwise required. C. Sheathing: Where gypsum wallboard sheathing 1s indicated on the Drawings, provide gypsum wallboard complying with Fed Spec SS-L-30D, type II, grade W, class 2. 2.2 METAL TRIM A. Form from zinc-coated steel not lighter than 26 gage, com- plying with Fed Spec QQ-S-775, type I, class d or e. B. Casing beads: 1. Provide channel-shapes with an exposed wing, and with GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM .01 09260-2 a concealed wing not less than 7/8" wide. 2. The exposed wing may be covered with paper cemented to the metal, but shall be suitable for joint treatment. C. Corner beads: Provide angle shapes with wings not less than 7/8" wide and perforated for nailing and joint treat- ment, or with combination metal and paper wings bonded to- gether, not less than 1-1/4" wide and suitable for joint treatment. D. F.dge beads for use at perimeter of ceilings: 1. Provide angle shapes with wings not less than 3/4" wide. ' , 2. Provide concealed wing perforated for nailing, and ex- posed wing edge folded flat. 3. Exposed wing may be factory finished in white color. 2.3 JOINTING SYSTEM A. Provide a jointing system, including reinforcing tape and compound, designed as a system to be used together and as recommended for this use by the manufacturer of the gypsum wallboard approved for use on this Work. B. Jointing compound may be used for finishing if so recom- mended by its manufacturer. 2.4. FASTENING DEVICES A. For fastening gypsum wallboard in place on B. For fastening gypsum wallboard in place on wood, use 1-1/4" type W bugle-head screws, or use annular ring type nails complying with ASTM C5l4 and of the length required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction. 2.5 ACCESS DOORS A. In partitions and ceilings installed under this Section, provide doors where required for access to mechanical in- stallations and electrical installations. GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM .01 09260-3 t'iff .~ ,,', ..~_)".~,,",,,,,., 2.6 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION .3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install the gypsum wallboard in accordance with the Drawings and with the separate boards in moderate con- tact but not forced into place. 2. At internal and external corners, conceal the cut edges of the boards by the overlapping covered edges of the abutting boards. 3. Stagger the boards so that corners of any four boards will not meet at a common point except in vertical corners. B. Ceilings: 1. Install the gypsum wallboard to ceilings with the long dimension of the wallboard at right angles to the sup- porting members. 2. Wallboard may be installed with the long dimension parallel to supporting members that are spaced 16" on centers when attachment members are provided at end joints. C. Walls: 1. Install the gypsum wallboard to studs at right angles to the furring or framing members. 2. Make end joints, where required, over framing or fur- ring members. D. Attaching: 1. Drive the specified screws with clutch-controlled GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM .01 09260-4 power screwdrivers, spacing the screws 12" on centers at ceilings and 16" on centers at walls. 2. Where framing members are spaced 24" apart on walls, space screws 12" on centers. 3. Attach double layers in accordance with the pertinent codes and the manufacturer's recommendations as ap- proved by the Architect. 4. Attach to wood as required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction. E. Access doors: 1. By careful coordination with the Drawings and with the trades involved, install the specified access doors where required. 2. Anchor firmly into position, and align properly to achieve an installation flush with the finished sur- face. 3.3 JOINT TREATMENT A. General: 1. Inspect areas to be joint treated, verifying that the gypsum wallboard fits snugly against supporting frame- work. 2. In areas where joint treatment and compound finishing will be performed, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 degrees for 24 hours prior to commencing the treatment, and until joint and finishing compounds have dried. 3. Apply the joint treatment and finishing compound by machine or hand tool. 4. Provide a minimum drying time of 24 hours between coats, with additional drying time in poorly ventila- ted areas. B. Embedding compounds: 1. Apply to gypsum wallboard joints and fastener heads in a thin uniform layer. 2. Spread the compound not less than 3" wide at joints, center the reinforcing tape in the joint, and embed the tape in the compound. Then spread a thin layer of compound over the tape. 3. After this treatment has dried, apply a second coat of embedding compound to joints and fastener heads, spreading in a thin uniform coat to not less than 6" wide at joints, and feather edged. 4. Sandpaper between coats as required. 5. When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to eliminate ridges and high points. c. Finishing compounds: 1. After embedding compound is thoroughly dry and has been completely sanded, apply a coat of finishing com- GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM .01 09260-5 pound to joints and fastener heads. 2. Feather the finishing compound to not less than 12" wide. 3. When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to obtain a uniformly smooth surface, taking care to not scuff the paper surface of the wallboard. 3.4 CORNER TREATMENT A. Internal corners: Treat as specified for joints, except fold the reinforcing tape lengthwise through the middle and fit neatly into the corner. I . B. External corners: 1. Install the specified corner bead, fitting neatly over the corner and securing with the same type fasteners used for installing the wallboard. 2. Space the fasteners approximately 6" on centers, and drive through the wallboard into the framing or fur- ring member. 3. After the corner bead has been secured into position, treat the corner with joint compound and reinforcing tape as specified for joints, feathering the joint compound out from 8" to 10" on each side of the corner. 3.5 OTHER METAL TRIM A. General: 1. The Drawings do not purport to show all locations and requirements for metal trim. 2. Carefully study the Drawings and the installation, and provide all metal trim normally recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum wallboard approved for use in this Work. 3.6 CLEANING UP A. In addition to other requirements for cleaning, use neces- sary care to prevent scattering gypsum wallboard scraps and dust, and to prevent tracking gypsum and joint finish- ing compound onto floor surfaces. B. At completion of each segment of installation in a room or space, promptly pick up and remove from the working area all scrap, debris, and surplus material of this Section. END OF SECTION . .01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM 09260-6 SECTION 09310 CERAMIC TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide ceramic tile where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thor.oughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Provide manufacturer's Haster Grade certificate stating type and location of each tile material in this Section 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data: within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. 2. Manufacturers' specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. 3. Samples of each type, class, and color of ceramic tile required, not less than 12" square, mounted on plywood or hardboard backing, and grouted as specified. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. CERAMIC TILE .01 09310-1 rl PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CERAMIC TILE A. Acceptable products: 1. Florida Tile, Natura 8707 Oyster @ Restroom floors 2. Florida Tile, Bright Glaze 3 Bone @ Restroom Wainscot B. Provide sanitary cove base to match in restrooms only. c. Lay tile patterns as indicated on drawings. 2.2, SETTING MATERIALS A. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in the Tile Council of America. B. Organic adhesive: 1. Provide a prepared organic material, ready to use with no further addition of liquid or powder, which cures or sets by evaporation. 2. Comply with ANSI A136.1, using type I where exposed to prolonged water presence and using type II at all other locations. (Miracle 500) adhesive. C. Special tile setting mortars will be considered by the Architect when complete technical data is submitted in ad- vance. 2.3 GROUT A.,':'Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in the Tile Council of America in colors selected by the Architect from standard colors available from the approved manufacturers. B. Ceramic Acid Resistant Grout: 1. Provide a commercially prepared mixture of portland ce- ment and other ingredients producing a water-resistant, dense, uniformly colored material. 2. Secure the Architect's specific approval of the pro- posed material prior to use. C. Plywood Waterproofing: 1. Provide a latex waterproof membrane over plywood flooring before installation of file. 2. Membrane to be Laticrete Waterproofing. CERAMIC TILE .01 09310-2 D. Aluminum thresholds: 1. Provide aluminum thresholds at all exterior doors where the interior floor finishes change materials ( 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quin'~ for? c{.l:J1plet.e C1.nc1 prop'E~r inst:\ll(\tion, ns selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to tillely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI AlOS.l, ANSI Al08.2, and the "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" of the Tile Council of America, except as otherwise directed by the Architect or specified herein. 2. Maintain minimum temperature limits and installation practices recommended by materials manufacturers. 3. Do not install tile floors over waterproofing until the membrane has been tested and accepted. B. Limits of tile: 1. Extend tile into recesses and under equipment and fix- tures to form a complete covering without interruptions. 2. Terminate tile neatly at obstructions, edges, and cor- ners, without disruption of pattern or joint alignment. C. Joining pattern: 1. Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or directed by the Architect. 2. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, trim, and walls are the same size. 3. Layout tile work, and center the tile fields both di- rections in each space or on each wall area. 4. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. 5. Provide uniform joint widths. D. Cleaning: 1. Upon completion of placing and grouting, clean the work of this Section in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturers of the materials used. CERAMIC TILE .)! 09310-3 2. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous items fro~effects of acid cleaning. 3. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after clean- ing. E~' : Provide tile surfaces clean and free from cracked, broken, chipped, unbonded, and otherwise defective units. F. Provide required protection of tile surfaces to prevent damage and wear prior to acceptance of the Work by the Owner. END OF SECTION , . :1' .01 CERAMIC TILE 09310-4 SECTION 09330 CUBAN TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Repair cuban tile where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a com- plete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Section 09310: Ceramic tile. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS CUBAN TILE .01 09330-1 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CUBAN TILE A. Provide quarry tile and accessories complying with Tile Council of America Specification 137.1, in colors and pat- terns selected by the Architect from standard colors and patterns of the approved manufacturers, with coefficient of friction not less than 0.50 when tested in accordance with ASTM F489, ASTM F609, and the National Bureau of Standards Technical Note 895. 2.2 SETTING ~~TERIALS A. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in the Tile Council of America "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." B. Provide a mortar system employing epoxy resin and epoxy hardener portions, especially formulated for industrial and commercial installations where chemical resistance, high bond strength, and high impact resistance are important. C. Acceptable products: 1. "Epox-C-Uent" manufactured by Summi tville Tiles, Inc., Summitville, Ohio 43962. 2. Equal products of other manufacturers when approved in advance by the Architect. 2.3 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Upon examining the existing tile after the carpet removal, contractor should clean existing cuban tile with an acid wash as required. CUBAN TILE .01 09330-2 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A10a.l, J1.NSI A10a. 2, and the "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" of the Tile Council of America, except as otherwise directed by the Architect or specified herein. 2. Maintain minimum temperature limits and installation practices recommended by materials manufacturers. 3. Do not install tile floors over membrane until the mem- brane has been tested and accepted. B. Limits of tile: 1. Extend tile into recesses and under equipment and fix- tures to form a complete covering without interruptions. 2. Terminate tile neatly at obstructions, edges, and cor- ners, without disruption of pattern or joint alignment. C. Joining pattern: 1. Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or directed by the Architect. 2. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor and base are the same size. 3. Layout tile work, and center the tile fields both di- rections in each space. 4. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. 5. Provide uniform joint widths. D. Provide expansion and control joints where shown on the Drawings, and where otherwise recommended by the "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" of the Tile Council of Amer- ica, sealing in accordance with Section 07920 of these Specifications. E. Cleaning: 1. Upon completion of placing and grouting, clean the work of this Section in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturers of the materials used. 2. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous items from effects of acid cleaning. 3. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after clean- ing. F. Provide tile surfaces clean and free from cracked, broken, chipped, unbonded, and otherwise defective units. G. Provide required protection of tile surfaces to prevent damage and wear prior to acceptance of the Work by the Owner. END OF SECTION .01 CUBAN TILE 09330-3 SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide acoustical ceilings where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the OWner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements; 3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show suspension, layout, lateral restraint, installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades; 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply ''lith pertinent provisions of Section 01640. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS .01 09510-1 1.5 EXTRA STOCK A. Deliver to the OWner for his use in future modifications, an extra stock of approximately 10% of each type of acous- tical material installed, packaging each type of material separately, distinctly marked, and adequately protected against deterioration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 "T" GRID SYSTEM A. Provide a complete system of supporting members, anchors, wall cornices, adapters for light fixtures and grilles, and accessories of every type required for a complete sus- pended "T" grid system of the arrangements shown on the Drawings, in color or colors selected by the Architect from standard colors of the approved manufacturer, and complying with pertinent requirements of Underwriters Lab- oratories, Inc., and the governmental agencies having jur- isdiction. B. Acceptable products: 1. Chicago Metallic Corp., 5501 Downey Boulevard, Vernon, California 90058 (213) 582-1100: a. Ceiling system type 1: "Snap Grid 500"~ 2. Equal products of other manufacturers when approved in advance by the Architect. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS A. Acceptable products: 1. Armstrong Ceilings, Orlando, FL, (305) 774-6905 1 t 80 553, 12"x12"x3/4", a. Ceiling system type : Traver one , Class A, NRC .75-.85, White b. Ceiling System type 2 (Match exist.): Sanerra 12"x12"x3/4", class A, NRC .60-.70, Field verify coloI' "" c. Ceiling System type 3: Second Look 1 2765B, 24"x48 x3/4 , Class A NRC .50-.60, White d. Ceiling System type 4: Open Plan Cortega 768A 24"x48"x3/4", Class A, NRC .65-.75, White 2.3 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete and proper installati.on, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS .01 09510-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Ale should be on and the humidity no more than 7Q%. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Except as modified by requirements of governmental agen- cies having jurisdiction, recommendations of the manufac- turer as approved by the Architect, or specific directions of the Architect, install in accordance with ASTM C636 and the pertinent UL design requirements. B. Lateral bracing: 1. Provide lateral bracing as required by pertinent codes and regulations. 2. Secure lateral bracing to structural members. Secure at right angles to the direction of the partition and four ways in large ceiling areas. C. Provide hold-down clips for ceiling boards only when so re- quired by governmental agencies having jurisdiction. D. Make all grid level within a tolerance of one in 1000 and straight within a tolerance of one in 1000. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS A. "T" grid system: Install acoustical ceiling boards so linearity of facing is as directed by the Architect. B. Sound walls: Set acoustical ceiling boards in four con- tinuous beads of 1/4" diameter sealant, one at top of each edge of the gypsum drywall and two on top of the top metal runner track. 3.4 CLEANING UP A. In addition to other stipulated requirements for cleaning, completely remove finger prints and traces of soil from the surfaces of grid and acoustical materials, using only those cleaning materials recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the material being cleaned. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS .01 09510-3 3.5 GLUED IN PLACE INSTALLATION A. Examine the surfaces under which the work of this section will be performed. 1. New surfaces: To be clean and free of all loose dirt. 2. Existing surfaces: To have existing tile removed, including the removal of glue and loose or peeling paint, sanding smooth the existing surface to which the new tile will be glued to. 3. Do not cement acoustical tile when room temperature exceeds 100 degrees F. or is below 50 degrees F. Relative humidity should be nor more than 70%. AIC systems should be installed and operable to maintain proper temperatures before, during and after instal- lation of the acoustical tiles. B. Repainting existing tile 1. Spray Painting: First remove loose dust from the material with a brush or vacuum cleaner attachment. Thin the paint only as much as necessary. If it is too thick for proper spraying, care should be taken that it is thinned only with the solvent recommended by the manufacturer. When spray painting, apply the paint with a stream directed perpendicularly to the surface of the material, moving the gun back and forth to get a uniform coating. Under normal conditions, one coat should be sufficient. 2. Roll coating: Applicator must brush paint all bevels after roll coating. When painting acoustical materials, the painter should be very careful that he does not close up the perforations or fissures in the material. It is through these openings in the surface that sound waves enter the body of the acoustical material and aI'e absorbed. END OF SECTION .01 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-4 SECTION 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide resilient tile flooring and base where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data: within 60 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements; 3. Samples of each item, color, and pattern available in the specified grades from the proposed manufacturers. 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. 1.5 EXTRA STOCK A. Deliver to the Owner for his use in future modifications an extra stock of approximately 10% of each color and pat- RESILIENT TILE FLOORING .Ol 09660-1 tern in each material installed under this Section, pack- aging each type of material separately, distinctly marked, and adequately protected against deterioration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENE~.L A. Provide colors and patterns as selected by the Architect from standard colors and patterns of the approved manufac- turer in the specified type. B. Adhesives: 1. Provide waterproof and stabilized type adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer of the material being installed. 2. Asphalt emulsions and other non-waterproof adhesives will not be acceptable. C. Concrete slab primer: Provide non-staining type as re- quired and as recommended by the manufacturer of the mate- rial being installed. 2.2 RESILIENT MATERIALS A. Reinforced vinyl tile: 1. Dimension: Provide 12" x 12" x 1/8". 2. Acceptable products: a. Armstrong Premium Vinyl Composition Tile 1. Stonetex, 52134 Shell Mist 2. Stonetex, 52127 Stone White b. Equal product of other manufactured when samples are approved in advance by Architect. 2.3 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. --,' .01 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660-2 3.2 PREPARATION A. Subfloors: 1. Verify that substrate is smooth, level, at required finish elevation, and without more than 1/8" in 10'-0" variation from level or slopes shown on the Drawings. 2. Prior to laying materials, broom clean or vacuum the surfaces to be covered, and inspect the subfloors. B. Priming: 1. Apply concrete slab primer if so recommended by the resilient flooring manufacturer. 2. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer's recommen- dations as approved by the Architect. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install materials only after finishing operations, in- cluding painting, have been completed and after perma- nent heating system is operating. 2. Verify that moisture content of concrete slabs, build- ing air temperature, and relative humidity are within the limits recommended by the manufacturers of the materials used. 3. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on the finish surface as marked in the sub- floor. Use chalk or other non-permanent marking de- vice. B. Installing resilient tiles: 1. Place units with adhesive cement in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Architect. a. Butt units tightly to vertical surfaces, nosings, edgings, and thresholds. b. Scribe as necessary around obstructions and to pro- duce neat joints. c. Place tiles tightly laid, even, and in straight parallel lines. d. Extend units into toe spaces, door reveals, and in closets and similar spaces. 2. Lay units from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that units at op- posite edges of the room are of equal width. a. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 3" wide at room perimeters. b. Lay units square to axes of the room or space. 3. Match units for color and pattern by using materials from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING .01 09660-3 4. Lay in ashlar pattern with grain in all units running the same direction, unless otherwise directed by the Architect. 5. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to units and secured with adhesive, providing at all unprotected edges unless otherwise shown. C. Installing base: 1. Install base where shown on the Drawings. 2. Use factory-preformed exterior corners, and factory- preformed or job-mitered interior corners. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Remove excess adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces, using neutral cleaner recommended by the manufac- turer of the resilient materials. END OF SECTION .01 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660-4 ~;- 'f-'" f P f-- . -;'.'" SECTION 09680 CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide carpet insta11ati.on and carpet ac- cessories where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper glue-down installa- tion. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data: Within 60 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements; 3. Shop Drawings showing location of seams and locations and types of carpet metal and accessories. 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. CARPETING .01 09680-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET A. Acceptable product: Lees Commercial Carpet Company, C-401 North Green, Atlanta, GA 404/521-1293. 2.2 OTHER HATE RIALS A. Adhesives: 1. Provide white latex carpet adhesive such as W. W. Henry Company No. 356, Roberts Company No. 41-0504, or an equal approved by the Architect and recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the selected carpet. 2. Provide seam adhesive such as W. W. Henry Company No. 246, Roberts Company No. 41-0502, or an equal approved by the Architect and recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the selected carpet. B. At intersection of carpet and floor tile, provide Mercer Plastics Company, Inc., "Custom Edge Carpet Bar No. 90," vinyl, or equal, in color selected by the Architect. C. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Immediately prior to installation of the work of this Sec- tion, thoroughly clean substrata and remove oil, grease, paint, varnish, hardeners, and other items which would ad- versely affect the bond of adhesive. B. Make substrata level and free trom irregularities. Assure one constant floor height after carpet is installed, fill- ing low spots and grinding high spots as required. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Glue directly to the floor, using no pads and no foam. 2. Scribe the carpet accurately to vertical surfaces. CARPETING .01 09680-2 i ~. .....,.,' 'f: i'\l>"~-' :"', .~~.' -,."",,,,,,,.'" 3. Align the lines of carpet, as woven, using no fill strips less than 6" wide, laying all carpet in the same direction unless specifically directed otherwise by the Architect. B. Seams: 1. Locate seams only where shown on the approved Shop Drawings, or where specifically otherwise approved by the Architect. 2. Locate seams to the maximum extent practicable out of the way of traffic. 3. Fabricate seams by the compression method, using a butt joint, and properly bead and seal. 4. Do not stretch seams. C. In addition to the cleaning requirements stated else- where, thoroughly clean carpet and adjacent surfaces prior to final acceptance of the carpeted areas by the OWner. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide a heavy non-staining paper or plastic walkway as required over carpeting in direction of traffic, maintain- ing intact until carpeted space is accepted by the OWner. 3.5 SURPLUS MATERIAL A. Allow the OWner to inspect and select from scrap carpet remaining after the installation. Bundle, wrap in burlap, and deliver to the Owner the carpet scraps selected by him. END OF SECTION .01 CARPETING 09680-3 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Paint and finish the exterior and interior exposed surfaces listed on the Painting Schedule in Part 3 of this Section, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Priming or priming and finishing of certain surfaces may be specified to be factory-performed or insta1ler- performed under pertinent other Sections. C. Work not included: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces in concealed areas and inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, foundation spaces, pipe spaces, and duct shafts. 2. Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze, and similar finished materials will not require painting under this Section except as may be so specified. 3. Do not paint moving parts of operating units: mechani- calor electrical parts such as valve operators: link- ages, sensing devices, and motor shafts, unless other- wise indicated. 4. Do not paint over required labels or equipment identi- fication, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. D. Definitions: 1. "Paint," as used herein, means coating systems materi- als including primers, emulsions, epoxy, enamels, sealers, fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. PAINTING .01 09900-1 B. Paint coordination: 1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime coats actually used. 2. Review other Sections of these Specifications as re- quired, verifying the prime coats to be used and as- suring compatibility of the total coating system for the various substrata. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINT MATERIALS A. Acceptable materials: 1. The Painting Schedule in Part 3 of this Section is based, in general, on products of the Benjamin Moore Paints Co. 2. Equal products or other manufacturers approved in advance by the Architect, may be substituted in ac- cordance with provisions of the Contract. B. Undercoats and thinners: 1. Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufac- turer as the finish coat. 2. Use only the thinners recommended by the paint manu- facturer, and use only to the recommended limits. 3. Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, finish coat, and thinner material as parts of a unified system of paint finish. 2.2 COLOR SCHEDULES A. The Architect will prepare a color schedule with samples for guidance in painting. B. The Architect may select, allocate, and vary colors on different surfaces throughout the Work, subject tothe following. 1. Exterior work: A maximum of three different colors will be used, with variations for trim, doors, miscel- laneous work, and metal work. 2. Interior work: A maximum of two different pigmented colors will be used, with variations for trim and wall surfaces. PAINTING .01 09900-2 2.3 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT A. For application of the approved paint, use only such equipment as is recommended for application of the partic- ular paint by the manufacturer of the particular paint, and as approved by the Architect. B. Prior to use of application equipment, verify that the proposed equipment is actually compatible with the materi- al to be applied, and that integrity of the finish will not be jeopardized by use of the proposed equipment. 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental totimely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 MATERIALS PREPARATION A. General: 1. Mix and prepare paint materials in strict accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations as approved by the Architect. 2. When materials are not in use, store in tightly cover- ed containers. 3. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing, and ap- plication of paint in a clean condition, free from foreign materials and residue. B. Stirring: 1. Stir materials before application, producing a mixture of uniform density. 2. Do not stir into the material any film which may form on the surface, but remove the film and, if necessary, strain the material before using. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: 1. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with the paint manufacturers' recommenda- tions as approved by the Architect. PAINTING .01 09900-3 -.li!I 2. Remove removable items which are in place and are not scheduled to receive paint finish: or provide surface- applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. 3. Following completion of painting in each space or area, reinstall the removed items by using workmen who are skilled in the necessary trades. 4. Clean each surface to be painted prior to applying paint of surface treatment. 5. Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvent of low toxicity and flash point in excess of 200 degrees F, prior to start of mechanical cleaning. 6. Schedule the cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall onto wet newly painted surfaces. B. Preparation of wood surfaces: 1. Clean wood surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and other foreign substance. 2. Smooth finished wood surfaces exposed to view, using the proper sandpaper. Where so required, use varying degrees of coarseness in sandpaper to produce a uni- formly smooth and unmarred wood surface. 3. Unless specifically approved by the Architect, do not proceed with painting of wood surfaces until the mois- ture content of the wood is 12% or less as measured by a moisture meter approved by the Architect. C. Preparation of metal surfaces: 1. Thoroughly clean surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and grease. 2. On galvanized surfaces, use solvent for the initial cleaning, and then treat the surface thoroughly with phosphoric acid etch. Remove etching solution com- pletely before proceeding. 3. Allow to dry thoroughly before application of paint. 3.4 PAINT APPLICATION A. General: 1. Touchup shop-applied prime coats which have been dam- aged, and touchup bare areas prior to start of finish coats application. 2. Slightly vary the color of succeeding coats. a. Do not apply additional coats until the completed coat has been inspected and approved. b. Only the inspected and approved coats of paint will be considered in determining the number of coats applied. 3. Sand and dust be~n coats to remove defects visible to the unaided eye from a distance of five feet. 4. On removable panels and hinged panels, paint the back sides to match the exposed sides. PAINTING .01 09900-4 B. Drying: 1. Allow sufficient drying time between coats, modifying the period as recommended by the material manufacturer to suit adverse weather conditions. 2. Consider oil-base and oleo-resinous solvent-type paint as dry for recoating when the paint feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate pressure of the thumb, and when the application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. C. Brush applications: 1. Brush out and work the brush coats onto the surface in an even film. 2. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, and other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. D. Spray application: 1. Except as specifically otherwise approved by the Arch- itect, confine spray application to metal framework and similar surfaces where hand brush work would be infer- ior. 2. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide the hiding equivalent of brush coats. 3. Do not double back with spray equipment to build up film thickness of two coats in one pass. E. For completed work, match the approved Samples as to tex- ture, color, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with the specified requirements. F. Miscellaneous surfaces and procedures: 1. Exposed mechanical items: a. Finish electric panels, access doors, conduits, pipes, ducts, grilles, registers, vents, and items of similar nature to match the adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces, or as directed. b. Paint visible duct surfaces behind vents, regis- ters, and grilles flat black. c. Wash metal with solvent, prime, and apply two coats of alkyd enamel. 3. Hardware: Paint prime coated hardware to match adja- cent surfaces. 4. Wet areas: a. In toilet rooms and contiguous areas, add an ap- proved fungicide to paints. PAINTING .01 09900-5 b. For oil base paints, use 1% phenolmercuric or 4% tetrachlorophenol. c. For water emulsion and glue size surfaces, use 4% sodium tetrachlorophenate. 6. Exposed vents: Apply two coats of heat-resistant paint approved by the Architect. 3.5 PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Provi~e the following paint finishes. B. Exterior metal, galvanized: 1. Pretreatment: Ospho metal treatment 2. First coat: Moorcraft lat~x house paint 3. Second and Third coat: Latex Enamel/Mooreglow C. Exter ior \-mod: 1. First coat: 2. Second and Third coat: Trim Oilbase/Moorecraft Latex Enamel Mooreglow with moldicide. Treat knot holes with QD 30. D. Interior flat wall paint: 1. On gypsum drywall (typical) (walls and ceilings): a. First coat: Primer Latex (Look) b. Second and Third coat: Latex Mooretone with moldicide. E. Interior semi-gloss enamel: 1. On ferrous metal, use: a. First coat: Chrome Oxide primer b. Second coat: Primer Latex Look c. Third coat: Latex Mooretone 2. On gypsum drywall at restroom ceilings, mechanical rooms and janitor closets. a. First coat: Moorecraft Enamel under body b. Second and Third coat: Empervo Highgloss Enamel 3. On wood doors and trim: a. First coat: Moorecraft Enamel underbody b. Second and Third coat: Latex Enamel Semigloss Mooretone with moldicide. F. Exterior stucco: 1. First coat: Latex Moorgard 2. Second coat: Latex Moorgard END OF SECTION .01 PAINTING 09900-6 SECTION 09951 VINYL-COATED FABRIC WALL COVERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide vinyl-coated fabric wall covering where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Sectio'n. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements; 3. Samples of the full range of colors and patterns avail- able from the proposed manufacturer in the specified range. 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. C. Mock-ups: 1. At an area on the site where approved by the Architect, provide a mock-up panel of the work of this Section. a. Make the mock-up panel approximately 4'-0" high by three full fabric widths wide. VINYL-COATED FABRIC WALL COVERING .01 09951-1 b. Provide one mock-up panel for each color and pat- tern of vinyl-coated fabric wall covering used on the Work. c. The mock-ups may be part of the Work, and may be incorporated into the finished Work, when so ap- proved by the Architect. d. Revise as necessary to secure the Architect's ap- proval. 2. The mock-up panels, when approved by the Architect, will be used as datum points for comparison with the remainder of the work of this Section for the purpose of acceptance or rejection. 3. If the mock-up panels are not permitted to be part of the finished Work, completely demolish and remove them from the job site upon completion and acceptance of the work of this Section. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. 1.5 EXTRA STOCK A. Deliver to the OWner for his use in future modifications, an extra stock of approximately 10% of each color and pat- tern of material, and proper adhesive, used in the work of this Section, packaging each type of material separately, distinctly marked, and adequately protected against deteri- oration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL-COATED FABRIC WALL COVERING A. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide Blantex fabric backed vinyl wall-covering, style - East Side MDS 3550, Miami, FL, 1-800-727-6610. 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide a heavy-bodied water-soluble adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the approved fabric. B. At external corners and at exposed edges of fabric, provide extruded aluminum trim from alloy 6063-T5, one-piece full length, with fine satin finish and class II clear coating complying with AA-M2l-A3l, in type recommended for the use by the manufacturer of the approved fabric. VINYL-COATED FABRIC WALL COVERING .01 09951-2 C. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Make moisture content tests of substrate by use of an elec- tronic moisture meter approved by the Architect, and verify that substrate moisture content does not exceed: 1. For plaster and gypsum wallboard: 5%: 2. For masonry and concrete: 12%: 3. For wood products: Maximum moisture content 7% aver- age, with a range permitted in individual pieces from 5% to 15%. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Metal: 1. Clean the surface free from rust, scale, grease, oil, and other contaminants. 2. Prime bare metal with a metal primer recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the approved fabric. B . Wood: 1. Make the surface completely smooth: set nail heads and fill with waterproof filler, sanding smooth with the adjacent surfaces: and verify proper moisture content. 2. Seal knots, pitch, and sap streaks with one coat of 2 lb cut white shellac and one coat of the adhesive used for applying the fabric, covering the entire surface. C. Gypsum wallboard and plaster: 1. Over gypsum wallboard, apply a uniform release coat of material recommended by the manufacturer of the ap- proved adhesive. 2. Dust the surface thoroughly and remove all loose mate- rial. 3. Verify proper moisture content. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF METAL MOLDING A. Install the approved molding at external corners and at ex- posed edges of fabric, using adhesive recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the molding, installing true to line, using full-length stock to the maximum practicable, VINYL-COATED FABRIC WALL COVERING .01 09951-3 l. .~., 'W. . ~;.'1' -..-.r ,,' ''I'' ""'"~, butting horizontal joints to form a tight hairline crack, and mitering corners. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FABRIC A. Sequence: 1. Use fabric in consecutive numerical sequence of their manufacture. 2. Place fabric panels sequentialy in the exact order they are cut from the roll, including for filling all spaces above doors and above or below windows and similar lo- cations. B. Handle the fabric in strict accordance with the manufac- turer's recommendations as approved by the Architect. 1. Trim additional selvage where required to achieve a color and pattern match at seams. 2. Follow the manufacturer's printed instructions for mix- ing adhesive. 3. When overlapping the edges and double-cutting through both thicknesses, exercise care to prevent cutting the substrate. 4. Wrap fabric 6" beyond inside and outside cornerS1 not cutting at corners except when color of fabric selected is different on adjacent walls. 5. Do not permit horizontal seams. 6. Install the fabric prior to installation of plumbing fixtures, casing, bases, and cabinets. 7. Use stiff bristled brush or flexible broad knife to eliminate air pockets and to secure fabric to substrate surfaces. 8. Using a damp sponge, remove excess adhesive from each seam as it is made, wiping clean and dry with a cloth towel. 3.5 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. As the work progresses, clean the surplus adhesive from fabric surfaces and adjacent surfaces. B. Visually inspect to verify that installed fabric is secure, smooth, clean, without wrinkles, and with no gaps or over- laps. C. Inspect all seams, verifying that precise match has been achieved, and correcting mis-match of color and/or pattern as necessary to secure the Architect's approval. D. Verify that installed fabric meets or exceeds the quality of installation achieved in the approved mock-up panels. END OF SECTION .01 VINYL-COATED FABRIC WALL COVERING 09951-4 SECTION 10161 LAMINATED PLASTIC TOILET PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide laminated plastic toilet parti- tions where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Section 10800: Toilet room accessories. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements; 3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades; 4. Color and pattern charts showing colors and patterns available in the specified products from the proposed manufacturer. 5. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. LAMINATED PLASTIC TOILET PARTITIONS .01 10161-1 i .--". 'r'""l- ii'..' -. .- ~'l!\;~''''_';''''".'''~ 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LAMINATED PLASTIC TOILET PARTITIONS A. Provide laminated plastic toilet partitions, ceiling hung, in the dimensions and arrangements shown on the Drawings, and in colors and finishes selected by the Architect from standard colors and finishes of the approved manufacturer. 2.2 URINAL SCREENS A. Provide urinal screens in the dimensions and arrangements shown on the Drawings, 2.3 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS A. Provide type 1046 (848 Ivory) Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company, or equal products of.Sanymeta1 or other manufac- turers approved in advance by the Architect. 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for in- terface with the work of this Section. B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, LAMINATED PLASTIC TOILET PARTITIONS .01 10161-2 and the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as approved by the Architect, anchoring all components firmly into position for long life under hard use. . C. Adjust doors, except doors to handicapped compartments, to remain at a uniformly open position when unlocked. D. Touchup scratches and abrasions to be completely invisible to the unaided eye from a distance of five feet. END OF SECTION .01 LAMINATED PLASTIC TOILET PARTITIONS 10161-3 I1IitV1><i'IJ'~ . SECTION 10400 IDENTIFYING DEVICES 1.1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.2 1.3 .01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included~ Provide identifying devices where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not neces- sarily limited to: 1. 2. Handicapped Parking 3. Door signs. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. ,QU1\I,ITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. Product data~ Within 60 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements; B. IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10400-1 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Design is based on use of standard products manufactured by ASI Sign System, 4419 Hubert Ave., Suite E, Tampa, Fl 33614- 7620 (813) 879-4360 , and trade names of that manufac- turer are used herein. ' . B. Provide the products upon which design is based, or provide equal products of another manufacturer approved in advance by the Architect. C. Except as otherwise approved by the Architect, provide all products of this Section from a single manufacturer. 2.2 BUILDING IDENTIFICATION Provide ASI 390 series toilet room door sign plaques with the following attributes: 1. Size 6" x 6". 2. Type style: None 3. Plaque color: Black. 4. Type color: White. 5. Frame finish: Black. 6. Margins: Center/center. 7. Mounting: As per manufacturers specifications 8. Messages: Men & Women Restroom Logos PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsa~isfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install the wor~ of this Section in strict accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations as approved by the Arch- itect, using only the approved mounting materials, and lo- cating all components firmly into position, level and plumb. END OF SECTION .01 IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10400-2 SECTION 10800 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide toilet room accessories where in- dicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as need- ed for a complete and proper installation. ~. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Provide the following products of Bobrick Washroom Equip- ment Company, or equal approved in advance by the Archi- tect. 1. Paper towel dispenser and covered waste receptacle: a. Number: B262 & B2621 @ H.C. b. Size: 10 3/4"WxI4 3/4"Hx4"D&10 3/4"Wx8"Hx4"D@H.C. c. Mount: 60-3/4" for handicapped~ d. Finish: Satin stainless steel. 2. Surface mounted toilet tissue dispenser a. Number: B288 b. Size 5 7/8" W x 102" H x 5 5/8" D c. Mount 27" d. Finish: Satin stainless steel. .01 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES 10800-1 3. Stainless Steel Channel framed Mirror a. B290 7236, B290 4836, B290 1830 b. Size 72" W x 36" H, 48" W x 36" H, 18" W x 30" H c. Mount as shown on drawings d. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel 5. Wheelchair toilet compartment grab bar: a. Number: B 4937 b. Size: 36" x 48" c. Mount: 33", with 1-1/2" wall clearance; two per handicapped toilet stall; d. Finish: Satin stainless steel. 6. 7. Single robe hook: a. Number: B-67l; b. Size: Flange 2" x 2"; hook 2"; c. Mount: As shown on the Drawings; d. Finish: Bright polished stainless steel 8. 2.2 MIRRORS A. Where shown on the Drawings, provide 1/4" polished plate glass or float glass mirrors, with stainless steel frames, in the dimensions and arrangements indicated. 2.3 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but re- quired for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES .01 10800-2 C. ... 'P' .\71 - I ~~ 'f. . r.. 'i:O" . -.;>;~,i-'..,." to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for in- terface with the work of this Section. B. Install each item in its proper location, firmly anchored into position, level and plumb, and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION .01 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES 10800-3 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope of Work Includes, but is not limited to: 1.1.1 Work of this Section shall be performed 1n accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to Instructions to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditions. 1.1.2 Except as otherwise specified under "Work of Other Sections" and "Work Not Included", the work under this Section consists of furnishing all labor, tools, materials, services, equipment, appliances and supervision necessary and required for Air Conditioning, Plumbing & Ventilating work as indicated on the Drawings and as described in this Specification. 1.1.3 This Contractor shall furnish and deliver to the Electrical Contractor at the job site all starters, motor control devices, etc., required in connection with apparatus furnished by him. The Electrical Contractor will receive, erect and wire up complete all such starters, control devices, etc., as outlined in connection schedule on Drawings, in accordance with approved wiring diagrams supplied by this Contractor. 1.2 SUPERVISION 1.2.1 Provide competent supervisor who shall be constantly on premises while job is in progress and who shall familiarize himself with requirement's of all other contracts in order that the work under this Contract shall be coordinated with the work of other Contractors who are now or who may later be engaged in work at this site. All work shall be so scheduled that there will be no delay in the proper installation and completion of any part or parts of each respective Contract, wherein it may be interrelated with that of this Contract, so that generally all construction work may proceed in its natural sequence without unnecessary delay. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 All work specified in Division 15 shall be performed by approved workmen qualified by satisfactory experience in the particular work. 1.4 LAWS, PERMITS AND INSPECTION 1.4.1 Comply with all Federal, State, Municipal, OSHA, NFPA, AGA, NEC, SED and Utility Companies' laws, ordinances and regulations that apply to the work. 1.4.2 Comply with the American National Standards Refrigeration Safety Code (ANSI) B9.1. 1.4.3 Comply with the Plumbing Code for area of construction. This code shall constitute minimum standards for all materials, methods and details of plumbing work not covered by plans or specifications. SECTION 15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 1 OF 9 <"r '.. ~""~I""",~:__"",,,,'""""~"'''''~_'''.",.~-e' 1. 4. 4 Comply with the Standard Plumbing and Standard Building Code. This code, hereinafter referred to as the "Uniform Building Code" shall constitute minimum standards for all materials. methods. and details of plumbing work not covered by plans or specifications. 1. 4. 5 Obtain all required permits and inspections. Pay all fees and costs. 1.4.6 Before requesting final payment, submit certificates of approval (or final inspection) from the above concerned authorities. 1.5 NOTICE TO BIDDERS: Each Bidder, before submitting his proposal shall examine all drawings relating to this work and verify all governing conditions at the site and shall become fully informed as to the extent and character of the work required and its relation to other work in the building. No consideration will be granted for any alleged misunderstanding of the materials to be furnished or work to be done. it being understood that the submission of a Proposal is an agreement to all items and conditions referred to herein or indicated on the accompanying Drawings. 1.6 COORDINATION OF WORK BY OTHERS 1.6.1 Various items of apparatus and equipment will be furnished and set under, other Contracts. This Contractor shall familiarize himself with the requirements of the General Contractor, the Plumbing Contractor and the Electrical Contractor, and shall examine the plans and specifications of each of these Contractors. No portion of the documents are to be construed as complete for anyone contract, but the plans and specifications in their entirety are a part of each sub-contract. 1.6.2 This Contractor shall carefully check space requirements with other subcontractors to insure that his equipment, ducts, etc. can be installed in the spaces allotted for same. 1.6.3 This Contractor shall consult with General Contractor and with contractors for other trades so that whenever possible all motors and motor starters are of the same manufacture throughout the entire building. 1.6.4 Ceiling Heights: All contract drawing's and finish schedule shall be checked for ceiling height requirements. 1.7 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WORK 1.7.1 Plan installation for minimum interference with regular operation of existing facilities during functioning hours. Make temporary shut-downs at such time as not to interfere with regular operation of existing facilities. 1.7.2 Connection of new work to existing shall be in a neat and approved manner with all disturbed existing work restored to perfect condition. 1.8 OPENINGS AND CHASES 1.8.1 The Contractor for the work of general construction will provide sizes for boxed openings, chases, recesses, lintels and bucks required for the SECTION 15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 2 OF 9 admission of the work in ample time. 1.8.2 If openings, chases, recesses, lintels and bucks are omitted or not correctly located, bear the cost of subsequent patching as required. 1.8.3 Do not cut walls or floors that are waterproofed or pierce any structural member without written permission from the Engineer. 1.9 SLEEVES AND INSERTS 1.9.1 Provide sleeves and inserts ahead of the general construction work and maintain them in position. 1.9.2 Bear the cost of cutting and patching required to make corrections resulting from the omission or improper location of sleeves and/or inserts. 1.9.3 Make sleeves in floors and Partitions of galvanized steel with lock seam joints. 1.9.4 Sleeves for insulated pipe shall be of sufficient size to Pass insulation. 1.9.5 Sleeves for bare pipe shall be two pipe sizes larger than the pipe passing through. 1.9.6 Terminate sleeves flush with walls. partitions, and ceilings. terminate sleeves 1/4" above floors. 1.9.7 Space between sleeve and pipe in underground walls shall be sealed with "Link Seal" fittings. 1.9.8 Provide 4-pound lead flashing extending 12" beyond sleeve for sleeves Passing through membrane waterproofing or lead safe. Turn down flashing into space between pipe and sleeve. Insert oakum, pour lead, and caulk watertight. 1.10 FLASHINGS 1.10.1 All opening sizes and locations shall be coordinated with the General Contractor, who shall provide all flashings, etc. 1.10.2 Clean-outs: Flashing shall extend 12" beyond body of cleanout. 1.11 MATERIALS 1.11.1 All equipment and materials furnished shall be new and where used for similar purposes shall be of the same manufacturer. 1.11.2 "Equal materials" shall comply with General Conditions and Supplementary general Conditions. 1.11.3 Drawings and Specifications are based on one manufacturer's equipment requirements. The costs of all revisions required to meet the requirements of a different manufacturer s equipment (even though mentioned on the Drawings or specified) furnished under this Division shall be borne under this Division. SECTION 15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 3 OF 9 '. '-x..;.""",_.;._~_,_~~liI ~ ~ ..~ilI...i.nr' j~r_' '," '."' 1.12 DRAWINGS & CATALOG DATA 1.12.1 The Contractor shall examine all Architectural, Structural, Electrical and Plumbing Drawings, note any conditions that may affect his work and care for same executing his Contract. 1.12.2 Install all work substantially as shown but do not scale plans. Before proceeding with any work, verify at the site all building levels, measurements, etc., necessary for the perfect and complete fabrication, assembling and installation of the work. Do not "rough" prior to receipt of approved shop drawings. 1.12.3 The Drawings show the various plplng and duct systems schematically. No added compensation will be permitted for variations due to field conditions. 1.12.4 Shop Drawings shall be checked by this Contractor for all clearances and filed conditions including proper coordination with other trades. 1.12.5 This Contractor shall submit for Engineer's approval, a list of material manufacturer's, suppliers and Shop Drawings, not later than 35 days after signing of contract or receipt of letter of intent whichever is first. 1.12.6 Submit Shop Drawings for all work and equipment for approval in accordance with requirements of the General Conditions. Obtain approval prior to proceeding with manufacturing. 1.12.7 Indicate thickness and dimensions of all parts, fastenings and anchoring methods and other provisions necessary. 1. 13 SUBMITTALS 1.13.1 Furnish shop drawings as specified in Agreement and Section 01300. 1.13.2 Submittals shall be complete by specification article. All items specified under the same article as the major item shall be included in the submittals. 1.13.3 No partial or incomplete submittal will be accepted or reviewed. 1.13.4 Submittals for equipment requiring electrical service shall include wiring diagrams. 1.13.5 Required Shop Drawings: All Drainage products Piping specialties Power roof exhauster All ductwork Filters Air conditioning and refrigeration All dampers Grilles Registers Di ffusers Louvers Temperature controls Air handling equipment Plumbing fixtures SECTION 15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 4 OF 9 1.14 PAINTING 1.14.1 All unit air conditioners, grilles, registers, etc., shall be delivered to the building with a baked enamel finish applied at the factory. Color as selected by the Engineer. 1.14.2 All motors, fans and all other factory manufactured and assembled apparatus shall be factory coated with one coat of primer and one coat of machinery enamel at the factory, and after installation shall be oil cleaned and touched up to repair any damage incurred during construction. All construction dust and debris shall be removed from all equipment before final acceptance. 1.14.3 All finished painting, except as noted above, including the painting of the various piping systems, will be done under specification of other trades, except as otherwise described herein. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2. 1 MOTORS 2.1.1 Continuous duty, radio non-interfering type conforming to NEMA and AlEE standards, with open frames unless otherwise noted. Provide slide rails or integral belt tightener bases on belt drive motors. Motors shall be only for manufacture of companies that are members of the Motor and Generator Section of NEMA. Submit prints. 2.1.2 Motors shall have proper characteristics and ample HP capacity to perform their duty with minimum power consumption. Sizes shall be not less than those published by the manufacturers of the driven machinery nor than those specified. 2.1.3 Integral HP motors for PUMPS AND VENTILATING FAN DUTY shall be especially selected for quiet operation and shall bear the manufacturer's "Quiet Ope rat i ng" 1 abe 1. 2.1.4 Equip each oil lubricated motor with drain plugs and oil cups extended to readily accessible positions and locate on sides for easiest servicing. 2.2 MOTOR STARTERS: Full voltage across-the-1ine type except as otherwise noted with start-stop reset push-button, or handles in the covers, overload protection with hand reset, and with elements of proper size for the loads, ambient temperatures and voltages. Provide remote push-button stations with red bulls-eyes for all remotely controlled motors. Omit start-stop buttons on automatically controlled motors. 2.2.2 Manufacturer General Electric (as listed below), Allen Bradley, Westinghouse, Cutler-Hammer, AH & H, Square D. 2.2.3 Manual starters in finished rooms shall be flush mounted type unless otherwise directed. 2.2.4 Provide fuses of proper sizes in all fused switches. SECTION 15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 5 OF 9 2.3 WORK NOT INCLUDED 2.3.1 All following items are excluded from this Section of Work: 1. All cutting and patching except as specifically modified in these Specifications. In general, cutting and patching will be done by the General Contractor. This Contractor shall furnish to the General Contractor all required information so that necessary openings for his work can be provided. Such cooperation shall be required to keep the cutting of walls and roof consistent with the construction schedule. 2. All finished painting of exposed pipes, apparatus. etc., except as otherwise specified herein. 3. All electric wiring except that furnished as an integral part of factory assembled equipment or as otherwise specified. 4. Base flashing for any ductwork and Piping penetrations and counter flashing. 5. All motor control devices including starters, push buttons, automatic switches will be wired by Electric Contractor except as otherwise indicated elsewhere in this Specification. Generally package equipment will be factory wired. In these cases. Electrical Contractor will provide external wiring and make connection after unit is installed. See connection schedule on Drawing's. 2.4 FINAL CLEANING 2.4.1 After installations are done and tests made, thoroughly clean the entire installation. Remove all spots. Clean both exteriors and interiors of all equipment. Remove all debris caused by the work from ceiling spaces and other unoccupied spaces. 1. Thoroughly clean cooling elements and air moving equipment. 2. Extended cooling surfaces straighten all fins using combs or other approved means. 3. Filters - remove all filters and clean and/or replace as directed. 2.5 FINAL APPROVAL OF THE WORK 2.5.1 Engineer will entertain the requests for final approval only after the following items are done: 1. Submit a list of uncompleted items, if any, and advise when the items will be done. 2. Test and adjust all systems and equipment. 3. Submit all data, test results, affidavits. etc. SECTION 15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 6 OF 9 4. Deliver the instruction book to Owner. 5. Instruct the Owner's representatives. 6. Obtain and deliver receipts and affidavits to the Engineer. 7. Provide and have approved all air balance reports. 2.6 LUBRICATION AND CHECKING 2.6.1 Prior to final inspection, lubricate all motors and motordriven equipment. Check them for running without objectionable noise and for running in the correct direction, and check the motor Protective devices for being the proper size, all in the presence of the Custodian. Submit letter attesting to inspection. 2.6.2 Provide a neat typewritten list of the proper oils and/or greases for each motor and moving part furnished in this contract. Frame under glass and hang in mechanical room. 2.7 BALANCING REPORT 2.7.1 The following tests shall be performed and submitted in a tabular form, for each air handling system. The report shall clearly show actual readings and specified or nameplate requirements. (See Section 15891 Air Balance.) 1. Fans and fan motors - rpm of each, amp. draw on each leg, static pressure at fan outlet and fan inlet, total static air pressure, total cfm supplied, total cfm returned. 2. Coils - average face velocity at coil inlet,entering and leaving air conditions (D.B. & W.B. for cooling, and D.B. for heat i ng) . 3. Velocity traverses at filters, coils, but preferably main and branch ducts to obtain air volumes. 4. Air volume and velocity at each ceiling diffuser, supply register, return and exhaust register. 5. Rebalance or adjust all registers, diffusers, etc. to minimize draft and noise. 6. Submit in tabular form all items listed under 3.10-A. 7. List field readings vs. specified requirements for each cooling device such as data for air conditioners. 8. If equipment does not mmet specification, the systems balance contractor must rebalance system after corrections have been made. 9. All balance reports must be submitted to Engineer and approved before final payment. 2.8 NOISE AND VIBRATION 2.8.1 Mechanical and electrical equipment shall operate without objectionable (determined by the engineer) noise and vibration. 2.8.2 If noise or vibration is transmitted to occupied portions of the building by equipment, piping, ducts, etc., make the required changes and/or SECTION 15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 7 OF 9 additions as approved, at no expense to the Owner. 2.8.3 The sound levels around mechanical and electrical equipment located in equipment spaces such as fans, refrigeration and air conditioning equipment rooms at any point three feet from the equipment shall not exceed 85 dBA sound level in the frequency range between 10 and 10,000 Hertz with all equipment in the room operating. The sound criteria applies to the complete operating range of each piece of equipment. 2.8.4 All rotating machinery supporting structure shall not have any natural frequency within +20% of the operating speeds. The machinery when mounted and placed in operation shall not exceed a self excited vibration velocity of 0.10 inches per second peak when measured in the vertical, horizontal and axial directions or measured at equipment mounting feet. 2.9 OPERATING & WORKING TESTS 2.9.1 Conduct a working test upon completion of the work by turning on all air conditioning and ventilating equipment, fans, temperature controls, etc., throughout the entire project for a continuous three (3) hour period. Tryout and check all switches and controls under normal operating conditions. Conduct the test at least one week prior to the time when the building is to be opened for public inspection. Make all corrections and adjustments found necessary by this operation. 2.10 INSTRUCTION TO OWNER 2.10.1 Provide an approved competent operator to thoroughly instruct the Owner's designated representative in the care and operation of all systems and equipment furnished and to operate them in their presence. 2.10.2 After the above period, have the operator return to the building to further teach the Owner's representatives. 2.10.3 During the above periods, arrange to have authorized representatives of the manufacturers of major equipment such as air conditioning equipment, temperature controls, etc., to be present at times as requested for the purpose of giving detailed instructions. 2.10.4 Arrange with the Owner by letter and submit proposed dates for approval. Submit letters attesting to the visits, times of arrival and departure the names of the individual systems and equipment covered, and the names of the personnel instructed. 2.10.5 Unless otherwise agreed in writing, the systems shall remain the respective Contractor's responsibility until final acceptance even though they may be operated by the Owner's personnel. 2.11 INSTRUCTION BOOKS 2.11.1 Deliver to the Engineer two (2) 3-pronged hard backed binders, each containing: 1. Manufacturer's printed instructions for the care and operation SECTION 15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 8 OF 9 of each item of equipment furnished. All printed material not applying shall be neatly crossed out with ink lines. 2. A set of each of the prints submitted for approval of all major items of equipment furnished. Prints shall incorporate all changes requested on the approved sets. 3. A detailed index of the above listed items giving a descriptive name of each item and reference to its usage in the building, manufacturer's name, the identification number of the printed material, a neatly printed index number. 4. A list giving the names and addresses of all major items of equipment and the names, addresses and telephone numbers of the nearest representatives or service agencies to whom the Owner should go for services. 5. Instructions written and typed by the Contractor for all items where the manufacturer's written instructions are not available and for all items that require special instructions. 2.11.2 Neatly emboss name of the job and the words "VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING INSTRUCTIONS" on the back of each binder and on the front cover. 2.11.3 Binders shall be of ample size. Items too thick to be punched or too large to punch in a folder arrangement may be inserted into punched, labeled manila envelopes. Very large broqhures may be furnished separately upon written request. Apply Dennison gummed reinforcements at all punch holes. 2.12 DEFECTS 2.12.1 Should it be found by the Engineer that material furnished and installed under this Section fails to comply with the Specifications and plans, it shall be rejected and replaced by the Contractor and all work disturbed by changes necessitated in consequence of said defects or imperfections shall be made good at the Contractor's expense. 2.13 GUARANTEE 2.13.1 Contractor shall guarantee all workmanship and materials to be free from inherent defects and shall at his expense, upon notice from the Engineer, keep same in repair and replace any defective materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after date of acceptance by Owner. SECTION 15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 9 OF 9 <.~.._....;..~.;~.' .. ~, . ~'~'~1>' ,_. '.-...-",,^--' ". '.,~>-. .,-"~""._~.~,,,...- DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL SECTION 15011 - PREPARATION FOR FINAL USE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK Includes, but is not limited to: 1.1.1 Work of this Section shall be oerformed in accordance with the requlrements of the Contract Documents, lnciuding but not il~ltea to Ins~r'~ctlon to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division I of these specifications. 1.1.2 This section covers testing, cleaning, balancing, dlsinfection and Hater treatment required before final comoletion. 1.2 Related work shall be found in the following sections: Air Balance Basic Piping Materials and Methods Section 15891 Sectlon 15060.15061. 15080,15100 2. 1 TESTING 2.1.1 General: Furnish all test pumps, gages, equipment, and personnel requir-ed, and test as necessary to demonstrate the integrity of the finished installation to the dporoval of all oertinent authorities and the Architect. 2.1.2 Conduct of tests: Make all tests in presence of Engineer and/or Owners' representative, do all work before insulation or concealment of pipe. Refit all pipe as indicated in "Pipe and Pipe Fittings." Bypass all equipment which could be damaged by high test pressures. Purge and flush all lines s~bs~auent ~n ~esting. 2.1.3 Low pressure piping: Low pressure piping includes domestic water and ~ondensate dralns. 2.1.4 Soil and Waste: Unless otherwise directed, plug all openings and fill with water to a height equal to the lowest vent. Allow to stand one hour or lcnger as r~cuir2~. RS-~31~ leaking ~Gints ~s directed and ~hen re-test. 2.1.5 ''''ater Lines: Tast and make tlght a': 150 OSl water- gauge. Retaln for four hours; repair all leaking joints as directed; and then re-test. - < .,j. I STERIL:ZAT!CN OF PIPES ~. i . : Ch-~c;"nali~n: 3.'.1.1 ,.:.iter oreliminar'.' curalr'g of the svstern.:hlor~~-::\:e t'le entlre ;:::ccasie ~ater syste~ In accordance with the current oroceaures of (~e Amerlcan water .~(Jr'i(s ~ssaciaticn for flushl~g 3nd disl~1fectt~ng water ~3'ns. ard ~n acc:rjance .~ :'- 3+, G-r:.~,e~- ::sr7',~r;ert .-'",-.::':: '..:.;';::-: ":;'~~lU~ :l'C"'':::S. ._' 8c.n :=;';"1ci-:::'>:.r~: :.,": :.:~-=-- "":;;~~'-:I,~:::;ii". - .::.--~r~ -,' -' -' -- --, - ......... - - '.... - -,.... .. ....6t2'- -; .':;::'8::1. .... - -,- -,....\1 .: ':' ~ - - j i ::,-, , ~ _ ::;::::= ~'=' \ ~= ~~; :: \ - = 3.1.1.3 When sterl1izingg is ccmplete, arrange with the pertinent authorities for tests on mains and system. 2,. i . ; . .1 Chlar~nate only when the tuild~ng is unoccucied. 3.1.2 Certification: Deliver a "Certificate of Completion of Chlorination" to the Architect. 4.1 STERILIZING 4.1.1 Before placing the domestic water system in service, engage a qualified service organization to sterilize the new domestic water lines in accordance with the following procedures: 4.1.2 Provide taps, connections, chemicals and power for pumping sterilizing solution into the water main. Through a 3/4" hose connection in the domestic water main entering the building, pump in sufficient sodium hypochlorite to produce a free available chlorine residual of not less than 100 ppm. 4.1.3 Proceed upstream from the point of chlorine application opening all faucets and taps until chlorine is detected. Close faucets and taps when chlorine is evident. 4.1.4 When chlorinated water has been brought to every faucet and tap with a m~n~mum concentration of 100 ppm chlorine, retain this water in the system for at least two hours. 4.1.5 At the end of the retention period, no less than 100 ppm of chlorlne shall be present at the extreme end of the system. 4.1.6 Open all faucets and taps, and thoroughly flush all new lines until the chlorine residual in the water is less than 1.0 ppm. 4.1.7 Obtain and submit representative water samples from the system to a certified bacteriological laboratory for analysis. 4.1.8 If any samples tested indicate the presence of coliform organisms, repeat the entire sterilization procedure. ~ 1.9 When all sam~ies test conform to applicable regulatlons, submit certification to the Ownnei indicating successful sterilizatlon. 4. 1 . 10 Clean strainers or replace if required. SEi::;-:ml . ;::,-' 11 _ PPEPAP6.TTON COR f:INpl_ uSE P~Gt: l ;~~~,,"~,. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15012 - PIPE IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope of Work Includes, but is not limited to: 1.1.1 Work of this sect10n shall be performed 1n accordance w1th the requirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to Instruction to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division I of these Specifications. 1.1.2 This section covers labelled identification and color coding of all plumbing piping. 1.1.3 This section includes pipe identification with plastic labels inaicating type of piping and direction of flow. Placement of labels shall be as indicated in identification schedule in this Section. Unless otherwise noted, all labeling shall be in accordance with USASI Std. A-13. 1.1.4 All piping shall be banded 1n accordance with identificat10n schedule in this section. 1 .2 Related Work Included in other Sections: Insulation for Pipes and Ducts Pipe and Pipe Fittings Preparation for final use Section 15180 Section 15060 Sect i on 15011 , , SIJB~ITT~LS: Submit six (6) sets of label types and colors ;n schedule form within 35 days after Contract is let for Engineers approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 LABELS AND BANDS 2.1.' Labels and bands shall be oressure sensitive vinyl taoe sim1lar to those manufactured by W. H. Brady Co., Milwaukee, W1SCJnS1n. Letters shal~ ~e standard size - 1-1/8" high for pipe under 3" diameter, and 2 1/4" high for pipe 3" and over. Tape shall be suitable fer pipe operating temoeratl.wes. Where quaiity of pipe covering so required. bane 01pe far full length of laoel to cravide ~ suitable surface for label. Width of color bands shall be as follows: :; ;'-=~ - '1 t: 2: ~2" ~cr ~ 1/2 ~'J '). ~..l'- for 8" to 1:" 3.na 32" f:.;- 8\~er ~c. ~acels shal~ oe b~ack letters en c=~or bacKground ~ne'"e 'noicate:. ~t:,t:I!T:~:C.\Tl:;r1 :3C:-it:DUL= ~ ~ C .j : ~ :.;--: ') "1'" l C ~ -: ~:. r .: - : ... J. ~ .'0 .:; . i ~ 'I .:." ':;JU ~ cment r-ccr;s. :-;a.seme:": [ 3 r--::3.S :.' '" -~ .... .- r ~ - -... r - . .... ~"~ - ....J' .:: '. ..,. '..... '_4 _ - -,:-:-,~ i - i ~ - - ~ - - -,' ! ~ ~ G E .. ,;..... cellings label all plplng at least once and at 50- intervals thereafter. Where pipe is not painted and color coded, locate identification bands same color as label every 25' between labels. (2) Above hung ceilings label n every room if push up ceiling is used, or at every access panel for fixed ceilings. (3) In pipe chases locate at every floor where access is made available to the chase. (4) Where pipe is exposed in occupied room without ceiling verify pipe color to be painted with Engineer before painting. (5) Notations and Colors: System Notation Backqround Color ( 1 abe 1 ) Cold water (domestic) Same green Hot water (domestic) Liquid City Water green Ref. Suc orange Ref. Liq orange CWS ye 11 ow CWR ye 11 ow City Water Suction Line Chilled Water Supply & Return PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. 1 access. Locate all labels to be clearly visible from the floor or point of 3.2 Thoroughly slean surface before appllcation. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations. SECTION '~012 - PIPE IDENTI~!CATION PAGE 2 OF 2 ''''"'"''')'~~'<fi~lliI~_lIlillli..lI1~1ihiWllt 'q .1 11 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15013 - GENERAL PIPING SYSTEMS INSTALLATION PROCEDURE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK Includes, but is not limited to: 1.1.1 Work of thlS Section shall be performed ln accordance wlth the requirements of the Contract Documents. including but not limited to Instruction to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division I of these Specifications. 1.1.2 This section covers general installation procedures for all piping. 1 . 1 .3 Section. Furnish all excavation and backfilling installed in accordance with 1 . 1 .4 Work specified ln other Sections: Hangers and Supports Vibration Isolation and Expansion Preparatlon For Final Use AH Balance Section 15061 Section 15160 Sect i on 15011 Sectlon 15891 PART 2 - INSTALLATION 2.1 Run all piping parallel and plumb to structural elements with prODer clearance for insulation. Run exposed piping as high as possible unless :)':.he~',..,ise noted. ~() ~'Jt '-!Jf1 across huilding ooenings or in such a way as to interfere with access to or operation of equipment, or wlth less than head clearance without approval of Architect or unless so clearly noted on plans. All plpin3 ln finisned rooms shall be concealed unless otherwise Iloted. if furred, install to require minimum furrlng. No piping shall touch any other system excect at final connection. Provide all necessary offsets wether or not shown. 2.2 Ream. file. ~nd remove all burr:. Ma~e all of:sets and jaints"ith fittilgS. ::'0 not use "educir.g bushings, close nicoles. or concealed unions without permission of Englneer. Refit or replace pipe. seals, or equlpment wnere leaks occur. Sealing compounds not permitted. Use insulated connections for all joints of dissimilar materials. 2.3 Grading ard Laving Drainage and Vent Piping ':' 1 ~ The intent ~f this sDecificatlon is that all cicing shall be ~nstal~e,j tc free' ;jr?in '~r '/en'::. :Jags. humps. 3.nd 31'- SCCr:ets :ire '-,ct ~ermitte~. Use eccentrlc fittings. f~at 8n too or Dottom ~s reaUlred to ~ ;-- ':: - f: ~ 9 n t . - .... r .. ... 1'-' ~'1 \..., lIt:: ',j t::::' : -::: :i. .'\ .2:;:;" '";~,: ,-::r: ::;'::;" '\ ~ _. -- ,_-'0 ...... -' ~ _ - C,.. -- - ,..'-"" :"" i-=n-::~'~ ~":~",-..=n-:.. jn~2S3 :-::::....~.....i..3e ~c~:::.:. :cCTIC\J ~~'J13 - 1:'c.i~E?~L ;:'~PIN;-; ,3O{S:=i''',:S lNSI.~.LL,~ll~'N ;:'PC'CE=\.:,~;: ,:,~GE . --' 2.3.3 Provide drain valves at all low points and for each piping loop or branch isolated by section valves for all pipes carrying fluids unless otherwise noted. 2.3.4 Make all turns in drainage pipes with long sweep 1/4 bends or combination Y and 1/8 bends. 2.3.5 Provide c1eanouts extended accessibly at each bend, at bottom of all stacks and conductors. at 50' intervals on horizontal runs, at exit from building for running traps and where otherwise noted. Same size as pipe up to 4" maximum. 3.1 Expansion Compensation (for piping subject to temperature fluctuations). 3.1.1 Provide control expansion chambers on domestic hot water heater make- up water line between the heater and the backflow preventer. 4.1 Unions or Flanges 4.1.1 Provide as required for final connections, to permit disconnection of all equipment and fixtures, and to permit removal of pipe for cleaning interior of all equipment. This shall include provision for removal of pipe sections which obstruct equipment removal. 5. 1 Sleeves 5.1.1 Provlde for all piplng passing through masonry constructlOn, 1/2" larger than pipe 0.0. (or insulation 0.0. for insulated pipe). Use 24 ga. galvanized iron for pipes 2 1/2" and smaller, and schedule 40 galvanlzed steel for pipes 3" and larger and where penetrating foundation walls below grade or where waterproofing is required: incorporate flashing in extreme water conditions cr 3S detailed. 5.1.2 Thoroughly caulk all pipes passing through sleeves where moisture, vapor or fume carry-over should be avoided. Anchor oipes at sleeves to avoid destroying barrier created by caulking. 6.1 Insulation Protectors 6.1.1 Provide ga1vanized steel shields. 18 ga.. 120. arc, length two times insulation 0.0. or as otherwlse required to avoid crushing of lnsulatlon for all insulated pipe passing through sleeves where pipe bears on sleeves. 7.1 EscutGheons 7.1.1 Provide chrome plated brass escutcheons (solid. set screw type or sp11~ tipe) for all pipes passing through finished construction. 3.1 Conaensate Dralns .3. ' . ~ 3'; qap. ~rovlde trapped ccnaensate dralns ana ~~n :c oeen T Iocr aralns Wl:n Conc:ensate Oice 3nai i ~ oe I...l I i ::>lLC aT '::;nnac:~cr, t.'JJr3.:~t pan. SECTION 15013 - GENERAL PIPING SYSTEMS INSTALLATION PROCEDURE PAGE 2 OF 3 .".".,._...._......"',"'.,,,.."'...,,.,_......."'""""''''" -. --",~"~.",, -l ij- F "'-'110111 8.1.2 Conaensate dralns are required on ail cooiing coi;s '~hether shown en Drawings or not. j. 1 Reef C8enings ~~G F'ashings 9.1.1 All flashing will be furnished by roofer, general contractor trades except as noted. For galvanized steel stacks, use Josam Series 1830 stack flashing fitting. For pipe through roof to equipment on roof, use stack flashing sleeve, Josam Series 1840 or accroved equal. ,':';':: v , J. \..l'~ J .., ,~ - I ..."v I-.J -l'::: . t:;- ......... l.- ::?:~,: 31':~-:-~:~:: ItjS:,:,_~ .: ~c= ~C:lUP::: ::~~:: DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15060 - PIPE & PIPE FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK INCLUDES, but is not limited to pipe materials and joint construction. 1.1.1 WORK OF THIS SECTION SHALL BE PERFORMED in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to Instructions to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division I of these Specifications. 1.1.2 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS: Hangers and Supports Refrigeration Piping and Accessoriess Section 15061 Section 15650 1.1.3 Provide and install pipe and fittings of class schedule required for service liquids, pressures, and temperatures noted on drawings, or as required. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: 1.2.1 Submit shop drawings for approval in accordance with the general conditions. Obtain approval prior to proceeding with manufacturer. 1.2.2 Indicate schedule of pipe and fittings for specific application. Submittals must indicate all various code standards. Each service is required to meet and show that all pipe and installation will be meeting these standards. 1.3 GUARANTEE: 1.3.1 Guarantee all parts for one (1) year after acceptance by owner. All piping free from objectionable noise, vibration, and leaks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 GENERAL PIPING FABRICATION: 2.1.1 COPPER: Type L, hard temper, ASTM B-88. Type K, soft temper, ASTM B-88. Type M, hard temper, ASTM B-88. Type DWV, hard temper, ASTM B-306. 2.1.2 BRASS: 89% copper - ASTM B-43. SECTION 15060 - PIPE & PIPE FITTINGS PAGE 1 OF 5 -'"",,, ". ~rr' ~ rT~1I'11111?". 2.2 PIPE FITTINGS AND STANDARDS SHALL BE: 2.2.1 SCREWED BRASS: Cast, Federal Spec WW-P-460, ASA 816.5 2.2.2 SOLDER CUPROUS: Wrought copper, ASTM B88, ASA 816.18, 816.22 cast brass, ASTM 8-62. 2.2.3 CAST IRON DRAINAGE FITTINGS: Drainage Cast Iron Flange 2.3 PIPING USE SCHEDULE: SERVICE SIZE WATER 2-1/2" (CONDENSATE) & UNDER REFRIGERANT ALL SOIL & WASTE ALL VENT 2-1/2" & UNDER DOMESTIC H&C & REC. WATER WASTE UNDER SLA8 ALL MATERIALS & HOUSE CONN. 4" CHILLED WATER SUPPLY & RET. ALL ANSI Standard 816.12 Classes 125 & 250 - ANSI Standard 816.1 MATERIAL & WEIGHT JOINT & FITTINGS TYPE M COPPER SOLDER 95/5 TYPE L COPPER SOLDER 95/5 DWV COPPER OR NO HUB SOLDER 95/5 OR MESH JOINT, NO HUB SOLDER 95/5 COPPER TYPE L COPPER HARD DRAWN SEAMLESS SOLDER 95/5 SERVICE WEIGHT C.I. TYPE L COPPER HARD DRAWN SEAMLESS SOLDER 95/5 GENERAL COMMENTS RE-INTERCHANGE OF MATERIALS: Where different materials are specified for different pipe sizes for the same duty, Contractor has the option to adjust the break point with written request and approval of the Engineer. Where ASTM A-120 pipe is indicated as an acceptable material, this is a minimum standard. A-53 may be substituted at contractor's option. 2.4 PIPE-JOINTS (SIMILAR MATERIALS) STANDARDS SHALL BE: 2.4.1 SCREWED JOINTS: Do not damage threads, remove all burrs, use pipe thread compound on male threads only, lead and oil not permitted. Do not mar outside of exposed finished piping, avoid use of toothed pipe wrench for same. 2.4.2 SOLDERED JOINTS: Thoroughly clean all surfaces, remove all oxidation. Do not use acid core or paste type solder. Cover all surfaces to be SECTION 15060 - PIPE & PIPE FITTINGS PAGE 2 OF 5 joined with flux. Use 95/5 solder. 2.4.3 CAULKED JOINTS: Make joints with pure oakum caulked into bell, then poured flush with hub with soft pig lead. Use 1 lb. lead per inch diameter of pipe. Smoothly face joint after caulking, recaulk as required. 2.4.4 "0" RING PIPE JOINTS (Rubber or Plastic) Shall Be: Clean, lubricate and assemble joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not install chipped pipe. Approved manufacturers are: Robinson Clay Products, (Wedge-Lock for vitrified tile drainage pipe) Hamilton Kent Manufacturing Co. (Tylox for concrete drainage pipe) Tyler Pipe and Foundry Co. (Ty-Seal for cast iron drainage pipe) Johns Manville Co. (Ring tite for cement asbestos drainage of pressure pipe) for cast iron pressure pipe The above listing of manufacturers is to indicate standard of performance, or equals are acceptable with approval of engineer. 2.5 PIPE JOINTS OF DISSIMILAR MATERIALS SHALL BE EITHER: 2.5.1 PLASTIC TO METAL: Female solvent type adapter to male or female threaded or flanged. 2.5.2 Dissimilar Metals, FE To CU, FE To AL, AL To CU: Provide non- metallic insulating couplings to prevent any direct metallic connection. 3. 1 SCREWED PIPING 2" AND SMALLER (ALL PIPING EXCEPT AS NOTED OTHERWISE) : 3.1.1 Use screwed fittings, flanges, unions and extra heavy couplings. Shoulder nipples shall be extra heavy with 1/4" shoulder as a minimum. 3.2 COPPER PIPING 2" AND SMALLER (IN LIEU OF SCREWED PIPING): 3.2.1 Thoroughly clean all surfaces to be soldered to remove all oxidation. use fine sandcloth or wire brush. After cleaning, coat surfaces to be soldered with a thin coat of solder flux in paste form. Use solder of 95% tin, 5% antimony solder. Use soldered fittings, flanges, unions and couplings. 3.2.2. Do not use mitered bends and notched pipe for tees. Avoid the application of excessive heat. Do not use acid core, paste type solder or solder flux combination. Disassembled joints for inspection as directed. PART 4 - EXECUTION 4.1 INSTALL ALL PIPING IN THE FOLLOWING MANNER: 4. 1 . 1 Approximately as and where shown on the drawings, plumb and SECTION 15060 - PIPE & PIPE FITTINGS PAGE 3 OF 5 r1;IHIi;l 1 if' parallel with walls. 4.1.2 Run exposed piping as high as possible unless otherwise noted. 4.1.3 Grade piping just off level, up in direction of flow 1" in 60", unless otherwise noted. 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.7 4.1.8 4.1. 9 Up-feed connections off top of mains at 90 degrees or 45 degrees. Down-feed connections 45 degrees off side or bottom of mains. Provide adequate swing joints for all take-offs. Make all offsets with fittings. Use eccentric reducers, flat on top. Ream, file and remove all burrs. 4.1.10 Provide anchors, expansion compensators, guides, turns, swings where shown and as required. ~ 4.1.11 Increases size at temperature bulbs to qive equal free area as unrestricted pipe. 4.1.12 Install stem of the immersion aquastat in elbow with stem installed in direction of flow. 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 5.1 5. 1 . 1 DO NOT INSTALL PIPING AS FOLLOWS UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SHOWN: Within 6" of finished floors. In front of windows. With less than head clearance. With sags, humps or pockets. With bent pipe, short lengths, unnecessary joints. With reducing bushing, close nipples. With unions on concealed piping. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING: Valves - for each piece of equipment and as shown. 5.1.2 Unions - as required to make final connections. Wherever necessary to allow removal of equipment. Wherever shown and as necessary. 5.1.3 5.1.4 Drains - from all equipment requiring draining. Drain valves - At all low points, pockets, and for each piping SECTION 15060 - PIPE & PIPE FITTINGS PAGE 4 OF 5 branch isolated by section valves. 5.1.5 Air vents - at all high points of system and where noted. for each piping branch isolated by section valves. (use manual type) 6. 1 PIPING SYSTEM TESTING: 6.1.1 All testing must be done before insulation is applied or pipe is concealed. Provide all testing equipment necessary; such as pumps, gauges, etc. repair all leaks by refitting or replacing pipe, seals or equipment. Do not use sealing compounds. Notify Engineer in writing at least one week in advance of time test to be done. SECTION 15060 - PIPE & PIPE FITTINGS PAGE 5 OF 5 , ,.,~",">,.._,,;M""-~~"~~'",;,."~I"Il'" .1'" "'1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15061 - HANGERS & SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK includes, but is not limited to: 1.1.1 Work of this Sectlon shall be performed in accordance with the reauirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to Instructions to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division I of these Specifications. 1.1.2 Providing pipe hangers,supports, anchors and guides. and other mechanical supporting devices. 1.1.3 Work related to other Sections includes: Insulation General Piplng System Installation Procedure Pipe Identification Section 15180 Section 15013 Section 15012 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1 .2. 1 Provide six (6) copies of all hanger types. use and locations. 1.3 GUARANTEE 1.3.1 Guarantee material and installation for one (1) year as per acceptance by Owner. 1.4 DESIGN 1.4.1 All supports and parts shall conform to the latest requirements of the U.S.A.S. Code for Pressure Piping B31.1, and MSS Standard Practice SP-58, except as supplemented or modified by the requirements of this Specification. 1.4.2 Designs generally accepted as exemplifying good engineering practlce. using stock or production parts. shall be utilized wnerever possible. 1.4.3 Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the P1Pe in all conditions of operation. They shall allow free expansion and contractlon of the piping, and prevent excessive stress resulting from transferred weight being lnduced into the plPe or connected equlpment. 1.4.4 Wherever possible. pipe attachments for horizontal piping shall ce oipe clamos. 1.4.5 Whel"ever possible. structural attacnments shall be beam c amos. 1.4.6 For :10n-crltlca.1. low temoerature systems. where vertical movements up' to 2" are anticipated. an aoproved precompressed variable sorlng SECTION 15061 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PAGE 1 OF 3 deslgn similar to ITT Grinnell Fig. 8-268 may be used. Where the vertical movement is greater than 2", a variable spring hanger similar to ITT Grinnell Fig. 98 may be used. Where movements are of a small magnitude, sprlng hangers similar to ITT Grinnell Fig. 82 or light duty Fig. 247 may be used. 1.4.7 All rigid hangers shall provide a means of vertical adjustment after erection. 1.4.8 Hangers shall be designed so that they cannot become disengaged by movements of the supported pipe. 1.4.9 Hangers shall be spaced in accordance with ANSI 831.1. Standards as a minimum. Where practical riser piping shall be supported independently of the connected horizontal piping. 1.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1 .5. 1 Grinnell or approved equal. Grinnell numbers are listed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 HORIZONTAL PIPING 2. 1 . 1 1-1/4" and smaller wrought band type (269). 2.1.2 1-1/2" and larger wrought clevis type (260). 2.2 VERTICAL PIPING 2.2.1 2" and smaller split ring hanger for exposed piping (139). 2.2.2 2" and smaller riser clamp at floors indicated or as required. 2.2.3 2-1/2" and larger riser clamp at floors indicated or as required to support pipe as per manufacturer's recommendations. 2.3 HORIZONTAL PIPE SUGGESTED SCHEDULE Steel Pipe Copper Tubing Pipe Size Rod Dia. Max. Spacing Max. Spacing 1-1/4" or sma 11 e r 3/8" 8 ' - 0" 6' - 0" 1-1/2" and ')" 3/8" 1 0' - 0" 1 0' - 0" ... 2-1/2" and 3" 1/2" 10' - 0" 2.3.1 Locate hangers within 4' of elbow or tee on copper tubing and within 6' of elbow or tee on steel pipe. Install double lock nuts on each side of hanger for each hanger rod. Four (4) nuts per rod. 2.3.2 Provide adequate saddles or metal shields where insulated pipe 1S being supported. SECTION 15061 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PAGE 2 OF 3 t' 1 ..I......~~,.'I'~I'(jT 'r.'" t '''! It PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE HANGERS 3.1.1 Supports shall maintain proper grading by adjustment. No hanger or accessory shall carry more than published manufacturer's max. recommended load. Install so that building construction is not unduly stressed. Hanger rods shall be of sufficient length to allow for ample swing. Support from building steel framing only. 3.1.2 Provide all necessary pipe bars, structural steel shapes and all accessories. 3.1. 3 Do not use perforated band iron, wire or chain. 3.1.4 Do not support one pipe from another. 3.1.5 Do not pierce ducts or equipment with hanger rods. 3.1.6 support. Provide additional structural steel supports where required for 3.1.7 Hangers, rods and steel members shall be electroplated (with zinc or cadmium) or painted one coat red lead. Use copper plating for hangers supporting copper pipe. 3.2 PRECAST CONCRETE FLOORS & ROOFS 3.2.1 Drill through concrete sections and insert rods through side of section. Install 4" x 4" min. 3/16" plate washer over rod. with double nut screwed to rod. For small loads (300 lbs. or less) bolts extended into the hollow core may be used. to top Anchor toggle 3.3 EXISTING CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION 3.3.1 Use lead expansion shields and steel studs. Inserts for pipes 2" and smaller may be "shot" with approval of Engineer. SECTION 15061 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PAGE 3 OF 3 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15106 - VALVES & COCKS (MANUAL) WATER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK Includes, but is not limited to: 1.1.1 Work of this Section shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to Instructions to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division I of these Specifications. 1.1.2 Providing valves and cocks as shown on drawings or as required. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 Submit Shop Drawings for approval in accordance with the General Conditions. Obtain approval prior to proceeding with manufacturing. 1.2.2 Indicate thickness and dimensions of all parts, fastenings and anchoring methods and other provisions necessary. 1.3 GUARANTEE 1 .3. 1 Guarantee all parts for one (1) year as per acceptance by Owner. 1.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1.4.1 Products meeting Specifications and manufactured by the following shall be acceptable for valves. 1 . 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Crane Jenkins Kennedy Fairbanks Powe 11 Chapman 7. Stockham 8. Nibco 9. Wa lworth 10. Lunkenheimer 1..4.2 VALVE BODY RATINGS PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE RATINGS TEMPERATURE (deg. F.) CLASS 125 LB. (psig) CLASS 250 (psig) BRONZE SCREWED BODIES -20 to 150 200 400 Specification # 200 B16.15 (1971) 250 ANSI; AMER. STD.; 300 USA; ASME B-62 350 400 190 180 165 150 125 385 365 335 300 250 SECTION 15106 - VALVES & COCKS (MANUAL) WATER PAGE 1 OF 3 ,.".,"'."'_...-.,.....~.. 1>'-'"- ",. ~ 'P'-"'-,....~' '<11'i> ',~~' "'f"'" .'....;~," 1.5 VALVE IDENTIFICATION 1.5.1 Identify all valves except in Labs by a number (preface "R" refr~geratl0n I. use 3/.." engraved brass tag and ~16 brass Shock. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 VALVE TYPE 2. 1 . 1 1.25 WSP MIN. RATED VALVES (COLD WATER) 2.1.1.1 Solder Type Valves (Jenkins Nos. listed): Gates: 1/2" - 2" brass wedge disc rising stem. 1242. Globes: 1/2" - 2" brass compo disc rising stem. 1200. Checks: 1/2" - 2" brass 90 deg. brass swing disc. 1222. 2.1.1.2 Screwed type valves (Crane Nos. listed): Gates: - 1/2" - 2" brass wedge disc rising stem. 428. Globes: 1/2" - 2" brass plug disc rislng stem. 14 1/2p. Checks: 1/2" - 2" brass 90 deg. swing disc. 37. 2.1.1.3 oraln valves: 3/4" compression faucet with male hose end. Crane B-150 or Nibco 72 or 73 hose valve. Install Watts 8A or approved equal hose connection vacuum breakers. 2.1.1.4 Backflow Preventers: All backflow preventers shall be double type 3.rd i'~ted bv the Environmental Health Manual. Acceotable valves shall be as follows: Comoany Model/Series No. Size (inches) Watts/Regulator No. 2 3.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0 FOC .75. 1. O. 1.50. '2.0 00C-11 4.0. 6.0. e.o 700 .50, 0.75, 1. 0, 1.25. 1.50, 2.0, 2.50, 3.0, 4.0 709 .75. 1.0. 1 .25. 1.50. 2.0. 2.50. 3.0, 4.0. 6.0. 8.0, 10.0 Buco/Hersey 2. 1 . 1 . 5 StOD ana Wastes: Nlbco ~~26 :)r 738 - solder 'f ~ 0CC # 7 ',~ '::r- I:: ~c i:=wec '~iDC~) ;;;....'~-~;:. ~7\~-~-; s:r~we: :'0 C8CC2i. SECTI~N ~5'C6 - V~LVES & COCKS (MANUAL) WAT~R PAGE 2 OF 3 2.1.1.6 Ball Valves \Cr~ne No. listed): 'valves 2" and smaller: Crane No. 2180 or 2182. 2.1.1.7 Stralners: Stralners 2" and smailer: shall be Crane No. 988-i/2, iron body, screwea, V-pattern, 200~ WOG. sediment separators with a 20-mesh Monel screen. 2.1.8 Vacuum Breakers: a. Hose Bibb Installation: Watts No. 8A or approved equal hose connection vacuum breaker and protection from back-siphonage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. 1 INST ALLATION 3.1.1 Valves shall be rated according to reauired duty. and shall be manufacturer, designed for packing under pressure wlth valve in open or closed position. s ;: .: T ~ :' N E 1 Ci!'i - I A L Ii ~ S:, CO C K S I ~ MJ I j A L: w ,l. T E R - ~ - - -'}-.I-.AC ""~,,,.,.,.,'<"",",'~'''''';'''''__,,",',._''''_'''''''''M<,,",""''''''~_~~_'o;:.;.,,., DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15140 - PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 centrifugal performance Drawings. SCOPE OF WORK: Provide general service and suction and In-line pumps, including motors and drives. Models, capacities and shall be in accordance with the pump schedule on the Contract 1.1.1 Work of this section shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. including but not limited to Instructions to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditions, Special Conditions. and Division I of these Specifications. 1.2 Related work included in other sections: 1. 2.1 Hangers and Supports - Section 15061 1.2.2 Vibration Isolation and Expansion - Section 15160 1. 2.3 Insulation- Section 15180 1 .2.4 Control Systems - Section 15951 1.3 SUBMITT ALS 1.3.1 Submit six (6) sets of product data, including wiring diagrams, and mounting details to the Engineer within 35 days after award of the contract. ; .3.::: Product Data - SIJbmlt manuf'icturer's pr"oduct data. r,)r al ~ prol.lucts showing gallons per minute (gpm), total dynamic head (tdh), discharge minimum net positive suction head (npsh), casing material, shaft type or seal and wear material, bearings, minimum expected bearing lire brake hp, motor hp, speed in rpm and efficiency. specified pressure, material, in hours, < .3. :2 ~2rt~fied Perfor~anse Characteristic Curves. 1. 3.4 Factory Hydraulic Test Report. 1 .3.5 Ooeration and Malntenance Manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4 Reference Standards - Comply with the followlng: 1. Amerlcan Iron and Steel Instltute (AISI) C10~5: Shaft Mater1al. ~ ~meric3n Soc.e~~. ~cr 7sst1r= 3nd ~3~3r.31s ~ST~' ~~8-~9~3: :; t.: ~, 1.:- C ;: = _: ~ _. . ,- ..- '1 .J . ASTM B6:-1g~2a: Comros1t1on 8~~n=e Cas:1ngs. SECTION 15140 - PUMPS PAGE 1 G~ ~ DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15140 - PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 centrifugal performance Drawings. SCOPE OF WORK: Provide general service and suction and in-line pumps, including motors and drives. Models, capacities and shall be in accordance with the pump schedule on the Contract 1.1.1 Work of this section shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to Instructions to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division I of these Specifications. 1.2 1 .2. 1 1.2.2 1. 2.3 1. 2.4 1.3 Related work included in other sections: Hangers and Supports - Section 15061 Vibration Isolation and Expansion - Section 15160 Insulation- Sectlon 15180 Control Systems - Section 15951 SUBMITT ALS 1.3.1 Submit six (6) sets of product data, including wlrlng diagrams, and mounting details to the Engineer within 35 days after award of the contract. 1. 3. 2 specified pressure, material, in hours, 1 . 3. 3 1. 3.4 1. 3.5 1.4 1.4 Product Data - Submlt manufacturer's product cata for all products showing gallons per minute (gpm), total dynamic head (tdh), discharge minimum net positive suction head (npsh), casing material, shaft type of seal and wear material, bearings, minimum expected bearing life brake hp, motor hp, speed in rpm and efficiency. Certified Performance Characteristic Curves. Factory Hydraulic Test Report. operation and Maintenance Manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE Reference Standards - Comply with the following: 1. Amerlcan Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) C1045: Shaft Material. 2. American SOclety for Testing and Materials (ASTMl A48-1983: Gray Iron Castings. 3. ASTM 662-1982a: Composit~on 6ronze Castings. SECTION 15140 - PUMPS PAGE 1 OF 3 '...1-."tU ~~" ~..~ 4. Hydraulic Inst1tute Standaras (14th Edition - 1983). 5. occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), the Federal Register 29 CFR 1910. 6. American National Standards Institute (ANS!) 816.5-1981: Steel Flanges. 7. National Electrical Code (NEC): NFPA 70-1987. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 The pump shall be single stage, vertical split case design, in cast iron fitted construction. The pump internals shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections. The impeller shall be of the enclosed type, hydraulically and dynamically balanced and keyed to the shaft and secured with a suitable locknut. The pump shall employ a mechanical seal, with a carbon seal ring and ceramic set. A shaft sleeve shall be furnished under the complete wetted area of the mechanical seal. The bearing frame assembly of the pump shall be fitted with oil-lubricated, bronze journal bearings and a hardened alloy steel shaft. A flexible coupling, capable of absorbing torsional vibration shall be employed between the pump and the motor. 2.2 IN-LINE PUMP 2.2.1 In-line pump shall be close-coupled permitt1ng the removal of motor and pump internals without d1sassemeling suction and discharge p1ping connections. Pumps shall be designed for horizontal or vertical mounting. 1. Casing: Cast bronze. Provide gauge ports in both suction and d i sdlarge. 2. Impeller: Cast bronze. Impeller shall be keyed to the shaft. 3. Shaft: Carbon steel meetlng AISI C1045 fitted wlth a removable bronze or stainless steel shaft sleeve under the seal area. 4. Mechanical Shaft Seals: Provide manufacturer's standard flushed mechanical seal. 5. Provide pump with a NEMA standard solid shaft ball bearing motor specifically designed for mounting with in-line pumps. 2.2.2 Capacity: 34 GPM at 38'TDH. Make: Bell and Gossett, Series 60, 1- 1/2" A. i770 RPM. 6-1/2" impeller, 3/4 he, 208v!3~/60C'/. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTAL.lATIC~~ Install :umcs 1~ 'ocatlons shown an Ccntrac: Drawlngs and In a::crdance with manufac~Jrer's lnstruct1ons. SEC7ICN 15140 - PUMPS PAGE" OF 3 - - --- - :..;.. :..-.... -...,;...... .---. , 3.1.2 Align pumps for all piping connectlons. Avoid all strain on the pump connections. 3.1.3 Provide dnD par, under CL.:fTiC .:.~d plpe drain to re"lrest ~loor drain with copper piping in accordance with Sectlon 15050 and ln sucn a manner as to avoid a tripping hazard. Connect pipe drain to drip pan drain as shown on Contract Documents. 3.1.4 Clean, lubricate and protect pumps in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.1.5 Check pump rotatlon before pumps are placed ln operatlon. 3.1.6 Do not operate pump for over 60 seconds without fluid flow. 3.1.7 Provide pressure gauge with stop cock on discharge side, as well as suction side of pumps. SECTION 15140 - PUMPS PAGE 3 OF ~ ~."","",,~-~"''"'.>> DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15160 - VIBRATION ISOLATION AND EXPANSION COMPENSATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 This section covers devices for controlling or absorbing pipe movement, expansion and equipment, including vlbration. 1.2 Related work in other sections: Pipe and Pipe Fittings Hangers and Supports Heat Pumps Fans Duct Accessories Section 15060 Section 15061 Section 15160 Section 15820 Section 15860 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 Submit six (6) sets to Architect for approval within 35 days from let of Contract cuts on flexible connectors, vibration isolators and mountings. Provide schedule showing size and length of connectors. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATION: 2.1.1 Pad Type Mountings: Neoprene Shear Flex Cross-Ribbed Type A as manufactured by Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc., or as approved equal. 2.1.2 Vibration Isolation Hangers: Provide Spring-Flex Hangers Type IV, s~zed by manufacturer for specific loading for each hanger and color coded to match load. Flex hangers shall be Series "RSH" as manufactured by Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc., or as approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Manufacturer shall be: Vibration Mounting and Controls Inc. 3.2 Align pipe so that axis of plpe on elther side of isolating or expansion device is coincident. Provide guides and/or anchors on either side of longitudinal expansion compensators (but anchor only one side). Anchor piping side where flexible connection separates vibrating equipment from piping. SECTION 15160 - VIBRATION ISOLATION & EXPANSION COMPENSATION PAGE 1 OF 1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15161 - WATER BALANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK includes, but is not limited to: 1.1.1 Work of this Sectlon 1S performed in accordance with the reQu1rements of the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to, Instructions to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.1.2 This Section covers the balancing of all the hot water zones and branches. 1.2 RELATED WORK included in other Sections: Preparation for Final Use - Section 15011 Meters, Gauges, and Thermometers - Section 15170 Chilled Water Specialties - Section 15702 Pipe and Pipe Standards - Section 15060 Air Conditioning Units - Section 15671 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 Submit tabulated tests results to Architect, indicating plpe sections tested, type orifice, orifice calibration curve - giving gpm and pressure proportions. 1. 3. 2 BALANCE PROCEDURE: 1.3.2.1 Charqe Expansion Tank With Air: Check all vents to eliminate air. Open full all balanclng fitt1ngs. Set all thermostats at lowest set~~ng. Ott31n and record pump pressure (suction and discharge) with no restrictions in system. Set all balancing cocks at 1/2 open. Adjust pump balancing cocks to obtain pressure differential for scheduled pump flow per individual pump curve. Check supply and return temperature differences for each piece or series, group 0f radiation and adjust balancing cock to obtain correct series, group of radiation 3nd adjust balancing cock to obtain correct differential. Record readings. When initial balanclng is complete, recheck all read1ngs and reoalance as requ1red. Submit record data to Arch1tect. 1.3.2.2 Circuit Setters: Provide tabulated list of all Circuit Setters design and actual GPM and P.O. Set all C1rcu1t Setters 1n accordance with spec1fiea GPM. 1.3.2.3 Circulatinq Pump: Prov1de GPM and pressure d1fferent1al across pumos in t30ulatea form. 1.3.2.4 Balancina Check: Rev1s1t Job at least tW1ce after system 15 1n C09r?t'on. Ccnsu~t owner and thcrou~hlv investigate anv iack of performance. ":,r2 "Sq,...::~~,j ".c~='.lstments. 7:II(e read''l(lS as reaU1rea ~c lr:a1cat9 tota~ 3/3:'2m cutout. Subm1t recorded aata to ~rcn'tect. SECTION 15161 - WATER BALANCE PAGE OF ~.""",,__':o"I 111' 1 r~~ l'TtI'lI. '"1''' .l......'.'''e'.. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15170 - METERS, GAGES, AND THERMOMETERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK Includes, but is not limited to; 1.1.1 Work of this section shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to Instructions to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditions, Special Conditions, an Divislon I of these Specifications. 1.1.2 This section shall include, but not be limited to, Pipe Line and Duct Sensing Thermometers, Pressure Gages, and Meters. 1.1.3 Related work in other sections: Pipe and Pipe Fittings - Section 15060 Refrigeration Piplng and Accessories - Section 15650 Chilled Water Specialities - Section 15710 Ductwork - Section 15840 Air Balance - Section 15891 Temperature Control - Section 15900 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 General: Comply with the provlsions of Division I. 1.2.2 Product Data: Within 35 calendar days after award of the Contract, submit: Six (6) sets of complete materials list of all items proposed to be turnished and installed under this Section to Architects. 1.2.3 Shop Drawings showing all details of the proposed installation, and the interface of the ducts, pipe, and eauipment. 1.2.4 Manufacturers' recommended procedures which, when approved by the ~ngineer will become the basis for inspecting and accepting or rejecting actual procedures used on the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Pipe Line Thermometers Shall Be: Direct mounted, brass seperab1e socket. 5" to 7" scale. Fixed shank, straight or back angle as best suited. Provide at the supply and return connects of the calls and the chiller. 2 . 1 . 1 MAKE: TAYLOR. or approved equal. PRESSURE GAGES: ') ') . L... ,-. I Prov1de 4 1/2" dial gauge with 1/2 of 1% accuracy of scale range. SECTION 15170 - METERS, GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS PAGE 1 OF 2 Unit shall be constructed of phosphur bronze tubes and dust and mOlsture proof cast iron body. ~ ~ ? ..:: . " . '- ?rovide adjustable pulsation dampener with stopcock for water gauges. 2.2.3 Provide on supply and return of the pumps. 2.2.4 Make: Taylor, Ernst Gage Company. SECTION 15170 - METERS. GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS PAGE 2 OF 2 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15180 - INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK Includes. but is not limited to: 1.1.1 Work of this Section shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to Instructions to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division I of these Specifications. 1.1.2 Scope: The work covered by this Section consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials and accessories, and of performing all operations necessary for the installation of all insulation for the plumbing, heating and air conditioning piping, in strict accordance with the insulation Section of this specification and applicable drawings. All insulation shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by skilled workmen regularly engaged in this type of work. Insulation shall be Manville Products Corporation or products of equal performance, subject to approval prior to installation by Engineer. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 Submit Shop Drawings for approval in accordance with the General Conditions. Obtain approval prior to proceeding wlth manufacturing. 1.2.2 Indicate thicknesses and dimensions of all parts, fastenings and anchorlng methods and other provlslons necessary. 1.3 GUARANTEE 1.3.1 Guarantee all material and installation for one (1) year as per acceptance by Owner. 1.~ ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1.4.1 Products meeting Specifications and manufactured by the following shall be acceptable: 1. Johns-Manvllle 2. Pittsburgh Plate Glass 3. Owens-Corning 4. Gustin-Bacon PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION: All insulation shall have composite (lnsulation, Jacket and acheslve usee to adhere the Jacket to the insulation; Fire and Smoke Hazard ratings as tested under procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 or UL 723, not exceeding: FI~me Spread Smoke QevelcDe~ 25 50 SECTION 15180 - INSULATION PAGE 1 OF 5 --.,' --- -- - --.. ~~ .. "'_ __ .,- ___ __ 4 _ _ , _n '. _ The insulation contractor shall certify 1n writ1ng, pr10r to installation, that products to be used meet the above criteria. 2. "1 . 1 Type A: 1. Indoor p1plng systems operating up to 650 degrees F. plplng, shall be cylindr1cal1y molded glass fiber, w1th Jacket or hlgh denslty white kraft bonded to aluminum foil relnforced with fiberglass yarn. Paper shall be chemically treated to assure pipe and smoke safety and to prevent corrosion of foil. Jacket shall also have pressure sensitive tape closure system. Insulation shall meet the following specificat10ns: Moisture Absorption Less than 0.2% by volume Alkalinity Less than 0.6% expressed as NA20 Corrosivity Does not accelerate Capillarity (after 24 hours) Negligible Shrinkage None Resistance to fungi & bacteria Does not breed or promote Fire Hazard FHC 25/50 Classificatlon (Composite) Per ASTM c-84, NFPA 255, UL 723 Thermal Conductivity K = .23 Physical Propertles of Jackets AP and AP-T Water Vapor permeability (ASTM E-96 Procedure A) .02 perm Beach Puncture (ASTM-D-7811 50 oz. in./in. tear Tensile Strength (ASTM-D-828) 40 1bs./in. wldth Mu 11 en Bu rst (ASTM-O-77 4) 70 psi Provide Manvi 11e "Micro-Lok 650 w1th AP-T" cr approvea eaua I. 2. 1 .2 Tyoe B ~/2" thiCk. f'e:"81e -;"camed o1astic. formelJ. 8109 cc'/er1n? ::.:...; 1 7: ~ b 1 e = '~~- "' ~~:. ~ ~ ~~ c c ~,~ -.J a ": e r 1 l :i 8 S. .3. n (j ,... ~ 1'4 r'" ~ 9 e r '3. -r: 1 0 n ~.. n e s . impervlOus tc mOls:.ure '1aoor. flame resistant. Aool'; o~/ S,l;::;::,r,c: over ooen end or Dlpe where possible. solit l~su1atiCn wnere SECTION 15180 - INSULATION PAGE 2 OF ~ 2.1.3 2.1.4 , " . . -_. ".- -..--.-. ._~--_. necessary. Seal longitudinal seam and butt end Joints with Armstrong 520 adhesive for chilled water, 620 for hot water, Foster 82-31. 2. Fittings - fabricate sleeve type fitting covers from insulation having an 1.0. large enough to fit over fitting. Miter as necessary. Seal wlth adhesive described above. Type C: Shall be Manville R-Series Microlite. 1. 1" thick, 1-1/2 lb. density, fiberglass blanket type insulation where factory applied .002" thick alumlnum foil FSKL vapor barrier and conductivity of K = .31 and permeability of .04 perm. Insulation shall be suitable for dual duty with temperature ranges of 50 degrees F to 150 degrees F. Seal longitudinal and end joints with factory supplied 4" wide tape. Cement seams and end joints with Foster 85-20 or Insul-Coustic 215 white vapor barrier adhesive. No staples permitted. Use aluminum bands on max. spacing of 2 ft. centers. Type 0: Shall have conductivity of K = min. of .25 1. 1-1/4" thick 3 lb. density, fiberglass insulating board with factory applied .002" thick aluminum foil vapor barrier (FSK-Foil- Scrim-Kraft). Insulatlon shall be sUltable for dual duty with temperature ranges of 50 degrees F. to 150 degrees F. Cement to duct with stick-on clips. Tape joints with factory supplied 4" wide tape. Cement seams and end joints with Foster 85-20 or Insul-Coustic 215 white vapor barrier adhesive. No staples permitted. Manville 800 Series Spin-Glas or approved equal. General PropertiGs Temperature Limit (maximum) Unfaced Faced-Unfaced Side Faced Side 450 degrees F 450 degrees F 150 degrees F Moisture Absorptlon Less than 1.0% by volume Alkalinity Less than 0.6% expressed as NA20 Corrosivity Does not accelerate Odor None Shrinkage None Resistance to fungi ~nd bacteria Does not breed or 8romote 0.02 perms ~oisture Vapor transmission FSK and AP SECTION 15180 - INSULATION PAGE 3 OF 5 .-...-.....-.----- ...-------- -_.__.~ .~-_......_._......:-. Densities. Thicknesses and Facinqs Thickness Inches(in 1/2" Density increments) iype lpcf) Faced Unfacea 812 1. 50 FSK, 1-1/2-4 1-1/2-4 814 3.00 FSK, AP 1-4 1-4 815 4.25 FSK, AP 1-2 1/2 1-2 1/2 817 6.00 FSK, AP 1-2 1-2 Composite Surface Burning Characteristics All Spin-Glas insulation products meet the Surface Burning Characteristics requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B Standards and FHA. FHC 25/50 (ASTM E84) 2.1.5 Type E 1. 1" thick glass fiber body with erosion and flame resistant coating. Minimum noise reduction co-efficient 80%. Attach to surfaces with fire resistant adhesive and sheet metal pins and washers not over 15" on centers. 2.2 Schedule Use: 2.2.1 Type B: Hot and cold domestic water lines and refrigerant suction and h~t gas lines. and condensate lines. 2.2.2 Type C, 0: Supply air duct and all outside air intake ducts. 2.2.3 Type E: Sound attenuatlon for inside ducts where shown on Drawlngs. 2.2.4 Type B: Expansion tank and pump impeller housing. '; ..., ;::; ......'-.-...1 Type B: Chilled water supply and return. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Pro'lide lnsu1atlOn fer all surfaces as indicated or 3S reaUlred. Installation shall be done by manufacturer's authorized representat:ve after plpe has been tested and accepted and shall include lnsulatlng materials, Jacket and fasteners. 3.2 Clean surfaces to be lnsulated and paint where reaulred before aoo1:~n9 insulation. .:,. ~ . ,.~.... i.':.:::: .....+- ... 3.f~ 2 r ":.es:~'-:J -:.rr""\.-.....' -=- ' ............,. ~ . . - ': ~ ~ ~ ... .... ~-:: . SECTION 15180 - INSULATION PAGE ~ OF ~ .f"~ 3.4 All materials and installation shall be subJect to inspectlon and approval by Underwriter's laboratories. Materials shall conform to NFPA Bulletin 90A and 90B with particular adherence to paragraph 305. 3.5 Do not lnsulate duct until alr balance has been done and approved by Architect. SECTION 15180 - INSULATION PAGE 5 OF 5 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.1 WORK OF THIS SECTION SHALL BE PERFORMED in accoraance wlth the requirements of the Contract Documents including but not limited to Instructions to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditlons, Speclal Conditions ana Divlslon I of these Specifications. 1.1.2 Work included: The plumbing system for this Work includes all cold water distribution, domestic water heating and distribution, vents and wastes, roof drainage and floor drainage, plumbing fixtures and trlm, and all other plumbing items indicated on the Drawings or described in these Specifications, plus all other plumbing items needed for a complete and proper installation. 1.3 Related work specified in other Sections: Pipe and Pipe Fittings Section 15060 Plumbing Fixtures Section 15450 General Piping Systems Procedure Section 15013 Valves & Cocks Section 15106 Preoaratlon for Final Use Sectlon 15011 Perform all ;-,renchlng and D3Cr,T,iling aSSOCi3.tea ,.nth ~r.e c1umbiw:; installation in strlct accordance wlth the provlslons of Dlvlslon 2. 1.4 Quality Assurance: Use sufficient journeyman plumbers and competent supervisors in execution of this portion of the Work to ensure proper and ~deauatR lrstallation throuahout. In the acc80tance or rejectio~ of installed plumblng, no allowance wll1 be maae Tor iaCK OT Sklii on tr1e Pdrt OTo'IOr"i"T,er,. '.5 Submittals 1 . 5 . 1 General: Comply with the provisions of Division 1. .. :: ... Pro~uct dat3: Wi:hln 35 ~21~~dar davs after ~w2rd of Contract. submit : 1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnlshed and 'r.stal'8d under ~hi5 Sect~on. 2. Catalog cuts and other data required tc demonstrate ccmcl1ance with the specified reculrements. 1.::.~ Oaer?.tlCn ard ma.in~enance mar_~al: 1..)C':Jn ':::::,mc'let~Sri OT "'C.tllS ocr::-;cn ':]T the work. and as a condition of its acceptance. cornplle a~d submit manua;s as reau' -~~ unaer ~l\l~ion 1 of these 5oeClf1catiors. :. ~.. ,: -..: .... ...:. ~~ .....,::. .:.: :: ~ . ~ . "I ~~.~:2C(~O~: I_!se ~l' ~ear5 re':e~3ary tc :rc:e.:: tne ~ater,~ls :r -:-~c SE=TI~~! . ~~OQ - ;)LiJMBING :~:~c: 1J J. Section before, during, and after installation and to protect the work and materials of all other trades. 1.6.2 Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Engineer ana at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.6.3 All plumbing work shall be supplied and installed under strict conformance with the terms and conditions of the current Plumbing Codes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 All other materials. not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of the work of this Section, shall be new, first quality of their respective kind, and as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Inspection: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 Plumbing System Layout: Layout the plumbing system in careful coordination with the Drawlngs, determinlng proper elevations for all components of the system and using only the minimum number of bends to produce a satisfactorily functioning system. Follow the general layout shown on the Drawings in all cases except where other work may interfere. Layout all pipes to fall within partitions. walls, or roof cavities, and to not reauire furring other than as shown on the Drawings. 3.3 Trenching and Backfilling 3.3.1 General: Comply with provision of Division 2. 3.3.1. < D~g trenches str3ight and true to line and grade. with bottom of trench free from rock points and with pipe cushion consistlng of compacted fine sand. 2.3.1.2 Provide a minimum trench width of 16 inches for main soil and drainage cioe, a~d a mlnlmum of 24" cover below finished grade wherever conditions will permit. Exterior work shall have a minimum of 2 feet of cover or as indlcated on the arawings as directed jy the Engineer. Provide thrust blocks jetween serVlce Dioe and undisturbed earth at all bends. 3.2.1.3 Where field conditions require variance from these mlnlmums, secure the Eng~neer's approval before oroceeding with the variance. Perform all such .arlances at n~ add~ticnal cast to the Cwner. SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING PAGE 2 OF 4 3.3.2 Backfilling 3.3.2.1 Backfill promoly uoon receipt of all necessary aoprovals, using stockp11ed mater1al excavated from the trencrl. or using other material approved by the Engineer. 3.3.2.2 All backfill maternl shall be free from rocks. large clods. roots, and other foreign matter, and shall be compacted 1n six 1nch layers to a m1nimum of 95% compaction. 3.3.2.3 Jetting of backfill will not be permitted. 3.3.2.4 Promptly remove all excess excavated material from the site. 3.4 Installation, General Do not cut into or reduce the size of any load-carrying member without the prior approval of the Engineer. Install all pipes to clear all beams and obstructions and in accordance with the following: 3.4.1 Install all piping promptly, capping or p1uggin all open ends. 3.4.2 Install all p1p1ng generally level and plumb, free from traps, and 1n a manner to conserve soace for other work. Run hot water suoply at least 6" from cold water supply. ~ 4.? Cush10n all traos and bear1ngs to m1nimize transfer of sound. PrOV1oe complete iso1at1on of all d1ssimi1ar metals. FirmlY anchor ail pipes 1ntO position. 3.4.4 Provide uniform pitch of at least 1/4 inch per foot for all horizontal waste and soil OlDln? within the buildinq. 3.4.5 Pitch all vents for proper drainage. Install vent p1p1ng with each bend 45 degrees mlnimum from the horizontal wherever structural conditions will permi t. 3.4.6 Provide alr chambers at all fixtures; 16 inch minimum length and same d1ameter as the brancn. 3.4.7 Conceal all piping unless otherwise shown on the Orawlngs. 3.~.~ Insoect aach ciecs af pipe. coucli~gs. fittings. and ecuioment for defects and abstr~ctions. crcmotly remove all defective materla1 from the slte. 2.4.9 All sUDciles ~c f, .tur~s shall nave stoos whether l~cludec in c'a:e ~u~bers or rot: ana all suoolles to eauioment and sinks. etc. suooi1ea oy others shall have stoes. 3. 1. ~ G Elevate t~e hot and cold water Dices where they came through the wa1' ~~ ~ -~a~G-c~cce~ ~.~~.. SECTION 15JOO - PLUMBING D~G~ , ;~ - 3.5 Joints and Connections 3.5.1 ana true. fittings. Preparation: Prooerly ream all cut pipe. Cut all threaas straight Apo1y best quality teflon tape to male pipe threads, but not to inside Use graphite on all c1eanout plugs. 3.5.2 Packing: Pack all joints in cast iron soil and waste plpe ana fittings, using oakum, and securing with one inch deep caulking of lead. Fully and properly caulk and finish. 3.6 Testing 3.6.1 General: Furnish all test pumps, gauges, equipment, and personnel required, and test as necessary to demonstrate the integrity of the finished installation to the approval of all pertinent authorities and the Engineer. 3.6.2 Soil and waste: Unless otherwise directed, plug all openings an fill with water to a height equal to the lowest vent. Allow to stand one hour or longer as required. Re-cau1k leaking joints as directed and then re-test. 3.6.3 Water lines: Test and make tight at 150 psi water gauge. Retain for four hours; repair all leaking joints ad directed; and then re-test. 3.6.4 Valves: Test all valve bonnets for tightness. Test operate all valves at lea3t once from closed-to-open-to-c1osed positions while valve is under pressure. Test all automatic valves for proper operation at the settings ;ndicated. Test pressure relief valves at least three times. 3.6.5 Other: Test all piping specialties for proper operation. Test all air vent points to ensure that air has been vented. SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING PAGE 4 OF 4 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15450 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK includes: Furnish, install and connect all new plumbing fixtures specified and shown on plans. 1.1.1 WORK OF THIS SECTION SHALL BE PERFORMED in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to Instructions to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division I of these Specifications. 1.1.2 RELATED WORK Specified in other sections: Plumbing General Piping Systems Procedure Valves and Cocks Section 15400 Section 15013 Section 15106 1.2 SUBMITTALS: 1.2.1 Submit Shop Drawings for approval in accordance with the General Conditions. Obtain approval prior to proceeding with manufacture. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 QUALITY OF MATERIALS 2.1.1 Vitreous china shall be unmarked, true and level, clear, smooth and bright and warranteed not to glaze, color or scale. Fixtures shall be of the same make and design throughout the whole building unless otherwise specified. 2.1.2 Where American Standard numbers are referred to, equivalent products of Crane, Kohler, or Eljer will be accepted. 2.1.3 Other Materials: 1. All trimmings, exposed supply and waste pipes shall be chromium plated. 2. All supplies shall have stops whether included in plate number or not. 3. Escutcheon Plates: Cast chromium plated with set screws. 4. All fixtures shall comply with the Florida State Water Conservation Code Requirements. 2.2 WATER CLOSETS 2.2.1 Water Closet type "A": 1. Make: American Standard 18" high - Elderly has Cadet Aquameter elongated siphon action reverse trap bowl, close-coupled flush-o- meter tank. (Flusher 1.5 gal/flush) vitreous china, bolt down, SECTION 15450 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PAGE 1 OF 3 _. '--~ l.'."""'~"" white. Model No. 2168.128. 2. Seat: Olsonite ~95 open front seat less cover; white. 2.3 URINALS 2.3.1 Vitreous China - 24" A.F.F. 1. Make: American Standard - Washbrook Model No. 6501.010 vitreous china, 3/4" inlet spud, (1.5 gal/flush), one piece, white, 2" outlet. 2. Flush Valve; Sloan Royal 186-1 A-85 - 3/4" IPS Bak-Chek angle stop with cap, adjustable tail piece, vacuum breaker flush connection, with low pressure refill ring. 3. Hangers: K2 hangers for 5/16 x 1 slots in stud wall, 13-1/2" on centers. 2.4 LAVATORIES 2.4.1 Lavatory type "A": 1. Make: American-Standard-Aqualyn Lavatory, Model No. 0476-028, Vitreous China countertop, self-rimming styling, oval with 4" hole centers. 2. Color: White 3. Faucets: Sloan On-Q electronic cast brass spout, Model No. ETF- 66. 4. Symmons #4-10 Mechanical Mixing Valve. 2.4.2 Lavatory Type "B": 1. Lavatory: American Standard 0355.027 "Lucerne" white vitreous china lavatory, size 20" x 1S" with front overflow, raised back for concealed arm support. 2. Trim: Faucet: Sloan ON-Q ETF-77 electronic faucet with gooseneck. a. 2411.015 - 1-1/4" diameter grid drain with 4" tailpiece. b. 2303.071 - 3/S" wall supplies with loose key angle stop and . brass set screw escutcheon. c. 4402.061 - 1-1/4" x 1-1/2" adjustable cast brass P-trap with swivel elbow, cleanout plug, tubing drain to wall and set screw escutcheon. d. Symmons #4-10 Mechanical Mixing Valve. SECTION 15450 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PAGE 2 OF 3 3. Carrier: Concealed arms - wall mounted. Jay R. Smith Model No. 720. 4. Mounting Height: 34" top to floor. 2.5 FLOOR DRAINS 2.5.1 Floor Drain Type "A": Josam Series 30000 - E3. Cast iron body with round strainer and oval funnel, satin finish bronze top with 3" outlet (add trap be 1 ow f 1 00 r) . 2.5.2 Floor Drain Type "B": Josam 30000 - S. Strainer size 5 x 5, cast iron body with satin finish bronze top, 3" outlet. Secured grate with vandal-proof screws. 2.6 HOSE BIBBS 2.6.1 Exterior Hose Bibbs, wall type, integral vacuum breaker, locking cover. Bronze hydrant with chrome plated face. Bronze casing, hose connection with 3/4" inlet connection. "Too handle key. Make: Jay R. Smith Model No. 5607. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Install all fixtures securely, level, and at elevations recommended by manufacturer and/or Engineer. Caulk with silicon sealant all cracks or joining 1 i nes. SECTION 15450 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PAGE 3 OF 3 .. Ulor. >>---......~I DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15650 - REFRIGERATION PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK Includes, but is not limited to: 1.1.1 Work of this Section shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to Instruction to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division I of these Specifications. 1.1.2 This Section shall include, but not be limited to all refrigerant plplng, valves, and fittings, charging procedure, testing, and operation of equipment, and recovery of refrigerant before disconnecting existing refrigerant' piping. 1.1.3 Perform all work in accordance with ASA B9.1 code. Refer to Carrier System Design Manual or Trane Refrigeration Manual. 1.2 RELATED WORK in other Sections: Hangers and Supports - Section 15061 Insulation - Section 15180 Temperature Control - Section 15900 SUBMITT ALS Genera 1 : Comply with the provisions of D i vis i on 1. 1 . 1 .4 1 .2. 1 1.2.1 Product Data: Within 35 calendar days after award of the Contract, submit: Six (6) sets of complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section to Engineers. 1.2.3 Contractor to submit piping schematic of Refrigerant plplng showing all valves. Submit cuts of all Refrigeration Specialty valves including sizes plus interfacing with condensing unit and HVAC unit. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.1 General Description: 2.1.1 Tubing: ASTM B-88 type L hard drawn copper. Fittings: Wrought copper or sweat type. Flare or compression type permitted only for connection to equipment where integral with same. Solder: 95/5. Sizes as shown on Drawings. 2.1.2 ACCESSORIES: Make: Sporlon, Superior, Alco, Mueller or Henry as applicable. Submit Prints. Service valves: Bronze alloy, pressure cap glove type for refrigerant service. Solenoid valve: Packless piston type with manual opening feature, 2 psi max. drop each with liquid line solenoid switch, on/off automatic SECTION 15650 - REFRIGERATION PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PAGE 1 OF 2 type. Thermal expansion valves: With external equalizer for each d i stri butor. Filter-Dryer: Provide with condensing unit. Liquid line sight glasses: Provide with condensing unit. Stra i ner: ahead of TX. Weatherproof covers: for all electrically operated accessories out of doors, not otherwise protected. Charging valves if required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Piping as direction of flow. drawing schematic. experience in built short as possible and pitched 1/4" per 10' properly for Install pipe valves and accessories in sequence shown on Installation personnel must have five (5) years minimum up system refrigeration ihstallation. 3.1.2 With the use of a refrigerant recovery and recycling unit, reclaim all refrigerant in the existing lines being removed before disconnecting and removing. Approved unit may be "The Rejuvenator" by Refrigerant Recovery Systems, Inc., P.O. Box 360 298, Tampa, FLA, 33673, 1-800-533-2845 or 1-813-237- 1266 for the refrigerant recovery processes. 3.2 REFRIGERATION TEST, DEHYDRATION AND CHARGING 3.2.1 Clean off solder and test system before covering pipe. Charge with mixture of dry inert gas and refrigerant. Test at 200 psi min. with relief valves out of circuit. Install relief valves after test is complete. Dehydrate system, use vacuum pump capable of .15" Hg absolute. Run pump (until vacuum indicator shows a reading of 32 deg. For) .20" Hg absolute. Valve off pumps, record pressure with manometer or approved gage. Check and record reading after 2 additional hours. If pressure increase is noted, repeat procedure until .20" Hg holds. Double dehydrate by admitting refrigerant vapor thru drier to break vacuum while vacuum pump is still running. Perform all dehydration work at 60 deg. F. ambient minimum. Repeat until system is completely dehydrated. Charge system with dry refrigerant only after the system has been properly leak and press -e tested, evacuated and dehydrated. Add charge until liquid line sight glas~ 3hows clear. Follow manufacturer's recommended method of charging to guarantee ~oper amount of refrigerant at design. Refrigerant in warranty one year after Owner has taken over equipment. Tag refrigerator type. SECTION 15650 - REFRIGERATION PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PAGE 2 OF 2 "'''''''''.. .4Itlll.. ~. n .rr r ~l.j..al'A"'_;;'lIllIIIM DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15671 - AIR CONDITIONING FAN & CHILLED WATER UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope of work includes, but is not limited to installation of fan and chilled water coil units plus relocation of one split system with fan, OX coil and air cooled condensing unit. 1.1.1 All equipment, including fan coil unlts and chlller shall be by same manufacturer. 1.1.3 All refrigerant piping shall be installed per manufacturer's recommendations. 1.2 Related work shall include: 1 .2. 1 Vibration Isolation - Section 15160. 1.2.2 Air Balance - Section 15891. 1. 2.3 Ductwork - Section 15840. 1.2.5 Temperature Control - Section 15900. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: Submit SlX (6) sets of product data, including wiring diagrams, duct layout, refrigerant and mounting details to the Engineer within 35 days after award of the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ZONE 1: All existing air conditioning equipment to remain. See plans for minor modifications of duct work, etc. 2.2 ZONE 2: Existing fan coil unit and air cooled condensing unit to be disconnected, relocated and reconnected per contract drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. Completed renovation shall provide a complete working system. a) Store and reuse existing refrigerant. b) Replace filters before air balance of air distribution system. c) Add outside air intake dampers, electric operator and new controls as outlined in Section 15900, Temperature Control. 2.3 ZONE 3: Remove existing fan coil unit and air cooled condensing unit and replace with the following: 2.3.1 Fan system shall include a fan unit with a chilled water coil and electric reheat duct heater in discharge duct. Provide and install new floor mounted, fully assembled central station air handling, vertical draw-through with flat filter and chilled water coil, installed per manufacturer recommendatlons SECTION 15671 - AIR CONDITIONING FAN & CHILLED WATER UNITS PAGE 1 OF 3 and construction documents. 2.3.1.1 Construction: Galvanized steel formed panels. Double-skinned hinged access doors. Double-walled insu12:ed stalnless steel draln pan. Belt-driven motors -na11 be mounted within casing. Motor and drives slia1l be installed and aligned at factory. Fan wheel shall be factory balanced on pillow block bearings. 2.3.1.2 Chilled Water Coils: Coil headers shall be schedule 40 steel pipe with copper tube with aluminum fins. Provide number of rows and fin spacing per schedule on Drawings. 2.3.1.3 Filter: Provide factory built flat filter with access panel for removal from either side. 2.:L2 Make: Carrier 39LD. Size per schedule on Drawings. 2.3.3 Electric Duct Reheat: Provide and install in discharge duct 120v/208v/3~/60cy electric resistance wire type duct heater. Sized as shown on Fan Coil Schedule on Drawings. 2.3.3.1 Electric duct heaters as manufactured by Brasch Manufacturing Company, Inc.. Voltage size, KW, steps and control voltage shall be as scheduled. Three phase heaters shall have balanced phases. 1. Heaters shall be UL listed for zero clearance and shall meet all NEC requirements. 2. Type: Heaters shall be for duct mounting - slip-in type. 3. Heating elements shall be 80% nickel and 20% chromium; steps shall be arranged to prevent stratification when operating at less than full capacity. 4. Element terminals shall be stainless steel; insulators and bracket bushings shall be non-porous ceramic and securely positioned. Terminals shall be machine ~rimped to elements. 5. Frame shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel ~ith galvanized steel brackets, stiffening ribs and gussets spat welded to the casing. 6. The terminal box shall be spot welded construction with solid, hinged cover, totally enclosed, without louvers or grilles per UL Standard 1096. 7. Recessed terminal box to be provided when cOl1s are installed ln ducts with internal obstruction greater than 1". 8. Safety Devices: A disc-type automatic reset thermal cutout shall be furnished for primary over-temperature protection. For secondary protection, a sufficlent number of replaceable cut-outs in the power lines shall de-~' argize elements if the primary cut- out fails. All safety devices shall be serviceable through the terminal box without removing the heater from the duct. 9. Manufact~rer to provide two-year lim,ted warranty for heatlng elements; other components and accessories to be warranted for one year. SECTION 15671 - AIR CONDITIONING FAN & CHILLED WATER UNITS PAGE 2 OF 3 """"".''''''~.'llII "rr ".~~.l>'II'_~~., "f....~~~t 2.3.3.2 Controls: Provide steps of control per schedule on Drawings. Step controllers shall be either electronic or electric and shall be controlled through the Temperature Control sequence. See Section 15900, Temperature Contro 1. 2.3.4 Installation: Control fan, chilled water coil, and reheat coil shall be installed in manner as outlined in Section 15900, Temperature Control. 2.3.4.1 Mount unit in elevated concrete pad 4" above floor. Provide and install vibration pad under unit. 2.3.4.2 Install condensate drain full size of drain outlet with trap and run to existing floor drain as shown on Drawings. 2.4 ZONES 4, 5 & 6: Provide and install air conditioning system which will include fan, chilled water coil, and electric duct reheat coil in discharge duct. Fan shall be fully assembled, horizontal fan with 1" filter rack capable of replacing filters from either side. Install per manufacturer's recommendations and per construction documents. 2.4.1 Construction: Casing shall be fabricated from structurally reinforced heavy gauge galvanized steel with removable side panels and internally insulated with glass fiber thermal/acoustical lining. 2.4.1.1 Condensate pan shall extend under full coil surface. 2.4.1.2 Fan shall be forward-curved, centrifugal, double-inlet type and dynamically balanced at factory. 2.4.1.3 Motor shall be belt-drive with adjustable sheaves and bolted to an adjustable platform. 2.4.2 Chilled Water Coil: Number of rooms and fin spacing shall be per schedule on Drawings. Coils shall be copper tubes with aluminum fins with manual air vents installed at factory. 2.4.3 Make: Carrier 42BH. Size per schedule on Drawings. 2.4.4. Electric Duct Reheater: Provide and install size and KW in voltages as indicated in Schedule on Drawings. Construction, make and control shall be the same as that specified in Paragraph 2;3.3. 2.4.5 Installation: 2.4.5.1 Suspend units from roof structure on frame with rod and vibrator isolators sized for concentrated corner weights. Avoid unit vibration by isolation of all ductwork, piping and building structure from the unit. 2.4.5.2 Unit for Zone 6 is an Add Alternate. Provide valved capped tees where shown on Drawings for Zone 6 unit if not accepted as the Add Alternate to the Base Bid. SECTION 15671 - AIR CONDITIONING FAN & CHILLED WATER UNITS PAGE 3 OF 3 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15680 - CHILLER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope of Work inc1udes, but is not 1imlted to: 1.1.1 Work of this Section shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to Instructions to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditions. 1.1.2 Except as otherwise specified under "Work of Other Sections" and "Work Not Included", the work of this Section consists of furnishing all air cooled chiller utilizing reciprocating compressor and thermal expansion valves. 1.2 Related Work Included in Other Sections: Section 15702 - Chilled Water Specialties Section 15161 - Water Balance 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Unit shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 590, latest edition. 1.3.2 Unit construction shall comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 15-1978 Safety Code, NEC (National Electric Code, U.S.A.) and ASME applicable codes. 1.3.3 Unit cabinet shall be capable of withstanding Federal Test Method Standard No. 141 (method 6061) 500 hour salt spray test. 1.3.4 Cooler shall be tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Code for a refrigerant working side pressure of 235 psig (1620 kPa) and a minimum water side pressure of 150 psig (1034 kPa). 1.3.5 Air cooled condenser coils shall be leak tested at 150 psig (1034 kPa) and pressure tested at 480 psig (3309 kPa). 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 .4. 1 Unit shall be shipped as a single package only. 1.4.2 Unit shall be stored and handled per unit manufacturer's recommendations. 1.5 Submittals: 1.5.1 Submit six (6) sets of manufacturer's brochures and installation instructions 35 days after Contract is let for Engineer's approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Furnish and lnstall factory-assembled Carrier Alr Cooled Water Chlller SECTION 15680 - CHILLER PAGE 1 OF 4 Model No. 30GT020. (Chiller with maximum .85 kw/ton output shall be especially considered.) 2.1.1 System Capacity: Total capacity 91.9 tons at 95 deg. F condensing air temperature Entering water temp. 54 deg. F Leaving water temp 44 deg. F Compressor power input 19.8 kw Chilled water flow 34 GPM with 19.5' P.O. EER - 10.9 Cooler Pressure Drop - 4' of water 2.2 CHILLER 2.2.1 chiller. controls, start-up. Unit shall be factory-assembled, single-piece, air-cooled liquid Contained within the cabinet shall be all factory wiring, piping, refrigerant charge (R-22) and special features required prior to field 2.2.2 Unit Cabinet shall be galvanized steel casing, zinc phosphatized, with an electrostatically applied baked enamel finish. 2.2.3 Condenser fans shall be direct-driven propeller type discharging air vertically upward equipped with permanently lubricated bearings and PVC coated steel wire safety guards. Shaft shall have inherent corrosion resistance as well as being statically and dynamically balanced. 2.2.4 Compressor shall be reciprocating semi-hermetic type only with automatically reversible oil pump, operating oil charge, suction and discharge shutoff valves, and an insert-type factory sized crank-case heater to control oil dilution. Each shall be mounted on spring vibration isolators with an isolation efficiency of no less than 95%. Compressor speed shall not exceed 1750 rpm and shall unload using suction cutoff unloading. 2.2.5 Cooler shall be a she11-and-tube type with removable heads. Tubes shall be seamless copper type rolled into tube sheets, equipped with threaded type water connections. Shell shall be insulated with 3/4 in. closed cell PVC foam of maximum K factor 0.28. 2.2.6 Condenser coil shall be air-cooled with integral subcoo1er, constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes which are then cleaned, dehydrated and sealed. 2.2.7 Refrigeration circuit components shall include hot gas muffler, high side pressure relief device, liquid line shut-off valve, suction and discharge shutoff valves, filter drier, moisture indicating sight glass, thermal type expansion valve, complete operant charge of refrigerant R-22 and compressor oil. 2.2.8 Controls and Safeties: 2.2.8.1 Controls: 1. Unit controls shall include the following minimum components: SECTION 15680 - CHILLER PAGE 2 OF 4 a. Power and control circuit terminal blocks. b. stop-start control switch. c. Chilled water temperature controller. d. Head pressure controller. e. Sing1e-pumpout controller. 2.2.8.2 2. Capable of performing the following functions: a. Pumpout at end of every circuit cycle. b. Capacity control based on return chilled water temperature. c. Field adjust R.W. temperature. Safeties: 1. Unit shall be equipped with necessary components in conjunction with the control system to provide the unit with the following protections: a. Loss of refrigerant charge protection. b. Low water flow protection. (flow switch) c. Low chilled water temperature protection. 2. Compressor shall be equipped with the following manual reset type protections: a. Thermal overload. b. Pressure overload. c. Electrical overload through the use of definite-purpose contactors and calibrated, ambient compensated, magnetic trip circuit breakers. Circuit breakers shall open all three phases in the event of an overload in anyone phase, or single phasing condition. 3. Fan motors shall have inherent overcurrent protection. 2.2.9 Operating Characteristics: 2.2.9.1 Unit shall be capable of starting and running fully loaded at outdoor ambient temperatures up to 115 deg. F per maximum load criteria of ARI Standard 590. 2.2.9.2 Unit shall be capable of starting up with 95 F entering water temperature to the cooler. 2.2.10 Motors: 2.2.10.1 Compressor motors shall be cooled by suction gas passing around motor windings. 2.2.10.2 Condenser fan motor shall be 3-phase type with permanently lubricated bearings and class B insulation. 2.2.11 Electrical Requirements: 2.2.11.1 Unit primary electrical power supply shall be connected to a single point. 2.2.11.2 Unit shall operate on 120/208v/30/60 cy 4-wire power. SECTION 15680 - CHILLER PAGE 3 OF 4 2.2.12 Provide 5 year warranty on compressor and one year on all other parts. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Install level on concrete pad where shown on Drawings, pad by General Contractor. Provide General Contractor with location and final unit size in time for scheduled installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION: 3.1 Install on concrete pad where shown on drawing, pad by General Contractor. Provide General Contractor with location and final unit size in time for scheduled installation. SECTION 15680 - CHILLER PAGE 4 OF 4 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15702 - CHILLED WATER SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scece of ',",orl' shall lnc1ude, put 1S not 11mlted to: 1.1.1 Work in this section shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to Instructions to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division I of these Specifications. 1.1.2 Work in this section shall include miscellaneous plplng specialties required for a complete working hot water heating system and chilled water cooling, including the chilled water duct coils. 1.1.3 Specific sizes, types, and brand names shall be shown on the Drawings. Other brands may be substituted if approved equal. 1.2 Submittals: 1.2.1 Submit six (6) sets of Drawings for approval by the Architect in accordance with the General Conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Chilled Water Speclalties Shall Include the Following: 2.1.1 Compression (expansion tank) shall be constructed Specification Section 15712, Expansion Tanks. Manufacturer shall be ITT Bell - Gossett or an approved eaua 1. 2.1.2 Air separator shall be an external air separ~tion unit, sized as shown on the Drawings, with tangential inlet and outlet connections and internal perforated stainless steel air collector tube designed to direct release air into the compression tank. Unit must be constructed in accordance with ASME boiler and pressure vessel code and stamped 125 psig design pressure. A blowdown ~::;Ii~lect,on shal~ ce pr"o'i:ded t::l f:.iCllitate routine cleaning of the unit. Each d1r separator shall be ITT Bell and Gossett, Rola1rtrol or approved equal. 2.1.3 Tank Fittings: :.1.3.1 Furnish and 1nstall a comoresslon tank fitting as shown on plans. It must include a manual vent for adjustment of alr volume in the tank. Cast 1ron 125 PSl working pressure. Unit shall be Bell and Gossett Airtrol Tank Fittlng or an approved equal. 2. 1 . A Manual Pipellne Airvent: :.1.":,1 Provide at "igh pOlnts of 3:1 malns. 1/2" ccmoress1on faucet w1th hose ",;_,:':. ~:-1ne B-,C5Jr ~i'::: -'Z or 73 hose valve. Pro'/lde 1H accumulation sl,andP1c,e full 51=e of ma1n where space perm1ts. Where concealed w1thout access. extend to access1ble location as directed w1th 1/2" pipe. Use of rad1ator alr valve SECTION 15702 - CHILLED WATER SPECIALTIES PAGE 1 OF 3 '"'~__ -": - II't-.- ..~~....-~~~""'''''.."._,. permitted with approval of the Engineer where space 1S restrlcted. 2.1.5 Manual Pipeline Airvent: 2.1.5.1 petcock. permits. directed Provide at high points of all mains, Crane 1$100 - 1/8" brass tee Provide air accumulation standpipe full size of main where space ~here concealed w1thout access, extend to 3c~essible iocation 3S with 1/8" tubing. head 2.1.6 Safety Relief Valve: 2.1.6.1 Furnish and install as shown on plans a diaphragm-assist operated bronze body ASME rated and nameplated safety valve with fail-safe disc to assure normal operation under emergency conditions. The valve shall have a low blowdown operating pressure specified for the system, within the maximum operating limitations of the valve. The ASME safety relief valve shall be engineered to prevent the system fluid from entering the spring chamber under normal operating conditions. The permanent valve nameplate shall display the STUH and relief pressure ratings certified by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors. The valve shall be ITT Bell and Gossett Model No. 1170-30 ASME or an approved equal. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. 1 . 7 Reducing Valve with Relief Valve (Dual Unit Valves): 2.1.7.1 Furnish and install a combined pressure relief valve as shown on plans. The valves must be diaphragm operated and working parts exposed to the fluid to be non-corrosive material. Fluid discharge should not enter the spr1ng chambers. Relief valve setting shall be 30 psig. The reducing valve must contain a removable strainer and low inlet pressure check valve. Reducing valve setting shall be 12 psig. Manufacturer ITT Bell and Gossett No. 0-525 Dual Unit Valve or approved equal. 2.1.8 Pump Inlet Valve: Provide at each pump Suction Diffuser of size and type noted on the Drawings. Units shall consist of angle type body with inlet vanes and combination Diffuser-Strainer-Orifice Cylinder with 3/16" diameter openings for pump protection. A permanent magnet shall be located within the flow stream and shall be removable for cleal1ing. The orifice cylinder shall be ea~ioced with a jisocsable fine mesh strainer which shall be removed after system start up. Orifice syllnder shall be designed to withstand pressure dlT7erentlal equal to pump shutoff head (maximum 62 PSI) and shall have a free area equal to five times cross section area of pump suction opening. Vane length shall be no less than 2-1/2 times the pump connection diameter. Unit shall be provided with :he adjustable suoport foot to carry weight of suction Oloing. Each Suction Diffuser to be ITT Bell & Gossett or an approved equal. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. Furnish and install as shown on the plans a non- slam check valve with a spring-loaded disc and calibrated adJustment feature permitting regulation of pump discharge flOW and shutoff.i=lves shall se designed to permit reoacking under full line pressure. Unit shall be lnstalled on discharge side of pumo in a norizontal or vertlcal POSition w1th the stem up. ~"''::',_ ;:-::~ mln~:r,IJr1 ,:l~="::nce of 'jalv~ stem. 71-1'5 ur,': 5h311 be cast ir8n body :':er...-=-.:;tl':: :'~lr2er:t:~;e ':;f .-:08 .:egr99S :=.:ihrenrlel:. ,~ii lJr,.,ts.3n,3.11 te :-7 c6~~ :~ Gossett -r,ple Duty Valve or equal. Install cer ~anufac:urer's reccmmenaa:'ors. ~ :.: :~ '.:: ~ ';.~ -:. - '9' :::.,... -:: J.;J -;:; - ~.' :J. ., ~ ~ m ';. 0 ~~ k .; G:; ': ~ e s :: '_~ ..- ~ r' of 1 - ~ :> S : (3 s. n ':J f11j Y .. -..q_~ rr. SECTION 15702 - CHILLED WATER SPECIALTIES PAGE 2 CF ~ 2.1.9 Pump Discharge Valve: Triple Duty Valve is a quiet operating heavy- duty valve which performs all the functions normally required on the discharge side of hydronic system pumps. The valve is a non-slam check valve pump discharge throttling device shut-off valve. The calibrated adjustment feature of the valve facilitates returning the valve to the "set" or balance position after the valve has been manually shut-off. Turning the valve stem all the way up back-seats the valve and allows repacking under full line pressure, while turning the valve stem all the way down provldes shut-off. Body: Cast iron Disc and Seat: Bronze Stem and Spring: Stainless steel Packing: Teflon-asbestos 2.1.10 BALANCING VALVES: 2.1.10.1 Circuit Setter: Furnish and install calibrated balance valves with either NPT connections suitable for 300 PSIG, or Sweat connections suitable for 125 PSIG, or Flanged connections suitable for 125 PSIG. Working pressure at 250 deg. Fahrenheit, equipped with brass readout valves fitted with an integral EPT inert, and check valve designed to minimize system fluid loss during the balancing and monitoring process. Each balancing valve shall have a calibrated nameplate to assure specific valve settings, be constructed with internal seals to prevent leakage, and be supplied with preformed polyurethane insulation suitable for use on heating and cooling systems. Each unit to be ITT Bell & Gossett Circuit Setter Balance Valve or an approved equal. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. 2.1.10.2 Provide a portable Readout Meter with provision for hanging, capable of indicating pressure differential across a system component. Unit to be complete with all necessary hoses, shut off and vent valves, and carrying case. Maximum operating temperature shall not be less than 250 degrees Fahrenheit. Reading range shall be as required for this installation. Readout kits to be ITT Bell & Gossett Model or an approved equal. After installation of water systems are completed and balanced, the Contractor shall turn over the meter to the owne r . 2.1.12 Strainers: Provide and install pioeline strainer with body same material as pipe with stalnless steel screen, cleanout plug, "Y" or "T" pattern. Make shall be Watt No. 27 Series or Hoffman 400 Series or an approved equal. SECTION 15702 - CHILLED WATER SPECIALTIES PAGE 3 OF 3 ". f' 1"'.llIiI'~"~_",~~*,;"",,,,, DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15712 - EXPANSION TANKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope of work shall lnclude, but is not limited to: 1.1.1 Work in this section shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to Instructions to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditions, Special Conditions. and Division I of these Specifications. 1.2 Description: Provide closed pressurized type expansion tanks for the chilled water piping systems as specified herein and scheduled on the drawings. 1.3 Related Work Specified Elsewhere: A. Chilled Water Specialties - Section 15702 1.4 Submittals: Submit six (6) sets to Architect for approval within 35 days from let of Contract. A. Product Data: Show tank dimensions, capacities. fittin9 sizes and locations and accessorles. B. Manufacturer's 20 year limited warranty against lnternal and external corrOSlon. C. ASME Stamp and National Board Certification. 1.5 Reference Codes and Standards, Comply with the following: A. ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section V~II, Division 1 - Pressure Vessels. B. ANSI/ASME B31.9-82: Building Services Piping. -he National Scarj of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inscectors Inspection Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Jesign Crlteria 2.1.1 Expansion tankCs) shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the ASME Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, and shall bear the ASME tamo and National Board Certification. Rated for max worklng pressure of 125 PS1. 2.2 Tcnk Constructlon '-',,:-:;~ s: ;':J:'.:t :.::.rn'-_ StiS ~ ~ " ..... .......:. I':: - ~ ~ ,v ~ _.- I ... -::-:.~~ :; ?~'3. .' 8~~-:?:: : 8 r. ~ t ,.- ',":::: i (~n . SECTION 15712 - EXPANSION TANKS PAG~ 1 0F 2 2.2.2 Tank dimensions and capacity shall be as scheduled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation: 3.1.1 Insta1l expansion tank ln accordance with manufacturer's lnstructlons and in the locations and arrangements shown on the drawings. 3. 1 .2 Insulate expansion tanks as specified and scheduled ln Sectlon15180. 3.2 Testing: 3.2.1 Hydrostatically test the expansion tanks and connected piping systems to the system design pressure of the piping connected in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.9-1982 and Building Services Piping and submit test schedule and results to Engineer. 3.3 Filling and Pressurization: 3.3.1 Upon completion of the cleaning, filling, flushing and draining of the water piping systems, final fill and pressurize the expansion tanks to the sched~led rnirlimum pressures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using oil-free compressed air or nit:ogen. SECTION 15712 - EXPANSION TANKS PAGE 2 OF 2 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15801 - EXHAUST FANS PART - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK Includes. but is not limited to: 1.1.1 Work of thlS Sectl0n shail be oerformea in accoraance wlth the reaulrements of the Contract Documents. including but not llmlted to Instruction to Bidders, Agreement and General Condltions, Speclal Condltlons. and OiviSlon I of these Specifications. 1.2 RELATED WORK Included in other Sections: Duct Accessories - Section 15860 Ductwork - Section 15840 Air Balance - Section 15891 Temperature Control - Section 15900 Preparation For Final Use - Section 15011 SU8r'1ITT ALS 1.3.1 Submlt S1X (6) sets of Shoe Drawings OT Tan. curb. ana accessorles for aooroval in accordance with the General Conditions. Obtain approval prior to ~roceealng with manuiactur1ng. 1.3.2 Indicate thickness and dimensions of all parts. fastenings and anchoring methods, roof curb and wall opening Slze. 1.3.l Submit cataloaue sheets including all data on accessories and motor controllers at one time. , ..;.J. GUARANTEE 1 .4.. 1 Guarantee all Darts for one (1) year as per acceptance bY Owner. ~~~ ~c:~~:r,~:,~ ::2 ~2~~~a ~na "3-:e.: ~ r-<> ~~ .: -:.-:: ~~ ~3 r~ c ~ ... ~ ~ :: t .3, n.': 3 ~... rj :; ;.) T :: ;,",\ e .; 1;-- N (J v i n 9 (:~ r', fJ C;.:; n C i :. ~ <J I ~ ! ~1 9 ,..:. sse c ~ a:, i G n. I n c . ~ ',,\ I ~ .: r ..... ?: C :: -'J r J an,: e .'1 the JOint Lest code aaopted Dj AMC:-. and tne :\meric.1n ~:JCle:/ of '~eatinq ~efrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). ~ 1"1 ~l1c:8rs::;"':::" ~:.~ ::7.:::'~ I e J~ C:Jsr?-: ~ ng :3r 3.~ 3.~'.' ':C- ~"lt en t:ne Dub1 isned oerformance cur'le uo to '::5;0 aoove or belm... CF:v1 ~cted. C30~cities. volt~?es ana accesscr12S as nc:ed on 1na~v~aual scec~ijc3ticns or as otherwise schecuiec or crawlngs. . .7.:) I~ -: C- - l.':- - .. .-.... -- ... "- 1.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1.5.1 Products meeting specifications and m~nufactured by the following shall be acceptable: (Penn indicated on Drawings) 1. Penn 2. Coolair 3. Carnes PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POWER ROOF EXHAUSTER (PRE): Capacity: 360 cfm @ .25" s.p., 1/25 hp, 1550 rpm, 120v/10 Make: Penn XR 82 direct drive. 2.1.1 Exhauster covers shall be spun aluminum specifically designed to withstand high wind loads. Wheels shall have airfoil or median foil blades. The motor and drive compartment shall be positively externally ventilated. Drive components shall be isolated from the structure. Bearings shall be designed for 200,000 hours operation. Hor'sepower and n'Jise levels shall not exceed the 'Jalues shm./n and OV8rs'ze motors wlll not be acceptable. Exhausters shall be furnished with acceptable electrical disconnect ana bHd-screen. Single pnase moters shall nave lntegral overload protection. V-belt drives shall be adjustable. Motors are mounted in enclosed compartments protected from exhaust air. Wheel shall be designed to provide positive flow of outside air through the compartment for motor cool1ng. 2.1.2 Provide 6" high aluminum insulated roof curb, welded construction with 1-1/2" fiberglass insulation and wood nailer. Provide a damper shelf to support a backdraft damper inside the curb. .' In all power roof e~hausters orovide automatic gravity backdraft damoers. Damper frames shall be heavy duty box type. Blades shall be alumlnum with felt edges and are linked together for quiet operation. A counterbalance spring shall be adjustable for tension to provide minimum resistance to air flow. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Install units on curb per general construction Drawings. Curb shall te same manufacturer as fan or hood. 3. 1 . 1 All units shall be free of vibration and exceSSlve neise. -: .. i 4,1 units Sh3.'1 I:;e oalnted:J'Jer factorv flnlsh CT' color as:Jlr-ected C'; ~'-<;-, ;'.8e'-. SECTION 15801 - EXHAUST FANS PAGE 2 OF 2 l>' j1" DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15840 - DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope of the work shall include. but is not limited to: 1.1.1 Work in this section shall be performea in accordance wlth the reauirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to Instructions to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditlons, Speclal Conditions, and Divlsion I of these Specifications. 1.1.2 Providing all ductwork as shown on the Drawings. 1.1.3 The construction standards shall be based on the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA) Duct Manuals For Low Velocity Systems. 1.1.4 The recommendations in these manuals are to be followed in all sheet metal construction limited only by exceptions or qualifications as hereinafter notee. CrltlCal velocities dGd preS3uras ~ill be noted ~n ~he Qraw~nss. 1.2 SUB~ITTALS 1.2.1 Submit six (6) sets of Siloo Drawings for 3oorev3.1 with :he General Condltions. Obtaln approval from the ~nglneer prlor to ~rOGeeCln9 ~jth manufacturing. 1.2.2 Indicate thicknesses and dimensions of all parts, fastenings and anchoring methods and other provisions necessary. 1.3 GUARANTEE 1.3.1 Guarantee all parts for one (1) year as per acceptance oy Owner. GU3r~ntee all sheet metal work to be free from objectional noise. vibration. or "breathing" with alr flO\~ at rated CFM. . . .- ~E:...ATED'I()K~ ~n;::'ler3es~~<;ns: b a : ,3.rl ::: 2. .2 e ..::. ~ C;I i ~ ,:' ,~ ~ SECTION 15840 - DUCTWORK ;AGE 1 J~ 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK FOR LOW PRESSURE RECTANGULAR DUCT 2.1.1 Galvanized sheet steel except as noted otherw1se. Dimension of longest side in inches. of the following USS gauges: Dimen of Long Side Gauges Steel Alum. Joint Tvpe Joint Soace Pock. Lock Stan. Min.Ga. Min.Ht. Re1n. Bet.Jts. 0"-12" 26 24 A-K-1 24 1 " 13"-18" 24 22 A-K-1 24 1 " 19"-30" 24 22 A-K-1 5'cc 24 1 " 1"x1"x1/8"@5'cc 31"-42" 22 20 K-1 S'cc 22 1 " 1"x1"x1/8"@S'cc 43"-54" 22 20 K 4'cc 22 1-1/2" 1-1/2" x 1-1/2"x 1/8" @4'cc 55"-60" 20 18 K 4'cc 22 1-1/2" 1-1/2" x 1-1/2"x ':J" '~.1' ~: - 61"-88" 20 12- H 5' ee 22 1-1/~ 1-1/2' ~ i-I !2 ( 1/8" @2'cc-6"ec J01nt A - On ve S 11 P K - Pocket Lock H - Angle Slip I - Standing Seam _. i.2 Fabrlc~ce all J01nts an eoncea18d ductworK uSlngFoc~et Lock". Angle Slip Or Standing Seam. Fabncate all j01nts on exposed auctwork using "Dnve- Slio". Exposed duct joints shall have flat or inverted seams. 0.1.3 Mave duct ser::tions in standard 18nath. Longitudinal seams shall be :-!'~de 'Js'na the "Pit':S:Jura~ LOCi<" or "Sutton c;uneh Snap LOCK' with buttons spaced :2nters.~ir''1',;-;-i ::'.'<:;\'e1: ,::e:J~~l S1"1:' ::'? "2' f~r' > .::nl1 21 ',Jauge.:no ;: /:' _':::~' 22,20. 3.na ''':; qal~~e. ":3uttcn Punc:1 ;:',30 ,_,JC~" sna:l :1(;:::;e 'Jsed 'in alLJ,'T\1n'..;m duct'./ork. Intermediate seams shall be fabncated using "Acme Lock-Grooved Seam'. :::.1.4 Corner closures shall be made on "Dri'Je Slios" by extending 3/4" Jevcnd ~idth of duct cn e3C~ side ~rc hammering over the other slio to seal the corner. On 'Pocket Lock' Joints. lock is notched and fitted at the corner ana soot Nelded or rivetec lnto a frame. Wher sections are jointed toget~er. L~e flange of the Pocket Locks are hammered down to seal the corner. 2.1.5 Cross-break all sldes of duct 12" and larger and shorter Sides ',T r',8':2oooo.".~',. Frcvlde "-:Ie',:: s"t.;ffeners anc:::;a:es for :once~lec :::'J::'Nor~'. :too 2 ,-.: .i . ~ ]~;,. c'::' \/ e .} n:J i.., -=- 2 ," ~~ ,~~. ::::'acn~~r' _ ,-"'" ~;::.,-.. .... '" "............ -:~,:'-:','iC~'''-'- '...'ier-e r~c:,_. ~ .-~': ...:-: .~ r :: '-. .: r-; -: ;;~ 3. C D ~ :--'~ :.:: ',~:,:: ," _.~ l. ~. -.... ':...I;'rnri9 Janes. 301Je1' seams ario;oints '...r.e;9 neC9ssa;v t:::: :::re'/er,: co~:::e"sa':.,cr ,. . :3 \1ake e~bQws :~ :~r~s cf ~-'/~ '-~G~LS ~3~~C. :r scuare elDc~s ~,~~ SECT!ON '~840 - QUCTWORk P4GE _ ~, . '" lI'll':.iJ_;>';o,'l' iiloilil. for drlpoing. All bolts, screws, ~astenlngs, etc., shall be galvan1:ed or other rust resisting finish. 2.1.7 Hangers - Provide 1" galvanized band iron not less than 16 ga. on ducts up to 31", largest dimension and steel angles not less than 1" x 1" x 1/8" on larger ducts. Space hangers not more than 8 ft. aoart on straight run and not more than 5 ft. from any turn or branch. 2.1.8 All low velocity branch ducts take offs shall have approved solitter dampers, air scoops, or adjustable take off vanes (extractors) at point of juncture with main duct whether shown on plans or not. Provide test holes with pivoted covers as required for balancing system. 2.2 DUCTWORK FOR LOW PRESSURE ROUND DUCTS 2.2.1 Galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise noted. Diameter in inches of the following USS gauges: up to 13" - 26 ga., 14" to 22" - 24 ga., 23" to 36" - 22 ga. spiral lock seam. 2.2.2 Make bends with sweeps of 1-1/2 radius ratio. Solder seams and joints if necessary to prevent condensation from dripping. All bolts. screws, etc., to be galvanized or other rust resisting finish. 2..:.3 Mangers - P(ov~de :" gaivcnL':t::c 2J.!1G ',':::,', ['ct :2SS :',3.n ~5 ::;"1. ,:'. ducts up to 31" and steel angles not less than 1 x 1 x 1/8' on larger aucts. Space not more than 8 ft. apart and not more than 5 ft. from any turn or branch. 2.2.4 Provide where exposea dUCT-WOrK passes through masonry. iiest angle collars to cover opening. Securely fasten to duct. 2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCT 2.3.; lnsu!3.~ed low pres~ur~ flexible duct snail be a fac:o;v fabricated assembly consisting of a zinc-coated sprlng steel helix, non-perforated inner liner, wrapped with a nominal 1-inch thick by 1 lb./cu. ft. density fiber glass insulation. The assembly shall be sheathed in a vapor barrier Jacket, factory sealed Jt both 8nds of 93Ch section, thus assuring the vaoor resistance of each sec:iGn 35 ~el' 13 ~he comoleted installation. 'The .:cmDoslte assembh, 'n-:lud~n~ irlsuiatlOn .H~Clr\Dcr Qar;-1,?~'. '::l.':~ meet the Class 1 requirements of NFPA Bulletln No. gO-A. and be labelea bv Underwriter's Laboratories. Inc., with a flame spread rating of 25 or less. ana a smoke develooed rating of 50 or under. 2.3.2 Flexlble ducts shall be lnstal1ed in a fully extenaea conalt10n free of sags ana kinks. using only the minimum le~gth required to ~ak9 the C0nnect;o~. 2.3.3 Where horizontal support 1S requirea, flexible duct s~all ce suscen:ec on 36-inch centers with a mlnimum 3/4-inch wlde flat banding material. All :c~~ts 1nd ccnnesticns shall be maca with 1i2-'nc~ w1de ccs~tlve CC~-,...~ :-=~1 : : :~ 3.C s . ~ 3. n 'J f a 0': ~ ;- e a 2.1 :.:, e G e n e I' E.' ::: 'I v 11' en mer :: ~ ere CJ r :: ':: 1 c,...,. G: e,. c a i e. ~, . -= c ,...,..., - 3. . - . .~. - = ~: ~ 'J - :,: 20 ~w :ress~-~ ;~~:(.Jle J~:: 3~3~~ -..... - -.. ..., _ .;:::: t " -:::: . v':: S,=':'7"~'=!N 15.SJO - DlJC'''ICR~ -.. \ ,-.- -i-i.U::: ~ PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. 1 SHEET METAL WORK 3. 1 . 1 Install all ductwork in the following manner: 1. SUltably constructed. braced. and supported. 2. Apcroximately as and where shown on Drawings. 3. Plumb and parallel with walls. 4. As direct as possible. 5. Provide collars of sufficient depth for grilles and registers so there is no projection lnto the duct. 6. Set diffuser, grilles, register openings symmetrical. 7. Locate all openings to comply with General Construction. 8. Change dimensions as required to avoid conflicts maintaining same ~r"ee are~::3.S sncl'in ,)11 the 013.115: l)btd~;l appr"ovdl fur d:i iild]Cr cn.:iIlges from the tnglr1(~tr. :ut 0.nd ~.H.ch duct'.~orK '_:) dClmi: liorr< of other trades; provlde streamlining around obstructlons and increase overall duct size if so instructed by the Engineer. 9. Cut and patch ductwork made necessary by the worK of the other contractors. SE~T~O~ '5840 - OUCTWOP~ PAGE 4 QF J r ...ii-.'..... ~'~o;o,l,......'ii>""".,,""'1--;,_~~_""''".,w"., DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15860 - DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK Includes. but is not limited to: 1.1.1 Work of this Section shall be performed in accordance with the reauirements of the Contract Documents. including but not limited to Instructions to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditlons. Special Conditlons. and Divlsicn I of these Specifications. 1.1.2 Providing duct accessories as shown on drawings and as required. 1.1.3 Related work in other sections: Ductwork Temperature Controls Section 15840 Section 15900 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 Submit six (6) sets of Shop Drawings for approval in accordance with tne Generai C,cnaitlOns. ~,;ta~,":iGu(:)val orior to ui'CjC2eG~::g ....it~ :n.~:.uf:2ctt.:~ing. 1.2.2 Indicate thlckness ana dlmenslons af all oarts. fastenings ana anchoring methods and other orovisions necessary. 1 .3 GUARANTEE 1 . 3 . 1 Guarantee all parts for one (1) year as per acceptance DY Owner. PAR7 ) - ~ROOUCTS 2.1 DAMPERS & SPLITTERS (MANUAL) 2.~.1 Provide where shown or 3S reauired to secure Drooer air de1iverv. 3deauatelv braced and orcvlded wltn locklng tyoe auadrants. Camoer. :~nstr~ctic~ - : ~au~as heaV16r. ~h3n d~ct: UD ~: 1_" ( ~3 slngle thickness. edge turned 1/2". 3/8" square end bearing OlnS. Uo to 24" x 72" - double thickness, 3/8" square rod extending full length of damper. 2. 1.3 S~1itter :onstr~cticn - Length to De 1-1/2 times branch Width. of same gauge as larger duct, double thickness. 3/8" square rod extenalng fuil lengtn or damoe r . 2. :.d Bearings - Provlde at ccth enas of all sp11:ters ana camoers or each rod. Young ~664 or Ventlock ~607. : - -- - ~ r ~ ,:U~C :::';".c;' 9 '.... :1.11::e yo --; : - i r::: .-:;.~: '2 r- ~ -: r-. -: ~: ~.~ :.: ~ r:: :: ~ ,-=:, , ~ -- '..' ~: s: ;~ c ~ 2: G . : (~:: '., ~ c e ..' ~~ ~:"',::2 =2~2:: ~ ~~;~ -:~:;'---::'....::t'"" - ~ ,.~ '.?,~~:,.:=', - - ........... .=. -:: ...~c - ::- -= . ~~r-/:\';~e ~=O de,? f~JS1Di9 'int<' ,-or 3.S ncted ~::r ,~I. :..,~ :3m:er-:;. -'-":.,'/~':~ mul~ibiaae tioe immejlatel~ benl~j ~r,11es ~r wrere SCJce -5 ~~l:ea. ~a"e: ':~^TE;~J 15860 - ,=oI.'CT ACCES~ORIES P~GE ,J~' Balance Corporation or Advanced Air, Inc.. type AS or C with constant tension spring closure and spring stalnless seal at blade ends. Damper will also have the abil1ty to close when actuated by a 24V - 1 amp charge. 2.1.6 Volume Control Devices: All volume control deVlces such as manual damoers. scoops. splitters. or extractors shall be adjustable from outside duct unless otherwise noted. AdjUstment may be auadrant (locking :ype as made by Young, Ventlok, or approved equal), adjustment rod, or through outlet. Locate adjustment device accessibly or extend to finished construction and conceal operator in recessed box with removable cover unless access panel is furnished. Provide ceiling markers for all quadrants located above push-up ceilings. All splitters shall be airfoil construction. Extractors or adjustable take-off vanes shall be similar to Titus AG-45. Provide access panels on one side of all volume control or directional devices. 2.1.7 Backdraft Dampers: Provide at all air release or discharge openings unless otherwise noted, or unless opening is provided with automatic damper. Backdraft dampers shall be counter-weighted or spring loaded aluminum #lade (unless noted). Backdraft relief dampers shall be sensitive, non-metallic, flexible flap type blades with supporting mesh. 2.2 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS 2.2. ' Provide wherever duct adjoins air moving equipment. and wherever duct','lOrk crosses building expansion ]Olnts. Leave at least 1" separatlOn. Use UL approved 18 oz. waterproof, fire retardant canvas. Vent-fabrics "Metaledge '!~nt~c.c" or E1gen canvas commercial "5~ lent Quct". 2.3 INSPECTION DOORS 2.3.1 As shown and where necessary to give access to interiors, inlet and outlet side of all coils. damoer motors, dampers, temperature control bulbs. f~ltars. etc. 2.3.2 Inspection doors 24" x 16" when space allows. No smaller than 12" x 10". Prefabricated, gasketed, insulated, hinged doors constructed so that no :J2.rts oroject into the air st'-eam. "Vent10k insulated access doors" with "\/ent1ok #100 latch" or Buensod-Stacy insulated tvpe "5-2". _.~ DRIP PANS 2.4.1 22 ga. aluminum with 2" upturned edges and of dimensions to exceed the roof ventilatlOn ocening tv 6" en all sides. Make watertight. Center under ooen1ngs at a distance equal to not less than one half the diameter of the Openlng. Provide pans under all roof ventilatlon openIngs not connected by ductworK. Provide pans under ooenings connected to ductwork if ductwork is not 'l'Iatertight. 2.5 SOUND ABSORBING LINING :: .,' ~ e:: :. :::' ~ t'"', s' ~ r"" ~ i :: ~ ;',"i 5 . 0'ffisnSlcns c~c: :lan ~lmenSl0ns are clear lrs~ae r; lnsula~-cn. SECTION 15860 - DUCT ACCESSORIES PAGE 2 OF ' -.'i;lt.. "ii"'" o.Mliw._~....,,"~~_,,_., 2.5.3 Application attach with fire-resistant adhesive. and sheetmetal pins and washers not over 15" o.c. Interior coating shall extend over downstream edge of each succeeding section in a shiplap joint, or exposed edges shall be coated with a heavy layer of mastic and metal cover. 2.5.<1 ~aterial 1.5 lb. density minimum glass fiber bodY with erosion and Hlnimum fire 15, smoke flame reslstant plastlc or neoprene interlor coatlng raclng 3lfstream. average noise reduction co-efficlent .70. Thickness. ". Mlnlmum NBFU hazard classification requirements - flame spread 15, fuel contributed developed 5-25. 2.5.5 Manufacturers Johns-Manville "Microlite", Pittsburgh Plate Glass "Superfine Ductliner", Gustin-Bacon "Ultrafine". 2.6 ADJUSTABLE TAKE-OFF VANES 2.6.1 Provide for all diffusers and duct take-offs where shown on plans symbol "ATOV". Submit prints. For branch take-offs simi lar to T & B "vectrol" or Titus "AG-45 Air Volume Extractor" with external operator. Provide adjustment rod to permit adjustment from outside duct, or duct inspection doors unless adJustment can be made through adjacent register. 2.7 FILTERS 2.7.1 Provide two (2) Sry Processed Carbon Composite (OPCC) absorDer tyoe filters for airborne chemical contaminants for paoer storage for each of the roof "or: '3'/stel1S. Model No. opec ~1073. 24" x 24" x 11" deep wlth 1" prefilter. Make: Extraction Systems. Inc. 32 Mechanic Ave. P.O. Box 1329 Woonsocket. RI 02895-0839 (401) 769-1113 FAX (401) 769-1118 SECTION ~5eEO - DUCT ACCESSORIES :),AG:: ,~ - ~ DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15870 - OUTLETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK includes, but is not limited to: 1.1.1 Work or this Sect10n shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to Instructions to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division I of these Specifications. 1.1.2 Providing ceiling air diffusers, supply air registers, return air registers, and grilles. 1.2 RELATED WORK shall include, but not be limited to work in the following Sections: 1. 2.1 Exhaust Fans - Section 15801 1. 2.2 Duct Work - Section 15840 < ~ i . '_ ,j ~ir Balance - Sect'8n 15291 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. i Supply Air Diffusers: 2. 1 . 1 damper. Type A - Titus TDCA-AA ceiling adjustable diffuser with Model AG-95 Aluminum ~25 white pattern 84 (4-way rectangle). 2.1.2 Type B - Titus 300 Register, 3/4" spacing, double deflection, front blades parallel to long dimens1on. All individually adjustable with Model AG-15 opposed blade damper. Provide adjustable a1r scoop. 2.1.3 alu1':inum. dameer. Type C - Titus perforated return reglster and registers - all Model 8F \*25 white with 3/16" staggered holes and opposed blade 2.1.4 Type 0 - Titus eggcrate return gr1 11e Model 50F wlth alumlnum borders and 1/4" SQuare grid. 2.1.5 Type E - Titus TDCA-AA celling adjustable diffuser with Model AG-95 damoe:, aluminum, #25 white, pattern A3-2 (3-way rectangle). 2.1.6 Type F - Titus eggcrate return grille. ~/2" aluminum grid with border type 7 to set in ceiling grid. 2.1,7 Type G - Titus ceilllg diffuser. 4-way discharge adjustable vanes. Moae' No. 255-AA alumlnum Border Tyoe 3. Provlde Model AG 65 volume extractors ~Jcejarn-3r, same S1::e of dL:c':. ccmnectl':r:. Size 12' 12' cellar './ith 24." x 24' r.J.~'~e. :~a/. S.P. .J1" ~t .30J :.:fr7"!. F~n42n ;;25 \-vr4t2. SECTION 15870 - OUTLETS PAGE 1 OF 2 PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1 All registers, grilles, and ceiling diffusers in manner as recommended by manufacturer. All units shall be tight-fitting to wall or ceiling and level and straight with wall or ceilings. SECTION 15870 - OUTLETS PAGE 2 OF ~ DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15891 - AIR BALANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF wORV ncluaes. but 1S net l1m1tea to: 1.1.1 Work of this section shall be performed in accordance with the reauirements of the Contract Documents. including but not limited to Instructions to Bidders. Agreement ana General Conditlons. Special Condltlons. and Division I of these Specifications. 1.1.2 This section includes balancing the air quantities and velocities through all ducts and equipment. 1.1.3 The HVAC Contractor shall procure the services* of an independent air balance and testing agency, approved by the Engineer, which specializes in the balancing and testing of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems, to balance, adjust, and test air moving equipment and air distribution or exhaust systems as herein specified. All work by this agency shall be done under direct suoervision of a qualified heating and ventilating engineer employed by the agency. All lnstrUmenLS used bv LhlS agencj sh3~1 be acs~r3tely calibrated 3nd maintained 1n good wor~ing order. If requested. the tests shall be conducted ln the presence of the Architect responsible for the and/or his representative. 1. ~.3.1 Air balance ana test1ng shall net begin until the system has been completed and is in full WOrklng order. The Contractor shall put all heating, '1~r.tilating and air conditioning systems and equipment into full operation and shall continue the operat1on of same during each working day of testing and balancing. The Contractor shall submit, within 35 days after receipt of tne Contract, five (5) copies of submittal data for the testing and balancing of the air conditioning, heating. and ventilating systems. The air balance and testing agency shall provide proof of havlng successfully completed at least five (5) projects of similar size and scope. 1.1.3.2 The Contractor shall award the test and balance contract to the acoroyed agencv ucon recelot of his contract to oroceed with the air conditioning 'nstallatlen. ~J allcw the dlr ~alance and t3sting agency to scnedule tnis work in cooperatlon with other trades involvea and comoly with comoletlon date. *The HVAC Contractor has the option of performing the above work as outlined. by sar'/ice men per~anentlj emoloved withln his own comDany or subsidiary comoany for the sole purpose of provid1ng SerY1Ce in the field of heating and air conditioning. The HVAC Contractor must submit equlvalent data as required by testing agency and must meet the approval of the Engineer or be subject to providing an independent air balance agency. Sheet metal subcontractors or subsidiary sheet metal companies shall not qualify. ~ ~ 3ALtNCIN3 , - l~\GO~~ cG';nDiet~c'1 ',~f ~~e ai; s'/s"':-3ms. the alr ~3.1ance 3.f1d :est:ra 3genCj shall cerform ~ne followlng tests. comcile the test data :0 tne Ccnt~~c:cr fer forwardlng to the Owner and Englneer fer evaluation and aporoval. The SECTION 15891 - AIR BALANCE PAGE 1 OF 3 r . r independent a1r balance and testing agency shall be a qualifled ana certlfiea member of Associated Air Balance Control. 1.3. Procedure: The alr balanclng and testing agency snall oerform the following tests and balance each system ln accordance wlth the followlng reauirements: 1 .3. 1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1. 3.4 1. 3.5 1.3.6 1.3. 7 1.3.8 1 . .3. 'j 1.3.10 1.:3.11 1.3.12 Test and adjust blower rpm to deslgn cfm requirements. Test and record motor fu 11 loaa amoeres for a 11 fans. Make pllot tube traverse OT maln supply and obtain deslgn cfm at fans. Test and record s~stem static oressures. suction and discharge. Test and adjust system for design cfm recirculated air. Test and adjust system for design cfm outside air. Test and adjust exhaust systems for design cfm. Test and record entering air temperatures (wb cooling). Test ,1nd r'eci)['d leilving :"11r temoeratures (db heating C\:i:::: r;oolingJ. Test and record leaving air temperatures (wb cooling). AdJust all maln sUPPlY dna return alr aucts to proper design cf:n. Adjust all :ones to proper design cfm. supply and return. 1.3.13 Test and adjust each diffuser, grille, and register to within 10% of design reauirements. 1 .3. 14 Identify each diffuser, grille. and register as to location and area. 1.3.15 Identifv and list size. t'loe , and manufacturer of diffusers, grllles. registers and all testing eauipment. Use manufacturer's ratlng on all eaUlpment to m3ke reaulr~d cal(ulat~ons. 1.3.16 In readings and tests of diffusers. grilles. and reg1sters. lnclude required fpm velocity and test fpm velocity and required cfm and test cfm after lcjustments. 1.3.17 In cooperation wlth the control manufacturer's representative, set adjustments of automatically operated dampers to operate as specified, indicated and/or noted. , .3.13 ~!: :_r"'"~j.~. Adjust all diffusers. grilles. and registers to minimize drafts In _ r,........,- ~........,.;'.1 , _ ~ _~ c u : .::. ~ e ,j ~ ~ s -: s ;- e :. '~ - ~ :: ~~.~ .. r-', ~e r . 1na~ca~~n0 JL':: ~~':~.~-~ :~s~~s. :as: ~re~3ur.9, t'tee :r~f~:a. :r.~~ce :~~~orat4Gn :~r-ve. 2na ::m=u:ec lea~age :or each ~ect'cn. SECTION 1589~ - AIR BALANCE PA.GE 1.5 Testing and balancing contractor shall make Engineer aware of any major shortages in cfm during the course of the balance procedure, rather than delaying until final report is completed. 1.6 Balance contractor shall return to any fan system WhlCh has been altered by the necessit'/ of changing the sheeve. motor. or pull;es, and rebalance the system as part of thlS contrac:. SECTION 15891 - AIR BALANCE PAGE 3 OF 3 "".''<-_ .iI......'" ""' .._~,.;.,.."...",'" . .~.~~'jntlii<*". ""~-" DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15900 - TEMPERATURE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK Includes, but is not limited to: 1.1.1 Work of this Section shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to Instructions to Bidders, Agreement and General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division I. 1.1.2 This Section covers electric or electronic control systems for sensing and regulating temperatures, humidities and air conditioning systems, local control panels, all automatic dampers and motors. Controls for individual equipment normally furnished with that equipment, or package control systems for grouped equipment are specified in the particular equipment section. The temperature control contractor shall do all control wiring (24v or 120 1.1.3 All HVAC Control work shall be done under the direct supervision of, or directly by an approved agency of the control manufacturer. Acceptable manufacturers are: Powers, Honeywell or Johnson. Control wiring shall be defined in general as wiring required to carry control signals from sensing devices to controllers and related interlocks. Power wiring shall be defined as wiring transmitting power for driving equipment motors or operating electric heating devices, including operating circuits from remote operating devices such as pushbuttons or selector switches. 1.1.4 Sub-contract all electric wiring in connection with the automatic temperature control system shown on the drawings and as required by Manufacturer. Any wiring required for proper operation of the automatic temperature control system shall be performed as a part of the work of this section. Fan, pump, chiller and reheat coils interlocking included as part of this contract, except as noted in electric connection schedule. 1.2 Related work specified in other Sections: 1 .2. 1 Air Conditions Systems - Section 15671 1. 2. 2 Preparation For Final Use - Section 15011 1.2.3 Ductwork - Section 15840 1.2.4 Duct Accessories - Section - 15860 1.3 Work by others: 1.3.1 Automatic 3-way bypass valves furnished by the control manufacturer will be installed in the piping by the mechanical trade. 1.3.2 Automatic dampers furnished by the control manufacturer shall be installed in the duct work by sheet metal contractor. 1.3.3 Electric reheat duct coils shall be provided by Mechanical Contractor. SECTION 15900 - TEMPERATURE CONTROL PAGE 1 OF 5 Power Wiring by Electrical Contractor. 1.4 SERVICE & GUARANTEE 1.4.1 The control system herein specified shall be free from defects in workmanship and material under normal use and service. After completion of the installation the Control Manufacturer shall regulate and adjust all thermostats, control motors and other equipment provided under his contract. If within twelve (12) months from the date of completion any of the equipment herein described is proved to be defective in workmanship or materials, it shall be replaced or repaired free of charge. 1.4.2 The Control Manufacturer shall, after completion, provide any service incidental to the proper performance of the control system under guarantee outlined above for the period of one (1) year. Normal maintenance of the system is to be considered part of the guarantee during this period. 1.4.3 The Control manufacturer will, upon completion of the installation, during the warranty period, make available to the Owner an annual service agreement covering all labor and material required to efficiently maintain the control system after the warranty period. 1.4.4 Instruction in the operation of HVAC controls shall be given to the Owner's representatives before the systems involved are finally and fully turned over to the Owner. Such instructions shall include the services of qualified personnel for at least one day. Notify Engineer before giving said instructions; all systems shall be finally adjusted before such instructions, and operating sequences adequately demonstrated in presence of Engineer. 1.4.5 All wiring shall be in accordance with electrical sections of these specifications. 1.5 SUBMITTALS 1.5.1 Submit six (6) sets of Shop Drawings for approval in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions. Obtain approval from Engineer prior to proceeding with manufacturing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROL EQUIPMENT 2.1.1 Provide instruments with ranges, differentials and action proper for the sequences specified. Mount room thermostats and humidistats 5'-6" above floor and locate so as not to be subject to direct sun rays. Set thermostats in tiled wall rooms above the tile line but not more than 6'-6" above the floor. 2.1.2 Day/Night Heating/Cooling programmable thermostat with adjustable dead band _ 24 volt. Range required for 68 deg. to 70 deg. heat and 80 deg to 78 deg. cooling. 2.1.3 Humidistat - Range 45% to 55%. 2.1.4 3-way Bypass 2-position valve with end switches. SECTION 15900 - TEMPERATURE CONTROL PAGE 2 OF 5 2.1.5 Damper and damper motor, 120v interlock with fan auxiliary N.O. contacts. PART 3 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION ZONE Existing Fan Coil Unit and Condensing Unit to be reused in existing locations. Provide electric automatic positioning dampers above ceiling in Auditorium where shown on Drawings to direct the air to the Auditorium or the Children's Area. Interlock switch with the room thermostats in such a way that whichever area the air is directed the thermostat in that area will control the air conditioning equipment. Adjust the linkage on the dampers so that the ratio of air will be 80% to the one being served and 20% to the unused area and vice versa. Provide new 24 hr/day-night programmable room thermostat in each area (cooling only). Unoccupied time fan system shall be shut down and outside air damper will close. Thermostats shall function in parallel with each other and the damper positioning switch will dictate which thermostat takes control. During night or unoccupied mode the fan will cycle to satisfy the increase in temperature; however, during occupied mode the fan shall run continuously. ZONE 2 Existing Fan Coil Unit and Air Cooled Condensing Unit to be disconnected, relocated and reconnected as per Drawings. Provide new outside air intake damper with automatic control. Provide new day/night cooling thermostat with 7 day programmable control to open outside air damper during occupied time and close during unoccupied time, as well as temperature reset up during unoccupied hours. Mount thermostat where shown on Drawings. Set outside air damper linkage to allow only cfm specified in Schedule when unit is running during occupied times. If area raises above night or unoccupied time setpoint the fan will start and the system will run until the night setpoint is satisfied. During occupied time the fan shall run continuously. Fan cycles only during night or unoccupied mode. ZONE 3, 4 & 6 Typical as follows. (Zone 6 to be included in the Add Alternate.) Provide wall mounted space day/night programmable heating-cooling thermostat and wall mounted space humidistat for each zone. Provide 3-way chilled water bypass control valve to be installed by Mechanical Contractor. Occucied Mode: 1. Fan runs continuously. Outside air dampers shall be interlocked with fan to open when fan is on. SECTION 15900 - TEMPERATURE CONTROL PAGE 3 OF 5 ZONE 5 2. When humidistat calls for dehumidification the chilled water 3-way valve shall allow water through coil. 3. If the dry bulb temperature drops below the setting of the heating on the thermostat the electric reheat will be energized. 4. Provide interlock so that reheat can only be energized if the chi lied water valve is opened on command by the humidistat. 5. Upon rise in dry bulb temperature above the thermostat setting the chilled water 3-way coil will allow water through the coil. 6. Due to the electric reheat being interlocked with the humidistat command the electric reheat and cooling cannot function at the same time. Unoccupied Mode: 1. Fan. shall be deenergized unless there is a call for dehumidification. (No night reset for humidity control). Upon a call for dehumidification the fan will energize and the chilled water valve shall open until the humidity is satisfied. 2. The electric duct reheat will be totally deenergized during night cycle. 3. Outside air damper shall go to closed position when fan is off. 4. The day/night thermostat cooling will be set up to operate the 3- way valve at a higher indoor space dry bulb temperature (field adjustable) . 1. Provide same humidistat, however, the heating/cooling thermostat shall not be programmable. 2. Fan to run continuously. 3. Upon either a call for cpoling or dehumidification the 3-way valve will send water through coil. 4. If humidifier is commanding the cooling and dry bulb drops below the termostat heating setpoint the electric heat shall be energized. Chiller Operation: 1. Air cooled chiller shall run to maintain a certain return water temperature. Chilled water pipe immersion aquastat shall be provided by Temperature control if not provided internally in chiller. Chiller to be wired per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Provide additional starter circuit for chiller through each of the four 3-way valve end switches in parallel so that during night shutdown it can be reactivated, if required. SECTION 15900 - TEMPERATURE CONTROL PAGE 4 OF 5 3. Provide a remote control hand/off/auto switch located in Janitor's Closet to deenergize and energize the chiller and the circulating pump in unison. 4. Wire the manual remote control in parallel with a separate 24 hour, 7 day time clock. Coordinate control wiring with starter type (as provided by Mechanical Contractor). (See Specification Sect ion 1 6140) . NOTE: It will not be advisable to deenergize the chiller and the circulating pumps at night due to the required constant humidity control in Zone 5. GENERAL CONTROLS: 1. Interlock electric reheat coil airflow switch to heater coil contactor in all zones. Interlock fire alarm to shut down all fans. Interlock fans, chiller, etc., per wiring diagram on Drawings. 2. 3. PART 5 - EXECUTION 5.1 The manufacturer of the automatic temperature control system must be one who has successful experience in projects of the same relative size, control design and climatic conditions for a period of at least five (5) years. Evidence that the manufacturer has factory supervised service facilities within the area covered by the installing office must be submitted to the Architect upon request along with catalog date and letter or certificates from owners in which the control systems have operated successfully as indicated. This data shall also include the number of service (maintenance) calls required during the past five years of operation. 5.2 All automatic dampers furnished by the Control Manufacturer shall be installed in the Mechanical Specifications under the Control Manufacturer's supervision. PART 6 - CALIBRATION AND PERFORMANCE TEST 6.1 Calibrate each and every control device and set as specified or as required to accomplish the sequences indicated. Performance test each individual control device by manual manipulation. 6.2 When any electrical control devices are furnished as part of the system, fully and completely performance test the entire electrical control network of the system. Any improper performance shall be promptly reported to the Engi neer. 6.3 Upon completion of this calibration and performance test work the Temperature Control Manufacturer shall submit a letter attested by the Clerk of the Works stating that this work has been done and that the system is functionally correct. PART 7 - POST INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 7.1 Upon completion of the work, the automatic temperature control contractor shall instruct the operating personnel in the proper operation of the system. As-built drawings after completion of the job shall be provided for the SECTION 15900 - TEMPERATURE CONTROL PAGE 5 OF 5 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 1.1.1 Refer to Section 01010 Summary of Work. 1.1.2 Provide all labor, items, articles, materials, operations, methods or equipment listed, mentioned, indicated or scheduled on the drawings and specified herein, and required to complete the Electrical Work. Contract drawings and specifications are complementary and must be so construed to determine the full scope of work. 1.1.3 Items of Work Included; But Not Limited To: 1.1.3.1 Lighting and power systems in areas noted on Drawings, complete as follows: Distribution feeders. Pullboxes. Interior and exterior luminaires. Lamps. Ballasts and accessories. Wiring to utilization equipment furnished by others. 1.1.3.2 Relocation of existing service entrance. 1.1.3.3 Cleaning of all luminaires, panelboards, switches, receptacles, cover plates and other electrical equipment upon completion of all work. 1.1.3.4 Demolition of lights and power in areas designated on Drawings. 1.1.4 Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1 . 1 .5 Drawings: Contract drawings are, in part diagrammatic and are intended to convey the scope of the work and indicate the general arrangement of the equipment. Follow these drawings in laying out the work. Consult all drawings to become familiar with all conditions affecting the work and to verify spaces in which the work will be installed. Reasonable changes required by job conditions (including offsetting of conduits around beams, etc.) shall be made, after obtaining the Engineer's approval, at no additional cost to the Owner. SECTION 16010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 1 OF 7 ....,..i..."'..,,"",.~,'~..., 'H ''l''"'" ".-_"',..'ffi..........""',...-~~~~,M;Ii''''.._.,,,..) 1.1.6 Definitions: The term "provide" shall have the same meaning as "furnish and install". All materials so implied either on the drawings or in these specifications shall be furnished and installed unless specifically noted otherwise. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.2.1 All work specified in Division 16 shall be performed by approved workmen qualified by satisfactory experience in the particular work. 1.3 STANDARDS 1.3.1 The following standards shall govern and shall constitute mlnlmum requirements as approved. If the requirements of this specification exceed those of the standards mentioned, this specification shall govern. Local building codes. Underwriters Laboratories Inc., UL, approved or listed: Wherever applicable to materials. Local electric utility, Standards in effect on bidding date. Local telephone utility, Standards in effect on bidding date for service entrance. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association, NEMA: enclosures, mountings and connections. Equipment America National Standards Institute, ANSI: Where mentioned he re in. American Institute of Electronic and Electrical Engineers, IEEE: Power equipment. National Electrical Safety Code, NESC: Outdoor and overhead work. Occupational Safety and Health Act, OSHA: Requirements for safety and health of employees. National Fire Prevention Association, NFPA: No. 70, National Electric Code, NEC. No. 101, Life Safety Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 Furnish shop drawings as specified in Supplementary General Conditions and as follows: 1.4.1.1 Submittals shall be complete by paragraph. All items specified in the same paragraph as the major item shall be included in the submittal. 1.4.1.2 No partial or incomplete submittals will be accepted or reviewed. SECTION 16010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 2 OF 7 1.4.1.3 Submit six (6) copies to Engineer of each shop drawing required by the Specifications. Mark each copy or highlight shop drawings and product data to identify compliance to Specifications. 1.4.1.4 The Engineer will review shop drawings and product data and will return two (2) stamped copies. If the returned copies are stamped "REJECTED" or "REVISE AND RESUBMIT", promptly resubmit six (6) copies meeting contractual ..equirements. 1. 4. 2 Required Shop Drawings: Luminaires. Submit complete and bound brochure containing descriptive sheets for each luminaire arranged in the same order as specified, with index showing types, manufacturer's catalog numbers and lamps required. Include poles or standards for exterior luminairs. 1. 4.3 Required List of Materials: Submit one complete list of manufacturers and model numbers including all of the following items (shop drawings of these items are not required), provide samples as noted: Conduits and surface raceway. Outlet, pull and junction boxes. Building and communication conductors. Lamps. Disconnects. Contactors, relays, and pushbuttons. Wall switches and receptacles; provide one sample of each. 1.5 RECEIPTS FOR LOOSE EQUIPMENT 1.5.1 Provide one receipt for all equipment as follows, to be signed by the Owner and delivered to the Engineer prior to request for final payment: Spare fuses. Keys for panelboards and all other key operated equipment. Circuit breaker handle locks. Instruction manuals, shop drawings, wire diagrams, etc. 1.6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1.6.1 Provide approved shop drawings, wlrlng diagrams, instruction manuals, operating instructions, service manuals, and signed instruction receipts bound in common folder; submit to Engineer for approval and delivery to Owner prior to request for final acceptance and payment. 1.6.2 Provide instruction on the operation and maintenance of all equipment installed in this Contract for personnel designated by the Owner. A minimum of two (2) personal instruction periods by qualified instructors shall be provided on normal operating procedures, minor adjustments and changes, SECTION 16010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 3 OF 7 preventive maintenance, and safety precautions. Obtain signed receipt that Owner's representative has been so instructed and can satisfactorily operate the equipment. 1.7 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS 1. 7 .1 Cost of fees shall be included in the bid as follows: Construction permits. Inspections and tests as described in this section. 1.7.2 Payment. Underwriters' Certificate: Prior to submittal of Request for Final An inspection Certificate shall be required. 1.8 CODES, STANDARDS AND LISTINGS 1.8.1 All wiring, conduit, and materials shown on the drawings and/or herein specified shall be in accordance with National Electrical Code (NEC), and National Building Code and Life Safety Code. 1.8.2 Wiring, conduit, and materials for all systems shall be provided in sizes and numbers sufficient to function as specified, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.8.3 Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Engineer before bids are taken, and bids shall be based on code and functional adequacy; failure of the Contractor in this respect shall not relieve him of responsibility for a fully adequate installation at no increase in cost. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 All equipment and/or materials shall be new and shall carry the label of Underwriter's Laboratories Inc., whenever UL requirements are applicable. 2.1.2 Materials of same general type, such as wiring devices and luminaires, shall be of the same make throughout the building so that appearance and operation are uniform. 2.1.3 "Equal materials" shall comply with Supplementary General Conditions. 2.1.4 Drawings and specifications are based on one manufacturer's equipment requirements. The costs of all revisions required to meet the requirements of a different manufacturer's equipment (even though mentioned on the drawings or specified) furnished by the Contractor shall be borne by the Contractor. 2.1.5 Small access doors in walls, plaster, brick, etc. shall be similar and equal to Milcor Access Doors as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Company, Milwaukee, Wisconsin. It is to be noted that various type frames are required in specific finishes. Any door having an area exceeding 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Size and location as shown on the plans and as SECTION 16010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 4 OF 7 required for access to equipment. Access doors shall be furnished and located by this Contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INFORMATION FOR OTHER DIVISIONS 3.1.1 Provide all information concerning the equipment or work of Division 16 required by other Divisions in ample time to prevent delay in building progress. 3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 All new material required shall be provided as part of this contract. 3.2.2 Electrical Contractor shall include all work as shown and described on Site Drawings, including site electrical drawings. 3.3 OPENINGS AND CHASES 3.3.1 The General Construction Contractor will provide all boxed openings, chases, recesses, lintels, and bucks required for the admission of the work. Furnish him with all necessary information and sleeves in ample time. 3.3.2 If openings, chases, recesses, lintels, or bucks are omitted or not correctly located, the General Construction Contractor shall bear the cost of subsequent patching as required. 3.3.3 Do not cut walls or floors that are waterproofed or pierce any structural member without written permission from the Engineer. 3.4 ANCHORS 3.4.1 Provide anchor bolts, sleeves, washers, nuts, and templates for anchoring of equipment. Check locations as work progresses. 3.5 SLEEVES AND INSERTS 3.5.1 Provide sleeves and inserts ahead of the general construction work and maintain them in position. 3.5.2 The General Construction Contractor shall bear the cost of cutting and patching required to make corrections resulting from the omission or improper location of sleeves and/or inserts after being spotted by Electrical Contractor. 3.5.3 Make sleeves in floors and partitions of galvanized steel with lock seam joints. 3.5.4 Make sleeves of extra heavy cast iron pipe or rigid galvanized steel pipe in outside walls, foundations, and footings. 3.5.5 Conduit sleeves shall be two (2) sizes larger than the conduit passing SECTION 16010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 5 OF 7 through it. 3.5.6 Terminate sleeves flush with walls, partitions, and ceilings. Terminate sleeves 1/4" above floors. 3.5.7 Fill space between sleeve and conduit in underground walls with oakum and caulk with lead on both sides of wall, or use "Link Seal". 3.5.8 Fill space between sleeve and conduit with fiberglass blanket insulation when sleeve does not occur in an underground wall. 3.6 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATING 3.6.1 Finished Areas: All equipment and fittings shall be factory pre- finished and installed in such a manner as to eliminate necessity for field painting. Paint as directed when rusted or otherwise damaged. Conduit or surface raceway where shown exposed on drawings will be painted by others. 3.6.2 Unfinished areas (except crawl spaces): Hanger rods, brackets, angle supports, straps, etc. shall be cadmium plated per ASTM 165, Type NS. 3.6.3 outdoor Work: All ferrous equipment and fittings cadmium plated after fabrication (ASTM 165 Type NS); all screws, nuts, washers, etc., brass or stainless steel. 3.7 ROUGHING 3.7.1 Before roughing for equipment furnished by others, obtain approved roughing drawings and exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough-in" services without approved drawings. 3.7.2 Obtain drawings or proper information giving final location of all motor and control connections. 3.7.3 Unless otherwise detailed or specified: All services shall be concealed in wall, above ceilings, etc. Work shall be exposed only where approved by the Engineer. Notify Engineer if work cannot be concealed, as intended. Conduit to be beared in concrete with approval of Engineer only and then a conduit plan must be submitted. Wiremold is to be used only per drawings as indicated. Usage otherwise only by written consent of Engineer. 3.8 CLEAN-UP 3.8.1 Contractor shall at all times keep the project free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish caused by his operation. Shall be done on a daily basis as required or directed by Engineer. SECTION 16010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 6 OF 7 3.8.2 When directed, just prior to final acceptance, clean all equipment under contract including, but not limited to the following: Lighting fixtures, panelboards, control centers, clocks, receptacles and switch plates. All equipment to be painted, removing all rust, etc., and leave ready for painting. Building, by removing all debris, leftover conduits, wire insulation, cartons, etc., left as a result of this work. 3.9 SUPPORTS 3.9.1 After thorough investigation of Architectural, Structural and Shop Drawings related to work to determine how and where equipment, fixtures, conduit, panelboards, etc., are to be supported, mounted or suspended, provide: Extra steel, bolts, inserts, pipe stands, brackets or any other items required for proper support. Supporting accessories where required, whether or not shown on drawings. SECTION 16010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 7 OF 7 1"'~ 11 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16025 - CODES PART 1 - CODES AND REGULATIONS: 1.1 Furnish all materials and labor to provide a complete electrical system that will conform to the following, including any or all local interpretations. A. Installation standards of local power company. B. Local or municipal ordinances governing this type of work. C. National Building Code. D. Owner's Insurance Carriers. E. National Electric Code, latest edition. F. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). PART 2 - STANDARDS 2.1 shall be Standard Electric Unless specifically described otherwise, standards of equipment design in accordance with applicable specifications of American National Institute, Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers and National Manufacturers Association. PART 3 - LISTINGS 3.1 Equipment and materials for which Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. provides product listing service, shall be listed and bear the listing mark. PART 4 - PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS 4.1 Electrical Contractor shall have any local or municipal inspection ~rocessed and present Engineer with a certificate of inspection indicating approval of such governing body. SECTION 16025 - CODES PAGE 1 OF 1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16050 - CUTTING. PATCHING AND PAINTING PART 1 - CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.1 Electrical Contractor shall do all normal cutting and patching of existing construction required for electrical demolition and new installations EXCEPT cutting and patching which is specifically indicated on the General Construction Drawings or in the specifications as being performed by General Contractor. 1.2 Should changes, omissions or errors in the electrical work require cutting, patching or making alterations in any portion of the new construction, such work shall be performed by the General Contractor at the Electrical Contractor's expense. 1.3 Perform all cutting of existing building construction including cutting of concrete floors as required for Electrical Contractor's installations. Building structural members shall not be disturbed by Electrical Contractor's work without receiving prior approval by Engineer. 1.4 Where reinforced concrete slabs and/or walls are already in place Electrical Contractor shall core drill same (through 8" diameter) as required to make the electrical installation. Location of holes shall not void the structural integrity of the building and must be approved by Engineer. 1.5 All patching of existing surfaces shall match the existing surrounding materials and finishes as closely as possible with respect to color and texture. All patches shall be structurally sound. 1.6 All areas patched by Electrical Contractor shall be finished and/or painted by Electrical Contractor unless the patched area is indicated on the General Construction Drawings or in the Specifications as being painted by the General Contractor. Color and type of paint shall match existing surfaces and paint shall be applied to sufficient area to blend newly patched area into existing surface. 1.7 All one or two hour walls, floors, or ceilings shall be blocked up with one of the following Dow Corning Fire Stop System products depending on the application. 1.7.1 Fire stop Sealant ~2000 - Silicone elastomer shall be caulked into simple, small ~~netrat~ons. 1.7.2 Fire stop Foam ~2001 - 2-part liquid silicone elastomer foam which expands to fill penetrations. 1.7.3 Fire Stop Intumescent ~2002 Wrap Strip shall be wrapped around plastic pipe and when triggered by heat will expand to fill the void filled when the pipe melts. 1.7.4 The above products shall pass ASTM E814 tests. SECTION 16050 - CUTTING, PATCHING AND PAINTING PAGE 1 OF 2 PART 2 - PAINTING 2.1 Electrical Contractor shall perform all painting of surfaces as specified herein and of electrical installations that are specified or noted on the drawings and not speCifically indicated on the General Construction Drawings as being painted by General Contractor. 2.2 Whenever factory finishes on electrical equipment have been damaged use factory furnished painting materials and refinish or touch-Up damaged portions of the finish to Engineer's satisfaction. 2.3 When new or existing surfaces are to be painted prepare surface in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations. Apply primer coat as recommended by paint manufacturer and apply finish coats as required to completely "COVER" primer and/or existing surface color. 2.4 Where an existing color must be matched, match colors at site, paint a sample area and receive Engineer~s approval on paint color and paint type before proceeding. 2.5 All new colors will be selected by Engineer. Prepare color samples as required by Engineer. SECTION 16050 - CUTTING, PATCHING AND PAINTING PAGE 2 OF 2 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16060 - DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Electrical Cortractor shall perform all work of electrical removals and demolition in the eX1sting buildings as indicated on the drawings and/or as required by the alterations. 1.2 All materials removed shall be examined by Owner, those materials designated by Owner as "scrap" Shall become the property of Electrical Contractor and shall be removed from the site immediately by Electrical Contractor. Materials not so classified Shall remain the property of the Owner and Electrical Contractor Shall deliver same to Owner as directed. 1.3 Remove all existing exposed conduit, conduit concealed in construction to be removed, wiring installations, wiring devices and electrical equipment rendered useless by the demo;ition or alterations. 1.4 Relocate existing electrical installations where required to avoid conflicts with new electrical equipment to be installed. 1.5 Wiring rendered useless by the demolition shall be removed to its point of supply. 1.6 Restore any existing electrical installation disturbed during the course of construction and not indicated for demolition or removal. 1.7 Install blank covers on all abandoned flush mounted outlet boxes, pullboxes and junction boxes including boxes above suspended ceilings. In finished areas, install faceplates on all abandoned outlet boxes. 1.8 Patch and paint holes and marks remaining from electrical demolition and removal in finished spaces EXCEPT when the general construction drawings or specifications indicate that the surface will be painted or finished by General Contractor. 1.9 Patch per Specification Section 16050, Article 1.7. SECTION 16060 - DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS PAGE 1 OF 1 'III. -.WI_~."""",,,,,,,,,,_",,,,,,,',_'<I...If'( DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16110 - INTERIOR RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.1.1 Reference Standards: Raceways shall meet the requirements of NEMA, ANSI and Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 Samples: One of each product if different from manufacturer or catalog number specified. 1.2.2 Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 . 1 Armored cable: 2.1.1.1 Type A-AC: 90 Deg. Crated, UL Standard 4, conductor type THHN individually wrapped with moisture and fungis-resistant paper under galvanized steel armor. Provide as required 2, 3, or 4 conductors, 600v maximum rating. Make: Model No. AC-90 Type ACTHH, Manufacturer: AFC 2.1.1.2 Type B-AC: 90 Deg. C rateed, UL Standard 4, shall meet Federal Spec. J-C-30B and HUD requirements. Conductor shall be copper THHN individually wrapped with a moisture and fungis-resistant paper. Provide as required 2, 3, or 4 conductors, 600v maximum rated. Make: Model No. AC Lite Type ACTHH, Manufacturer: AFC 2.1.2 Metal Clad Cable: 2.1.2.1 Type A-MC: 90 deg. C rated cable with a galvanized steel armor, manufactured to UL Standard 1569, type THHN conductors, including the green insulated ground wire, wrapped overall with a 3000 volts per mil dielectric barrier tape. Provide as required sizes #14 to 1 AWG; 2, 3, 4, or 5 circuit conductors plus a green ground wire. 600 volt maximum rating and shall pass the 70,000 BTU vertical tray flame test. Make: Model No. Type MC, Manufacturer: AFC 2.1.2.2 Type B-MC: 90 deg. C rated metal clad cable with aluminum armor, manufactured to UL Standard 1569, type THHN conductors, including the green insulated ground wire. Shall be wrapped overall with a 3000 volts per mil dielectric barrier tape. Provide as required 2, 3, or 4 circuit conductors plus a green ground wire. 600 vol~ maximum rating and shall pass the 70,000 BTU SECTION 16110 - INTERIOR RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES PAGE 1 OF 8 vertical tray flame test. Make: Model No. MC LITE, Manufacturer: AFC 2.1.2.3 Type C-MC: Fire Alarm/Control Cable shall be metal clad cable in sizes #16 and 18 AWG with a bare copper ground wire. Conductors shall be type TFN. Provide number of conductors up to 30 in twisted pairs or twisted shielded pairs and color coded as required. Shall pass the 70,000 BTU vertical tray flame test. Make: Model No. "Fire Alarm/Control Cable", Manufacturer: AFC 2.1.2.4 Type D-MC: Provide jacketed metal clad cable with an overall black, flame retardant, PVC jacket extruded over the armor. Shall be used in wet, dry, oily locations, and direct buried in earth or concrete, outdoors, and in cable trays. Shall have passsed the severe 210,000 BTU vertical tray flame test. Shall be used in branch, feeder, service circuits, power, lighting, control and signal circuits. Temperature rating is 90 deg. C dry and 75 deg. ZC wet, 600 volts maximum rating. Make: Model No. "Jacketed MC", Manufacturer: AFC 2.1.2.5 Type E-MC: Liquidtight, flexible metal conduit, with internal copper band wire for ground, covered with gray PVC jacket which has passsed the 720 hour weatherometer test and shall operate between 60 deg. C to -30 deg. C. Make: Model No. "L iquidtight Flexible", Manufacturer: AFC 2.1.2.6 Type F-MC: Metal clad cable with more than four (4) circuit color coded conductors. Shall pass the 70,000 BTU vertical tray flame test. Model No. "Home Run Cable", Manufacturer: AFC 2.1.3 Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized on the outside and enameled on the inside or hot dipped galvanized on the outside and inside, as manufactured by Midwest Electric Mfg. Corp., Robroy Industries, Inc., Steelduct Conduit Products, Triangle PWC, Inc., or Wheatland Tube Co. 2.1.4 Intermediate Metal Conduit: Steel, galvanized on the outside and enameled on the inside or hot dipped galvanized on the outside and inside, as manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit Corp., Cerro Wire & Cable Corp., ETP Div. of Berger Industries, Inc., Triangle PWC Inc., or Wheatland Tube Co. 2.1.5 Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Extruded from aluminum alloy No. 6303 and processed to a T-42 temper, as manufactured by New Jersey Aluminum Co., or V.A.W. of America, Inc. 2.1.6 Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing: Electro-galvanized on the outside and enameled on the inside, as manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit Corp., Cerro Wire & Cable Corp., Republic Steel Corp., Robroy Industries, Inc., Triangle PWC, Inc., or Wheatland Tube Co. SECTION 16110 - INTERIOR RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES PAGE 2 OF 8 2.1.7 Flexible Steel Conduit: Hot dipped galvanized steel strip shaped into interlocking convolutions, as manufactured by American Flexible Conduit Co., Cerra Wire & Cable Corp., or Triangle PWC Inc. 2.1.8 Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Anaconda Metal Hose Div's Sealtite Type UA, Electri-Flex CO.'s Type LA Liquatite, Flexi-Guard Inc's (Ol/Gedney) Type UAG, or Universal Metal Hose CO.'s Universal Sealflex-U. 2.1.9 Metal Surface Raceway, Fittings and Accessories: Walker Parkersburg's 333, 888, 17000 Snap Cap Surface Raceway Systems, or Wiremold CO.'s 500, 700, 1000, 45700 Surface Metal Raceway Systems. 2.1.10 Wireways, Fittings and Accessories: Keystone Columbia Inc's KFW or KFWH Lay-In Wireway System, or Square D Co.'s Square-Duct Combination Lay-In Wireway System LDWK. 2.1.11 Plastic Coated Rigid Steel Conduit A. Rigid steel conduit, fittings, and accessories coated with 40 mils thick PVC coating. B. Make: Robroy Industries Plastibond System. 2.2 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES 2.2.1 MC connectors as recommeded by AFC. 2.2.2 Insulated Bushings: Appleton Electric Co. 's BU501 Series, Gould Inc.'s Efcor 55-50 Series, Midwest Electric Mfg. Corp.'s 1031 Series, Ol/Gedney Co. 's IBC-50 Series, Raco Inc.'s 1132 Series, or Thomas & Betts Corp.'s 1222 Series. 2.2.3 Plastic Bushings for 1/2 inch and 3/4 inch Conduit: Appleton Electric Co.'s BBU50, BBU75; Gould Inc.'s Efcor PB1, PB2; Midwest Electric Mfg. Corp.'s 931, 932; Ol/Gedney Co's IB-50, IB-75; Raco Inc.'s 1212 Series, or Thomas & Betts Corp.'s 222, 223. 2.2.4 Insulated Grounding Bushings: Appleton Electric Co.'s GIB-50 Series, Gould Inc. 's Efcor 56-50-8 Series, Midwest Electric Mfg. Corp.'s GLL Series, Ol/Gedney Co. IBC-50L Series, Raco Inc.'s 1212 Series, or Thomas & Betts Corp.'s 3870 Series. 2.2.5 Connectors and Couplings: A. Locknuts: Appleton Electric Co.'s BL-50 Series, Gould Inc.'s Efcor 151 Series, Midwest Electric Mfg. Corp.'s 10 Series, Ol/ Gedney Co.'s 1-505 Series, Raco Inc.'s 1002 Series, or Thomas & Betts Corp.'s 141 Series. B. Grounding Wedge: Thomas & Betts Corp.'s 3650 Series. C. Couplings (For Rigid and IMC Conduit): Standard threaded couplings as furnished by conduit manufacturer. SECTION 16110 - INTERIOR RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES PAGE 3 OF 8 D. Three Piece Conduit Coupling (for Rigid and IMC Conduit): Gould Inc.'s Efcor 165 Series, Midwest Electric Mfg. Corp.'s 190 Series, OZ/Gedney CO.'s 4-50 Series, Raco Inc's 1502 Series, or Thomas & Betts Corp's 675 Series. E. Tap-On Type (For EMT 1/2 inch to 1 inch): Tomic Electric EMT TAP- ON Raintight with Bushing. F. Compression Type (For EMT 1/2 inch to 2 inch): Appleton Electric Co. 's TW-50CS1, TWC-50CS Series, Gould Inc's Efcor 760, 750 B Series; Midwest Electric Mfg. Corp.'s 660S, 1650 Series, Raco Inc. 's 2912, 2922 Series; Tomic Electric's TW120, TW140 Series, or Thomas & Betts Corp.'s 5120, 5123 Series. G. Flexible Steel Conduit Connectors: Midwest Electric Mfg. Corp's 1108, 1736 Series, Ol/Gedney Co's C-8T, 24-34T, ACV-50T Series, or Thomas & Betts Corp. 's Nylon Insulated Tite-Bite Series. H. Sealtite Connectors (For liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit): Appleton Electric Co.'s STB Series, Crouse-Hinds Co's LTB Series, Gould Inc. 's Efcor 11-50B Series, Ideal Industries Inc. 's 15-521 Series, Midwest Electric Mfg. Corp. 's LTB Series, Ol/ Gedney Co. 's 4Q-50T Series, Raco Inc. 's 3512 Series, or Thomas & Betts Corp. 's 5332 Series. 2.2.6 Conduit Bodies: Appleton Electric Co's Unilets, Crouse-Hinds Co. 's Condulets, Gould Inc. 's Efcorlets, Ol/Gedney Co. 's Conduit Bodies, Pyle National Co's Pylets, or Red Dot/Mason Co.'s Conduit Bodies. 2.2.7 Expansion Fittings: Appleton Electric Co.'s XJ, Crouse-Hinds Co.'s XJ, Midwest Electric Mfg. Corp.'s XJ, or OZ/Gedney Co's AX (TX for E.M.T.), with external bonding jumper. 2.2.8 OX. Deflection Fittings: Crouse-Hinds Co. 's XD, or Ol/Gedney Co. 's Type 2.2.9 Sealing Fittings: Appleton Electric Co. 's EYS, ESU w/Apelco C sealing compound, or Crouse-Hinds Co's EYS, EZS w/Chico A sealing compound. 2.2.10 Vertical Conductor Supports: Kellems Div. Harvey Hubbell Conduit Riser Grips, or OZ/Gedney Co.'s Type M, Type R. 2.2.11 Service Entrance Caps/Heads: Appleton Electric Co. 's F50 to Fl00, F300 to F400, OZ/Gedney Co.'s 17-50G Series, Thomas & Betts Corp's 1525 Series. 2.2.12 Drag Line: 1/8 inch polypropylene monofilament utility rope; American Synthetic Ropes' Flotorope, Freenlee Tool Co. 's 2 ply Rope 431, or Thomas Industries'/Jet Line Products Rope 232. 2.2.13 Oxide Inhibiting Compound: Burndy Corp.'s Penetrox, Electro Compound Co.'s Alum-N-Eas, Ideal Industries Inc. 's Noalox, ITT Blackburn's CT-CONTAX, or Thomas & Betts Corp.'s 21059. SECTION 16110 - INTERIOR RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES PAGE 4 OF 8 r. '1."\.- ~- \. ~1 WIT 2.2.14 Type C-1 Patching Mortar: Anti-Hydro Waterproofing Co's A-H Hydraulic Cement, Sonneborn-Contech's Sonopatch, or Standard Dry Wall Product's Thorite. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Number of Circuits in Raceway: Each raceway shall enclose one circuit unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 3.1.2 Number of Raceways: Do not change number of raceways to less than the number indicated on the drawings. 3.1.3 Raceways for Future Use (Spares): Draw fish tape through raceways in the presence of the Owner's Representative to show that the raceway is clear of obstructions. Empty conduits for future use or use by others, provide nylon pull cord and cap to exclude foreign material entry. 3.1.4 Conduit Installed Concealed: Install conduit for all circuit Work concealed in the floors, ceilings, walls, or partitions of the building unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. If any portions of the conduit system cannot be installed concealed due to conditions encountered in the building, report such conditions and await approval in writing before proceeding. A. Run conduit in partitions vertically. B. In flat concrete slabs rest conduits directly on top of the reinforcement. In all other types of arch construction rest the conduits directly on top of the steel pans or fillers. Pass conduit over steel beams parallel with the reinforcement. 1. Place conduits to allow minimum of 1-1/2 inches of concrete cover. 2. Run conduits 1 inch and larger in concrete floor or roof slabs specifically where shown on the drawings. 3.1.5 Conduit Installed Exposed: A. Install vertical runs perpendicular to the floor. B. Install runs on the ceiling perpendicular or parallel to the walls. C. Install horizontal runs parallel to the floor. D. Do not run conduits near heating pipes. E. Installation of conduit directly on the floor will not be permitted. 3.1.6 Conduit Size: Not smaller than 1/2 inch electrical trade size. Where type XHHW, THWN, THHN conductors are specified for use under Section 16120, the SECTION 16110 - INTERIOR RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES PAGE 5 OF 8 minimum allowable conduit size for new work shall be based on Type THW or RHW conductors in Table 3A, Chapter 9 of the National Electrical Code. 3.1.7 Materials in Conduit Runs: All conduits in a conduit run shall be of the same material. A combination of steel and aluminum conduits or fittings will not be permitted. 3.1.8 Conduit Ends: A. Arrange conduit terminations in cabinet with ends at the same level. B. Plug ends of conduits with caps to exclude foreign material until wiring is installed. C. Use 2 locknuts and insulated bushing on end of each conduit entering cabinet or galvanized box (plastic bushing may be used on 1/2 inch and 3/4 inch conduit). o. Use insulated grounding bushings on the ends of conduits which are not directly connected to the enclosure (such as stub-ups under equipment, etc.) and bond between bushings and enclosure with equipment grounding conductor. E. Use insulated grounding bushings or grounding wedges on ends of conduit for terminating and bonding equipment grounding conductors (when required) if cabinets or boxes are not equipped with grounding/bonding screws or lugs. 3.1.9 Conduit Bends: For 1/2 inch and 3/4 inch conduits, bends may be made with manual benders. For all conduit sizes larger than 3/4 inch, manufactured or field fabricated offsets or bends may be used. Make field fabricated offsets or bends with an approved hydraulic bender. 3.1.10 Conduit in Waterproofed Floors: Install conduit runs in waterproof floors to avoid penetrating the waterproofing. Avoid penetration of waterproofing with conduit risers so far as practicable. A. Where it is necessary to puncture the waterproofing for a conduit riser, install a standard weight steel pipe sleeve extending 1/2 inch above the finished floor level. Flash the steel pipe sleeve to the waterproofing with 16 ounce copper. Construct the flashing with a copper tube extending 6 inches in all directions from the sleeve. B. The flashing will be integrated into the waterproofing by the Construction Contractor. Provide solid cast brass floor plates with chromium finish where pipe sleeves are exposed in rooms. 3.1.11 Watertight Entrance Fittings - New Walls: Where conduits pass through walls or floors below grade, provide mechanical conduit seals to prevent entry of water around periphery of conduits. Make: Ol Mechanical Manufacturing Company Type FSK. Provide sealing fitting (Crouse-Hinds EYS or Ell, or equal) using approved poured composition compound, adjacent to FSK fitting to seal inside of SECTION 16110 - INTERIOR RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES PAGE 6 OF 8 'Ilit V .-..4~_~~""'~~'" conduit. 3.1.12 Conduits in Drywalls: For drywall construction with sheet metal studs use rigid conduit for branch circuit conduits. 3.1.13 Metal Surface Raceway: Use metal surface raceway system of size required for number of wires to be installed therein. A. Do not run raceway through walls which have a plaster finish nor through masonry walls or floors. Install a pipe sleeve, or a short length of conduit, with junction boxes or adapter fittings for raceway runs through such areas. Run raceway along top of baseboards, care being taken to avoid telephone and other signal wiring. Where raceway crosses chair railing or picture molding, cut the chair railing or picture molding to permit the raceway to lie flat against the wall. Run raceway around door frames and other openings. Run raceway on ceiling or walls perpendicular to or parallel with walls and floors. B. Secure one piece raceway every 30 inches alternately with 2 hole straps and support clips (2 hole strap, support clip, 2 hole strap, etc.). Secure 2 piece raceway every 30 inches alternately with 2 hole straps and fasteners through back of raceway (2 hole strap, fastener through back, 2 hole strap, etc.) 3.2 MAINTAINING FIRE RESISTANCE 3.2.1 New Construction: Conduit and equipment shall be firestopped to prevent the passage of flame, smoke, fumes and hot gases. Use the following methods of firestopping to suit job conditions: 3.3 RACEWAY SCHEDULE - TYPES & USE (Paragraph 1.1 of Section 16950, Raceway and Wiring Installation shall take precedence over this paragraph.) 3.3.1 Rigid Steel Conduit: Install in all locations unless otherwise specified or indicated on drawings. 3.3.2 Intermediate Metal Conduit: May be installed in all locations except hazardous areas. 3.3.3 Rigid Aluminum Conduit: May be installed as branch circuit conduits in all locations except directly in concrete, masonry or in damp locations. Use oxide inhibiting compound on all joints. 3.3.4 Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing: A. May be installed concealed as branch circuit conduits above suspended ceilings. B. May be installed concealed as branch circuit conduits in hollow areas in dry locations. SECTION 16110 - INTERIOR RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES PAGE 7 OF 8 3.3.5 Flexible Steel Conduit: Install equipment grounding conductor in the flexible steel conduit and bond at each box or equipment to which conduit is connected: A. Use for final conduit connection to recessed lighting fixtures in suspended ceilings. Use 4 to 6 feet of flexible steel conduit (minimum size 1/2 inch) between junction box and fixture. Locate junction box at least 1 foot from and accessible if the fixture is removed. B. Use 1 to 2 feet of flexible steel conduit for final conduit connection to: Emergency lighting units Dry type transformers Motors with open, drip-proof or splash-proof housings Equipment subject to vibration (dry locations) 3.3.6 Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Install equipment grounding conductor in 1-1/2 inch and larger sizes. Bond at box or equipment to which conduit is connected. Use 1 to 2 feet of liquidtight flexible metal conduit for final conduit connection to: Motors with weather-protected or totally enclosed housings. Equipment subject to vibration (damp and wet locations). 3.3.7 Metal Surface Raceway: Use as exposed raceway system in finished spaces at locations indicated on the drawings. 3.4 CONNECTOR AND COUPLING SCHEDULE 3.4.1 couplings. rotated. For Rigid Steel, Aluminum and IMC: Use threaded type connectors and Use 3 piece conduit coupling where neither piece of conduit can be 3.4.2 For Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing: Use tap-on or compression type for tubing size 1/2 inch to 1 inch. Use compression type for tubing size 1-1/2 inch to 2 inch. 3.4.3 For Flexible Steel Conduit: Use flexible steel conduit connectors. 3.4.4 For Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Use sealtite connectors. 3.4.5 For Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit: Use conduit manufacturer's standard connectors and couplings. 3.4.6 For Metal Surface Raceway: Use raceway manufacturer's standard connectors and couplings. 3.4.7 For Wireways: Use wireway manufacturer's standard connectors and couplings. SECTION 16110 - INTERIOR RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES PAGE 8 OF 8 .,",_,._.0"",,................_.1 .-~r .....,....... DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16115 - FASTENING AND SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 The scope of this Section covers the approved fasteners and their systems that will be utilized in the construction and fastening of the electrical components or hardware. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 Shop Drawings: Show details of proposed methods for support of lighting fixtures and raceways if different from methods specified or shown on the drawings. 1.2.2 Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions. 1.2.3 Samples: One of each product if different from manufacturer or catalog number specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Fasteners: Furnish all fasteners and hardware compatible with the materials and methods required for attachment of supporting devices. A. Slotted - Type Concrete Inserts: Galvanized pressed steel plate complying with ASTM A 283; box type welded construction with slot designed to receive steel nut and with knockout cover, hotdipped galvanized in compliance with ASTM A 386. B. Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields complying with Federal 'Specification FF-S-325, as follows: 1. Furnish lead expansion shields for machine screws and bolts 1/4" and smaller; head-out embedded nut type, single unit class, Group I, Type 1, Class 1. 2. Furnish lead expansion shields for machine screws and bolts larger than 1/4" in size; head-out embedded nut type, multiple unit class, Group I, Type 1, Class 2. 3. Furnish bolt anchor expansion shields for bolts, closed-end bottom bearing class, Group II, Type 2, Class 1. 4. Furnish bolt anchor expansion shields for bolts, closed-end bottom bearing class, Group II, Type 2, Class 1. SECTION 16115 - FASTENING AND SUPPORTING DEVICES PAGE 1 OF 4 2.1. 2 C. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, complying with Federal Specification FF-B-588, Type, class and style as required. D. Nuts, Bolts, Screws, Washers: 1. General: Furnish zinc-coated fasteners, with galvanizing complying with ASTM A 153 for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Furnish fasteners for the type, grade and class required for the particular installation. 2. Standard Nuts and Bolts: Regular hexagon head type, complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A. 3. Lag Bolts: Square head type, complying with Federal Specification FF-B-561. 4. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, complying with Federal Specifications FF-S-92. 5. Wood Screws: Flat had carbon steel, complying with Federal Specification FF-S-111. 6. Plain Washers: Round, general assembly grade carbon steel, complying with Federal Specification FF-W-92. 7. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, complying with Federal Specification FF-W-84. "C" Beam Clamps: A. For 1" Conduit Maximum: Caddy Fastener Div./Erico Product Inc. BC-8P and BC-8PSM Series; HIT Spring Steel Fasteners, Inc. CH Series. B. For 3" Conduit Maximum: Kindorf Elec. Prod. Div./Midland Ross Corp. 500 Series beam clamp with 6HO-B Series hanger; Gedney Electric Co. IS-500 Series beam clamp with H-OWB Series hanger; Appleton Electric Co. BH-500 Series beam clamp with H50W/B Series hangers. C. For 4" Conduit Maximum: Kindorf Elec. Prod. Div./Midland Ross Corp. E-231 beam clamp with E-234 anchor clip and C-149 Series lay-in hanger; Unistrut Corp's P2676 beam clamp and P-1659A Series anchor clip with J1205 Series lay-in hanger. D. For Threaded Rods (100 lbs. load max.): Caddy Fastener.Div./Erico Products Inc. BC-4A, or HIT Spring Steel Fasteners Inc.'s master clamp MC. E. For Threaded Rods (200 lbs. load max.): Appleton Electric Co. 's BH-500 Series, Kindorf Elec. Prod. Div./Midland Ross Corp. 500 Series, or OZ/Gedney Co.'s IS-500 Series. F. For Threaded Rods (300 lbs. load max.): Kindorf Elec. Prod. SECTION 16115 - FASTENING AND SUPPORTING DEVICES PAGE 2 OF 4 f.!dn ..~.....",~...illo'~"'Ii1Il1t"i\i;ll Div./Mid1and Ross Corp. E-231 beam clamp and E-234 anchor clip, or Unistrut Corp.'s P2676 beam clamp and P-1659A Series anchor clip. 2.1.3 Fastening Fittings for Wood and Existing Masonry: Kindorf Elect. Prod. Div./Mid1and Ross Corp. E-243, E-244, E-245, E-170, Unistrut Corp. 's P2682, or Versabary Corp.'s VX-4310, VX-2308, VX-4308, VX-4309. 2.1.4 Pipe Straps: Two hole steel conduit straps with Ga1v-Krom finish: Kindorf E1ec. Prod. Div./Mid1and Ross Corp. C-144 or C-280 Series. 2.1.5 Pipe Clamps: One hole malleable iron type clamps; Kindorf E1ec. Prod. Div./Mid1and Ross Corp. C-144 or C-280 Series. 2.1.6 Deck Clamps: Caddy Fastener Div./ Erico Products Inc. DH-4-TI Series. HIT Spring Steel Fasteners, Inc. RD Series. 2.1.7 Fixture Stud and Strap: Steel City Electrical Products Div. FE-431; Gedney Electric Co. S1-134. 2.1.8 Channel Support System and Accessories: Furnish 12 gauge galvanized steel channel and accessories as manufactured by: A. Kindorf E1ec. Prod. Div./Mid1and Ross Corp., B-900 (1-1/2" x 1- 1/2"), B-901 (1-1/2" x 1-7/8"), B-902 (1-1/2" x 3") B. Unistrut Corp.'s P-3000 (1-3/8" x 1-5/8"), P-5500 (1-5/8" x 2- 7/16"), P-5500 (1-5/8" x 3-1/4"). C. B-Line Division - The Binkley Co. s, B-22 (1-5/8" x 1-5/8"), B-12 (1-5/8" x 2-7/16"), B-11 (1-5/8" x 3-1/4") D. Versabary Corp.'s VA-1 (1-5/8" x 1-5/8"), VA-3 (1-5/8" x 2-1/2") 2.1.9 Supporting Fittings for Commercial Type Fluorescent Fixtures on Exposed Conduit System or Surface Metal Raceway: Miller Co.'s 3 wire Stem-Winder hanger with baked on aluminum paint finish, 39608 (8" stem), 39620 (20" stem), 88025 (Mounting Hickey). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3'.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Attachment of Conduit System: A. Wood Construction: Attach conduit to wood construction by means of pipe straps or pipe clamps and wood screws or lag bolts. B. Masonry Construction: Attach conduit to masonry construction by means of pipe straps or pipe clamps and masonry anchorage devices. C. Steel Beams: Attach conduit to steel beams by means of "c" beam clamps and hangers. SECTION 16115 - FASTENING AND SUPPORTING DEVICES PAGE 3 OF 4 D. Steel Decking: 1. For Steel Decking with Hanger Tabs: Use deck clamps and hangers. 2. For Steel Decking Without Hanger Tabs: Attach conduit to steel decking by means of pipe straps, pipe clamps or hangers. Fasten straps, clamps or hangers to steel decking with welded threaded studs, machine screws, self-drilling, self-tapping fasteners, or with 3/8" threaded steel rod, welded to a 4" x 4" X 1/4' steel plate and installed through 1/2" hole in roof deck. E. Multiple Parallel Conduit Runs: Use channel support system. F. Conduit Above Suspended Ceiling: Do not rest conduit directly on runner bars, T-bars, etc. Support conduit from ceiling supports or from construction above suspended ceiling. 3.1.2 Attachment of Surface Metal Raceway: Attach raceway to surface by means of straps and/or supporting clips manufactured specifically for the type and size of raceway used. 3.1.3 Support of Lighting Fixtures: A. General: Support fixtures as shown on drawings. B. Suspended Ceilings: for ceilings structurally inadequate to support fixtures, support fixtures independently of ceiling. Furring channels, nail channels, Z-splines, plaster, gypsum board, or ceiling tile are not considered part of the supporting structure. C. Number of Supports (Fluorescent Fixtures): 1. Support individual fluorescent fixtures less than 2' wide at 2 points. Support continuous row fluorescent fixtures less than 2' wide at points equal to the number of fixtures plus one. Uniformly distribute the points of suspension over the row of fixtures. 2. Support individual fluorescent fixtures 2' or wider at 4 corners. Support continuous row fluorescent fixtures 2' or wider at points equal to twice the number of fixtures plus 2. Uniformly distribute the points of suspension over the row of fixtures. D. Plaster Frames: For recessed or semi-recessed fixtures installed in a plaster, gypsum board of Z-spline acoustic tile ceiling, frame the opening with a plaster ring. SECTION 16115 - FASTENING AND SUPPORTING DEVICES PAGE 4 OF 4 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16120 - WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 1.1.1 Specification Section 16010. 1.1.2 The Electrical Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the Wiring Systems Work as shown on the drawings and/or as herein specified and/or required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 MATERIALS 2. 1 . 1 MC Cable - See Specification Sections 16110 and 16950. 2.1.2 Building Wire A. Annealed commercial grade copper only, 98% conductivity based on international copper standard, Minimum contractor size shall be #12 AWG, except for control wiring which may be #14 AWG. B. #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid. C. #8 and larger - stranded. D. Insulation shall be 600 volt, UL type THWN, THHN or RHW in dry locations. Insulation shall be surface printed with manufacturer's name, conductor size, insulation type, and voltage rating. All feeders larger than #4 AWG shall be type XHHW/USE insulation underground. 2.1.3 Fixture Wire A. Copper only, as described for building wire. B. Insulation shall be 600 volt, type RHH or THHN. C. Usage: Taps off branch circuits to recessed incandescent luminaries, wiring within three inches (3") of ballasts in fluorescent luminaries and for connecting all other heat producing equipment as required by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. D. Maximum length six feet (6'), minimum length four feet (4'), in flexible conduit. SECTION 16120 - WIRES AND CABLES PAGE 1 OF 3 2.1.4 Connectors for copper wire and cable A. Feeders: Burndy type QT Quiktap; Thomas & Betts Tee - Parallel Tap. B. Branch Circuit: 1. Crimp Type: One or two piece insulated pressure connectors having copper splice cap and nylon insulator; Buchanan "Pres-Sure" Ideal "Crimp Sleeve" with "Wrap Cap", or Thomas & Betts "Sta-Kon". 2. Twist-on Type: Phenolic, nylon or vinyl covered metal body with expandable coil spring insert; Ideal "Wire Nut" or "Wing Nut", Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co. "Scotchlok", Thomas & Betts "Piggy". PART 3 -EXECUTION 3. 1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 All wires and cables shall be installed in raceways or conduits (unless the use of MC Cable is approved). 3.1.2 Use of Materi a 1 : A. Building wire shall be as described in this division for general interior and exterior work s permitted by NEC, except: B. Where fixture wire or other special purpose is shown specified or required. 3.1.3 Wire and Cable Identification: A. Lighting and power wiring shall be color coded as indicated below: Phase 208/120 Volts A B Neutral Ground Black Red White Green 3.1.4 Joints and splices shall be made in accessible boxes using compression, crimp-type or twist-on connectors. 3.1.5 Use only U.L. Approved wire pulling lubricants, Ideal "Yellow 77", or Ideal "Wire Lube", EFCOR wire pulling compound, Holub "HiGreen". SECTION 16120 - WIRES AND CABLES PAGE 2 OF 3 3.2 CIRCUITING 3.2.1 Switching control shall be as indicated on drawings. 3.2.1 Load size and equipment area to be served by each circuit shall be as shown on drawings. The physical arrangement of conductors and conduits is typical and may be varied by the Electrical Contractor except in the case of the Television and Telephone Systems, for which the arrangement shall not vary from the drawings. 3.2.3 Pane1board connections shall be two #12 AWG copper conductors unless specifically shown otherwise on drawings; neutral shall be equal to underground wires. 3.2.4 Identification: A. Pane1board Feeders: Identify at source and at all accessible boXes with pane~ mark and phase (A or B) using Brady Qui6k- Label plastic coated adhesive tape. B. Branch Circuits: Color code underground wires as necessary for circuit, keeping consistent code throughout system. Use Brady Quick-Label plastic coated adhesive tape to indicate circuit numbers as shown on drawings. SECTION 16120 - WIRES AND CABLES PAGE 3 OF 3 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16130 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 1.1.1 DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION SECTION 16010. 1.1.2 The Electrical Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the Electrical Box Work as shown on the drawings and/or as herein specified and/or required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 2. 1 . 1 2.1.1.1 MATERIALS Switch Boxes: Construction: Galvanized. steel , thickness as required by NEC. 2.1.1.2 Standard size, 2 inches wide, 3 inches long by 2 inches deep, gangab1e for multiple switch locations. 2.1.2 2.1.2.1 2.1.2.2 2.1.3 2.1.3.1 2.1.3.2 2.1. 4 Outlet Boxes: Construction: Same as above. Standard Size: 4 inches square by 1-1/2 inches deep. Pull and Junction Boxes: Construction: Galvanized steel, thickness as required by NEC. Sizes: As shown and/or required by NEC. Covers: 2.1.4.1 Switch and outlet boxes: Plaster ring of depth for finished wall and opening for device with wall plate as described in switches and Receptacles Section for the device. 2.1.4.2 Boxes with no device: Plaster ring of depth for finished wall and blank wall plate. 2.1.4.3 Pull and junction boxes: Flat, galvanized steel, not less than No. 16 MSG thick, attached with no less than four screws. 2.1.5 2.1.5.1 2.1.5.2 Cast Boxes & Covers: Construction: Cast aluminum. Gaskets: Rubber or neoprene. SECTION 16130 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS PAGE 1 OF 3 2.1.5.3 2.1.6 2.1.6.1 Usage: For all outdoor locations. Floor Boxes (Above Floor) Anodized aluminum construction. 2.1.6.2 Capable of accepting one or two duplex receptacles or telephone outlet as shown on drawings. 2.1.6.3 2.1. 7 2.1.7.1 City. 2.1.7.2 Height 3/8", width 2-3/8", length 3-1/2". Make: Switch and Outlet Boxes: Appleton, General Electric, Raco, and Steel Pull and Junction Boxes: Hoffman, Lee, Keystone. 2.1.7.3 Floor Boxes (Above Floor): or approved equal units by Appleton, General Electric, Hubbell or Russel & Stol. 2.1.7.4 Pylets. Cast Boxes: Appleton Unilets, Crouse Hinds Condulets, Pyle National PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Fasten all boxes securely in place, independent of furnished surface. Note that extra care must be exercised when locating boxes for surface mounted equipment to be sure that equipment does not conflict with swing of doors. 3.1.2 Ceiling boxes mounted between building members: 3.1.2.1 Twenty-four inches or less apart: Straight or offset hangers as required with stud similar to Appleton S21 through S26 and Steel City 6000 series. 3.1.2.2 More than 24 inches: Channel iron of adequate dimensions to limit deflection to 1/16 inch when loaded. 3'.1.3 3.1.3.1 Wall Boxes: Metal Studs: A. Mount to back board fastened between studs with appropriate blocking. B. Mount to 3/4 inch channel fastened between studs with appropriate blocking. SECTION 16130 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS PAGE 2 OF 3 3.1.3.2 Nailable Steel Joists: A. Use boxes with brackets and nail to face or joist. 3.1.3.3 Block Walls: Cement in place. 3.1.3.4 Concrete Walls: Poured in place. 3.1.4 Unused openings and knockouts: Close with approved devices before i nsta 11 i ng box. 3.1.5 Partitions for Boxes: Boxes serving 120 volt a.c. receptacles and low voltage signal device shall have partitions dividing the two sections. 3.1.6 Centerline height above finished floor unless otherwise shown. 3.1.6.1 Switches: 48 inches. A. All local switches shall be located at the latch side of doors as finally hung, except where otherwise indicated. 3.1.6.2 Receptacles: Centerline height above finished floor unless otherwise shown. A. Not above counters: 18 inches. B. Above counters: 44 inches. C. Note that circuit numbers are indicated beside some receptacles. Do not confuse these numbers with mounting heights which are always noted on "inches". 3.1.7 Pull and Junction Boxes: 3.1.7.1 Usage: Where shown and where necessary or required in indoor locations. 3.1.7.2 Locations shall be approved by the Engineer before installation. 3.1.7.3 Close all unused opening and knockouts with approved devices before installing; mount securely in place. 3.1.8 Cast Boxes & Covers: 3.1.8.1 Usage: For outdoor locations, mounting on conduit stubs or as shown. SECTION 16130 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS PAGE 3 OF 3 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES AND COVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 1.1.1 Specification Section 16010. 1.1.2 The Electrical Contractor shall provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the Switches and Receptacles work as shown on drawings and/or herein specified and/or required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2. 1 . 1 Switches 2.1.1.1 General purpose toggle operated switches: A. Type: Heavy-duty, specification grade, screw terminals. B. Contacts: Slow make, slow break, quiet operation. C. Rating: 120/277 volts, a.c. only. D. Capacity: 20 amp. E. Toggle color: Ivory F. Catalog numbers: Make 20 amp 1 pole 20 amp 3 way 20 amp 4 way Bryant 4901 4903 4904 G. E. 5951-1 5953-1 5954-1 Hubbell 1221 1223 1224 P & S 20ACI 20AC3 20AC4 Sierra 5021 5023 5024 2.1.1.2 Dimmers: A. 600 watts: Lutron C-600, General Electric D1-61UL B. 1000 watts: Lutron C-1000, General Electric 01-101SS C. 1500 watts: Lutron C-1500, General Electric 01-151SS SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES AND COVERS PAGE 1 OF 3 2.1.2 2.1.2.1 2.1.2.2 Receptacles: General Purpose Type: A. 20 amp, 125 volt duplex, 3 wire grounding type, NEMA lt5-20R heavy-duty specification grade with break-off link for split wiring, designed for back or side wiring, screw terminals. Make Ivory Red General Electric GE5362-1 GE-5362-8 Hubbe 1 1 5362 8300 R P & S 6300 6300 - RED Sierra 14602 1460 R Woodhead 872 85874 Leviton 5362 5362-R Weatherproof receptacles and cover plates: A. Type: Short double covers, horizontal plate. B. Materials: Cover and plate shall be cast aluminum. C. Hinges: Totally enclosed; heavy-duty spring shall snap cover open or closed. D. Gasketing: Gray molded PVC between covers and plate and between plate and wall box. E. Mounting: Standard outlet box. (horizontal mounting) F. Make: P & S ~4500 Series or equal by GE, Sierra, Mulberry. 2.1.2.3 250 volt special purpose: 2.1.2.4 A. Type: Single, polarized. B. Color: Black. C. Cord Sets: Provide one matching cord and plug set with 6 ft. cord for each receptacle. D. Configurations: Description - 3P-3W, 125/250 V., 50A NEMA No. 10-50R E. Make: P & S, Hubbell, GE, Sierra Receptacles: Ground fault circuit interrupter. A. Duplex, 120 volt operation. B. 15 ampere configuration, 20 ampere capacity. SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES AND COVERS PAGE 2 OF 3 C. Color: Ivory D. Make: Pass and Seymour 1*1591-FHGI, Square D I*GFSR-1201C, Leviton 1*6198-1. 2.1.3 Wall Plates: 2.1.3.1 Material: 430 stainless steel, .040" with satin finish. 2.1.3.2 Multiple outlets at one location: Supply one multiple plate. 2.1.3.3 Make: General Electric, Hubbell Pass and Seymour, Sierra, Mulberry. 2.1.4 Time Clocks: 2.1.4.1 per week. 7-day time control, 4 on/off operations per day, 28 on/off operations Indoor case. 2.1.4.2 Make: Paragon 7000 Series, or equal, by Tork or Intermatic. 2.1.5 Telephone Outlets: Single gang outlet box with blank faceplate and 3/4 inch conduit with pullwire to corridor ceiling space. 2.2 COLOR: Color of all wiring devices to be as selected by Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 All switches an receptacles specified under this Section shall conform to requirements as outlined under Section 16010. 3.1.2 Install clocks on clock outlets. 3.1.3 Install all receptacles and GFI's with the ground pole down. 3.1.4 Install all single and double pole switches so that the switch handle is up to denote that the switch is ON. Arrange switches in gangs and cover with one faceplate. SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES AND COVERS PAGE 3 OF 3 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16160 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Types of panelboards in this section include power, lighting and appliances. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standard No. 67, "Electric Panelboards", and other standards pertaining to panel boards , accessories, and enclosures. Provide units that are UL-listed and labeled. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation of panel boards , cabinets, and cutout boxes. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Standards, publication No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum), No. PB 1, "Panelboards" , and No. PB 1.1, "Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less". D. Provide equipment that meets Federal Specification WP-115a, Type II, Class I. 1.3 SUBMITT ALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings for approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 GENERAL 2.1.1 Except as otherwise indicated, provide panel boards , enclosures, and ancillary components, of types, sizes, and rating indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with number of unit panelboard devices as required for a complete installation. Where types, sizes, or ratings are not otherwise indicated, comply with NEC, UL, and established industry standards for applications indicated. 2.2 PANELBOARDS 2.2.1 Provide dead-front safety type panelboards, equipped with switching and protective devices, in quantities, ratings, types, and arrangements shown: SECTION 16160 - PANELBOARDS PAGE 1 OF 4 T_......'f~t-' l"~:f A. Power panelboards: Provide panelboards with plug-in type circuit breakers. Provide panelboards with main breaker if indicated on the drawings. B. Lighting and appliance panelboards: Provide panelboards with plug-in type circuit breakers. Provide panelboards with main breaker if indicated on drawings. 2.2.2 Enclosures: Provide enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panel boards, which mate properly with panelboards. Provide galvanized steel backboxes; provide trims of code gauge steel with rust-inhibiting primer and baked enamel finish. A. For circuit-breaker pane1boards, key all panelboards alike. B. Provide gutter space in pane1boards as required by U.L. and NEC. 2.2.3 Bussing: Provide bare copper bus bars, with supports insulated to suit system voltage. Provide ampere rating of bus bars not less than either the frame size of main circuit breaker in the pane1board or, in the case of main lug only panelboards, the NEC ampere rating of the conductors feeding it. Provide bus bars having a maximum current density of 1000 amperes per square inch. Provide bus bars braced to withstand the same fault currents as the branch circuit breakers specified. A. Provide bus bar connections to branch circuit breakers of the "distributive phase" type. B. Provide full capacity neutral. C. Provide ground bus having sufficient lugs to accept the number of ground conductors required on this project, plus 6 spare lugs for future connections. 2.2.4 Lugs: Provide solderless type lugs, size and number as required to accept cables indicated. 2.2.5 Circuit Breakers: Provide thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick-break, circuit breakers having interrupting ratings of 10,000 AIC minimum, or higher if indicated on the drawings; trip free type that cannot be held closed against a fault. Provide trip-indicating type, with the breaker handle taking a position midway between the On and Off positions when the breaker has tripped. Provide multi-pole breaker design that provides tripping of all poles if a fault condition occurs on any phase. 2.2.6 Fusible Switch Units: Provide quick-make, quick-break units, with handles and covers interlocked to prevent opening in the On position, unless interlock defeat mechanism is used. Provide units with switch handles that indicate On and Off positions, and capable of being locked in the Off position. Provide a circuit identification cardholder on each branch switch. 2.2.7 Spaces: Equip sections designated "space" with all accessories required to accept a future circuit breaker (or switch). SECTION 16160 - PANELBOARDS PAGE 2 OF 4 2.2.8 Grounding: A code approved terminal bar for equipment grounding conductors shall be provided and secured inside of the cabinet for the attachment of all the feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors, when the panelboard is used with non-metallic raceway, cable wiring or where separate grounding conductors are provided. 2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 2.3.1 Power Panelboards: For circuit-breaker type, provide Square 0 I- Line, ITE type DCP, GE type CCB or Westinghouse. 2.3.2 Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: Provide Square 0 type NQOB, ITE type NLAB, GE type NLAB or Westinghouse. 2.3.3 Provide all panelboards by the same manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Examine the areas and conditions under which panelboards are to be installed, and notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 GENERAL 3.2.1 Install panel boards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA'S "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices. 3.3 INSTALLATION 3.3.1 Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secure. 3.3.2 Set cabinets at height as directed at the time of installation, but in general, set at such height so that the top branch breaker is not over 6'-6" from the floor. 3.3.3 Set flush cabinets so that edges will be flush with the finished wall line. Where space will not permit flush type cabinets to be set entirely in the wall," set cabinet as nearly flush as possible, and cover the protruding sides with the trim extending over the exposed sides of the cabinet and back to the finished wall line. 3.3.4 Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements ~re not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and 486B. 3.3.5 Directories: Provide complete, typewritten as follows: 3.3.5.1 Lighting Panels: Identify areas serviced by room names, door SECTION 16160 - PANELBOARDS PAGE 3 OF 4 ..-"_...!Iaiol..._. ~ numbers, and equipment served. 3.3.5.2 Power Panels: Identify equipment by name, location and number as shown on drawings. Indicate connected HP or KW for each branch circuit. 3.3.6 Replacement Panelboards: Replace existing panelboard interiors and trims where indicated. Before ordering pane1boards, verify existing branch circuit conductor sizes; match circuit breaker ratings with existing conductor sizes. Provide a circuit breaker for each branch circuit; reconnect existing branch circuit conductors to new circuit breakers. Secure ground bus to existing back box. 3.3.1 Identification: Provide phenolic name tags to be riveted to panel doors in 1/2" engraved lettering to designate "LP-1, PP-1, etc.", corresponding to panel designations on the drawings. Indicate also the phase, voltage and amperage. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.4.1 Prior to energization of circuitry, tighten all accessible connections to manufacturer's tightening torque specifications. 3.4.2 Prior to energization of panelboards, check with ground resistance tester phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled. 3.4.3 Prior to energization, check panelboards for electrical continuity of circuits, and for short-circuits. 3.4.4 Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize panelboards and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance. 3.5 SPECIFICATION EQUIVALENTS 3.5.1 Approval for "Approved Equal" equipment will be made for any item that is equal in performance to that specified. 3.5.2 Where, in these specifications, certain kinds, types, brands, or manufacturer of materials is named, they are to be regarded as the required standard or quality. If the Contractor desires to use any kind, type, brand, or manufacturer other than that named in the specification, he shall indicate in writing what kind, type, brand, or manufacturer is included in his Base Bid for specified items. Contractor shall also submit a detailed layout of the pane1board frame, backbox and options as specified herein in the submittal of his BASE BID. SECTION 16160 - PANELBOARDS PAGE 4 OF 4 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16170 - DISCONNECTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 1.1.1 Specification Section 16010. 1.1.2 The Electrical Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the Disconnect Switch Work as shown on the drawings and/or as herein specified and/or required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2. 1 . 1 SAFETY SWITCHES (Disconnects) A. Safety switches shall be suitable for "Service Equipment". B. Fused switches equipped with fuse holders to accept only the fuses specified in Section 16180. C. Visible blade heavy duty fusible safety switches. D. Rating: 240 volts AC for 120v/208v and 240v circuits. 600 volts for 277v and 480v circuits. E. Quick-Make, quick-break, cover interlock, single throw, lockable in OFF position. F. Poles: One, two, or three; solid neutral as required. G. Size: As necessary to hold dual-element time delay fuses sized to motor or equipment, or feeder protection as indicated on the drawings. H. Enclosure: NEMA Type 1, general purpose, or as required by service. I. Make: Westinghouse, Square D ("H" Series), Cutler Hammer, or General Electric. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1' of motor. Install disconnect switch on wall, column or equipment within sight 3.1.2 Wiring: A. All wiring shall be in conduit or raceway. B. Joints and Splices: All in accessible boxes using pressure or twist-on connectors. C. Identify at source and at all access boxes using Brady Quick- Label plastic coated adhesive tape. D. Color code ungrounded wires as necessary for circuit, keeping consistent code throughout system. SECTION 16170 - DISCONNECTS PAGE 1 OF 1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16180 - FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 1.1.1 Specification Section 16010. 1.1.2 The Electrical Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the Overcurrent Protection Work as shown on the drawings and/or as herein specified and/or required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Fuse holders: Equipment provided shall be furnished with fuse holders to accommodate the fuses specified. Provide Class uRn rejection clips as required. 2.2 FUSES RATED 600V OR LESS 2.2.1 Fuses for Safety Switches (Motor Circuits and Service Disconnects): 2.2.1.1 Cartridge Type (250 volts, 600 amperes or less): Dual element time- delay, UL Class RK-1, 200,000 amperes R.M.S. symmetrical interrupting capacity: a. Bussman Mfg. Div./McGraw Edison Co., Type LPN-RK. b. Gould Inc. Elec. Fuse Div. (Chase-Shawmut) Type A2-DR. 2.2.2 Fuses for Safety switches (Lighting and Heating Circuits): 2.2.2.1 Cartridge Type (250 volts): Single element, UL Class RK-1, 200,000 amperes R.M.S. Symmetrical interrupting capacity: a. Bussmann Mfg. Div./ McGraw Edison Co., Type KTN-R. b. Gould Inc. Elec. Fuse Div. (Chase-Shawmut) Type A2KR. 2.2.2.2 Cartridge Type (600 volts): Single element, UL Class RK-1, 200,000 amperes R.M.S. symmetrical interrupting capacity: a. Bussmann Mfg. Div./McGraw Edison Co., Type KTS-R. b. Gould Inc. Elec. Fuse Div. (Chase-Shawmut) Type A6KR. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: Install fuses in respective equipment. SECTION 16180 - FUSES PAGE 1 OF 2 3.2 EXTRA STOCK/SPARE PARTS: Furnish the following spare parts and store at the site where directed: 1. Six spare fuses of each size and category, including any accessories required for a complete installation. 2. Special tools if required for installation or removal of fuses. SECTION 16180 - FUSES PAGE 2 OF 2 ~.,.,.., -~~ '.,.Ilr.~ ~ ...'" 1 -_~",""",,,*,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,",;_,,,_,_,,,,,,.,.,,..,.i'__~,,.,, DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 1.1.1 Provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the identification work as shown, specified and/or required. A. Label all equipment pertaining to Electrical System. B. Identify all lighting, power and distribution panels, transformers, and power disconnect equipment switches with name and number as shown on distribution diagram and/or Power Outlet Schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 LABELS 2.1.1 Labels shall be phenolic board type and shall be engraved with minimum 1/4" block letters. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 3. 1 . 1 Each piece of equipment shall be properly identified. 3.1.2 Provide wiring diagrams, suitably mounted, on all equipment of this Contract. All mains, disconnect and circuits switches shall be clearly and permanently identified. 3.1.3 Whatever means used to identify the equipment shall be neat, easily read, present a professional appearance, be firmly attached, and be as permanent, as the equipment which it identifies. 3.1.4 The manner of identifying and scheduling of information shall be noted on the shop drawings and subject to the approval of the Engineer. The identifying information shall be taken from and agree with the Contract Documents. 3.1.5 Labels shall be mounted on front of cover or door in unfinished and finished areas. 3.1.6 Adhesive tape labels or stenciling WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED. SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PAGE 1 OF 1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16196 - ELECTRICAL INSPECTION, LOAD TEST & BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 1.1.1 Provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the Inspection & Load Test work as shown, specified and/or required. 1.2 ELECTRICAL INSPECTION, LOAD TEST & BALANCING 1. 2.1 Wiring: 1.2.1.1 Certification by a local organization of the National Board of Fire Underwriters or other authority having jurisdiction must be received by the architect before final request for payment will be certified for work under this Division. 1. 2. 2 Perform load test as follows: A. Notify the Engineer's Representative 48 hours in advance of all tests so that he may be present during the testing period. Arrange with the Engineer's Representative to witness all tests; do all testing at a mutually agreed time. The Owner will pay for all energy used during the test. B. Load Test and Balancing: Upon completion of the electrical installation, conduct a load test by turning on all lights, motors and other electrical equipment throughout the entire project for a continuous period. Alter fuses, breakers, circuit connection arrangements, etc. as required to permit satisfactory performance. Reconnect the circuits to the busses at each panel and distribution location as required so that the load on the phases and/or the neutral will be balanced within 5%. 1.2.3 DEMONSTRATION OF COMPLETED ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Before final acceptance, demonstrate the operation of the entire system and instruct the Owner's maintenance personnel in the complete operation of all systems, and in the resetting and refusing of all equipment. B. Provide the Owner with four (4) copies of all brochures and instruction sheets as sent with various equipment. List name, address, and day and night telephone numbers of nearest service representative. C. Provide the Engineer with a letter in duplicate, signed by the Owner, stating that the above items have been completed. SECTION 16196 - ELECTRICAL INSPECTION, LOAD TEST & BALANCING PAGE 1 OF 1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16511 - INCANDESCENT FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 The scope of this section describes all the various types of incandescent fixtures utilized on this project. 1.1.2 All fixtures shall be complete with hangers, supports, lamps, ballasts, shielding, diffusers, insulation and all other accessories required for mounting or proper operation. Refer to drawings for locations and wattages of fixtures required. Outdoor fixtures shall be provided with mounting brackets, poles and concrete bases as specified. Thoroughly ground all metal poles. 1.1.3 All fixtures shall bear UL labels. Check architectural drawings to verify ceiling types. Verify color of exposed trim and shielding medium with Engineer before ordering fixtures. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions. 1.2.2 Samples: One (1) of each product if different from company or catalog number specified. 1.2.3 Lamp Schedule: Submit a complete schedule of all lamps for reference and future stocking by Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL 2.1.1 Equip fixtures with: A. Minimum of 6' of type AF fixture wire (recessed and semi- recessed fixtures). B. Plaster frames as required for installation of recessed and semi-recessed fixtures. 2.1.2 Provide lamp wattage of types and sizes as shown on plans. A. Incandescent - 120 volt, inside clear, 250 watts and smaller -medium base, 300 watts and larger - mogul base. Manufacturer: Westinghouse, General Electric, Sylvania. 2.2 FIXTURE TYPES: Type 'H': 6" reflector open downlight. Clean Alzak reflector. White painted flange. 100w A19 lamp. 120 volt. Make: Lithonia Gotham AZ 6AR-TRW. SECTION 16511 - INCANDESCENT FIXTURES PAGE 1 OF 2 Type 'K': Porcelain lamp holder with 100w A19 lamp. 120 volt. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Fixtures: Install fixtures at locations indicated on the drawings. 3.1.2 Lamps: A. Install one set of lamps in all permanent fixtures. B. Replace all lamps that become defective during the use of permanent lighting system for temporary light with new lamps furnished by the Electrical Contractor, immediately before final inspection. 3.1. 3 Support fixtures independently of furred ceilings unless noted. 3.1.4 Provide hangers and inserts as required. Hang surface mounted fixtures true to vertical. Check mounting heights before ordering stems. All stems shall be same diameter in same room. Mount fixtures at intersections of ceiling tile joints or centered on ceiling panels, on roof pu1ins or as otherwise noted. Do not mount fixture in mechanical equipment rooms until equipment is installed. Coordinate location. Provide weatherproof flashing or otherwise thoroughly seal feeders to exterior fixtures where passing through building wall. 3.1.5 Outlet boxes shall not be supported by conduit or wire. 3.1.6 All broken or damaged fixtures shall be replaced with new units at no additional cost to the Owner prior to final acceptance. 3.2 EXTRA STOCK/SPARE PARTS 3.2.1 Furnish the following spare parts and store at the site where directed: A. Two tools to remove and install fasteners in fixtures equipped with tamper proof fasteners. 3.2.2 Furnish 10% of total number of lamps used of each lamp type. Store at site where directed and obtain signed receipt from Owner. SECTION 16511 - INCANDESCENT FIXTURES PAGE 2 OF 2 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16512 - FLUORESCENT FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 The scope of this section describes all the various types of fluorescent fixtures utilized in this project. 1.1.2 All fixtures shall be complete with hangers, supports, lamps, ballasts, shielding, diffusers, insulation and all other accessories required For mounting or proper operation. Refer to drawings for locations and wattages of fixtures required. Outdoor fixtures shall be provided with mounting brackets. poles and concrete bases as specified. Thoroughly ground all metal poles. 1.1.3 All fixtures shall bear UL labels. Check architectural drawings to verify ceiling types. Verify color of exposed trim and shielding medium with Engineer before ordering fixtures. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 Product data catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions. 1.2.2 Samples: One of each product if different from company or catalog number specified. 1.2.3 Cand1epower Distribution Curves: submit for each type fixture if different from company or catalog number specified. 1.2.4 Lamp Schedule: Submit a complete schedule of all lamps for reference and future stocking by Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL 2.2.1 Equip fixtures with: A. Fluorescent ballasts shall be MagneTek Triad Bal1aster electronic type or approved equal. B. Ballast manufacturer shall have been producing electronic ballasts for at least 10 years with a low failure rate. C. Ballasts shall operate at an input frequency of 60 Hz and an input voltage of 108 to 132 (120 V circuit# or 249 to 305 (277 V ci rcuit). D. Ballasts shall operate lamps at a frequency of 20 to 35 KHz with no detectable flicker. SECTION 16512 - FLUORESCENT FIXTURES PAGE 1 OF 4 E. All fixtures must meet ASTM E-84 maximum Smoke Developing of 240 and ASTM 0-635 maximum burn rate of 2.5" per minute. F. Ballasts that operate as a parallel circuit shall permit other lamps to maintain full output after failure of companion lamp(s). G. Rapid-Start ballasts shall provide soft/stable start of rapid tart lamps and maintain full cathode heat during operation. H. Ballasts shall be of U.S. manufacture and carry a 3-year warranty with up to $10 replacement labor allowance. I. Ballasts shall comply with FCC and NEMA limits governing EHI and RFI and shall not interfere with operation of other normal electrical equipment. J. Ballasts shall meet any applicable ANSI standards (i.e., harmonic distortion, surge protection, etc.). K. Ballasts shall be high power factor (90% or higher). L. Operating temperature shall not exceed 60. C at any point on the case during normal operation. M. Ballasts shall be potted and in a steel case and shall contain no POB's. N. Ballasts shall be marked with manufacturer's name, part number, supply voltage, power factor, open circuit voltage, current draw for each lamp type and UL listing. O. High power factor, Class P rapid start ballasts, UL listed and CBM certified by ETL, start and operate lamps to 0 deg. F., suitable for operation on 120 volt or 277 volt, 60 Hz circuit as indicated on fixture schedule. P. Plaster frames as required for installation of recessed and semi- recessed fixtures. Q. Safety clips for fixtures installed in grid ceilings. R. End caps for individually mounted fixtures and end of continuous row fixtures. S. All lamps shall be T12 as manufactured by General Electric Co., GTE/Sylvania, or Westinghouse Electric Corp., standard warm white, low wattage energy efficient type. (35w for 4' lamp and 6w maximum for 8' lamp.) SECTION 16512 - FLUORESCENT FIXTURES PAGE 2 OF 4 2.2 FIXTURE TYPES Type A Type a Type C Type D Type E Type F Type G Type I Type J 2' x 4', stem-mounted fixture. 4-lamp. Electronic ballasts and energy saving lamps. 120 volt. Make: Metallux SH-24-440-120 SDW-24 Static troffer for lay-in grid, 2' x 4', 4 lamp. Electronic ballasts and energy saving lamps. 120 volt. Make: Metallux 2GS-440-A125-120 Same as Type a, except 3-lamp. Make: Metallux 2GS-340-A125-120 Same as Type a, except 2-lamp. Make: Metallux 2GS-240-A125-120 Static troffer for lay-in grid, 2' x 2', 2 U-lamp. Electronic ballast and energy saving lamps. Make: Metallux 2GS-2U6-A125-120 Surface mounted commercial striplite. lamps, electronic ballasts. 120 volt. per Drawings. 4' energy saving Lengths as required Make: Metallux SN-140-120 2' x 2' surface mounted fixture, 2 U-lamp. Electronic ballast and energy saving lamps. 120 volt. Make: Metallux SH-22-2U40-120 SDW-22 2-lamp industrial, surface mounted fixture. Electronic ballast and energy saving lamps. 120 volt. Make: Metallux IA-240-120 Molded plastic circline fixture. Round drum 14" diameter with (1) 32w round tube. 120 volt. Make: Lithonia MP 10971-120 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 3.1.2 General: Install fixtures at locations indicated on the drawings. Lamps: SECTION 16512 - FLUORESCENT FIXTURES PAGE 3 OF 4 A. Install one set of lamps in all permanent fixtures. B. Replace all lamps that become defective during the use of permanent lighting system for temporary light with new lamps furnished by the Electrical contractor, immediately before final inspection. 3.1. 3 Support fixtures independently of furred ceilings unless noted. 3.1.4 Provide hangers and inserts as required. Hang surface mounted fixtures true to vertical. Check mounting heights before ordering stems. All stems shall be same diameter in same room. Mount fixtures at intersections of ceiling tile joints or centered on ceiling panels, on roof pulins or as otherwise noted. Do not mount fixture in mechanical equipment rooms until equipment is installed. Coordinate location. Provide weatherproof flashing or otherwise thoroughly seal feeders to exterior fixtures where passing through building wall. 3.1.5 Outlet boxes shall not be supported by conduit or wire. 3.1.6 All broken or damaged fixtures .shall be replaced with new units at no additional cost to the Owner prior to final acceptance. 3.2 EXTRA STOCK/SPARE PARTS 3.2.1 Furnish the following spare parts and store at the site where directed: A. Two tools to remove and install fasteners on fixtures equipped with tamperproof fasteners. 3.2.2 Furnish 10% of total number of lamps used of each lamp type. Store at site where directed and obtain signed receipt from Owner. 3.2.3 Furnish 5% of total number of lenses used of each fixture type. Store at site where directed and obtain signed receipt from Owner. SECTION 16512 - FLUORESCENT FIXTURES PAGE 4 OF 4 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16513 - AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 To provide for the automatic operation of designated lighting loads in the project. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 Product Data: Manufacturers catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL 2.1.1 Intermatic Inc.'s K4121 Series, Paragon Electric CO.'s CW Series, or Tork Inc. 's 2100 Series, having: 1. Moveable shield for sensitivity adjustment. 2. 120V operation, SPST, minimum rating of 6.5A, 1800W. 2.2 TIME CONTROLS 2.2.1 7 Day Calendar Dial: Intermatic Inc.'s T7400BC/T7800BC Series, Paragon Electric Co. 's 7217/7218 Series, or Tork Inc. 's W-220l/W-330l Series, having: 1. Surface mounted NEMA 1 enclosure, with lockable hasp. 2. Number of trippers to suit required number of on-off cycles. 3. 208 volt operation, DPST, minimum rating 40A per pole. 4. Spring wound reserve power feature to keep dial on time for minimum of 10 hours in event of power failure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTAllATION 3.1.1 Install lighting controls in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions unless otherwise indicated and as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 3.1.2 Wire circuit so that lighting is: 1. On at dusk by photoelectric control. 2. Off at dawn by time control. SECTION 16513 - AUTOMATIC lIGHTING CONTROLS PAGE 1 OF 1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16514 - METAL HALIDE FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 The scope of this section describes all the various types of metal halide fixtures utilized on this project. 1.1.2 All fixtures shall be complete with hangers, supports, lamps, ballasts, shielding, diffusers, insulation and all other accessories required for mounting or proper operation. Refer to drawings for locations and wattage of fixtures required. Outdoor fixtures shall be provided with mounting brackets, poles and concrete bases as specified. Thoroughly ground all metal poles. 1.1.3 All fixtures shall bear UL labels. Check architectural drawings to verify ceiling types. Verify color of exposed trim and shielding with medium with Engineer before ordering fixtures. 1.2 SUBMITT ALS 1.2.1 Product Data: instructions. Cata 1 og sheets, spec if i cat ions and i nsta 11 at ion 1.2.2 Samples: One of each product if different from company or catalog number specified. 1.2.3 Candlepower Distribution Curves: Submit for each type fixture if different from company or catalog number specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL 2.1.1 Equip Fixtures With: A. Ballasts (Interior Fixtures): High power factor metal halide lamp ballast which maintains lamp wattage within 10%, upon a 10% variation in line voltage and the starting current is lower than the operating current, U.L. rated and listed for 55 DEGREES C. ambient room temperature, suitable for operation on 208 volt, 60 Hz. circuit as indicated on fixture schedule. B. Ballasts (Exterior Fixtures): High power factor metal halide lamp ballast which maintains lamp wattage within 10% upon a + 10% vari at i on in 1 i ne vo 1 tage and the start i ng cu rrent is lower than the operating current, U.L. rated and listed for 40 DEGREES C. ambient temperature, start and operate to -20 DEGREES F; suitable for operation on 208 volt, 60 Hz circuit SECTION 16514 - METAL HALIDE FIXTURES PAGE 1 OF 3 as indicated on fixture schedule. C. Spacing/Mounting height ratio closest available to spacing and mounting parameters indicated on the drawings without exceeding recommended maximum S/MH ratio. D. Factory installed fuse holder and fuse in fixture body for each ungrounded conductor. E. Mount i ng accessori es as requi red for balanced and complete installation of fixtures. F. Lamps as manufactured by General Electric Co., Westinghouse Electric Corp., or Sylvania Electric Products, Inc. 2.2 FIXTURE TYPES Type 'L' Wa 11 mount cast a 1 umi num hous i ng. Sea 1 ed and gasketed lens with prismatic borosilicate glass refractor. HPF ballast, 120v input voltage, 100w lamp with support. Color as selected by Engineer. Make: Lithonia TWH 100M 120 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3. 1 . 1 General: Install fixtures at locations indicated on the drawings. 3.1.2 Lamps: A. Install one set of lamps in all permanent fixtures. B. Replace all lamps that become defective during the use of permanent lighting system for temporary light with new lamps furnished by the contractor, immediately before final inspection. 3..1.3 Support fixtures independently of furred ceilings unless noted. 3.1.4 Provide hangers and inserts as requi red. Hang surface mounted fixtures true to vertical. Check mounting heights before ordering stems. All stems shall be same diameter in same room. Mount fixtures at intersections of ceiling tile joints or centered on ceiling panels, on roof pulins or as otherwise noted. Do not mount fixture in mechanical equipment rooms until equipment is installed. Coordinate location. Provide weatherproof flashing or otherwise thoroughly seal feeders to exterior fixtures where passing through bui lding wall. 3.1.5 Outlet boxes shall not be supported by conduit or wire. SECTION 16514 - METAL HALIDE FIXTURES PAGE 2 OF 3 3.1.6 All broken or damaged fixtures shall be replaced with new units at no additional cost to the Owner prior to final acceptance. 3.2 EXTRA STOCK/SPARE PARTS 3.2.1 directed: Furnish the following spare parts and store at the site where A. Two tools to remove and install fasteners on fixtures equipped with tamperproof fasteners. 3.2.2 Furnish 10% of total number of lamps used of each lamp type. Store at site where directed and obtain signed receipt from Owner. SECTION 16514 - METAL HALIDE FIXTURES PAGE 3 OF 3 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16516 - EMERGENCY LIGHTING AND EXIT LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 Supplementary emergency lighting consists of D.C. storage batteries, D.C. lighting fixtures, A.C. input reference wiring and D.C. output wiring. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 .2. 1 Provide Underwriter's Laboratories listing on all products. 1.2.2 Install the complete system in accordance with the N.E. Code. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1 .3. 1 Shop Drawings: Submit for approval on all components. 1.3.2 Wiring Diagrams: Submit with Shop Drawings for approval. Include the lengths of D.C. conductors, sizes of D.C. Conductors, distance of all remote D.C. heads from batteries and intended location of source of reference A.C. source on all wiring diagrams. 1.3.3 Instruction Manuals: Provide four (4) copies of individualized instruction manuals that contain detailed operating and maintenance procedures on the system and all components, spare parts list on all components, troubleshooting instructions, shop drawings, wiring diagrams and nearest service representative's name, address and telephone number. Instruction manuals containing information solely on broad product lines are not acceptable. 1.3.4 Warranties: Provide a 10-year warranty on the batteries. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL 2.1.1 Except as otherwise indicated, provide supplementary emergency light-ing of manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information as required for complete installation. 2.2 PROVIDE PRODUCTS HAVING CHARACTERISTICS AS FOLLOWS 2.2.1 Emergency Light Units EM-1 6 volt self-contained emergency lighting fixture. Sealed, maintenance free nickle cadmium battery. (2) 8w tungsten halogen lamps. 120 volt. Make: Lithonia 6ELM2-N-H SECTION 16516 - EMERGENCY LIGHTING AND EXIT LIGHTING PAGE 1 OF 2 2.2.2 EXIT FIXTURES: 'XA' Single faced fluoresent emergency exit sign, 6 volt sealed nickle cadmium battery. Brushed face with matte black trim and red stencil face. (2) 5w compact fluorescent lamps. Make: Lithonia F2ES1R-ELN 'XB' Same as 'XA' except double-faced. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALL SUPPLEMENTARY EMERGENCY LIGHTING AND FIXTURES AS FOLLOWS: A. Install EXIT LIGHTING AND FIXTURES in areas as indicated by drawings. Special attention should be given to their unrestricted visual location, but yet still centered and balanced in the room areas. SECTION 16516 - EMERGENCY LIGHTING AND EXIT LIGHTING PAGE 2 OF 2 ......"'_""..... :.d~j-flL- -: \:if'" (.<l.~.._~_~l"'"*";;"";.i."~.."',.~.~~.,,,.. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 1.1.1 The Electrical Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the revision and/or addition to the existing Fire Alarm Systems as shown on the drawings and/or as herein specified and/or required. The work includes, but is not limited to, the following items: Supervision by a qualified representative of equipment manufacturer. 1.1.2 Existing fire alarm control panel is a Faraday Firewatch II+2. Provide devices compatible to this system. 1.2 DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Provide a complete control wiring for shutting down all selected fans at time of fire alarm, with existing fire alarm system. 1.2.2 The System Wiring shall be supervised against any of the following fault conditions. 1. An open short, or ground in the wiring. 1.2.3 Installation and equipment shall conform with NFPA 72A and 728 for local and auxiliary fire alarm systems, and the New York State Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code. 1. 2.4 New devices shall be tied into existing panel as a new zone. 1.3 SERVICE 1.3.1 Supplier must show proof that he is an authorized representative of the manufacturer and provide further evidence that should his business dissolve, be sold or otherwise transferred, the manufacturer will honor all warranties, service contracts, and guarantees of said dealer. 1.3.2 Supplier must guarantee the availability for service and certify that in the event of a failure, service will be provided within 24 hours of not ifi cat ion. 1.3.3 Supplier must have capability of availability or service and certify that in event of a failure, service will be provided within 24 hours of notification. 1.4 GUARANTEE 1.4.1 Guarantee shall be for materials and service at Owner's place of SECTION 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 1 OF 3 business. 1.4.2 Guarantee shall cover fan shut down and back in operation sequence. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS 1.5.1 This system shall be built, tested and shipped by the manufacturer of the Fire Alarm System who has been regularly engaged in the production of Fire Alarm Systems for a minimum of ten (10) years. 1.5.2 Outside parts and service organizations will not be permitted. Parts and service facilities must be established in that State in which the Fire Alarm System is to be used. 1.5.3 The manufacturer shall have printed literature and brochures describing the standard series specified (not one-of-a-kind fabrication). The manufacturer shall furnish schematic and wiring diagrams for the control panel and an interconnecting diagram showing connections to individual components which constitute the Fire Alarm System. 1.6 1.6.1 Complete instructions, consisting of four (4) operating and maintenance manuals, parts books, dimensional drawings, separate unit wiring diagrams and schematics and interconnection wiring diagrams shall be provided. (Schematics to include schematic diagram of all electronic components used). INSTRUCTION AND DRAWINGS 1.7 1.7.1 A representative of the supplies shall meet with a representative of the Owner at the time of start-up and shall review the operation and parts books, correct system test and reset methods and recommend preventative maintenance procedures. OWNER ORIENTATION PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL 2~1.1 Manufacturer All equipment shall be the latest model of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of this type of system. 2.2 MATERIALS 2.2.1 FAN SHUTDOWN Provide the necessary wlrlng and relays to shutdown all air handling fans during an alarm condition. Single action station as manufactured by 2.2.2 Faraday. MANUAL PULL STATION: SECTION 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 2 OF 3 >."",,,,'" ''ll' I"....p'- ,...._............-~,-~"'.,"-'"..,"'.~~, 2.2.3 Faraday. FIXED TEMPERATURE HEAT DETECTORS: 200 deg. F as manufactured by 2.2.4 IONIZATION TYPE SMOKE DETECTOR: As manufactured by Faraday. 2.2.5 COMBINATION HORN/STROBE. As manufactured by Faraday. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Fire alarm system installation shall be done only after receipt of approved shop drawings showing all signal and alarm wiring (size & number) and interconnections between system components. 3.1.2 Wiring shall be copper building wire, #12, or #14 AWG size, as required. THWN insulation in conduit. 3.1.3 Entire fire alarm system installation shall be supervised by qualified manufacturers representative. 3.1.4 Label all annunciators and prepare and install graphic key plan adjacent to the main control panel. Graphic key plan to be protected by a clear anodized aluminum framed glass cover sized as required, Contractor to prepare graphic key plan. 3.1.5 Provide all accessories and equipment as required to make the system completely operational. 3.2 WIRING 3.2.1 All 120V wiring shall be in conduit. SECTION 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 3 OF 3 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16740 - TELEPHONE INSTALLATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 1.1.1 specification Section 16010. 1.1.2 The Electrical Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the commercial telephone system work as shown on the drawings and as required. 1.1.3 Empty conduits installed with pull wire by this Division. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2. 1 . 1 Conduit as specified in Section 16110, 3/4" minimum size. 2.1.2 Boxes as specified in Section 16130. Single gang 2" deep with single gang plaster ring. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 As specified herein, run conduit with pullwire from each telephone outlet to an accessible corridor ceiling space. 3.1.2 Install conduit with pullwire as required to provide a continuous wlrlng path from each accessible ceiling space where telephone outlet conduits are terminated, through building construction, to telephone switch. 3.1.3 Conduits from ceiling spaces to telephone switch shall have a minimum size of 1 inch. 3.1.4- All conduits shall be concealed within walls, above ceilings, within walls or in ceiling spaces below. Exposed conduit or surface raceway shall be used only where specifically shown on drawings or permitted by Architect. 3.1.5 All conduit bends to be long radius. SECTION 16740 - TELEPHONE INSTALLATION PAGE 1 OF 1 '".,.",.....,.",--.,;.,._-"'..",--,"",..._._',-"'......"...=.,;.~.""".";,.",",,,",---~' DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16950 - RACEWAY AND WIRING INSTALLATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 MC SCHEDULE (UNEXPOSED LOCATIONS): TYPE LOCATION TYPE A-AC a) Commercial, industrial, and multi-family residential branch circuit and feeder wiring. b) Under raised floors for electronic computer/data processing equipment. c) Above suspended ceilings and other spaces used for environmental air. TYPE B-AC a) Commercial, industrial, and multi-family residential branch circuit and feeder wi ring. b) For 90 deg. C rated fixtures and other high ambient temperature locations. c) Unde r ra i sed floors for electronic computer/data processing equipment. d) Above suspended ceilings and other spaces used for environmental air. TYPE A-MC a) Generally suitable for public assembly areas of more than 100 people. b) Environmental air plenums. c) As specified or noted on Drawings. TYPE B-MC Same as Type A-MC and as noted on Drawings. TYPE C-MC a) Fi re alarm systems and central cable. b) Suitable for environmental air plenums. TYPE D-MC a) Power and lighting for parking lots. b) Hook up to outside air conditioners. TYPE E-MC a) Outside air conditioners. b) Outside 1 ighting. c) Wet, dusty, or oily locations. TYPE F-MC As noted on Drawings and where approved by NEC when approved by Engi neer. , SECTION 16950 - RACEWAY AND WIRING INSTALLATION PAGE 1 OF 5 1.2 CONDUIT TYPES: Unless specifically noted or specified-otherwise-the - following types of conduit shall be used in the locations indicated: Location Conduit Types 2" & Under 2-1/2" & Over Above suspended ceiling construction EMT EMT Concealed in or exposed on masonry construction EMT EMT Concealed in frame building construction EHT EHT Exposed under roof deck EHT EHT Concealed in above grade floor or roof deck EHT RSC Concealed in concrete construction on or below grade RSC RSC Exposed in mechanical spaces (less than 3 feet above floor level) IHC RSC Exposed in mechanical spaces (more than 3 feet above floor level) EHT EMT Concealed in grade RSC RSC - All exterior conduit RSC RSC 2.0 CONDUIT INSTALLATION: 2.1 piping. No conduit shall be attached to or run close to any steam or hot water 2.2 All exposed conduits shall run at right angles to or parallel with building structural members, be neat in appearance and supported at regular intervals so as to be rigid with pipestraps, hangers or approved methods. Methods of fastening conduit supports to building structural members shall be approved by Engineer. 2.3 Install locknut and bushings on all conduit terminations not supplied with a condu1et. 2.4 All conduits installed below grade shall be sealed at all coupling joints with teflon pipe thread seal tape and the assembled joint shall be covered with an approved paint material. 2.5 Seal around all conduits passing through floors, fire partitions, and smoke partitions using approved methods, fittings and compounds which maintain the smoke and/or fire rating of the partition or floor. 2.6 Seal around all conduits where they enter the building below grade with Thruwa11 and Floor Seals, O.Z. Manufacturing Co.; or equal. SECTION 16950 - RACEWAY AND WIRING INSTALLATION PAGE 2 OF 5 2.7 Seal the interior of all conduits where they enter buil~ing with sealing compound, Johns-Manville "Duxseal"; or equal. 2.8 Both ends of each conduit installed to serve telephone wlrlng or wlrlng for other low voltage systems shall be equipped with a suitable insulated bushing to protect the wiring. 2.9 Except for detailed and/or dimensioned conduit runs all conduit runs shown are diagrammatic and used to designate circuiting. Unless specifically noted otherwise on the drawings, these runs do not necessarily agree with the location of existing conduits or the conduit routing actually required for the electrical installation. 3.0 SURFACE RACEWAY INSTALLATION: 3.1 All surface raceway shall follow the surfaces of the building structure, be neat in appearance and secured to building surface at regular intervals so as to be rigid with suitable clips and fasteners. 3.2 Routing shall be such that surface raceway is as unobtrusive as possible and shall receive approval of Engineer prior to installation. 4.0 WIRING INSTALLATION: 4.1 No wires shall be installed in conduits until any masonry, concrete or plaster is fully dried. 4.2 No lubrication shall be used to facilitate pulling wires into conduits except wire pulling compound specifically formulated for the purpose and compatible with the cable insulation. 4.3 No lubrication shall be used to pull wlrlng connected to the secondary side of an isolation transformer serving an isolated distribution system. 4.4 Unused wires in any outlet box shall be left neatly coiled in outlet box. 4.5 Splices or taps shall not be made in conduits and raceways. 4.6 Wires No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be joined with "Wire Nut" type connectors. All larger wire sizes shall be joined with bolt type mechanical connectors fabricated of copper alloys with lock washers and silicon bronze bolts. Cover tap or splice with insulated plastic covers or wrap joint with electrical tape as required by code. 4.7 Splices or taps in damp or wet locations shall have entire connection wrapped in moisture sealing tape or encased in epoxy. 4.8 Open wiring runs, Type AC cable, and flexible metal conduit, where specified, shall be gathered together throughout the installation, neatly cabled with plastic cable ties, Thomas & Betts "Ty-Rap"; or equal and secured in an approved manner to the building construction. 4.9 Open wiring runs, where specified, shall be supported from deck above by "J" hook or loop and shall be run in conduit where they pass through floors, walls and roofs. These conduits shall be sealed as required to maintain the SECTION 16950 - RACEWAY AND WIRING INSTALLATION PAGE 3 OF 5 smoke and/or fire rating of the construction. 5.0 REUSE OF EXISTING CONDUITS: 5.1 Electrical Contractor may elect to reuse existing conduits which comply with the provisions specified herein. u 5.2 Conduits to be reused shall be of proper size, free from obstructions, in good condition and approved for reuse by Engineer. 5.3 Check all conduits to be reused for ground continuity and install grounding fittings as required to establish an effective ground. 5.4 Remove existing conductors and install new conductors. 6.0 SECONDARY SERVICE FEEDER 6.1 Run 30" below grade minimum and install with wide radius bends. 7.0 LIGHTING AND POWER FEEDERS: 7.1 Run feeders concealed in building constructlon in finished areas and exposed in mechanical areas. 7.2 Risers to flush panelboards shall be run concealed in construction. Cut and patch as required to run new feeders to existing flush panelboards. 8.0 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING: 8.1 Run wiring in conduit concealed in building construction except where specified otherwise. 8.2 Conduit runs serving branch circuit wlrlng shall be continuous from outlet box to outlet box, accessible junction box or panelboard. 9.0 New Construction of wall, floors and ceilings that are part of this project shall have branch circuit wiring installed as follows: 9.1 Run wiring in conduit concealed in floors and walls and exposed on underside of floor above or roof deck in mechanical rooms and unfinished areas. The use of ML cable shall be permitted in unexposed spaces per Schedule 1.1. 9.2 Conduits serving surface mounted equipment mounted on walls in mechanical rooms and unfinished areas may be run exposed on the walls of these areas. 9.3 Those portions of branch circuits above accessible type suspended ceilings may consist of flexible conduit or Type AC cable. However, in all instances interconnection to wiring in conduit shall be made at accessible junction boxes above suspended ceiling. 10.0 Existing Construction, which is in place prior to this project shall have branch circuit wiring installed as follows: 10.1 Run wiring in conduit concealed in building construction except where specified otherwise. SECTION 16950 - RACEWAY AND WIRING INSTALLATION PAGE 4 OF 5 10.2 Cut and patch as required to run wiring and conduits concealed in__ existing cei 1 ings, walls and floors in finished areas. - - - - -- 10.3 areas. Run wiring in conduit exposed on walls and ceilings in unfinished 10.4 All flush mounted junction boxes which are abandoned, including boxes above suspended ceilings shall be covered. 10.5 Those portions of branch circuit wiring above accessible type suspended ceilings may consist of flexible conduit or Type AC cable. However, in all instances interconnection to wiring in conduit shall be made at accessible junction boxes above suspended ceiling. 10.6 Where it is not possible to conceal wiring as described above, branch circuit wiring shall be installed in surface raceway. These installations shall be reviewed with the Engineer prior to installation and shall be made only after receiving Engineer's approval. 11.0 SECURITY SYSTEM WIRING: 11.1 Run wiring in conduit as described for branch circuit wlrlng except that low voltage wiring above accessible suspended ceilings may be run open. 11.2 Detector and signal wiring may be run open above accessible suspended ceilings in new construction and fished above non-accessible suspended ceilings in existing construction. 11.3 All security alarm detector and signal circuits shall be run using high temperature security alarm cable. 11.4 All splices and taps in high temperature security alarm cable shall be soldered and covered with heat shrink tubing. SECTION 16950 - RACEWAY AND WIRING INSTALLATION PAGE 5 OF 5 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16960 - WIRING TO EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 Specification Section 16010. 1.1.2 Furnish all labor, material, and equipment necessary to complete the installation of Wiring to Equipment furnished and set by Contractor supplying driven equipment. This includes starters, safety switches, etc. As scheduled in Power Outlet Schedule, and as shown on drawings and/or as herein specified. I, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROL AND WIRING 2.1.1 General: Unless specifically noted otherwise on plans, this Division shall furnish and install safety switches, motor starters and power wiring from panels through switches and starters to motors. All manual and automatic control devices, other than starters and safety switches, and control wiring not specificallY shown on Electrical Drawings will be furnished and installed by Division supplying equipment. 2.1.2 Exception to above: Only as indicated on Power Outlet Schedule and as listed in motor control notes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Provide disconnect (safety switches) as indicated on Drawings and as required by the National Electric Code. 3.1.2 Provide power wiring and make all connections to disconnect switches, motor controllers, motors, electric heating elements, etc. as indicated on drawings. 3.1.3 Starters and switches shall be located on wall or column within visual 10 feet of motor and within reach from floor. 3.1.4 Coordinate locations with contractor supplying driven equipment. Verify exact location of all motors, controllers, control devices, electric heating elements, etc., before roughing. 3.1.5 Safety switches and starters or controllers serving same power outlet shall be located together. 3.1.6 Power and control wlrlng may be combined in common conduits by increasing conductor and conduit sizes as required by N.E.C. SECTION 16960 - WIRING TO EQUIPMENT PAGE 1 OF 2 ,". """'~_""'''''."r'''''j,.".___~.,...;_",........";""""",,,.,',"~;'''''';'",_",."."".,.~."c,;;,",,~"''':'''"'''''''-'''='''';..,,^, 3.1.7 1 ights. Power roof exhausters (PRE's): As shown on drawings - provide pilot 3.2 WIRING DIAGRAMS 3.2.1 Any wiring diagrams shown on plans for hook-up of equipment furnished by others, are approximate and are for bidding purposes only. 3.2.2 Obtain 'wiring diagrams, certified correct for the job, from respective Contractors for all equipment and systems furnished by them. 3.2.3 Install all work in accordance with certified wiring diagrams. 3.3 PLUG-IN CONNECTIONS 3.3.1 Where a plug-in type wiring device is shown to supply a permanently installed motor or appliance, Contractor shall provide a suitable flexible mu1ti- conductor cord connection with proper plug between the device and the equipment. This flexible connection shall connect the necessary ground wire required by N.E.C. for the grounding pole as the wiring device. 3.3.1.1 When~a wiri.ngdevice (any type of plug-in receptacle) is provided for a plug-in connection of portable equipment, connection of equipment, apparatus, etc. to receptacle .wi11 be made by others unless noted otherwise. <'\;(' . ~ r' SECTION 16960 - WIRING TO EQUIPMENT PAGE 2 OF 2